ANEXOS

ANEXOS

SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO

“BRYNAJOM I”
 ANEXOS

ANEXOS

1. FACTIBILIDAD DE SUMINISTRO Y FIJACIÓN DE PUNTO DE DISEÑO

2. CONFORMIDAD TÉCNICA DEL PROYECTO
3. ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN Y PROTECCIÓN
4. CONTRATO DE EJECUCIÓN DE OBRA
5. CARTA DE INICIO DE OBRA
6. RESOLUCION DE APROBACION DECLARACION DE IMPACTO
AMBIENTAL(DIA)
7. COMPROMISO DE OBTENCIÓN – CIRA
8. CARTA RESPUESTA DEL MINISTERIO DE CULTURA
9. DETALLE PMI_BRYNAJOM I - CORIS CHURCAMPA
10. CERTIFICADO DE ZONA NO MITIGABLE Y ZONA INTANGIBLE
11. FRANJA DE SERVIDUMBRE-BRYNAJOM
12. DECLARACIÓN JURADA DE COMPROMISO
13. AUTORIZACIÓN PARA EL TENDIDO DE RED
SUBTERRÁNEA
14. FICHA RUC BRYNAJOM I
15. REGISTRO DE PROPIEDAD-BRYNAJOM
16. DNI PROPIETARIO
17. PRESUPUESTO GENERAL - PMI
18. GUÍAS DE REMISIÓN DE MATERIALES
19. CARTAS DE GARANTÍA Y PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBAS
19.1. PROTOCOLO RECLOSER
19.2. SOFTWARE CONFIGURACIÓN RECLOSER “THYSETTER”
19.3. INFORME DE CONFIGURACIÓN DE RECLOSER
20.1. CALIBRACIÓN MEGÓHMETRO
20.2. CALIBRACIÓN TELURÓMETRO
21. SCTR PERSONAL
22. ACTA DE IP N º IP-020-GRP-2022/A
23. ACTUALIZACIÓN EN EL GIS
24. CARTA DE GARANTÍA DE OBRA LEGALIZADA
25. HABILIDAD PROFESIONAL
SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO
“BRYNAJOM I”
 Firmado Digitalmente por:
QUISPE ANCCASI John Cesar FAU 20129646099
soft
Razón: SOY AUTOR DEL DOCUMENTO
Ubicación: DISTRILUZ
Fecha: 15/02/2022 10:53:35

"AÑO DEL FORTALECIMIENTO DE LA SOBERANÍA NACIONAL"

Huamanga, 15 de febrero de 2022

ELCTO-A-0164-2022
Expediente: 20220421000223

Señor(a)
LOBO SUAREZ, LINDO RUBEN
JR. BOREAL 640
Huancayo - Huancayo
Junín .-

Asunto : FACTIBILIDAD DE SUMINISTRO Y FIJACIÓN DE PUNTO DE DISEÑO DEL SISTEMA

DE UTILIZACION EN MEDIA TENSION DE USO EXCLUSIVO EN 22.9 KV TRIFÁSICO
PARA LA “FACTIBILIDAD DE SUMINISTRO ELECTRICO Y FIJACION DE PUNTO DE
DISEÑO EN MEDIA TENSION 22.9KV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO
“BRYNAJOM I”.

Referencia : a) CARTA Nº 005-2022/COSEM

De mi consideración:

Visto la documentación presentada a nuestra representada, nos es grato manifestarle que tendremos mucho agrado en
definir el punto de entrega requerido para el estudio del Sistema de Utilización en Media Tensión de Uso Exclusivo en 22.9
kV. para la “FACTIBILIDAD DE SUMINISTRO ELECTRICO Y FIJACION DE PUNTO DE DISEÑO EN MEDIA TENSION
22.9KV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO “BRYNAJOM I”.”; el mismo que se encuentra ubicado fuera de nuestra
zona de concesión, por lo mismo vuestro requerimiento se realizará en base a las condiciones establecidas en la
Resolución Directoral N° 018-2002-EM/DGE, Decreto Ley N° 25844 “Ley de Concesiones Eléctricas” y su Reglamento
aprobado por Decreto Supremo N° 009-93-EM y modificado por D.S. N° 022-97-EM y Código Nacional de Electricidad
Suministro RM N° 214-2011-MEM/DM.

Por tratarse de un sistema de utilización, su obra será de carácter NO Reembolsable, para la elaboración del
estudio tomará en cuenta las siguientes condiciones:

EXPEDIENTE N°: 008GRP2022/A

VIGENTE HASTA: 11/02/2024
MODALIDAD :Sistema de Utilización en 22.9 kV trifásico.
LUGAR:Carhuancho.
POTENCIA :889.79 kW (Proyectado)

DISTRITO: CarhuanchoPROVINCIA: ChurcampaREGIÓN:Huancavelica

1. FACTIBILIDAD DE SUMINISTRO:
Es FACTIBLE, de acuerdo con los Dispositivos Legales Vigentes.

1. PUNTO DE ENTREGA:
·Punto de Entrega en Media Tensión Sistema de Utilización: Barra 22.9 kV SET Machahuay, Línea 3Ø, 22.9 kV.

Ubicación LugarDistrito
SET MachahuayCarhuancho Carhuancho
(UTM: 567393, 8607708)

1. CONDICIONES TÉCNICAS PARA LA ELABORACIÓN DEL PROYECTO EN MEDIA TENSIÓN

Según lo dispuesto por el Art. 25 de D.S. 070-2013-PCM y la Tercera Disposición Complementaria Final del D.S. 026-2016-PCM. Puede
validar la autenticidad e integridad del documento generado a través del código QR ubicado en la parte inferior izquierda del presente
documento o colocando la siguiente dirección en la barra del navegador: https://hidrandina.distriluz.com.pe/SistemaCasillaVerificacion
e ingresando la siguiente clave R7SCN8.
Para un próximo trámite, señalar el número de expediente: 20220421000223 1 de 3
ENOSA: Jr. Callao 875-Piura. ENSA: Calle San Martín 250-Chiclayo.
HDNA: Jr. San Martín 831-Trujillo. ELCTO: Jr. Amazonas 641-Huacayo.
SEDE LIMA: Av. Camino Real N° 348, Torre El Pilar, Piso 13.-Lima.
La ampliación de red debe ser considerada desde el punto de entrega, considerando la demanda de 889.79 kW
proyectada por el ing. LINDO RUBEN LOBO SUAREZ, con registro CIP N° 174459:

El profesional responsable debe presentar el Estudio de acuerdo a las Normas DGE vigentes, Código Nacional de
Suministro 2011, incluido lo siguiente:

Obtener de la municipalidad respectiva lo siguiente:

Permiso municipal en caso que corresponda.
El expediente deberá contar como mínimo: Memoria Descriptiva, Especificaciones técnicas de equipos, materiales y
de montaje, estudio de mercado eléctrico, cálculos justificativos, metrado y presupuesto referencial, planos, detalles
y cronograma de obra.
Adicionalmente debe presentarse expediente donde adjunte planos y relación de los propietarios afectados en la
selección de la ruta, debidamente refrendado por la autoridad competente.
Los cálculos constarán de Cálculos eléctricos y Cálculos mecánicos este último incluirá cálculos de prestación de
ambientes, estructuras (postes y crucetas) y cálculo de cimentación en función a la capacidad portante del suelo,
indicados en un detalle sus dimensiones y proporción de materiales requeridos.
Habilidad vigente del profesional responsable.
Plano de catastro (manzaneo y corte de vías) y/o habilitación de tierras Aprobado por el municipio, este plano debe
ser georeferenciado vía GPS en coordenadas UTM, en escala 1/1000 o 1/2000 y Plano de Ubicación en escala
1/5000 o 1/10000.
Los Planos del proyecto serán elaborados en AUTOCAD en escala 1/1000 que incluya las redes y lotización
Según lo dispuesto por el Art. 25 de D.S. 070-2013-PCM y la Tercera Disposición Complementaria Final del D.S. 026-2016-PCM. Puede
validar la autenticidad e integridad del documento generado a través del código QR ubicado en la parte inferior izquierda del presente
documento o colocando la siguiente dirección en la barra del navegador: https://hidrandina.distriluz.com.pe/SistemaCasillaVerificacion
e ingresando la siguiente clave R7SCN8.
Para un próximo trámite, señalar el número de expediente: 20220421000223 2 de 3
ENOSA: Jr. Callao 875-Piura. ENSA: Calle San Martín 250-Chiclayo.
HDNA: Jr. San Martín 831-Trujillo. ELCTO: Jr. Amazonas 641-Huacayo.
SEDE LIMA: Av. Camino Real N° 348, Torre El Pilar, Piso 13.-Lima.
 aprobado por el Municipio, así mismo la elaboración del Expediente Técnico será entregado en medio magnético,
juntamente con los planos.
El inventario físico valorizado debe presentarse detalladamente poste por poste.
El proyecto deberá considerar evitar el paralelismo con las redes telefónicas.
El desarrollo del estudio será de acuerdo a la normativa y lineamientos técnicos vigentes, dentro del marco de la
Ley de Concesiones Eléctricas N° 25844 y su Reglamento, Norma de Procedimientos para la Elaboración de
Proyectos y Ejecución de Obras R.D. n° 018-2002-EM/DGE, Código Nacional de Electricidad Suministro 2011 y
Utilización.
Es necesario que el proyecto considérelos artículos 7° de la norma A.120, 43° de la norma GH.020 y norma EC 030
del Reglamento Nacional de Edificaciones; El estudio de coordinación de protección en cumplimiento al CNE-S regla
017.C e implementar equipos de protección contra fallas a tierra y entre fases en el punto de entrega.
Elaborar y desarrollar el proyecto en coordinación permanente con nuestra Área de Administración de Proyectos y
de requerir información técnica adicional para elaborar estudios complementarios recurrir a nuestra Unidad de
Control de Operaciones (Ing. Juan Aguilar Molina celular 964699159) dirección: Av. Huancavelica N° 2735 – El
Tambo – Parque Industrial).
La Subestación deberá estar ubicada dentro de su predio, con fácil y libre acceso para el montaje de los equipos
desde la vía pública; los equipos de medición componentes del PMI deben estar ubicado en lugar accesible para el
respectivo control por parte del concesionario, de conformidad con el Artículo N° 172 del Decreto Supremo N° 009-
93-EM.
El Área del terreno para el cuál solicitan la factibilidad y punto de diseño, deben encontrarse y/o proyectarse libres
de infracción de las distancias mínimas de seguridad u ocupación ilícita de aires de la vía pública que afectan las
líneas eléctricas de media y/o baja tensión, las mismas que estarán enmarcadas de acuerdo a lo dispuesto en la
Tabla 234-1 de la Sección 23 del Código Nacional de Electricidad – Suministro 2011.
La ejecución de la obra estará sujeta al cumplimiento de las condiciones establecidas en los Arts. 88° y 121° de la
Ley de Concesiones Eléctricas y el Art. 60° de su Reglamento de Carácter No reembolsable.
En todo trámite el interesado indicará el N° de EXPEDIENTE 008GRP2022/A.

Aprovecho la oportunidad para expresarle los sentimientos de mi mayor consideración y estima personal.

Atentamente,

JOHN CESAR QUISPE ANCCASI

Jefe de Unidad de Negocio

Según lo dispuesto por el Art. 25 de D.S. 070-2013-PCM y la Tercera Disposición Complementaria Final del D.S. 026-2016-PCM. Puede
validar la autenticidad e integridad del documento generado a través del código QR ubicado en la parte inferior izquierda del presente
documento o colocando la siguiente dirección en la barra del navegador: https://hidrandina.distriluz.com.pe/SistemaCasillaVerificacion
e ingresando la siguiente clave R7SCN8.
Para un próximo trámite, señalar el número de expediente: 20220421000223 3 de 3
ENOSA: Jr. Callao 875-Piura. ENSA: Calle San Martín 250-Chiclayo.
HDNA: Jr. San Martín 831-Trujillo. ELCTO: Jr. Amazonas 641-Huacayo.
SEDE LIMA: Av. Camino Real N° 348, Torre El Pilar, Piso 13.-Lima.
 Firmado Digitalmente por:
CONDOR SANTIAGO Hugo Alejandro FAU
20129646099 soft
Razón: SOY AUTOR DEL DOCUMENTO
Ubicación: DISTRILUZ
Fecha: 20/04/2022 23:20:51

"AÑO DEL FORTALECIMIENTO DE LA SOBERANÍA NACIONAL"

Huancayo, 20 de abril de 2022

ELCTO-GRP-0978-2022
Expediente: ELCTO-GRP-0885-2022

Señor(a)
LOBO SUAREZ, LINDO RUBEN
JR. BOREAL 640
Huancayo - Huancayo
Junín .-

Asunto : CONFORMIDAD TÉCNICA DE PROYECTO: “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA

TENSIÓN DE USO EXCLUSIVO EN 22.9 KV TRIFÁSICO PARA LA PLANTA DE
BENEFICIO “BRYNAJOM I” DISTRITO DE SAN PEDRO DE CORIS, PROVINCIA DE
CHURCAMPA, DEPARTAMENTO DE HUANCAVELICA.

Referencia : a) CARTA 034-2022/COSEM

Es grato dirigirnos a usted para saludarlo cordialmente y dar respuesta, a su solicitud de aprobación de proyecto y
documentación complementaria, presentadas con la carta de la referencia, en los siguientes términos.
1. El proyecto materia del presente documento, está destinado para dotar de energía eléctrica al: “Sistema de Utilización en
Media Tensión de Uso Exclusivo en 22.9 KV Trifásico para la Planta de Beneficio “Brynajom I” distrito de San Pedro de
Coris, Provincia de Churcampa, Departamento de Huancavelica”.
2. Con fecha 12 de enero del 2022, mediante carta de autorización, el propietario Sr. José Manuel Guerra Urruche, encarga
al Ing. Lindo Rubén Lobo Suarez, con registro CIP Nº 174459, como Ingeniero Proyectista para la elaboración del
estudio “Sistema de Utilización en Media Tensión de Uso Exclusivo en 22.9 KV Trifásico para la Planta de Beneficio
“Brynajom I” distrito de San Pedro de Coris, Provincia de Churcampa, Departamento de Huancavelica”.
3. La fijación del punto de diseño fue emitida por Electrocentro S.A. mediante documento A-0164-2022, de fecha
15.02.2022. Se fijó como punto de diseño la barra en 22.9 KV de la SET Machahuay, línea 3Ø, en 22.9 kV, para una
potencia de 889.79 KW, ubicado en la Localidad de Machaguay distrito San Pedro de Coris,provincia de Churcampa,
departamento de Huancavelica.
4. Con fecha 05 de enero del 2021, La Municipalidad Distrital de San Pedro de Coris hace constatar que el proyecto
“Sistema de Utilización en Media Tensión de Uso Exclusivo en 22.9 KV Trifásico para la Planta de Beneficio “Brynajom I”
distrito de San Pedro de Coris, Provincia de Churcampa, Departamento de Huancavelica”; no se encuentra en una
Zonas de Riesgo no mitigable y Zona Intangible, firmado por Yanet Meza Aguirre, alcaldesa de la Municipalidad Distrital de
San Pedro de Coris.
5. Con fecha 25 de marzo de 2022, el Sr. José Manuel Guerra Urruche – propietario del proyecto “Sistema de Utilización en
Media Tensión de Uso Exclusivo en 22.9 KV Trifásico para la Planta de Beneficio “Brynajom I” distrito de San Pedro de
Coris, Provincia de Churcampa, Departamento de Huancavelica”, se compromete a entregar el Certificado de
Inexistencia de Restos Arqueológicos (CIRA) al solicitar el inicio de obra.
6. Con fecha 07 de febrero de 2022, el Director Regional del Ministerio de Energía y Minas Huancavelica, mediante
Resolución Directoral Regional N° 006-2022/GOB.REG-HVCA/GRDE-DREM, otorga la Conformidaddel Informe Técnico
Sustentatorio (ITS) del Proyecto “Electrificación Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I, distrito de San Pedro de Coris, provincia
de Churcampa, departamento de Huancavelica; indicando al titular a cumplir con lo estipulado en el mencionado
informe, con los compromisos y recomendaciones de laUnidad Técnica de Asuntos Ambientalesde la Dirección Regional
de Energía y Minas, con la Resolución y el Informe que lo sustenta, así como con los compromisos asumidos a través de
los escritos presentados durante la evaluación.
7. Con fecha 26 de febrero de 2021 el Sr. Abel Crispin Huaman, en calidad de Presidente de la Comunidad Campesina de
Carhuancho, suscribe el Acta de Cesión de Faja de Servidumbre y Libre Disponibilidad del Terreno a favor del proyecto
Sistema de Utilización en Media Tensión de Uso Exclusivo en 22.9 KV Trifásico para la Planta de Beneficio “Brynajom”
distrito de San Pedro de Coris, Provincia de Churcampa, Departamento de Huancavelica; en este sentido, se precisa que
Según lo dispuesto por el Art. 25 de D.S. 070-2013-PCM y la Tercera Disposición Complementaria Final del D.S. 026-2016-PCM. Puede
validar la autenticidad e integridad del documento generado a través del código QR ubicado en la parte inferior izquierda del presente
documento o colocando la siguiente dirección en la barra del navegador: https://hidrandina.distriluz.com.pe/SistemaCasillaVerificacion
e ingresando la siguiente clave G7TWWZ.
Para un próximo trámite, señalar el número de expediente: ELCTO-GRP-0885-2022 1 de 3
ENOSA: Jr. Callao 875-Piura. ENSA: Calle San Martín 250-Chiclayo.
HDNA: Jr. San Martín 831-Trujillo. ELCTO: Jr. Amazonas 641-Huacayo.
SEDE LIMA: Av. Camino Real N° 348, Torre El Pilar, Piso 13.-Lima.
 el interesado deberá de presentar el expediente servidumbre saneado de toda la línea primaria, tal como señala la
normatividad vigente, al solicitar la inspección y pruebas en la etapa de ejecución de obra.
8. Con fecha 06 de abril de 2022, mediante documento N° ELCTO-GTC-0061-2022, la Jefatura de la Unidad de Control de
Operaciones de Electrocentro, emite conformidad al Estudio de Coordinación de Protecciones del Proyecto: “Sistema de
Utilización en Media Tensión de Uso Exclusivo en 22.9 KV Trifásico para la Planta de Beneficio “Brynajom” distrito de San
Pedro de Coris, Provincia de Churcampa, Departamento de Huancavelica”; asimismo indica que, el Interesado deberá
informar los resultados de la implementación del Estudio de Coordinación de Protecciones previo a la puesta en servicio
del proyecto.
9. Con fecha 11 de febrero de 2022, el Director Regional de Transportes y Comunicaciones del Gobierno Regional de
Huancavelica, Autoriza la instalación subterránea en el área excedente externa de la carretera que se conduce en la ruta
de San Pedro de Coris a Expansión Cobriza, partiendo de la Subestación Machacuay hacia 500 metros al lado sur,
considerando los informes N°s 121-2022/GOB.REG.-HVCA/GRI-DRTC-DC. Y001-2022/GOB.REG.-HVCA/GRI-DRTC-DC-
SDGIV/omc, donde recomiendan que la plataforma existente después de los trabajos realizados debe quedar libre para
su funcionamiento, también se debe considerar el dimensionamiento del ancho mínimo del Derecho de Vía para
carreteras de bajo volumen de tránsito, 8.00 metros, a cada lado a partir del eje de la vía. (Anexo N° 08 del expediente
del proyecto).
10. El presente proyecto corresponde a un sistema de utilización particular con medición en MT 22.9 kV, por lo cual de
acuerdo a lo establecido en el Art. 88º de la Ley de Concesiones Eléctricas, corresponde al interesado elaborar el
proyecto, ejecutar las obras, efectuar el mantenimiento y la operación de las instalaciones eléctricas, así como eventuales
ampliaciones, renovaciones, reparaciones y/o reposiciones; no genera por lo tanto Contribución Reembolsable por parte
de Electrocentro S.A.
11. El presente estudio corresponde a un sistema de utilización particular con medición en media tensión (MT) en 22.9 kV,
por lo cual de acuerdo a lo establecido en el Art. 88° de la Ley de Concesiones Eléctricas corresponde al interesado (Sr.
José Manuel Guerra Urruche), elaborar el proyecto, ejecutar las obras, efectuar el mantenimiento y la operación de las
instalaciones eléctricas, así como eventuales ampliaciones, renovaciones, reparaciones y/o reposiciones; no genera por lo
tanto Contribución Reembolsable por parte de Electrocentro S.A.
12. El citado estudio ha merecido la expedición de nuestro Informe Técnico N° VCMI- 040-IT-2022-A, de fecha 20 de abril
del 2022, firmado por el Ing. Electricista Víctor Carlos Muñoz Illanes con registro CIP N° 93775, Coordinador de Estudios
y Obras de Terceros del Área de Administración de Proyectos de Electrocentro S.A., el que incluye de manera resumida
las especificaciones técnicas del Proyecto.
13. Por lo tanto, en cumplimiento de la Ley de Concesiones Eléctricas Nº 25844, se otorga Conformidad Técnica “Sistema
de Utilización en Media Tensión de Uso Exclusivo en 22.9 KV Trifásico para la Planta de Beneficio “Brynajom I” distrito de
San Pedro de Coris, Provincia de Churcampa, Departamento de Huancavelica”, el cual contiene memoria descriptiva,
especificaciones técnicas de materiales y montaje, cálculos justificativos, metrado, láminas y planos N°s s PLA-01, y PLA-
02 y PLA-03, elaborados y firmados por el Ing. Electricista Lindo Rubén Lobo Suarez, con registro CIP N° 174459, para
una Máxima Demanda de 889.79 kW, el cual tendrá validez de dos años a partir de la fecha. Adicionalmente se
precisa que esta conformidad técnica no aprueba el presupuesto del proyecto.
14. Para la ejecución de la obra, EL INTERESADO comunicará oportunamente, el nombre del contratista especialista quien
a su vez designara al ingeniero residente, quienes, en cumplimiento de la normatividad vigente, serán los responsables de
cumplir con las obligaciones técnicas, económicas y legales que deriven de su atención.
15. El Contratista Especialista, comunicará la fecha de inicio de la obra de conformidad con la R.D. Nº 018-2002-EM/DGE y
cumplirá con las condiciones generales de su ejecución contempladas en la Ley de Concesiones Eléctricas Nº 25844, su
Reglamento, disposiciones emitidas por el MEM/DGE, Municipalidad Provincial y el Reglamento Nacional de
Construcciones, alcanzando:
1. Carta del interesado, presentando ante Electrocentro S.A. al Contratista Especialista.
2. Carta del Contratista Especialista presentando ante Electrocentro S.A. al Ing. Residente de Obra.
3. 01 copia del proyecto con la Conformidad Técnica de Electrocentro S.A.
4. Copia del documento de Conformidad del Proyecto.
5. Certificado de habilidad profesional del Ingeniero Residente.
6. Declaración jurada suscrita por el Ingeniero Residente de cumplimiento de los artículos 8.5.1, 8.5.2, 8.5.3, 8.5.4,
8.5.5, 8.5.6 y 8.5.7, de acuerdo a la R.D. Nº 018-2002-EM/DGE.
7. Copia del registro de Contratista Especialista emitido por OSCE o acreditación del ejercicio continuo en los últimos
5 años en la construcción de estos sistemas.
8. El cuaderno de obra foliado y registrado.
9. Cronograma actualizado de ejecución de la obra, metrado.
10. Autorización de la Municipalidad para trabajos en vías públicas.
11. Presentar copia de la póliza de seguros contra accidentes y SCTR de trabajo (pensiones y salud), además del
Seguro Vida Ley D.S. Nº 009-2020-TR.
12. Acreditar cumplimiento del Reglamento de Seguridad y Salud en el Trabajo con Electricidad R.M. 111-2013-
MEM/DM de fecha 21.03.2013).
Según lo dispuesto por el Art. 25 de D.S. 070-2013-PCM y la Tercera Disposición Complementaria Final del D.S. 026-2016-PCM. Puede
validar la autenticidad e integridad del documento generado a través del código QR ubicado en la parte inferior izquierda del presente
documento o colocando la siguiente dirección en la barra del navegador: https://hidrandina.distriluz.com.pe/SistemaCasillaVerificacion
e ingresando la siguiente clave G7TWWZ.
Para un próximo trámite, señalar el número de expediente: ELCTO-GRP-0885-2022 2 de 3
ENOSA: Jr. Callao 875-Piura. ENSA: Calle San Martín 250-Chiclayo.
HDNA: Jr. San Martín 831-Trujillo. ELCTO: Jr. Amazonas 641-Huacayo.
SEDE LIMA: Av. Camino Real N° 348, Torre El Pilar, Piso 13.-Lima.
 13. Plan de Seguridad de la Obra (Plan de Trabajo que incluya la relación de personal, IPERC, Plan de contingencias,
Certificado de Aptitud médica, PETS, ATS, PTAR, evidencia de inspección de EPP, equipos y materiales).
14. Resolución, Informe y Expediente de aprobación del Instrumento de Gestión Ambiental que incluya redes
eléctricas (EIA, EIA-d, DIA, etc.) - ley N° 27446 del Sistema Nacional de Evaluación de Impacto Ambiental.
15. Copia del “Plan para la Vigilancia, Prevención y control de COVID-19 en el Trabajo” del contratista designado,
debidamente registrado, según lo establece la Resolución Ministerial N° 239-2020-MINSA - “Lineamientos para la
Vigilancia, Prevención y Control de la Salud de los Trabajadores con Riesgo de Exposición a COVID-19”.

Atentamente,

HUGO ALEJANDRO CONDOR SANTIAGO

Jefe (e) Area de Adm. de Proyectos

Según lo dispuesto por el Art. 25 de D.S. 070-2013-PCM y la Tercera Disposición Complementaria Final del D.S. 026-2016-PCM. Puede
validar la autenticidad e integridad del documento generado a través del código QR ubicado en la parte inferior izquierda del presente
documento o colocando la siguiente dirección en la barra del navegador: https://hidrandina.distriluz.com.pe/SistemaCasillaVerificacion
e ingresando la siguiente clave G7TWWZ.
Para un próximo trámite, señalar el número de expediente: ELCTO-GRP-0885-2022 3 de 3
ENOSA: Jr. Callao 875-Piura. ENSA: Calle San Martín 250-Chiclayo.
HDNA: Jr. San Martín 831-Trujillo. ELCTO: Jr. Amazonas 641-Huacayo.
SEDE LIMA: Av. Camino Real N° 348, Torre El Pilar, Piso 13.-Lima.
 Firmado Digitalmente por:
SANTIVAÑEZ CHUQUICHAICO Boris Percy FAU
20129646099 soft
Razón: SOY AUTOR DEL DOCUMENTO
Ubicación: DISTRILUZ
Fecha: 06/04/2022 19:26:19

"AÑO DEL FORTALECIMIENTO DE LA SOBERANÍA NACIONAL"

Huancayo, 06 de abril de 2022

ELCTO-GTC-0061-2022 Expediente: 20220412004768

Para : HUGO ALEJANDRO CONDOR SANTIAGO

Jefe (e) Area de Adm. de Proyectos

De : BORIS PERCY SANTIVAÑEZ CHUQUICHAICO

Jefe Unidad de Control de (e)

Asunto : CONFORMIDAD AL ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIÓN DEL

PROYECTO “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9KV, TRIFÁSICO
PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I.”, UBICADO EN DISTRITO DE SAN
PEDRO DE CORIS, PROVINCIA DE CHURCAMPA Y DEPARTAMENTO DE
HUANCAVELICA.

Referencia : CARTA NO 025-2022/COSEM

Respecto al asunto, se ha revisado los Estudios de Flujo de Carga, Cortocircuito y Coordinación de la

Protección y habiéndose verificado la idoneidad y veracidad de los resultados indicados en las Conclusiones y
Recomendaciones emitimos Conformidad al Estudio de Coordinación de Protecciones del proyecto “SISTEMA
DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM
I.”,UBICADO EN DISTRITO DE SAN PEDRO DE CORIS, PROVINCIA DE CHURCAMPA Y DEPARTAMENTO DE
HUANCAVELICA.

En ese sentido, deberá informar los resultados de la Implementación del Estudio previo a la puesta en servicio
del proyecto.

Atentamente,

BORIS PERCY SANTIVAÑEZ CHUQUICHAICO

Jefe Unidad de Control de (e)

BSC
Cc. ELCTO-GRP-CMI, ELCTO-GRP-EMG, ELCTO-GTC-D Archivo

20220412004768
ELCTO-GTC-0061-2022
pág. 1 de 1
 ESTUDIOS ELÉCTRICOS

PROYECTO
“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO
PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I.”.

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE
PROTECCIONES

REV: 01

Huancayo, marzo de 2022

Elaboración – Revisión - Aprobación

Revisión Elaborado por: Revisado por: Aprobado por:

01 COSEM
 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

INDICE

1. INTRODUCCION ........................................................................................................................... 2
2. OBJETIVOS ................................................................................................................................... 2
3. ALCANCES DEL ESTUDIO.............................................................................................................. 3
4. NORMAS EMPLEADAS ................................................................................................................. 3
5. BASE DE DATOS ........................................................................................................................... 3
6. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA ELÉCTRICO EN ESTUDIO ................................................................. 4
7. PARÁMETROS ELÉCTRICOS DE LA RED EN ESTUDIO ................................................................... 5
8. ANÁLISIS DEL SISTEMA ELÉCTRICO.............................................................................................. 6
8.1.-Calculo de Flujo de Carga ....................................................................................... 6
8.1.1.-Objetivos ......................................................................................................................... 6
8.1.2.-Metodologia Técnica ..................................................................................................... 6
8.1.3.-Resultados ..................................................................................................................... 6
8.2.-Cálculo de Cortocircuito .......................................................................................... 8
8.2.1.-Objetivos ......................................................................................................................... 8
8.2.2.-Metodologia y criterios.................................................................................................. 9
8.2.3.-Resultados ..................................................................................................................... 9
9. CRITERIOS PARA LA DETERMINACION DE AJUSTES .................................................................. 10
9.1 Protección de sobrecorriente de fases (50/51) ....................................................... 10
9.2.-Proteccion de sobre corriente a tierra (50N/51N) .................................................. 14
9.2.1.- Calculo de Ajustes ..................................................................................................... 15
10. CONCLUSIONES Y RECOMENDACIONES ................................................................................ 17
11. ANEXOS ................................................................................................................................. 18

COSEM PAGINA 1 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA

PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

1. INTRODUCCIÓN

El desarrollo del presente Proyecto, tendrá como objetivo brindar energía

eléctrica a la Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I. de propiedad del titular Guerra
Urruche, José Manuel; ubicado en el Fundo Yacohuanay, distrito de San Pedro
de Coris, provincia de Churcampa, Departamento Huancavelica.
La concesionaria Electrocentro S.A. mediante Carta N° A-0164-2022 de fecha
15 de febrero del 2022, ha emitido la fijación de punto de diseño en la barra
22.9KV de la SET Machahuay, ubicado en el distrito de San Pedro de Coris,
provincia de Churcampa, Departamento Huancavelica, para una demanda de
máxima de 889.79kW.

Por lo tanto, en cumplimiento de la ley de concesiones eléctricas N° 25844,

Código Nacional de Electricidad (C.N.E. – Suministro), Norma Técnica de
Calidad de Servicio Eléctrico (N.T.C.S.E.), directivas de OSINERGMIN, Arts.
170° y 172° del Reglamento de la Ley de Concesiones Eléctricas (L.C.E.),
Ley que aprueba disposiciones de carácter extraordinario para las
intervenciones del Gobierno Nacional frente a desastres y que dispone la
creación de la Autoridad para la Reconstrucción con Cambios (Ley N°
30556). Quedando a entera responsabilidad de los interesados asumir las
penalidades correspondientes por omisión de las normas (distancias mínimas
de seguridad y otros).

Con el objetivo de satisfacer la demanda eléctrica de la empresa minera

brynajom S.R.L. ha previsto la construcción de Red Primaria que será
alimentada en 22.9 kV a través de las líneas existentes las cuales son
energizadas desde el punto de entrega

2. OBJETIVOS

Establecer una adecuada coordinación de protecciones en media tensión entre

el recloser THYTRONIC NA11 y el rele de barra 22.9KV de la SE Machahuay,
bajo el esquema de protección de tiempo inverso.

COSEM PAGINA 2 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

3. ALCANCES DEL ESTUDIO

El presente estudio de coordinación de protecciones comprende el siguiente

alcance:

• Recopilación de información técnica

• Simulaciones de flujo de carga
• Simulaciones de corto circuito
• Cálculo y coordinación de equipos de protección.
• Planilla de ajustes de los equipos de protección
• Recomendaciones y conclusiones.

4. NORMAS EMPLEADAS

El estudio presentado ha sido desarrollado en base a las siguientes normas

• IEEE Std. 242-2001™ Recommended Practice for Protection and

Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
• IEEE C37.48.1 Guide for the Operation, Classification, Application, and
Coordination of Current-Limiting Fuses with Rated Voltages 1 – 38kV.
• IEEEC37.112Standard Inverse-Time Characteristic Equations for
overcurrent relays.
• IEC 60282-1 High-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: Current-Limiting Fuses.
• IEC 60787 Application Guide for the Selection of Fuse-Links of High-
Voltage Fuses for Transformer Circuit Applications.

5. BASE DE DATOS

Para el desarrollo del presente estudio se ha considerado la siguiente

información:

• Diagrama unifilar de la SE Machahuay barra 22.9KV.

• Máxima demanda del SE Machahuay barra 22.9KV.

COSEM PAGINA 3 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

• Ajustes de las protecciones tanto fases 50/51 como de tierra 50N/51N

del relé del SE Machahuay barra 22.9KV.
• Potencia de corto circuito monofásica y trifásica en la barra de 22.9kV
de la SE Machahuay.

6. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA ELÉCTRICO EN ESTUDIO

A continuación, se muestra un diagrama unifilar reducido para los elementos de

la protección que forman parte del análisis de selectividad.

Gráfico 1
La SE Machahuay 3MVA 69/22.9 KV es alimentada desde la SE Mollepata a
través de la línea L-6062 .

COSEM PAGINA 4 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

Se instalará 2677.60m de conductor AAAC - 50mm2 de red Primaria Aérea de

22.9 kV, trifásica, compuesta de 23 postes de concreto armado centrifugado de
13/500 y 2 postes de concreto armado centrifugado 13/1000, se instalará
527.70m de Red subterránea con cable NA2XSY 18/30kV de 22.9 kV 50 mm2
de sección.

7. PARÁMETROS ELÉCTRICOS DE LA RED EN ESTUDIO

Los parámetros eléctricos usados para el análisis de la red en estudio se

muestran en las siguientes tablas:

Tabla1: Parámetros Eléctricos de Líneas Aéreas y/o Cables de Energía

Sección Tensión Resistencia Reactancia Amp

Tipo
mm2 KV Ohm/Km Ohm/Km A
35 27 AAAC 0.952 0.4482 160
25 27 AAAC 1.310 0.4598 125
50 27 AAAC 0.663 0.4346 195
70 27 AAAC 0.484 0.4185 235
120 27 AAAC 0.275 0.3975 340
50 27 N2XSY 0.927 0.1562 160
Tabla 1
Tabla2: Parámetros Eléctricos de los transformadores

TENSION NOMINAL POTENCIA

SUBESTACIÓN Vcc (%) Grupo de Conexión
Prim(kV) Sec(kV) kVA

TR 01 500KVA 22.9 0.40/0.22 500 5.5 Dyn5

TR 50KVA 22.9 0.23 50 4 Dyn5

TR 02 500KVA 22.9 0.40/0.23 500 5.5 Dyn5

Tabla 2

COSEM PAGINA 5 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

8. ANÁLISIS DEL SISTEMA ELÉCTRICO

8.1.-Calculo de Flujo de Carga

8.1.1.-Objetivos

El objetivo de la simulación de flujo de carga es analizar el comportamiento

del sistema eléctrico existente cuando se conecte a la barra 22.9 KV la Planta
de Beneficio Brynajom I.

Los cálculos de las simulaciones nos permiten observar el comportamiento

del sistema en estado estacionario, determinándose los correctos niveles de
tensión en barras, la adecuada distribución del flujo de potencia (activa y
reactiva) y la verificación de la capacidad de transmisión de los equipos
eléctricos.

8.1.2.-Metodologia Técnica

Para evaluar los resultados de flujo de carga en régimen estable como

criterios de calidad y confiabilidad que el sistema debe satisfacer las
siguientes condiciones:

▪ Niveles de tensión admisibles en las barras

• Operación normal: +-6%VN

VN: tensión nominal

▪ Líneas y transformadores sin sobrecarga

• Operación normal: 100%SN

SN: Potencia nominal
8.1.3.-Resultados

El siguiente cuadro muestra los valores de tensión y el porcentaje de caída

de tensión de la red en estudio, donde se modelo los parámetros eléctricos
de la red, las cargas suministradas por Electrocentro S.A. y la demanda del
Sistema de Utilización en Media Tensión 22.9KV, Trifásico para Planta de
Beneficio Brynajom I.

COSEM PAGINA 6 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

TENSION
BARRA CAIDA DE TENSION
NOMINAL
Barra 22.9kV SE Machahuay 22.9 KV 1.000 p.u. +0.0%
Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I 22.9 KV 0.995 p.u. -0.5%
Tabla 3
Así mismo se muestra el perfil de tensión del alimentador, en la cual se puede
observar que el perfil de tensión de se encuentran dentro de los límites
permisibles los cual es considerado adecuado.

DIgSILENT
1.03

[p.u.]
B0.23KV BRYNAJOM I
3.024 km
SE Machahuay B22.9KV 1.011 p.u.
1.01 0.013 km
1.000 p.u.

Vnom = 1.00 p.u.

0.99
B22.9KV BRYNAJOM I
3.024 km
0.995 p.u.

0.97

0.95

Vmin = 0.94 p.u.

0.93
0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 [km] 5.00
SEMACHY 22.9..

Terminal(1)

Line-Ground Voltage, Magnitude A Line-Ground Voltage, Magnitude B

Line-Ground Voltage, Magnitude C

Grafico 2.
La demanda de la barra 22.9KV de la SE Machahuay es 1.075 MW, con la
construcción y puesta en servicio del sistema de utilización en Media
Tensión 22.9KV, Trifásico para Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I, se prevé un
incremento de la potencia lo cual permitiría transportar al SE Machahuay
barra 22.9KV una potencia total de 1.96 MW.

En la gráfica anterior se muestra el perfil de tensión del alimentador

exclusivo para la Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I que recorre

COSEM PAGINA 7 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

aproximadamente 3km. hasta la celdas de, el diagrama verifica que la

tensión es adecuada y esta dentro de los parámetros que comprende la
NTCSER.

La cargabilidad de la línea de media tensión en la salida de la troncal estará

en un 12.5% y los transformadores de la Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I
operando en un 92% de su capacidad esto considerando la demanda
proyectada. Todo ello se puede observar mejor en el ANEXO de flujo de
Potencia.

A continuación, se muestra el nivel de carga de las líneas y transformadores

más importantes considerando la máxima demanda.

Máxima demanda Nivel de

Línea Ubicación
MW MVAR Carga
3-1X50mm2 NA2XSY Alimentador Exclusivo 0.89 0.34 12.48%
3X50mm2 AAAC Alimentador Exclusivo 0.89 0.34 10.58%

Máxima demanda Nivel de

TRANSFORMADOR
MW MVAR Carga%
TR 01 500KVA, Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I 0.43 0.16 91.97%

TR 50KVA, Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I 0.04 0.01 91.54%

TR 02 500KVA, Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I 0.43 0.16 91.97%

8.2.-Cálculo de Cortocircuito
8.2.1.-Objetivos

El cálculo de las simulaciones de corrientes de corto circuito tiene como

objetivo determinar las máximas y mínimas de falla del sistema eléctrico en
estudio cuyos resultados permitirán:

▪ Verificar la capacidad térmica de los equipos como son las barras,

equipos de maniobra y transformadores de corriente.
▪ Desarrollar los cálculos y determinar los ajustes adecuados de los
relés de protección.

COSEM PAGINA 8 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

8.2.2.-Metodologia y criterios

Para el estudio de corto circuito se ha seguido el siguiente procedimiento:

▪ La corriente base para la referencia de corto circuito de toma de la

barra de 22.9 KV en la SE Machahuay lo cual fue alcanzado por
Electrocentro.
▪ Las simulaciones de corto circuito se han desarrollado con el
software DigSilent –Power Factory 15.1.7
▪ Las corrientes de corto circuito han sido simuladas según el método
Completo.
▪ Duración de la apertura del interruptor 0.1s
▪ Las fallas evaluadas son las siguientes:
• Falla monofásica con resistencia de falla de 0Ω y 400Ω
• Falla bifásica con resistencia de falla de 0Ω
• Falla Trifásica con resistencia de falla de 0Ω

8.2.3.-Resultados

Para la evaluación de la selectividad de los sistemas de protección por sobre

corriente se ha tomado como referencia las máximas corrientes de corto
circuito en la barra de 22.9kV de la SE Machahuay, alcanzadas por
ELECTROCENTRO.

Los resultados en forma gráfica se muestran en el Anexo C. A continuación,

se presenta los valores calculados de cortocircuito trifásico y monofásico de
la red en estudio, donde se modelo con los parámetros eléctricos de la red
de media tensión.

FALLA TRIFASICA FALLA MONOFASICA

BARRA MVA KA MVA KA
Barra 22.9 KV SE Machahuay 38.14 0.96 13.56 1.02
Tabla 4

COSEM PAGINA 9 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

9. CRITERIOS PARA LA DETERMINACIÓN DE AJUSTES

9.1 Protección de sobrecorriente de fases (50/51)

▪ El Valor de Arranque de los relés de sobrecorriente no debe ser inferior

al 120% de la máxima corriente de carga o corriente nominal.

▪ El arranque determinado debe permitir el transporte total de la carga y

no debe actuar cuando se conectan las cargas.

▪ Los ajustes de los relés deben proteger a los equipos (transformadores)

de sus límites de sobrecarga térmica y dinámica.

▪ La curva de daños térmicos y dinámicos de los transformadores se

determinan según la norma ANSI/IEEE C57, 91-1981.

▪ Se toma en cuenta la curva de daño térmico y dinámico de los

transformadores. las características de operación de los relés deben estar
por debajo de esta curva en la gráfica de selectividad.

▪ El punto Inrush se determina de la siguiente forma:

▪ Para transformadores de potencia menores a 2MVA; la constante Inrush=
8 veces la corriente nominal del transformador.
▪ Para Transformadores mayores a 2MVA; Inrush=10-12 veces la corriente
nominal del transformador.

▪ El intervalo de tiempo de coordinación entre relés es 200ms. como

mínimo

▪ Los tiempos de ajustes y curvas dependen de las corrientes de corto

circuito, La forma de la red y la selectividad de los equipos de protección.

9.1.1- Calculo de Ajustes

9.1.1.1 Calculo de Ajustes para recloser THYTRONIC NA11 del sistema de

utilización en Media Tensión 22.9KV, Trifásico para Planta de Beneficio
Brynajom I.

Se ha determinado teniendo en cuenta la potencia instalada del

transformador además la máxima demanda proyectada:

COSEM PAGINA 10 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

Ptotal=1050KVA (Tensión 22.9kV), I trafo=26.47 Amp.

Se ajustará con una sobrecarga de 1.2 (I>) =1.2 x (I trafo) =31.77 -> 33 Amp.
(considerando los pasos del recloser)

Ajuste de fases Ajuste de fase

Temporizado Instantáneo
TC:300/1 TC :300/1
I>33A pri. I>> 660A pri.
Curva IEC-VI t>> 0.01
TD>0.05

Se ha previsto un seccionamiento con fusibles de 140K en el punto de

diseño del sistema de utilización el cual serán utilizados como
seccionamiento de maniobra.

9.1.1.2 Ajuste del relé SEL 751 protección de barra 22.9KV de la SE Machahuay

La corriente de arranque del relé SEL 751 protección del SE Machahuay

barra 22.9KV se considera adecuado (98 A·pri), en conclusión el ajuste
actual se considera correcto asimismo coordina adecuadamente con
recloser del Sistema de Utilización Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

Ajustes del relé SEL 751 del SE Machahuay barra 22.9KV.

Ajuste de fases Ajuste de fase

Temporizado Instantáneo
TC:100/5 TC :100/5
I>98A pri. -
C2 – IEC Class B (Very Inverse) -
TD>0.30

A continuación, se muestra la gráfica de selectividad de fases con los

ajustes del recloser THYTRONIC NA11 del Sistema de Utilización Planta
de Beneficio Brynajom I y relé SEL 751 protección del SE Machahuay barra
22.9KV.

COSEM PAGINA 11 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

CURVAS DE SELECTIVIDAD

DIgSILENT
1000

I =693.384 pri.A

I =961.331 pri.A
[s]
Transformer Damage Curve
Srat: 500.00 kVA
uk: 5.50 %
Ipeak: 12.00/0.01 s
100

SEL751_SEMACHY_AA
C2 - IEC Class B (Very Inverse)
0.98 p.u.
4.90 sec.A
Transformer Damage Curve(1) 98.00 pri.A
Srat: 50.00 kVA Tpset: 0.30
10 uk: 4.00 %
Ipeak: 12.00/0.01 s
4.952 s
Fuse Maniobra
RCL THYTRONIC NA11 S&C Positrol 140k
IEC-VI 2.222 s
0.11 p.u. 1.413 s
0.11 sec.A
33.00 pri.A
1 Tpset: 0.05 0.855 s
0.667 s
0.460 s
Transformer Damage Curve(1)
Srat: 50.00 kVA
uk: 4.00 % Transformer Damage Curve
Ipeak: 12.00/0.01 s Srat: 500.00 kVA
uk: 5.50 %
Ipeak: 12.00/0.01 s
0.1
RCL THYTRONIC NA11
20.00 p.u.
2.20 sec.A
660.00 pri.A
Tset: 0.01 s
0.020
0.020
s s

0.01
22.90 kV 1 10 100 1000 10000 [pri.A] 100000
SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_3\SEL751_SEMACHY_AA SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_5\RCL THYTRONIC NA11
SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_5\Fuse Maniobra Transformer Damage Curve
Transformer Damage Curve(1)

Grafico 3

En la gráfica de selectividad se puede observar que el recloser del Sistema

de Utilización Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I, coordina adecuadamente con
el relé SEL 751 protección del SE Machahuay barra 22.9KV. La línea
continua del mismo color representa la máxima y mínima corriente de
cortocircuito vista por el recloser de la Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

COSEM PAGINA 12 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

9.1.1.3 Curva del fusible de protección del Transformador 01 500 KVA.

DIgSILENT
I = 11.593 Ipri.A
= 24.289 pri.A
I = 55.757 pri.A
1000

I =693.384 pri.A

I =961.331 pri.A
[s]

100

SEL751_SEMACHY_AA
C2 - IEC Class B (Very Inverse)
0.980 p.u.
4.900 sec.A
98.000 pri.A
Tpset: 0.30
10 Tripping Time: 9999.999 s

4.952 s
Fuse Maniobra
S&C Positrol 140k
RCL THYTRONIC NA11 : 9999.999 s
IEC-VI 2.222 s
0.110 p.u. 1.413 s
0.110 sec.A
33.000 pri.A
1 Tpset: 0.05 0.855 s
Tripping Time: 9999.999 s 0.667 s
0.460 s

0.1 RCL THYTRONIC NA11

660.00 pri.A
Fuse Protección TR 01 500 KVA 2.20 sec.A
ABB CEF 016 20.00 p.u.
Tripping Time: 9999.999 s Tset: 0.01 s
Tripping Time: 9999.999 s
0.020
0.020
s s

0.011
0.011
s s
0.01
22.90 kV 1 10 100 1000 10000 [pri.A] 100000
SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_3\SEL751_SEMACHY_AA SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_5\RCL THYTRONIC NA11
SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_5\Fuse Maniobra Fuse Protección TR 01 500 KVA

En la gráfica de selectividad se puede observar que la protección del

transformador 01 de 500 KVA coordinada adecuadamente con el recloser
del punto de diseño del Sistema de Utilización Planta de Beneficio Brynajom
I.

9.1.1.4 Curva del fusible de protección del Transformador 01 50 KVA.

DIgSILENT
I = 1.153 pri.A I = 24.289 pri.A
I = 55.757 pri.A
1000
I =693.384 pri.A

I =961.331 pri.A

[s]

100

SEL751_SEMACHY_AA
C2 - IEC Class B (Very Inverse)
0.980 p.u.
4.900 sec.A
98.000 pri.A
Tpset: 0.30
10 Tripping Time: 9999.999 s

4.952 s
Fuse Maniobra
S&C Positrol 140k
RCL THYTRONIC NA11 : 9999.999 s
IEC-VI 2.222 s
0.110 p.u. 1.413 s
0.110 sec.A
33.000 pri.A
1 Tpset: 0.05 0.855 s
Tripping Time: 9999.999 s 0.667 s
0.460 s

0.1 RCL THYTRONIC NA11

660.00 pri.A
2.20 sec.A
Fuse Protección TR 50KVA 20.00 p.u.
ABB CEF 006 Tset: 0.01 s
Tripping Time: 9999.999 s Tripping Time: 9999.999 s
0.020
0.020
s s

0.011
0.011
s s
0.01
22.90 kV 1 10 100 1000 10000 [pri.A] 100000
SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_3\SEL751_SEMACHY_AA SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_5\RCL THYTRONIC NA11
SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_5\Fuse Maniobra Fuse Protección TR 50KVA

COSEM PAGINA 13 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

En la gráfica de selectividad se puede observar que la protección del

transformador 01 de 50 KVA coordinada adecuadamente con el recloser del
punto de diseño del Sistema de Utilización Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

9.1.1.5 Curva del fusible de protección del Transformador 02 500 KVA.

DIgSILENT
I = 11.593 Ipri.A
= 24.289 pri.A
I = 55.757 pri.A
1000

I =693.384 pri.A

I =961.331 pri.A
[s]

100

SEL751_SEMACHY_AA
C2 - IEC Class B (Very Inverse)
0.980 p.u.
4.900 sec.A
98.000 pri.A
Tpset: 0.30
10 Tripping Time: 9999.999 s

4.952 s
Fuse Maniobra
S&C Positrol 140k
RCL THYTRONIC NA11 : 9999.999 s
IEC-VI 2.222 s
0.110 p.u. 1.413 s
0.110 sec.A
33.000 pri.A
1 Tpset: 0.05 0.855 s
Tripping Time: 9999.999 s 0.667 s
0.460 s

0.1 RCL THYTRONIC NA11

Fuse Protección TR 02 500KVA 660.00 pri.A
ABB CEF 016 2.20 sec.A
Tripping Time: 9999.999 s 20.00 p.u.
Tset: 0.01 s
Tripping Time: 9999.999 s
0.020
0.020
s s

0.011
0.011
s s
0.01
22.90 kV 1 10 100 1000 10000 [pri.A] 100000
SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_3\SEL751_SEMACHY_AA SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_5\RCL THYTRONIC NA11
SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_5\Fuse Maniobra Fuse Protección TR 02 500KVA

En la gráfica de selectividad se puede observar que la protección del

transformador 02 de 50 KVA coordinada adecuadamente con el recloser del
punto de diseño del Sistema de Utilización Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

9.2.-Proteccion de sobre corriente a tierra (50N/51N)

▪ Para el cálculo del ajuste, básicamente se ha seguido el criterio de

determinar la corriente de arranque en función fallas monofásicas de alta
impedancia 400 ohm.
▪ La temporización se ha determinado de modo que las protecciones
despejen la falla en forma selectiva.
▪ Los tiempos de ajuste y curvas dependen de las corrientes de
cortocircuito, La forma de la red y la selectividad de los equipos de
protección.
▪ El intervalo de tiempo de coordinación entre relés es 200ms.como
mínimo

COSEM PAGINA 14 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

9.2.1.- Calculo de Ajustes

9.2.1.1.- Ajuste del recloser THYTRONIC NA11 protección principal para la Planta
de Beneficio Brynajom I.

I falla 1ph-400Ω=32.63 Amp.

Con la finalidad de obtener una buena sensibilidad se ajustará lo siguiente:
Ajuste del arranque (Io>) = 12 Amp .
El método grafico determina el uso de Curva IEC SI con TMS = 0.05
Tiene la activación de la parte instantánea con un valor de (Io>>) =180Amp
y un TMS =0.01

Ajuste del Recloser del S.U Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

Ajuste de tierra Temporizado Ajuste de tierra Instantáneo

TC:300/1 TC :300/1

I>12 A pri I>>180 A pri

Curva IEC SI t>> 0.01
T>0.05

9.1.1.6 Ajuste del relé SEL 751 protección de barra 22.9KV de la SE Machahuay.

La corriente de arranque del relé SEL 751 de barra 22.9KV de la SE

Machahuay se considera adecuado (40 A·pri), en conclusión el ajuste
actual se considera correcto asimismo coordina adecuadamente con
recloser del S.U Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

Ajustes del relé SEL 751 del SE Machahuay barra 22.9KV.

Ajuste de Tierra Ajuste de Tierra

Temporizado Instantáneo
TC:100/5 TC :100/5
I>40A pri. -
C1 – IEC Class A (Standard Inverse) -
TD>0.25

COSEM PAGINA 15 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

A continuación, se muestra la gráfica de selectividad de tierra con los

ajustes del recloser THYTRONIC NA11 protección principal para la Planta
de Beneficio Brynajom I y relé SEL 751 del SE Machahuay barra 22.9KV,
donde además se señaliza los cortocircuitos monofásicos a tierra máximos
y mínimos (con impedancia de falla de 400 ohm).

DIgSILENT
100

3*I0 = 32.630 pri.A

3*I0 =1020.198 pri.A

[s]
SEL751_SEMACHY_AA
C1 - IEC Class A (Standard Inverse)
0.40 p.u.
2.00 sec.A
40.00 pri.A
10 Tpset: 0.25

0.523 s

0.346 s

RCL THYTRONIC NA11

0.1 IEC-SI RCL THYTRONIC NA11
0.04 p.u. 0.60 p.u.
0.04 sec.A 0.60 sec.A
12.00 pri.A 180.00 pri.A
Tpset: 0.05 Tset: 0.01 s

0.020 s

0.01
22.90 kV 10 100 1000 [pri.A] 10000
SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_3\SEL751_SEMACHY_AA SEMACHY 22.9 kV\Cub_5\RCL THYTRONIC NA11

Grafico 5.

COSEM PAGINA 16 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

10. CONCLUSIONES Y RECOMENDACIONES

a) Se ha cumplido con efectuar los estudios necesarios para revisar la

coordinación del sistema de protección para garantizar la selectividad,
asimismo salvaguardar la calidad del suministro y seguridad del sistema.

b) La caída de tensión máxima presentada es de 0.995 por lo que se concluye

que las nuevas instalaciones no impactan negativamente a la calidad de
producto en el parámetro de tensión, asimismo de los resultados del estudio
se verifica que no existe sobrecarga en transformadores y líneas de
distribución.

c) Frente al desbalance en las fases por presencia de redes bifásicas y

monofásicas, no se presenta desbalance significativo por la mínima cantidad
de redes bifásicas y monofásicas.

d) Las corrientes de cortocircuitó que se tomaron como base para la elaboración

del presente estudio fueron entregados por Electrocentro:

a. Barra 22.9 kV – SE Machahuay:

b. Corriente Cortocircuito Trifásico: 0.96 kA
c. Corriente Cortocircuito Monofásico: 1.02 kA

e) Para la determinación de las corrientes de arranque de las unidades de

sobrecorriente de tierra se han simulado fallas en el extremo remoto con
resistencia de falla de 400 Ohms.

f) Del análisis de la activación de la función de secuencia negativa, se concluye

que al existir equipos de maniobra asimétricas (Cut Outs) podrían producir
operación indebida por secuencia negativa por lo que no se ha considerado
su activación.

g) Los ajustes propuestos, garantizan la selectividad de las protecciones, por lo

que se recomienda su implementación. El esquema de protecciones que se
plantea (ajustes, criterios, etc.) debe implementarse en forma integral, solo
de esta manera se garantiza la adecuada coordinación de los equipos de
protección.

COSEM PAGINA 17 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

11. ANEXOS

Anexo A-Flujo de Potencia

Anexo B-Cortocircuito
Anexo C-Criterios de Protección
Anexo D-Evaluación Fase Abierta
Anexo E-Protocolo de Pruebas Recloser THYTRONIC NA11

COSEM PAGINA 18 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

Anexo A-Flujo de Potencia

ECP S.U Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

SE Machahuay 22.9KV

COSEM PAGINA 19 REVISIÓN: 01

 DIgSILENT

COSEM
B22.9KV
SE MACHAHUAY CELDA
CELDA PROTECCIÓN 01 CELDA PROTECCIÓN 02 CELDA PROTECCIÓN 03
LLEGADA

SEMACHY 22.9 kV Barra 22.9 kV 22.79 kV

22.88 kV 1.00 p.u.
1.00 p.u. -152.39 deg
-152.36 deg

0.0
0.0
0.0

RECLOSER 22.79 kV

Breaker/S..
1.00 p.u. 22.79 kV 22.79 kV
THYTRONIC NA11 -152.39 deg 1.00 p.u. 1.00 p.u.
-152.39 deg -152.39 deg

901.1 kW
317.4 kv ar
24.109 A

72.4
19.2
72.4

24.104 A
24.103 A
0.006 A
10.543 %

kV 22.79 kV kV
Fuse Protección TR 50KVA Breaker/S..

22.79 kW
427.5 22.79 kW
427.5
1.00 p.u.
162.4 kv ar 1.00 p.u. 1.00 p.u.
162.4 kv ar
Fuse Protección TR 02 500KVABreaker/S..

Fuse Protección TR 01 500 KVA

-152.39 A
11.585 deg -152.39 deg -152.39 A
11.585 deg
11.585 A 42.8 kW 11.585 A
11.585 A 15.5 kv ar 11.585 A
0.000 A 1.152 A 0.000 A
5.037 % 1.152 A 5.037 %
1.152 A
0.000 A
0.501 %

5.0
0.5
5.0

Cable
Cable(1)
Cable(2)

-427.5 kW
CELDA TRANSFORMACIÓN 01 CELDA TRANSFORMACIÓN
-42.8 kW
02 CELDA TRANSFORMACIÓN
-427.5 kW 03
Inactive -162.6 kv ar -15.6 kv ar -162.6 kv ar
11.586 A 1.153 A 11.586 A
Out of Calculation 11.586 A 1.153 A 11.586 A
11.586 A 1.153 A 11.586 A
De-energized 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A
5.037 % 22.79 kV 0.501 % 22.79 kV 5.037 % 22.79 kV
1.00 p.u. 1.00 p.u. 1.00 p.u.
-152.39 deg -152.39 deg -152.39 deg
427.5 kW 42.7 kW 427.5 kW
Voltages / Loading 162.6 kv ar 15.6 kv ar 162.6 kv ar
11.586 A 1.153 A 11.586 A
11.586 A 1.153 A 11.586 A
11.586 A 1.153 A 11.586 A
0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A
Lower Voltage Range 91.911 % 91.477 % 91.911 %

PAGINA 20
<= 1. p.u. 91.9
91.5
91.9

<= 0.94 p.u. 3-1x50mm2 - A AAC(1) N2XSY -50mm2 - Remonte

12.5 10.6
TR 50KVA

Upper Voltage Range -427.5 kW -42.7 kW -427.5 kW

TR 01 500 KVA
TR 02 500 KVA

-140.5 kv ar -14.1 kv ar -140.5 kv ar

0.002 A
0.001 A
0.001 A

24.250 A
24.249 A
24.248 A
24.284 A
24.284 A
24.283 A
24.284 A
24.284 A
24.283 A

10.543 %
12.453 %
10.574 %

897.8 kW

-900.8 kW
-897.8 kW
336.2 kvar

-334.0 kvar
-336.2 kvar
>= 1. p.u. 1124.733 A 111.942 A 1124.733 A
1124.741 A 111.943 A 1124.741 A
>= 1.06 p.u. 1124.725 A 111.942 A 1124.725 A
0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A
91.911 % 0.23 kV 91.477 % 0.23 kV 91.911 % 0.23 kV
Loading Range 1.00 p.u. 1.01 p.u. 1.00 p.u.
54.98 deg

10.5
54.98 deg 55.71 deg
>= 80. % 427.5 kW 42.7 kW 427.5 kW
140.5 kv ar 14.1 kv ar 140.5 kv ar
1124.733 A 111.942 A 1124.733 A

N2XSY-50mm2
>= 100. % 1124.741 A 111.943 A 1124.741 A
1124.725 A 111.942 A 1124.725 A
0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A

General L.. General L.. General L..

Load Flow 3-phase(ABC)

Nodes B Project:
Line to Line Positive-Sequence Voltage, Magnitude [kV] T Graphic: SU BRYNAJOM
Positive-Sequence Voltage, Magnitude [p.u.] T Date: 3/28/2022
Positive-Sequence Voltage, Angle [deg] P PowerFactory 15.1.7 Annex:
kW
.5
7
2
4 kW
.7
2
4
.kv11
2
6 kv
.6
5
A1
6
8
.5
1 A
3
.5
ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

A1
6
8
.5
1 A
3
.5
A1
6
8
.5
1 A
3
.5
.A
0
.%
1
9 7
.4
1
9

REVISIÓN: 01
“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”
“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

Anexo B-Cortocircuito (3 Ø y 1 Ø)

ECP S.U Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

SE Machahuay 22.9KV

COSEM PAGINA 21 REVISIÓN: 01

 COSEM
DIgSILENT

B22.9KV
SE MACHAHUAY CELDA
CELDA PROTECCIÓN 01 CELDA PROTECCIÓN 02 CELDA PROTECCIÓN 03
LLEGADA

SEMACHY 22.9 kV Barra 22.9 kV 38.04 MVA

41.52 MVA 0.959 kA
1.047 kA 2.166 kA
2.748 kA

0.0
0.0
0.0

RECLOSER 38.04 MVA

Breaker/S..
0.959 kA 38.04 MVA 38.04 MVA
THYTRONIC NA11 2.166 kA 0.959 kA 0.959 kA
2.166 kA 2.166 kA

0.0
0.000
0.000

0.0
0.0
0.0

38.04 38.04 MVA 38.04

Fuse Protección TR 50KVA Breaker/S..
0.0MVA 0.0MVA
0.959
0.000kA 0.959 kA 0.959
0.000kA
Fuse Protección TR 02 500KVABreaker/S..

Fuse Protección TR 01 500 KVA

2.166
0.000kA 2.166 kA 2.166
0.000kA
0.0
0.000
0.000

0.0
0.0
0.0

Cable
Cable(1)
Cable(2)

CELDA TRANSFORMACIÓN 01 CELDA TRANSFORMACIÓN 02 CELDA TRANSFORMACIÓN 03

38.0 38.0 38.0

0.959 0.959 0.959
2.166 38.04 MVA 2.166 38.04 MVA 2.166 38.04 MVA
0.959 kA 0.959 kA 0.959 kA
2.166 kA 2.166 kA 2.166 kA
0.0 0.0 0.0
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000

PAGINA 22
3-1x50mm2 - A AAC(1) N2XSY -50mm2 - Remonte
0.0 0.0
TR 50KVA

TR 01 500 KVA
TR 02 500 KVA

0.0

41.3
38.1

1.041
2.682
0.961
2.177
0.000
0.000
7.8 1.3 7.8
19.555 3.263 19.555
52.435 7.79 MVA 9.145 1.30 MVA 52.435 7.79 MVA
19.555 kA 3.263 kA 19.555 kA

0.0
52.435 kA 9.145 kA 52.435 kA

Inactive

N2XSY-50mm2
Cortocircuito 3Ø

Out of Calculation
De-energized

Loading of Thermal / Peak Short-Circuit Current

General L.. General L.. General L..

Max. Mech. Loading

>= 80. %
>= 85. % Max. 3-Phase Short-Circuit IEC 60909
>= 90. % Short Circuit Nodes Branches
Max. Therm. Loading Initial Short-Circuit Power [MVA] Initial Short-Circuit Pow
>= 80. % Project:
Initial Short-Circuit Current [kA] Initial Short-Circuit Cur
>= 85. % Graphic: SU BRYNAJOM
Peak Short-Circuit Current [kA] Peak Short-Circuit Curren
>= 90. % Date: 3/28/2022
PowerFactory 15.1.7 Annex:
.
0
.0
.
0
ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

REVISIÓN: 01
“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”
 COSEM
DIgSILENT

B22.9KV
SE MACHAHUAY CELDA
CELDA PROTECCIÓN 01 CELDA PROTECCIÓN 02 CELDA PROTECCIÓN 03
LLEGADA

SEMACHY 22.9 kV Barra 22.9 kV 12.48 MVA

14.72 MVA 0.944 kA
1.114 kA 2.132 kA
2.927 kA

0.0
0.0
0.0

RECLOSER 12.48 MVA

Breaker/S..
0.944 kA 12.48 MVA 12.48 MVA
THYTRONIC NA11 2.132 kA 0.944 kA 0.944 kA
2.132 kA 2.132 kA

0.000
0.000
0.000

0.0
0.0
0.0

12.48 MVA 12.48 MVA 12.48 MVA

Fuse Protección TR 50KVA Breaker/S..

0.000 0.000
0.944
0.000kA 0.944 kA 0.944
0.000kA
Fuse Protección TR 02 500KVABreaker/S..

Fuse Protección TR 01 500 KVA

2.132
0.000kA 2.132 kA 2.132
0.000kA
0.000
0.000
0.000

0.0
0.0
0.0

Cable
Cable(1)
Cable(2)

CELDA TRANSFORMACIÓN 01 CELDA TRANSFORMACIÓN 02 CELDA TRANSFORMACIÓN 03

0.944 0.944 0.944

0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 12.48 MVA 0.000 12.48 MVA 0.000 12.48 MVA
0.944 kA 0.944 kA 0.944 kA
2.132 kA 2.132 kA 2.132 kA
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000

PAGINA 23
3-1x50mm2 - A AAC(1) N2XSY -50mm2 - Remonte
0.0 0.0
TR 50KVA

TR 01 500 KVA
TR 02 500 KVA

1.103
0.000
0.000
0.947
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
21.044 3.302 21.044
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 2.79 MVA 0.000 0.44 MVA 0.000 2.79 MVA
Cortocircuito 1Ø

21.044 kA 3.302 kA 21.044 kA

0.0
56.429 kA 9.254 kA 56.429 kA
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
Inactive 0.000 0.000 0.000

N2XSY-50mm2
Out of Calculation
De-energized

Loading of Thermal / Peak Short-Circuit Current

General L.. General L.. General L..

Max. Mech. Loading

>= 80. %
>= 85. % Max. Single Phase to Ground IEC 60909
>= 90. % Short Circuit Nodes Branches
Max. Therm. Loading Initial Short-Circuit Power [MVA] Initial Short-Circuit Curr
>= 80. % Project:
Initial Short-Circuit Current [kA] Initial Short-Circuit Curr
>= 85. % Graphic: SU BRYNAJOM
Peak Short-Circuit Current [kA] Initial Short-Circuit Curr
>= 90. % Date: 3/28/2022
PowerFactory 15.1.7 Annex:
23
4
.0
1
2
.0
.
0
ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

.
0

REVISIÓN: 01
“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”
“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

Anexo C-Criterios de Protección

ECP S.U Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

SE Machahuay 22.9KV

COSEM PAGINA 24 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

Criterios de Ajustes de las Protecciones

Para Sistemas de Distribución

En las redes de distribución primaria se usan principalmente los siguientes criterios en equipos de protección:

a) Sobrecorriente entre Fases (ANSI 50/51)

Los relés de sobrecorriente de fases se encuentran ubicados en las salidas de las subestaciones y
sirven de respaldo de las protecciones ubicadas aguas abajo de la red, es decir, reconectadores y/o
fusibles y por lo tanto debe coordinar con ellos.
La corriente de arranque de la protección de fase se calcula en base a las cargas que alimenta más una
sobrecarga adicional que oscila entre 30 a 60% de la corriente de máxima demanda.
Los tiempos de ajuste y curvas características dependen de las corrientes de cortocircuito máximas,
mínimas, modelo de carga, así como de los dispositivos de protección aguas arriba, es por ello que no
se puede dar una recomendación general en esta parte.
La coordinación entre los diversos relés de protección de sobrecorriente se ha realizado mediante la
definición de sus ajustes, tanto de corriente como de tiempo, de modo tal que se obtenga la mejor
selectividad posible. Para los ajustes mencionados, se siguió la siguiente metodología:
• Todos los ajustes se han verificado, para la condición más desfavorable, que corresponde a las corrientes de
falla máxima.
• Por corriente de falla máxima para los ajustes de los dispositivos de protección de fallas entre fases, se
consideró el evento de un cortocircuito trifásico en la condición de máxima demanda del sistema.
• Otro evento considerado es el cortocircuito bifásico en el extremo más remoto del alimentador con una
impedancia de contacto de 20 Ohm; con la simulación de estos dos eventos se determina el tipo de curva y el
tiempo de arranque de las funciones de protección entre fases.
• Los ajustes de estos dispositivos de protección de fallas entre fases han sido verificados para que no operen
con la corriente de carga de los equipos y con la corriente de inserción de los alimentadores.
• Para el ajuste de sobrecorriente de fases se empleará en lo posible curvas de tiempo inverso (Extremadamente
o Muy Inversa) debido a que tienen afinidad para coordinar con fusibles tipo K ubicados en las redes de
distribución.
• El intervalo de tiempo de coordinación entre dispositivos de protección es aproximadamente de 200ms, pero
para equipos de la misma marca e igual modelo por experiencia basada en pruebas efectuadas este margen
se puede recortar hasta los 150ms.
• Los niveles rápidos o instantáneos se aplicarán a fin de privilegiar la velocidad y evitar tiempos de exposición
a fallas de larga duración, a fin de prever corrientes de energización el ajuste deberá ser temporizado al menos
a un ciclo.

b) Sobrecorriente a Tierra (ANSI 50N/51N)

Los siguientes criterios son aplicados a sistemas con sólidamente aterrados y los de aterramiento a través de
zigzag.

COSEM PAGINA 25 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

La corriente de arranque de la protección de tierra es calculada en base a las simulaciones de conductor

caído a tierra por el lado fuente más una resistencia de falla de alta impedancia (400 Ohm para redes de
distribución de 10KV), al resultado de corriente de falla de alta impedancia se aplica un factor de
seguridad que oscila entre 60 a 80% de la corriente calculada.
La coordinación entre los diversos relés de protección de sobrecorriente se ha realizado mediante la
definición de sus ajustes, tanto de corriente como de tiempo, de modo tal que se obtenga la mejor
selectividad posible. Para los ajustes mencionados, se siguió la siguiente metodología:
• Todos los ajustes se han verificado, para la condición más desfavorable, que corresponde a las corrientes de
falla máxima.
• Para el caso de fallas a tierra se han simulado fallas en diferentes puntos de la red en estudio. Para fallas en
zonas relativamente alejadas del punto de ubicación del Relé de Protección las corrientes toman valores
relativamente pequeños. los casos más críticos se presentan cuando se simulan fallas en los extremos más
alejados con impedancia de contacto de 400 Ohm. Con los valores obtenidos en las simulaciones se determina
el tipo de curva y la corriente de arranque para la función de tierra.
• El intervalo de tiempo de coordinación entre dispositivos de protección es aproximadamente de 200ms, pero
para equipos de la misma marca e igual modelo por experiencia basada en pruebas efectuadas este margen
se puede recortar hasta los 2500ms.

Los niveles rápidos o instantáneos se aplicarán a fin de privilegiar la velocidad y evitar tiempos de
exposición a fallas de larga duración, para el caso de fallas a tierra se podrán efectuar disparos
instantáneos sin temporizaciones.

c) Reconectador Automático

Los reconectadores son utilizados en redes aéreas cumpliendo una doble función, protegen las redes de
distribución contra cortocircuitos abriendo el circuito a fin de despejar la falla y una vez despejada la falla
reponen el servicio de manera automática.
Para la coordinación Recloser - Fusible existen dos esquemas de protección esenciales: “Fuse Saving” y
“Fuse Clearing”, su principio, así como ventajas y desventajas se describe a continuación:
Fuse Saving, este principio permite salvar fusibles ubicados debajo del recloser; el recloser debe contar
con dos curvas de operación, una rápida que actúa de forma instantánea para fallas transitorias esto
permite realizar los recierres correspondientes, y otra curva lenta la que apertura si la falla es
permanente.
Este esquema es muy útil para evitar la quema de fusibles ante fallas transitorias, en contrapartida
requiere administración exigente de la selección de fusibles.
El uso de este esquema se dificulta cuando se tiene varios equipos en cascada ya que requiere
márgenes de coordinación suficientes para las curvas lentas y rápidas, además de ser exigente en el
manejo de stock de fusibles ya que deberá ser repuesto con el valor inequívoco de fusible y el
reemplazo de todos los fusibles por donde circulo la corriente de falla. La búsqueda del fusible a ser

COSEM PAGINA 26 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

salvado podría ser dificultoso o hasta imposible cunado los niveles de cortocircuito son considerables
(3.0kA) ya que exige incrementar márgenes de coordinación y en oportunidades se afecta los relés de
cabecera o hasta la transmisión.
Fuse Clearing, esta función se utiliza dependiendo de los márgenes de coordinación que se puedan
presentar en el sistema, por ejemplo, cuando existen recloser en cascada, solo posee una curva que es
temporizada.
En este estudio se utilizó el criterio quemar fusible debido a que:
• Desde el punto de vista práctico el manejo de una pequeña gama de fusibles facilita al técnico mantener
actualizado su esquema de protección mediante fusibles, es decir se reduce la posibilidad que el técnico use
un fusible equivocado que podrían descoordinar al sistema.
• Se reduce la posibilidad de que el fusible opere inadecuadamente por la variación de su característica térmica
al paso repetitivo de la corriente de falla.

Alcances para Ajustes de parámetros de reclosers

Numero de Recierres
Un análisis de las faltas, en cualquier red de líneas aéreas, muestra que el 80 – 90 % de ellas son de
naturaleza transitoria, por lo que en estos casos son muy útil los recierres.
Una falta transitoria de tipo de arco a través del aislador constituye una falta auto – extinguible “no
perjudicial”. Este tipo de falta puede eliminarse instantáneamente por el disparo de uno o varios
interruptores y no aparecerá al reconectar la línea. Entre otras causas de faltas transitorias se pueden
citar las sobretensiones provocadas por rayos, así como las causadas por el viento (contacto entre
conductores y las partículas propagadas por el viento). El 10 a 20 % de faltas restantes son de
naturaleza semipermanente o permanente.
Una pequeña rama de árbol que caiga en la línea podría provocar una falta semipermanente. En este
caso, la falta no se eliminará con un disparo instantáneo, pero podría desaparecer mediante un disparo
temporizado.
Las faltas permanentes como conductores rotos, faltas en transformadores, faltas en cables o en
máquinas son faltas que deben localizarse y repararse antes de reponer la tensión de servicio.
En la mayoría de faltas, si la línea es disparada instantáneamente y el arco tiene suficiente tiempo para
desionizarse, el reenganche del interruptor permite reponer con éxito la tensión. Se utilizan esquemas de
reenganche automáticos para volver a cerrar, automáticamente, tras una temporización determinada.
El número de recierres del recloser estará condicionado al máximo número de conteos al que está
programado el seccionalizador aguas abajo. El ajuste del número de recierres del reconectador será
igual al número de conteos del seccionalizador, para el presente estudio los reclosers se programaran
en 2 recierres con la finalidad de que los seccionalizadores aguas abajo no aperturen por transitorios
que se presentan en la línea.

COSEM PAGINA 27 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

La activación o no del número de recierres dependerá del tipo de proceso y de los equipos eléctricos a
alimentar, si estos fueran sensibles a las interrupciones temporales (Transitorias) no es recomendable
su activación. En redes urbanas no es recomendable efectuar recierres por el alto tráfico vehicular y/o
peatonal que podrían estar cerca del defecto.
En alimentadores con altos niveles de falta y sin seccionalizadores aguas abajo, se aplicará uno o dos
recierres, debido a que, si la falta es permanente, los recierres múltiples podrían ocasionar daños a los
equipos protegidos (Caso redes Rurales)
Tiempo Muerto o de Recierre
El tiempo entre recierres o cuando el interruptor está abierto es llamado tiempo muerto, la secuencia a
emplear será de 2s, 2s.
La selección del tiempo muerto depende mucho de la red. Los factores principales que influyen en la
selección del tiempo muerto son los siguientes:
• Comodidad de funcionamiento: Debe ser lo suficientemente largo para permitir que decaiga cualquier
transitorio resultante de la falta y del disparo, pero no demasiado largo para incomodar a los clientes afectados
por la pérdida del servicio.
• Tipo de interruptor: depende del tiempo mínimo de operación del interruptor durante sus fases de apertura y
cierre.
• Duración de desionización de la falla: no puede predecirse con precisión.
• Los tiempos muertos serán de 2s para asegurar que la falla no es de naturaleza transitoria.

d) Fusibles
Estas protecciones son frecuentemente utilizadas en los sistemas de distribución por su menor costo de
instalación, es la protección más barata y por ende poco confiable, su principal defecto es el estrés
térmico al que es sometido con cada falla haciendo que su característica de operación se vea disminuida
o desplazada. La selección de la capacidad y tipo del elemento fusible se hace en base a la carga que
protege, la magnitud de la corriente de corto circuito que va a despejar y el tiempo de operación.
Fusibles en Troncales:
En las troncales de las redes MT no se instalarán fusibles para coordinación, en todos los casos solo
serán de maniobra.
Realizar maniobras de apertura y cierre de seccionador fusible con corrientes de carga mayores a 250A
provoca un arco eléctrico, y seguidamente el disparo innecesario del relé aguas arriba, por lo que
muchas veces para la reposición de estos seccionadores fusibles necesariamente se tiene que provocar
interrupciones momentáneas en la red.
La operación del fusible de una fase crea una red Trifásica, operar la red en estas condiciones muchas
veces provoca averiar los transformadores de distribución si éstas están cerca a la sobrecargada debido
a que la potencia demandada solo será atendida por dos devanados aumentando el riesgo de colapso
por sobrecarga.

COSEM PAGINA 28 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

La falla de fase abierta provocada por quemadura de fusible de protección provoca la circulación de
corrientes de secuencia cero que provocan disparos indeseados de los equipos de protección aguas
arriba. Es importante hacer notar que el empleo de elementos de apertura que controlan individualmente
cada una de las fases (fusibles) son los principales causantes de los eventos de fase abierta.
Fusibles para Ramales:
Para la selección de los fusibles que se recomienda instalar en las líneas que alimentan más de un
transformador, se tomaran en cuenta lo siguiente:
• La corriente nominal total
• Los resultados de flujo de potencia
• La corriente de energización total del circuito protegido
• La corriente de cortocircuito en la ubicación del fusible
• Tiempos de operación (mínimum meelting y total clearing) para las corrientes de cortocircuito en el punto de
ubicación del fusible.
• Curvas de operación de los relés, reclosers y demás fusibles ubicados en la red de distribución.
• La corriente de carga fría.

La corriente de energización de la rama a proteger se estimará a partir dela potencia instalada.

Fusibles en Transformadores de Distribución:
Para la selección de los fusibles que se recomienda instalar en los transformadores y en las
derivaciones que alimentan un solo transformador, se toma en cuenta lo siguiente:
• La corriente nominal
• La corriente de energización
• La curva de daño térmico del transformador
• Curvas de operación de los relés, reclosers y demás fusibles ubicados en la red de distribución.

COSEM PAGINA 29 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

Anexo D-Evaluacion de Fase Abierta

ECP S.U Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

SE Machahuay 22.9KV

COSEM PAGINA 30 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

Evaluación de Eventos de Perdida de Fase

y su Incidencia en el Ajuste de Neutro

En los sistemas de distribución se han presentado eventos que han provocado apertura de fusibles y en
seguida la desconexión del interruptor principal, el presente análisis evalúa la aparición de corrientes por
el neutro a causa de la pérdida de un fusible de fase.
Se ha simulado mediante la herramienta RMS de Digsilent el comportamiento de las corrientes
homopolares causadas por la apertura de un fusible de protección en redes de distribución.
Basados en el cálculo de flujos de carga resuelto, la función de simulación del DIgSILENT determina las
condiciones iniciales de todos los elementos del sistema de distribución, cumpliendo con el
requerimiento de que las derivadas de todas las variables de estado, cargas, máquinas, etc., sean cero.
También está determinado qué tipo de representación de red debe ser usada para un análisis más
amplio, cuál es el tamaño de los pasos de integración a usar, cuáles son los eventos a manejar y dónde
almacenar los resultados. La simulación usa un procedimiento iterativo para resolver el flujo de carga AC
de la red y un modelo dinámico de integración de variables de estado simultáneamente.
Para el modelo de simulación RMS los cálculos de las señales eléctricas son desarrollados en base a:

V = Magnitud del fasor de voltaje.

I = Magnitud del fasor de corriente.
f = Frecuencia.
Se ha considerado dos estados, una en que el sistema es normal y otra cuando se sucede el evento de
pérdida de fase, se analiza las características de las fuentes de alimentación sobre todo su conexión a
tierra así como también la conexión a tierra del lado carga. Se presta principal atención en sistemas
MRT.
El análisis se centra en verificar el estado estable luego de la perdida de fusible, no se analiza el estado
transitorio de evaporación (explosión) del fusible.

Análisis
Caso 1: Fuente YN y Cargas YN
a) Condiciones previas a la falla

COSEM PAGINA 31 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

A continuación se muestra el comportamiento del sistema en estado normal (Sin condición de fase
abierta), se observa las corrientes por fase ABC y su respectiva representación en componentes de
Secuencia (0, 1, 2). Como se esperaba no existe componentes de secuencia cero ni negativa.

DIgSILENT
[A]
[A]

123.
105.
105.
87.5
87.5 B: 100.409 A/53.81° 70.0
70.0
52.5
52.5
35.0
35.0 0.000 A/0.00°
100.409 A/173.81° 17.5
0.000 A/0.00°
17.5 -105. -87.5 -70.0 -52.5 -35.0 -17.5 17.5 35.0 52.5 [A]
A: 100.409 A/173.81°

-105. -87.5 -70.0 -52.5 -35.0 -17.5 17.5 35.0 52.5 [A] -17.5
-17.5
-35.0
-35.0
-52.5
-52.5
-70.0
-70.0
-87.5
-87.5
-105.
C: 100.409 A/-66.19°
-105.
-123.
-123.
-140.
-140.
-158.
-158. Salida AMT Terminal j
Zero-Sequence Current in A
Salida AMT Terminal j Positive-Sequence Current in A
Phase Current in A Negative-Sequence Current in A

b) Condiciones después de la falla

A continuación se muestra la simulación del evento de fase abierta en dominio del tiempo
mostrándose las variables: Corrientes ABC y sus respectivas componentes simétricas, en la que se
puede comparar el estado normal y luego cuando sucede la pérdida de fase. DIgSILENT

X = -1.200 s X = 1.200 s
110.0
100.604 A
97.448 A
87.844 A
88.00

66.00

52.146 A

44.00

22.00

0.000
-1.500 -0.902 -0.303 0.295 0.893 [s] 1.492
Salida AMT: Phase Current, Magnitude A/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: Phase Current, Magnitude B/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: Phase Current, Magnitude C/Terminal i in A

X = -1.200 s X = 1.200 s
110.0
100.604 A

88.00
78.147 A

66.00

44.00

22.491 A
22.00 16.746 A

0.000 A
0.000
-1.500 -0.902 -0.303 0.295 0.893 [s] 1.492
Salida AMT: Positive-Sequence Current, Magnitude/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: Negative-Sequence Current, Magnitude/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: 3*I0/Terminal i in A

A continuación se muestra el comportamiento del sistema en estado de falla (Con la condición de

fase abierta) aquí se observa las corrientes por fase ABC y su respectiva representación en

COSEM PAGINA 32 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

DIgSILENT
componentes de Secuencia (0, 1, 2). Como se esperaba aparecen componentes de secuencia cero
y negativa por el desbalance que la perdida de fase genera.
[A]
[A]

123.
90.0
105.
75.0
87.5
60.0
70.0
45.0
52.5
B: 51.984 A/56.82° 30.0
22.492 A/115.80°
A: 97.241 A/162.60° 35.0
77.971 A/173.24° 15.0
17.5 -90.0 -75.0 -60.0 -45.0 -30.0 -15.0 15.0 30.0 45.0 [A]
5.585 A/-176.37°

-105. -87.5 -70.0 -52.5 -35.0 -17.5 17.5 35.0 52.5 [A] -15.0
-17.5
-30.0
-35.0
-45.0
-52.5
-60.0
-70.0
-75.0
C: 87.700 A/-57.11°
-87.5
-90.0
-105.
-105.
-123.
-120.
-140.
-135.
-158. Salida AMT Terminal j
Zero-Sequence Current in A
Salida AMT Terminal j Positive-Sequence Current in A
Phase Current in A Negative-Sequence Current in A

Caso 2: Fuente YN y Cargas Y o D (cargas sin conexión a tierra)

a) Condiciones previas a la falla

A continuación se muestra el comportamiento del sistema en estado normal (Sin condición de fase
abierta) aquí se observa las corrientes por fase ABC y su respectiva representación en
componentes de Secuencia (0, 1, 2). Como se esperaba no existe componentes de secuencia cero
ni negativa.

DIgSILENT
[A]
[A]

123.
105.
105.
87.5
87.5 B: 100.784 A/57.10°
70.0
70.0
52.5
52.5
35.0
35.0 0.000 A/0.00°
17.5
100.784 A/177.10° 0.000 A/0.00°
17.5 -105. -87.5 -70.0 -52.5 -35.0 -17.5 17.5 35.0 52.5 [A]
A: 100.784 A/177.10°

-105. -87.5 -70.0 -52.5 -35.0 -17.5 17.5 35.0 52.5 [A] -17.5
-17.5
-35.0
-35.0
-52.5
-52.5
-70.0
-70.0
-87.5
-87.5
C: 100.784 A/-62.90° -105.
-105.
-123.
-123.
-140.
-140.
-158.
-158. Salida AMT Terminal j
Zero-Sequence Current in A
Salida AMT Terminal j Positive-Sequence Current in A
Phase Current in A Negative-Sequence Current in A

b) Condiciones después de la falla

COSEM PAGINA 33 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

A continuación se muestra la simulación del evento de fase abierta en dominio del tiempo
mostrándose las variables: Corrientes ABC y sus respectivas componentes simétricas, en la que se
puede comparar el estado normal y luego cuando sucede la pérdida de fase.

DIgSILENT
X = -1.200 s X = 1.200 s
110.0
100.932 A
90.709 A
88.00

66.00
52.635 A

44.00

22.00

0.000
-1.500 -0.902 -0.303 0.295 0.893 [s] 1.492
Salida AMT: Phase Current, Magnitude A/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: Phase Current, Magnitude B/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: Phase Current, Magnitude C/Terminal i in A

X = -1.200 s X = 1.200 s
110.0
100.932 A

88.00
76.780 A

66.00

44.00

24.177 A
22.00

0.000 A 0.084 A
0.000
-1.500 -0.902 -0.303 0.295 0.893 [s] 1.492
Salida AMT: Positive-Sequence Current, Magnitude/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: Negative-Sequence Current, Magnitude/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: 3*I0/Terminal i in A

A continuación se muestra el comportamiento del sistema en estado de falla (Con la condición de

fase abierta) aquí se observa las corrientes por fase ABC y su respectiva representación en
componentes de Secuencia (0, 1, 2). Como se esperaba aparecen componente de secuencia
negativa por el desbalance que la perdida de fase genera sin embargo la de componente cero es

DIgSILENT
mínima.
[A]
[A]

105.
90.0
90.0
75.0
75.0
60.0
60.0
45.0
B: 52.485 A/58.48°
45.0
30.0
24.183 A/115.57°
A: 90.508 A/163.93° 30.0
15.0
76.632 A/177.58°
15.0 -90.0 -75.0 -60.0 -45.0 -30.0 -15.0 15.0 30.0 45.0 [A]
0.028 A/-1.33°

-90.0 -75.0 -60.0 -45.0 -30.0 -15.0 15.0 30.0 45.0 [A] -15.0
-15.0
-30.0
-30.0
-45.0
-45.0
-60.0
-60.0
-75.0
-75.0 C: 91.789 A/-49.50°
-90.0
-90.0
-105.
-105.
-120.
-120.
-135.
-135. Salida AMT Terminal j
Zero-Sequence Current in A
Salida AMT Terminal j Positive-Sequence Current in A
Phase Current in A Negative-Sequence Current in A

Caso 3: Fuente D y Cargas YN

a) Condiciones previas a la falla

COSEM PAGINA 34 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

A continuación se muestra el comportamiento del sistema en estado normal (Sin condición de fase
abierta) aquí se observa las corrientes por fase ABC y su respectiva representación en
componentes de Secuencia (0, 1, 2). Como se esperaba no existe componentes de secuencia cero
y negativa.

DIgSILENT
[A]
[A]

105.
90.0
90.0
75.0
B: 88.153 A/57.24°
75.0
60.0
60.0
45.0
45.0
30.0
30.0 0.000 A/0.00°
15.0
88.153 A/177.24° 0.000 A/0.00°
15.0 -90.0 -75.0 -60.0 -45.0 -30.0 -15.0 15.0 30.0 45.0 [A]
A: 88.153 A/177.24°

-90.0 -75.0 -60.0 -45.0 -30.0 -15.0 15.0 30.0 45.0 [A] -15.0
-15.0
-30.0
-30.0
-45.0
-45.0
-60.0
-60.0
-75.0
-75.0
-90.0
C: 88.153 A/-62.76°
-90.0
-105.
-105.
-120.
-120.
-135.
-135. Salida AMT Terminal j
Zero-Sequence Current in A
Salida AMT Terminal j Positive-Sequence Current in A
Phase Current in A Negative-Sequence Current in A

b) Condiciones después de la falla

A continuación se muestra la simulación del evento de fase abierta en dominio del tiempo
mostrándose las variables: Corrientes ABC y sus respectivas componentes simétricas, en la que se
puede comparar el estado normal y luego cuando sucede la pérdida de fase.

DIgSILENT
X = -1.200 s X = 1.200 s
110.0

88.303 A
88.00 80.925 A
78.154 A

66.00

44.00 43.793 A

22.00

0.000
-1.500 -0.902 -0.303 0.295 0.893 [s] 1.492
Salida AMT: Phase Current, Magnitude A/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: Phase Current, Magnitude B/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: Phase Current, Magnitude C/Terminal i in A

X = -1.200 s X = 1.200 s
110.0

88.303 A
88.00

66.015 A
66.00

44.00

22.364 A
22.00

0.000 A 0.059 A
0.000
-1.500 -0.902 -0.303 0.295 0.893 [s] 1.492
Salida AMT: Positive-Sequence Current, Magnitude/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: Negative-Sequence Current, Magnitude/Terminal i in A
Salida AMT: 3*I0/Terminal i in A

A continuación se muestra el comportamiento del sistema en estado de falla (Con la condición de

fase abierta) aquí se observa las corrientes por fase ABC y su respectiva representación en
componentes de Secuencia (0, 1, 2). Como se esperaba aparece componente de secuencia
negativa por el desbalance que la perdida de fase genera pero no existe componente de secuencia
cero.

COSEM PAGINA 35 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

DIgSILENT
[A]
[A]

105.
75.0
90.0
62.5
75.0
50.0
60.0
37.5
45.0
B: 43.606 A/53.58° 25.0
22.369 A/120.81°
A: 80.736 A/162.87° 30.0
12.5
65.858 A/176.03° 0.000 A/0.00°
15.0 -75.0 -62.5 -50.0 -37.5 -25.0 -12.5 12.5 25.0 37.5 [A]

-90.0 -75.0 -60.0 -45.0 -30.0 -15.0 15.0 30.0 45.0 [A] -12.5
-15.0
-25.0
-30.0
-37.5
-45.0
-50.0
-60.0 C: 78.058 A/-48.95° -62.5
-75.0
-75.0
-90.0
-87.5
-105.
-100.
-120.
-113.
-135. Salida AMT Terminal j
Zero-Sequence Current in A
Salida AMT Terminal j Positive-Sequence Current in A
Phase Current in A Negative-Sequence Current in A

Variables que determinan la cantidad de corriente por neutro.

El comportamiento de las corrientes por neutro que aparece cuando existe una falla de fase abierta va a
depender principalmente de dos factores que se mencionan a continuación:
I. Conexión de la Fuente
a) Sistemas con neutro aislado

b) Sistemas con neutro puesto a tierra

COSEM PAGINA 36 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

II. Conexión de la Carga

El comportamiento de las corrientes homopolares va a depender de cómo está conectada la carga

en el lado de la fuente. Para eventos de fase abierta las conexiones Yn de los primarios de los
transformadores de distribución “aportan corriente al neutro a la red”, mientras que para conexiones
Y o D en el lado de la fuente no existirá aporte alguno de corriente por neutro.

Adicionalmente se debe considerar que el aporte de corriente por neutro es mayor cuando el Voltaje
de Cortocircuito del transformador de Distribución es menor.
CONCLUSIONES

COSEM PAGINA 37 REVISIÓN: 01

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

1. En sistemas con conexión del neutro a tierra de la fuente y carga el valor de neutro por
apertura de fusible es significativo y debe ser considerado en los Estudios de Coordinación
para limitar las corrientes de arranque de las unidades de tierra.

2. En sistemas con fuente aterrada y carga aislada la compensación del desbalance se realiza
a través del Angulo de las fases sanas y no generan corrientes por el neutro de la fuente.

3. Es necesario prever en los ECP la aparición de las corrientes por tierra ante perdidas de un
fusible sobre todo en sistemas MRT, cuando el valor del Vcc (Voltaje de Cortocircuito del
transformador de Distribución) es menor entonces mayor será el aporte por neutro de la
fuente.

4. Es importante hacer notar que el empleo de elementos de apertura que controlan

individualmente cada una de las fases (fusibles) son los principales causantes de los eventos
de fase abierta.

Las fallas de fase abierta provocada por quemadura de fusible de protección no producen corrientes
elevadas, provocan la circulación de corrientes de secuencia cero que provocan disparos indeseados de
los equipos de protección aguas arriba.

COSEM PAGINA 38 REVISIÓN: 01

 “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I”

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES

Anexo E- Protocolo de Pruebas Recloser THYTRONIC

NA11

ECP S.U Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I.

SE Machahuay 22.9KV

COSEM PAGINA 39 REVISIÓN: 01

 PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBA RELÉ DE PROTECCIÓN THYTRONIC NA11

SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9 kV - EMPRESA MINERA BRYNAJOM S.R.L.

AJUSTES ENTREGADOS POR ENEL: N° de Serie: RELE THYTRONIC NA11 - 211421

ALIMENTADOR N° Cat:
SEF Io> (A): 40 A Vn AC: Vn DC: 24 Vdc
SEF to> (s): 0.57 s IN fase: 1A IN Tierra: 1A
51N Io>> (A): - A TC Fases: 300/1 A TC Toroidal: 300/1 A
t51N t Io>> (s): - s Instalado: 300 A Instalado: 300/1 A

PRUEBA 1 DISPARO POR PRIMER NIVEL (I >) - TIEMPO DEFINIDO

Nº Fase I Teorico I Disparo error (%) Fase t Teorico t Disparo error (ms)
1 R 30 30.34 1.13 R 0.200 0.264 150 ms
2 S 30 29.55 -1.50 S 0.200 0.265 150 ms
3 T 30 27.67 -7.77 T 0.200 0.265 150 ms

PRUEBA 2 DISPARO POR FALLA A TIERRA - PRIMER NIVEL - 51N

Ajuste
Nº Io Teorico Io Disparo error (%) Ajuste Tiempo to Teorico to Disparo error (ms)
Corriente
1 Io> 10 10.40 4.00 to> 0.450 0.462 12 ms

PRUEBA 3 DISPARO POR SFALLA A TIERRA - SEGUNDO NIVEL - 50N

Ajuste
Nº Io Teorico Io Disparo error <10% Ajuste Tiempo to Teorico to Disparo error (ms)
Corriente
1 Io>> 200 (40A) 39.73 0.68 to>> 0.100 0.109 9 ms

EQUIPO DE PRUEBA EQUIPO DE MANIOBRA

AVO INTERRUPTOR: SECCIONADOR:
× SVERKER 750 Nº Serie: 2606201701 MARCA: WIPP & BOURNE IN: 630 A
OTRO TIPO: VN: 24kV
Marca: KARDEX: ISC: 16kA
Cargador
Serie: SERIE: Año: 2016
Marca Bateria Apertura y Cierre - Mando Remoto: Local:

Observaciones: TODO QUEDO CONFORME - SETEO Seccionador de Potencia

Y PRUEBAS DE FUNCIONAMIENTO Fusibles R S T
Capacidad - - -
Marca - - -

Fecha:
Empresa:
Responsable Contratista: Tco. Harrison Peña Garcia

Firma del Responsable Residente de Obra Supervisor de Obra Supervisor ENEL

 NA11
PHASE & RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT
PROTECTION RELAY,
AUTOMATIC RECLOSING

MANUAL

NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009

 TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S
1 INTRODUCTION 5
Scope and liability ...........................................................................................................................................................................................5
Applicability ......................................................................................................................................................................................................5
Conformity ........................................................................................................................................................................................................5
Technical support ............................................................................................................................................................................................5
Copyright...........................................................................................................................................................................................................5
Warranty ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................5
Safety recommendations ...............................................................................................................................................................................5
Insulation tests ................................................................................................................................................................................................5
Product identification .....................................................................................................................................................................................6
Environment .....................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Graphical conventions ...................................................................................................................................................................................6
Glossary/definitions ........................................................................................................................................................................................6

2 GENERAL 10
Preface........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Photo .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10
Main features.................................................................................................................................................................................................11

3 TECHNICAL DATA 12
3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................................................12
Mechanical data ...........................................................................................................................................................................................12
Insulation ........................................................................................................................................................................................................12
EMC tests for interference immunity .........................................................................................................................................................12
Voltage dip and interruption ........................................................................................................................................................................12
EMC tests for interference immunity .........................................................................................................................................................12
Emission ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Mechanical tests.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Climatic tests................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13
Safety ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13
Certifications ..................................................................................................................................................................................................14
3.2 INPUT CIRCUITS ...............................................................................................................................................................................................14
Auxiliary power supply U aux .......................................................................................................................................................................14
Phase current input circuits ........................................................................................................................................................................14
Residual current input circuit......................................................................................................................................................................14
Binary input circuits......................................................................................................................................................................................14
Block input (logic selectivity) ......................................................................................................................................................................14
3.3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS ............................................................................................................................................................................................15
Output relays ..................................................................................................................................................................................................15
Block output (Logic selectivity)...................................................................................................................................................................15
3.4 MMI .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................15
3.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES ...................................................................................................................................................................15
Local port ........................................................................................................................................................................................................15
Remote ports ..................................................................................................................................................................................................15
3.6 GENERAL SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................................................................................16
3.7 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS .................................................................................................................................................................................16
Thermal protection with Pt100 probes - 26 ...............................................................................................................................................16
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 - settings for 1/5 A standard CTs version ...................................................................................................16
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 - settings for low power CTs version (LPCT) ............................................................................................ 18
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N - settings for 1/5 A standard CTs version ........................................................................................ 19
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N - settings for low power CTs version (LPCT) ................................................................................. 20
Breaker failure - BF.......................................................................................................................................................................................22
3.8 CONTROL AND MONITORING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Second harmonic restraint - 2ndh-REST.................................................................................................................................................. 23
Trip Circuit Supervision - 74TCS ................................................................................................................................................................. 23
Selective block - BLOCK2 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Circuit Breaker monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................................... 23
CT supervision - 74CT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 23
Pilot wire diagnostic .................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Demand measures ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Oscillography (DFR)) .....................................................................................................................................................................................24
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) .......................................................................................................................................................24
3.9 MEASURES ........................................................................................................................................................................................................25

2 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009

4 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS 26
4.1 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................................................................................26
Power supply board ......................................................................................................................................................................................27
CPU board.......................................................................................................................................................................................................27
Input board .....................................................................................................................................................................................................27
MMI (keyboard, LED and display) ..............................................................................................................................................................27
4.2 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................................................. 28
Base software............................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
Real-time operating system........................................................................................................................................................................ 28
Task ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 28
Drivers ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 29
Application Software ................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Data Base ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Self test (Application) .................................................................................................................................................................................. 29
Development tools (Builder) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 29
4.3 I/O DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 30
Metering inputs ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
Signal processing ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Conventions................................................................................................................................................................................................... 33
Use of measured values...............................................................................................................................................................................34
Binary inputs ..................................................................................................................................................................................................35
Output relays ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 40
LED indicators ................................................................................................................................................................................................42
Communication interfaces...........................................................................................................................................................................44
4.4 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS .................................................................................................................................................................................45
Rated values...................................................................................................................................................................................................45
Thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes (26) ........................................................................................................................47
Phase overcurrent - 50/51........................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N ................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Breaker failure - BF...................................................................................................................................................................................... 69
4.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING ........................................................................................................................................................................71
Automatic reclosure - 79 ..............................................................................................................................................................................71
Logical block - BLOCK1 ................................................................................................................................................................................75
Selective block -BLOCK2 .............................................................................................................................................................................77
Remote tripping .............................................................................................................................................................................................82
Frequency tracking ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 83
Second Harmonic Restraint - 2ndh-REST .................................................................................................................................................84
Cold Load Pickup - CLP ................................................................................................................................................................................85
CT supervision - 74CT ...................................................................................................................................................................................86
Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS...................................................................................................................................................................87
Circuit breaker supervision ........................................................................................................................................................................ 90
Demand measures ........................................................................................................................................................................................92
Oscillography ................................................................................................................................................................................................92

5 MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS 93

Measures....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Protection ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Delayed inputs .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 93
Internal states ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Relays ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................94
Counters..........................................................................................................................................................................................................94
Self test ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................94
Pilot wire diagnostic .....................................................................................................................................................................................95
Selective Block - BLOCK2 ............................................................................................................................................................................95
Fault recording - SFR ....................................................................................................................................................................................95
Event recording - SER...................................................................................................................................................................................95
Oscillography - DFR ......................................................................................................................................................................................95

6 INSTALLATION 98
6.1 PACKAGING ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 98
6.2 MOUNTING ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 98
6.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................102
6.4 NOMINAL CURRENT I n AND I En SETTING FOR TRADITIONAL CTs ..................................................................................................... 113
6.5 LED ALLOCATION ............................................................................................................................................................................................117
6.6 FINAL OPERATIONS .......................................................................................................................................................................................117

NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 3

 7 PROGRAMMING AND SETTINGS 118
7.1 SW ThySetter.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 118
ThySetter installation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 118
ThySetter use .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 118
7.2 MMI (Man Machine Interface) ................................................................................................................................................................... 119
Reading variables (READ) ......................................................................................................................................................................... 119
Setting modifying (SET) ............................................................................................................................................................................. 120
TEST ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................121
COMMUNICATION ......................................................................................................................................................................................121
Circuit breaker commands ........................................................................................................................................................................121
7.3 MENU TREE......................................................................................................................................................................................................122
7.4 MAINTENANCE ...............................................................................................................................................................................................127
7.5 REPAIR ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................127
7.6 PACKAGING .....................................................................................................................................................................................................127

8 APPENDIX 128
8.1 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time IEC curves .................................................................................................................................................. 128
Mathematical formula ............................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A) ................................................................... 129
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) ........................................................................... 130
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) ...................................................................131
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A) .........................................................132
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) ................................................................. 133
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) ........................................................134
8.2 APPENDIX A2 - Inverse time ANSI/IEEE curves .......................................................................................................................................135
Mathematical formula ................................................................................................................................................................................135
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)............................................................................136
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI) .........................................................................................137
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI) ............................................................................... 138
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI) ................................................................ 139
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI) .............................................................................. 140
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI) ......................................................................141
8.3 APPENDIX A3 - Inverse time - RECTIFIER, I2t and EM curves ................................................................................................................142
Mathematical formula ................................................................................................................................................................................142
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Rectifier curves ........................................................................................................................................... 143
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - I2t inverse curves (I2t=K) ............................................................................................................................144
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM) ..................................................................................................145
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)........................................................................................146
8.4 APPENDIX B1 - I/O Diagram .........................................................................................................................................................................147
8.5 APPENDIX B2 - Interfaces ........................................................................................................................................................................... 148
8.6 APPENDIX B3 - Connection diagrams ....................................................................................................................................................... 149
8.7 APPENDIX C - Dimensions ........................................................................................................................................................................... 153
8.8 APPENDIX D - Setting table ..........................................................................................................................................................................154
8.9 APPENDIX E - Revisions history .................................................................................................................................................................. 188
8.10 APPENDIX F - EC Declaration of conformity ............................................................................................................................................. 189

4 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009

 1 INTRODUCTION
Scope and liability
This document describes the functions, the technical data of NA11 devices; instructions for mount-
ing, setting and commissioning are included.
This manual has been checked out, however, deviations from the description cannot be completely
ruled out, so that no liability in a legal sense for correctness and completeness of the information or
from any damage that might result from its use is formally disclaimed.
The information given in this document is reviewed regularly; any corrections and integration will be
included in subsequent editions that are identified by the date of revision.
We appreciate any suggestions for improvement.
We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice.

Applicability
This manual is valid for NA11 devices with firmware version 1.60 and following.
Revision history is listed in appendix.

Conformity
The product complies with the CEE directives:
• EMC Council Directives: 89/336/EEC
• Low voltage Directives: 73/23/EEC

Technical support
Contact: THYTRONIC Technical Service www.thytronic.it

Copyright
All right reserved; It is forbidden to copy, modify or store material (document and sw) protected by
copyright without Thytronic consent.

Warranty
Thytronic warrants devices against defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a
period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of retail purchase by the original end-user purchaser (“War-
ranty Period”).

Safety recommendations
The warming contained in this document are all-important for safety; special attention must be paid
to the following symbols:

Death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions
WARNING are not taken.

CAUTION Minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken

Installation and commissioning must be carried out by qualified person; Thytronic assumes no re-
sponsibility for damages caused from improper use that does not comply all warning and caution in
this manual.
In particular the following requirements must be met:
• Remove power before opening it.
• Verify the voltage absence by means suitable instrumentation on relay connections; attention must
be paid to all circuits supplied by external sources (binary input, CT, etc...)
• Care must be taken when handling metal parts (front panel, connectors).

Settings must be established on the basis of a coordination study.

CAUTION Numerical values inside examples have educational purpose only; they don’t be used, in no way,
for actual applications.

Insulation tests
After insulation tests, hazardous voltages (capacitor charges,...) may be arise; it is advisable to grad-
ually reduce the test voltage avoiding to erase it abruptly.

INTRODUCTION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 5

Product identification
Each device is equipped with:
• Identification label installed on the front side with following informations: code number, phase and
residual nominal currents, auxiliary voltage range and CE mark:

In 5A 1A 5A
IEn 5A 1A 5A
UAUX 110-230 Vac/dc
1
2
3
4
5
NA11#0A2MM00

• Test label with following informations: data, serial number and test operator signature.

Environment
The NA11 device must be employed according to the environment conditions shown (see technical
data).
In case of different environment conditions, appropriate provisions must be provided (conditioning
system, humidity control, etc...).
If contaminants are present (dust, corrosive substances, etc...), filters must be provided.

Graphical conventions
The CEI/IEC and ANSI symbols is employed where possible:
e.g.: 51 = ANSI code concerning the overcurrent element.
Following text formats are used:
The ThySetter[1] menu:
Phase overcurrent -50/51
The parameter description (measures, thresholds, operate time,...) and related value:
First threshold 50/51 definite time
I>def
The display messages (MMI) are shown as:
NA11
Notes are highlighted with cursive letters inside colored bar

Note: Useful description note

Glossary/definitions
I En Relay residual nominal current
I Enp Residual CT primary nominal current
In Relay phase nominal current
I np Phase CT primary nominal current
50/51 Phase overcurrent ANSI code
50N/51N Residual overcurrent ANSI code
74CT CT supervision
79 Automatic reclosing
74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision

DFR Digital Fault Recorder (Oscillography)

SER Sequential Event Recorder
SFR Sequential Fault Recorder
ANSI American National Standard Institute
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique

52 o CB (Circuit Breaker) Circuit Breaker

52a Auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the same position as the
breaker. It can be assigned to a binary input to locate the CB posi-
tion (Breaker failure and/or CB diagnostic functions). (52a open = CB
open)
52b Auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the opposite position as the
breaker (52b open = CB closed)

K1...K6...K10 Output relays

Pulse Output relay with pulse operation
tTR Output relay minimum pulse width
Note 1 The graphic interface and the operation of the ThySetter software are described in the relative chapters

66 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INTRODUCTION

 Latched Output relay with latched operation (manual reset) Output relay with
latched operation (automatic reset)
No-latched Output relay with no-latched operation (automatic reset)

CT Current Transformer
LPCT Low Power Current Transformer
P1 IEC nomenclature for primary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to
a ANSI dot)
P2 IEC nomenclature for primary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to
a ANSI no-dot)
S1 IEC nomenclature for secondary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative
to a ANSI dot)
S2 IEC nomenclature for secondary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative
to a ANSI no-dot)
Self test Diagnostic
Start Leave an initial condition or reset condition (Pickup)
Trip Operation (with operate time)

Operating time Duration of time interval between the instant when the character-
istic quantity in reset condition is changed, under specified condi-
tions, and the instant when the relay operates
Dropout ratio The ratio of a reset value to an operate value in well-specified con-
ditions. The dropout ratio may be lower or greater than 1 according
as an over or under element is considered
Reset time Duration of the time interval between the instant when the charac-
teristic quantity in operate condition is changed, under specified
conditions, and the instant when the relay operates.
The stated reset time is related to a step variation of characteristic
quantity in operate condition to the reset condition.
Overshoot time The critical impulse time for a relay which is in its reset condition,
is the longest duration a specified change in the input energizing
quantity(ies) (characteristic quantity), which will cause the relay
to change to operate condition, can be applied without the relay
switches. The overshoot time is the difference from the operate time
and the critical impulse time.
The declared values for the overshoot time are applicable with the
lower setting value of the operation time.
MMI (Man Machine Interface) Operator front panel

ThySetter Setting and monitoring software

Log file A text file that lists actions that have occurred (ThySetter).
J2SE Java Platform Standard Edition
Subnet Mask (Ethernet nomenclature)
Sw Software
Fw Firmware
Upgrade Firmware upgrade
XML eXtensible Markup Language

INTRODUCTION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 7

 Symbols

I>> Threshold setting (e.g. pickup I>>).

The value is available for reading and is adjustable by means ThySetter + MMI.

I Limit block (I>> threshold).

I ≥ I>>
I L1
I L2 Ma x [I L1 ,I L2 ,I L3 ] Computation block (Max phase current)
I L3

Curve type (definite/inverse time)

T 0

Logic internal signal (output); may be a logical state (e.g.I>> Start) or a numerical value
I>> Start
It is available for reading (ThySetter + communication interface)

Logic external signal (intput); may be a command coming from a binary input or a sw command
IPh Block2
It is available for reading (ThySetter + communication interface)

Internal signal (e.g. Breaker Failure output state concerning to the 2nd threshold of the 50 element)
I>> BF_OUT It is not available for reading (missing arrow)

Switch

& & AND and NAND logic gates

≥1 ≥1 OR and NOR logic gates

=1 EXOR logic gate

INPUT

t ON t ON t ON t ON t ON

T 0 ON delay timer with reset (t ON delay)

RESET OUTPUT

RESET
t

INPUT
t ON
ON delay timer without reset (t ON delay) t ON t ON t ON
T 0

OUTPUT

INPUT
t DROP
OFF delay timer (dropout) without reset (t DROP delay) t ON t DROP t ON
0 T

OUTPUT

Symbols.ai

88 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INTRODUCTION

 INPUT

t DROP t ON t ON t DROP t ON t DROP

0 T OFF delay timer (dropout) with reset (t DROP delay)

RESET OUTPUT

RESET t DROP
t

INPUT
t TR
Minimum pulse width operation for output relays (t TR) t TR t TR
0 T

OUTPUT

INPUT

Latched Latched operating mode for output relays and LEDs

OUTPUT

INPUT

t TR t TR
Pulse operating mode for output relays
t TR
OUTPUT

Symbols1 .ai

INTRODUCTION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 9

 2 GENERAL
Preface
The relay type NA11 can be used in radial networks as feeder or power transformer protection.
In solidly grounded systems the residual overcurrent protection can be used on feeders of any length,
while in ungrounded or Petersen coil and/or resistance grounded systems, the residual overcurrent
protection can be used on feeders of small length in order to avoid unwanted trippings due to the
capacitive current contribution of the feeder on external ground fault.
Beside to the phase and residual overcurrent protections, the automatic reclosing function is pro-
vided. The NA11 protection relay may be shipped with traditional CTs or low power (LPCT) current
inputs.

Following input circuits are available:

• Three phase current and one residual current inputs with nominal currents independently select-
able at 1 A or 5 A using DIP-switch.
• Two binary inputs.
• One block input (logic selectivity).

In addition to the main protection element, the breaker failure (BF), CT monitoring (74CT), Trip Circuit
Supervision (TCS), Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and automatic reclosing function (79) are
also provided.
Setting, programming and reading operations must be effected by means of Personal Computer with
ThySetter software or by means of remote communication interface (RS485 bus and Ethernet net-
work); all operations must be performed through MMI.
According to the hardware configurations, the NA11 protection relay can be shipped in various case
styles depending on the required mounting options:
• Flush.
• Projecting mounting.
• Rack.
• With separate operator panel.
Other options are:
• Auxiliary power supply operating range.
• Communication protocols.

Photo

10 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 GENERAL

Main features
• Metallic case.
• Backlight LCD 4x16 Display.
• Eight LEDs that may be joined with matrix criteria to many and various functions.
• RESET key to clear LED indications and latched output relays.
• Free settable two binary inputs.
• Independently settable for start, trip, self-test and control six output relay (K1...K6) Each output
relay may be set with normally energized or normally de-energized operating mode and manual or
automatic reset (latched/no-latched).
• Rear Ethernet communication port, with MODBUS TCP/IP® protocol, with RJ45 (copper wires) or
FX (optical fiber) connection.
• Rear RS485 port, with ModBus protocol.
• RS232 front serial port (local communication for Thysetter).
• Real time clock with super capacitor backup.

The most significant constructive features of the NA11 protection relay are:
• Galvanically insulated input and output circuits (communication and binary circuits included).
• Fast sampling rate for inputs (24 samples per power cycle).
• Optimum filtering of input signals through combined use of analog and digital filters.
• Traditional electromechanical-type final output contacts with continuous monitoring of control coil
continuity.
• Auxiliary supply comprising a switching-type voltage stabilizing circuit having a very wide working
range and a very small power dissipation
• Nominal frequency: 50 or 60 Hz.

The most significant operating features are:

• Programming of operating modes and parameters by means of the front keys and alphanumeric
display, with a programming procedure based on carrying out guided selections and on explicit and
immediate signalling of the operations being performed, so that such procedure can be carried out
without coding tables or mnemonic informations.
• The feature modification operations do not interrupt the normal functions of the relay.
• Impossibility of programming unacceptable parameter values, thanks to the automatic limitation of
top and bottom scale values for the relative setting ranges.
• Currents are sampled 24 times per period and measured in the effective value (RMS) of the funda-
mental component using the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and digital filters.
• The fault recorder (SFR) runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last twenty events upon
trigger of binary input/output and/or element pickup (start-trip).
• The event recorder (SER) runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last three hundred
events upon trigger of binary input/output.
• Digital fault recorder (DFR) in COMTRADE format (oscillography).

GENERAL NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 11

 3 T E C H N I C A L D ATA
3.1 GENERAL
‡ Mechanical data
Mounting:
• Flush.
• Projecting.
• Rack.
• Separated operator panel.
External dimensions (Flush mounting) 177 x 107 x 235 (high x width x depth)
Terminals screw connection
Max conductor cross section 4 mm2
Mass (Flush mounting) 2.0 kg

Reference standards EN 60529, EN 60529/A1

• Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)Front
IP52
• Terminals IP20

‡ Insulation
Reference standards EN 60255-5 IEC 60255-5
High voltage test (50 Hz 60 s)
• Auxiliary power supply 2 kV
• Input circuits 2 kV
• Output circuits 2 kV
• Output circuits (between open contacts) 1 kV
• Communication interfaces 500 V

Impulse voltage withstand test (1.2/50 μs):

• Auxiliary power supply 5 kV
• Input circuits 5 kV
• Output circuits 5 kV
• Output circuits (between open contacts) 2.5 kV

Insulation resistance >100 MΩ

‡ EMC tests for interference immunity

Reference standards
• Product standard for measuring relays EN 50263
• Generic standards immunity for industrial environments EN 61000-6-2
• Electromagnetic compatibility requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment
EN 60255-26
• Apparati di automazione e controllo per centrali e stazioni elettriche
• Compatibilità elettromagnetica - Immunità ENEL REMC 02
• Normativa di compatibilità elettromeccanica per apparati e sistemi
ENEL REMC 01

‡ Voltage dip and interruption

Reference standards EN 61000-4-29
IEC 60255-22-11
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on dc input power port immunity tests
Auxiliary power supply in dc energizing quantity
• Interruption (UT=40%) 100 ms
• Interruption (UT=0%) 50 ms
• Voltage variations (UT=80...120%) 10 s

‡ EMC tests for interference immunity

Reference standards EN 60255-22-1 IEC 60255-22-1
EN 61000-4-12 EN 61000-4-12
Damped oscillatory wave
• 0.1 MHz and 1 MHz common mode 2.5 kV
• 0.1 MHz and 1 MHz differential mode 1.0 kV
• Ring wave common mode 2.0 kV
• Ring wave differential mode 1.0 kV
Reference standards EN 60255-22-2 IEC 60255-22-2
EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-2
Electrostatic discharge
• Contact discharge 6 kV
• Air discharge 8 kV

12 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 TECHNICAL DATA

 Reference standards EN 60255-22-3 IEC 60255-22-3
EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-3
Radiated radio-frequency fields
• 80...1000 MHz AM 80% 10 V/m
• 900 MHz Pulse modulated 10 V/m
Reference standards EN 60255-22-4 IEC 60255-22-4
EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-4
Fast transient burst (5/50 ns)
• Auxiliary power supply 2 kV
• Input circuits 4 kV
Reference standards EN 60255-22-5 IEC 60255-22-5
EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-5
High energy pulse
• Uaux (line-to-ground 10 ohm, 9 μF) 2 kV
• Uaux (line-to-line 0 ohm, 18 μF) 1 kV
• I/O ports (line-to-ground 40 ohm, 0.5 μF) 2 kV
• I/O ports (line-to-line 40 ohm, 0.5 μF) 1 kV

Reference standards EN 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-22-6

EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-6
Conducted radio-frequency fields
• 0.15...80 MHz AM 80% 1kHz 10 V
Reference standards EN 60255-22-7 IEC 60255-22-7
EN 61000-4-16 IEC 61000-4-16
Power frequency immunity tests
• Dc voltage 30 V
• 50 Hz continuously 30 V
• 50 Hz 1 s 300 V
• 0.015...150 kHz 30 V

Reference standards EN 61000-4-8 IEC 61000-4-8

Magnetic field 50 Hz
• 50 Hz continuously 100 A/m
• 50 Hz 1 s 1 kA/m

Reference standards EN 61000-4-10 IEC 61000-4-10

Damped oscillatory magnetic field
• Damped oscillatory wave 0.1 MHz 30 A/m
• Damped oscillatory wave 1 MHz 30 A/m

‡ Emission
Reference standards EN 60255-25 IEC 60255-25
EN 61000-6-4 IEC 61000-6-4
EN 55011 CISPR 11
Electromagnetic emission tests
• Conducted emission auxiliary power supply 0.15...0.5 MHz 79 dB μV
• Conducted emission auxiliary power supply 0.5...30 MHz 73 dB μV
• Radiated emission 30...230 MHz 40 dB μV/m
• Radiated emission 230...1000 MHz 47 dB μV/m

‡ Mechanical tests
Reference standards EN 60255-21-1 EN 60255-21-2 RMEC01
Vibration, shock, bump and seismic tests on measuring relays and protection equipment
• EN 60255-21-1 Vibration tests (sinusoidal) Class 1
• EN 60255-21-2 Shock and bump test Class 1

‡ Climatic tests
Reference standards IEC 60068-x ENEL R CLI 01 CEI 50
Operating temperature -25...+70 °C
Storage temperature -40...+85 °C
Permissible relative humidity 10...95 %
Atmospheric pressure 70...110 kPa

‡ Safety
Reference standards EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
Pollution degree 3
Reference voltage 250 V
Overvoltage category III

TECHNICAL DATA NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 13

‡ Certifications
Reference standards
Product standard for measuring relays EN 50263
CE Conformity
• EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
• Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
• Type tests IEC 60255-6

3.2 INPUT CIRCUITS

‡ Auxiliary power supply U aux
Voltage
Nominal value (range)[1] 24...48 V~/-
115...230 V~/110...220 V-
Operative range (each one of the above nominal values) 19...60 V~/-
85...265 V~/75...300 V-
Inrush current (max)
• 24 V- 6 A, 5 ms
• 48 V- 14 A, 5 ms
• 110 V- 20 A, 1 ms
• 230 V~ 50 A, 1 ms
Frequency (for alternate voltage supply) 45...66 Hz
Max distortion factor ( for alternating voltage supply) 15%
Max alternating component (for dc voltage supply):
• Full wave rectified sine wave 100 %
• Sine wave 80 %
Power consumption:
• Maximum (energized relays, Ethernet TX) 10 W (20 VA)
• Maximum (energized relays, Ethernet FX) 15 W (25 VA)

‡ Phase current input circuits

Standard CTs:
Connections M4 terminals
Relay nominal phase current I n 1 A or 5 A selectable by DIP-switch
Permanent overload 25 A
Thermal overload (1 s) 500 A
Dynamic overload (half cycle) 1250 A
Rated consumption (for any phase) ≤ 0.002 VA with I n =1 A
≤ 0.04 VA with I n =5 A
LPCT - Low Power Current Transformers:
Connections RJ45 plug
Relay nominal phase current I n 50 A
Extended primary current 50 A...1250 A selectable by DIP-switch
Max primary current 22.5 kA
Nominal secondary voltage (with Inp = 50 A) 22.5 mV

‡ Residual current input circuit

Relay nominal residual current I En 1 A or 5 A selectable by DIP-switch
Permanent overload 25 A
Thermal overload (1 s) 500 A
Dynamic overload (half cycle) 1250 A
Rated consumption ≤ 0.006 VA with I En =1 A
≤ 0.12 VA with I En =5 A

‡ Binary input circuits

Quantity 2
Type optocoupler
Operative range 24...265 V~/-
Min activation voltage UDIGmin 18 V
Max consumption, energized 3 mA

‡ Block input (logic selectivity)

Quantity 1
Type (powered by internal isolated supply) polarized wet input
Max consumption, energized 5 mA

Note 1 The different versions must be select on order

14 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 TECHNICAL DATA

 3.3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS
‡ Output relays
Quantity 6
Type of contacts K1, K2 changeover (SPDT, type C)
Type of contacts K3, K4, K5 make (SPST-NO, type A)
Type of contacts K6 break (SPST-NC, type B)
Nominal current 8A
Nominal voltage/max switching voltage 250 V~/400 V~
Breaking capacity:
• Direct current (L/R = 40 ms) 50 W
• Alternating current (λ = 0,4) 1250 VA
Make 1000 W/VA
Short duration current (0,5 s) 30 A
Minimum switching load 300 mW (5 V/ 5 mA)
Life:
• Mechanical 106 operations
• Electrical 105 operations

‡ Block output (Logic selectivity)

Quantity 1
Type optocoupler

3.4 MMI
Display 16x4 LCD backlight module

LEDs
Quantity 8
• ON/fail (green) 1
• Start (yellow) 1
• Trip (red) 1
• Freely allocatable (red) 5

Keyboard 8 keys

3.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES

‡ Local port
Connection RJ10
Baud rate 19200 bps
Parity None
Protocol Modbus RTU®

‡ Remote ports
RS485
• Connection screw terminals
• Baud rate 1200...57600 bps
• Protocol[1] ModBus®RTU
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3

Ethernet 100BaseT
• Connection[2] Optical fiber 1300 nm, ST
100 Base TX, RJ45
• Baud rate 100 Mbps
• Protocol ModBus®TCP/IP

Note 1 The different versions must be select on order

Note 2 The different versions must be select on order

TECHNICAL DATA NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 15

 3.6 GENERAL SETTINGS
Relay nominal frequency fn 50, 60 Hz
Standard CTs:
Relay phase nominal current In 1 A or 5 A [1]
Phase CT primary nominal current Inp 1 A...10 kA
1...499 A (step 1 A)
500...4990 A (step 10 A)
5000...10000 A (step 100 A)
LPCT - Low Power Current Transformers:
Relay phase nominal current (Inp) 50...1250 A

Relay residual nominal current IEn 1 A o 5 A [3][2]

Residual CT primary nominal current IEnp 1 A...10 kA
1...499 A (step 1 A)
500...4990 A (step 10 A)
5000...10000 A (step 100 A)

3.7 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS

‡ Thermal protection with Pt100 probes - 26[3]

ThAL1...8 Alarm:
Alarm threshold 26 PT1...PT8 (ThAL1...8) 0...200 °C
Operating time ThAL1...8 (tThAL1...8) 0....100 s
Th>1...8 Trip:
Trip threshold 26 PT1...PT8 (Th>1...8) 0...200 °C
Operating time ThAL1...8 (tTh>1...8) 0....100 s

‡ Phase overcurrent - 50/51 - settings for 1/5 A standard CTs version

I> Element
I> Curve type (I>Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI
RECTIFIER, I2t or EM
I CLP > Activation time (t CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I> Reset time delay (t > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 First threshold definite time (I> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
1.00...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I> def within CLP (ICLP>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
1.00...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)

I> def Operating time (t > def ) 0.04...200.00 s

0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)

Note 1 The nominal current settings doesn’t concern the protection elements; they must agree with hardware setting (dip-switch 1 A or 5 A) .
Note 2 1 - 5 A selection is meaningful for standard CTs versions; the computed residual current is employed for NA11 protection relays equipped with
LPCT sensor inputs
Note 3 The 26 element is available when the MPT module is connect on Thybus and enabled

16 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 TECHNICAL DATA

 Inverse time[1]
50/51 First threshold inverse time (I>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>inv within CLP (ICLP>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>inv Operating time (t >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>> Element
I>> Curve type (I>>Curve) DEFINITE or I2t
I CLP >> Activation time (t CLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>> Reset time delay (t >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 Second threshold definite time (I>> def ) 0.100...40.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>> def within CLP (ICLP>>def ) 0.100...40.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>> def Operating time (t >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Inverse time
50/51 Second threshold inverse time (I>>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)

I>>inv within CLP (ICLP>>inv) 0.100...20.00 In

0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>>inv Operating time (t >>inv) 0.02...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

I>>> Element
I CLP >>> Activation time (t CLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>>> Reset time delay (t >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 Third threshold definite time (I>>> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>>> def within CLP (ICLP>>>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>>> def Operating time (t >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t>inv · {0.01 / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t>inv · {3.922 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t>inv · {5.64 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
I-squared-t (I 2t = K): t = 16 · t>inv / (I/I>inv)2
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t>inv / [-0.236 · (I/I>inv)-1+ 0.339]
RECTIFIER (RI): t = 2351 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)5.6- 1]
t: operate time
I> inv : pickup value
t>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I> inv
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20
With I> inv pickup ≥ 2.5 I n , the upper limit is 50 I n

TECHNICAL DATA NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 17

 Pickup time ≤ 0.03 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.04 s
Overshoot time 0.03 s
Reference values rest: 0
Pickup accuracy ± 4% ± 1% I n
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

‡ Phase overcurrent - 50/51 - settings for low power CTs version (LPCT)
I> Element
I> Curve type (I>Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI
RECTIFIER, I2t or EM
I CLP > Activation time (t CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I> Reset time delay (t > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 First threshold definite time (I> def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I> def within CLP (ICLP>def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I> def Operating time (t > def ) 0.04...200.00 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
50/51 First threshold inverse time (I>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>inv within CLP (ICLP>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>inv Operating time (t >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)

I>> Element
I>> Curve type (I>>Curve) DEFINITE or I2t
I CLP >> Activation time (t CLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>> Reset time delay (t >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 Second threshold definite time (I>> def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)

Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t>inv · {0.01 / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t>inv · {3.922 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t>inv · {5.64 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
I-squared-t (I 2t = K): t = 16 · t>inv / (I/I>inv)2
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t>inv / [-0.236 · (I/I>inv)-1+ 0.339]
RECTIFIER (RI): t = 2351 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)5.6- 1]
t: operate time
I> inv : pickup value
t>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I> inv
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20
With I> inv pickup ≥ 2.5 I n , the upper limit is 35 I n

18 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 TECHNICAL DATA

 I>> def within CLP (ICLP>>def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>> def Operating time (t >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Inverse time
50/51 Second threshold inverse time (I>>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)

I>>inv within CLP (ICLP>>inv) 0.100...20.00 In

0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>>inv Operating time (t >>inv) 0.02...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

I>>> Element
I CLP >>> Activation time (t CLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>>> Reset time delay (t >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 Third threshold definite time (I>>> def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>>> def within CLP (ICLP>>>def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)

I>>> def Operating time (t >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Pickup time ≤ 0.03 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.04 s
Overshoot time 0.03 s
Reference values rest: 0
Pickup accuracy ± 4% ± 1% I n
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

‡ Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N - settings for 1/5 A standard CTs version

IE> Element
IE > Curve type (IE > Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI
EM
IECLP > Activation time (t ECLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE > Reset time delay (t E > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N/51N First threshold definite time (IE > def ) 0.002...2.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE > def within CLP (IECLP>def ) 0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 In (step 0.01 IEn)
IE > def Operating time (t E > def ) 0.04...200.00 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)

TECHNICAL DATA NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 19

 Inverse time[1]
50N/51N First threshold inverse time (IE >inv) 0.010...2.00 IEn
0.100...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >inv within CLP (IECLP>inv) 0.010...2.00 IEn
0.100...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >inv Operating time (t E >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE>> Element
IECLP >> Activation time (t ECLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE >> Reset time delay (t E >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N/51N Second threshold definite time (IE >> def ) 0.010...10.00 IEn
0.010...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >> def within CLP (IECLP>>def ) 0.010...10.00 IEn
0.010...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >> def Operating time (t E >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IE>>> Element
IECLP >>> Activation time (t ECLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE >>> Reset time delay (t E >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N/51N Third threshold definite time (IE >>> def ) 0.010...10.00 IEn
0.010...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >>> def within CLP (IECLP>>>def ) 0.010...10.00 IEn
0.010...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >>> def Operating time (t E >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Pickup time ≤ 0.03 s

Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.04 s
Overshoot time 0.03 s
Pickup accuracy ± 4% ± 1% I En
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

‡ Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N - settings for low power CTs version (LPCT) [2]
IE> Element
IE > Curve type (IE > Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI
EM
IECLP > Activation time (t ECLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t E>inv / [(I E/ I E> inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t E > inv / [(I E/I E> inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t E > inv / [(I E/I E> inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t E > inv · {0.01 / [(I E/I E> inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t E > inv · {3.922 / [(I E/I E> inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t E > inv · {5.64 / [(I E/I E> inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t E > inv / [-0.236 · (I E/I E> inv)-1+ 0.339]
I E: residual current input
t: operate time
I E> inv : pickup value
t E > inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I E >
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I E/ I E> inv ≤ 20
With I E> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I En, the upper limit is 10 I En
Note 2 The computed residual current (vector sum of the phase currents) is employed for NA11 protection relays equipped with LPCT sensor inputs

20 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 TECHNICAL DATA

 IE > Reset time delay (t E > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N/51N First threshold definite time (IE > def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)

IE > def within CLP (IECLP>def ) 0.100...35.0 In

0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IE > def Operating time (t E > def ) 0.04...200.00 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
50N/51N First threshold inverse time (IE >inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IE >inv within CLP (IECLP>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IE >inv Operating time (t E >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE>> Element
IECLP >> Activation time (t ECLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE >> Reset time delay (t E >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N/51N Second threshold definite time (IE >> def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IE >> def within CLP (IECLP>>def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IE >> def Operating time (t E >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

IE>>> Element
IECLP >>> Activation time (t ECLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE >>> Reset time delay (t E >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N/51N Third threshold definite time (IE >>> def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)
Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t E>inv / [(I EC/ I E> inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t E > inv / [(I EC/I E> inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t E > inv / [(I EC/I E> inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t E > inv · {0.01 / [(I EC/I E> inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t E > inv · {3.922 / [(I EC/I E> inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t E > inv · {5.64 / [(I EC/I E> inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t E > inv / [-0.236 · (I EC/I E> inv)-1+ 0.339]
I EC : calculated residual current input
t: operate time
I E> inv : pickup value
t E > inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I E >
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I E/ I E> inv ≤ 20
With I E> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I n, the upper limit is 10 I n

TECHNICAL DATA NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 21

 IE >>> def within CLP (IECLP>>>def ) 0.100...35.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...35.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IE >>> def Operating time (t E >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Pickup time ≤ 0.03 s

Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.04 s
Overshoot time 0.03 s
Pickup accuracy ± 4% ± 1% I n
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

‡ Breaker failure - BF
BF Phase current threshold (IBF >) 0.05...1.00 I n (step 0.01 I n )
BF Residual current threshold (IEBF >) 0.01...2.00 I n (step 0.01 I En )
BF Time delay(tBF) 0.06...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Dropout time (IBF >) accuracy ± 4% ± 1% I n
Dropout time (IEBF >) accuracy ± 4% ± 1% I En
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

22 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 TECHNICAL DATA

 3.8 CONTROL AND MONITORING
† Automatic reclosing - 79
Number of delayed reclosures 0...5
Rapid reclosure dead time t rdt 0.1...60 s
0.0...19.9 s step 0.1 s,
20..60 s step 1 s
Slow reclosure dead time t sdt 1...200 s (step 1 s)
Reclaim time t r 1...200 s (step 1 s)
Slow reclosure fault discrimination time t d1 0...10 s (step 1 s)
Delayed reclosure fault discrimination time t d2 0...10 s (step 1 s)
Manual close (R+S only) fault discrimination time t d 1...10 s (step 1 s)

‡ Second harmonic restraint - 2ndh-REST

Second harmonic restraint threshold (I 2ndh >) 10...50 %
I 2ndh > reset time delay (t 2ndh>RES) 0...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy I 2ndh > ± 4% ± 1% I n
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

‡ Trip Circuit Supervision - 74TCS

Operate time:
• One binary input supervision 40 s
• Two binary inputs supervision 2s
Reset time delay:
• One binary input supervision 6s
• Two binary inputs supervision 0.6 s

‡ Selective block - BLOCK2

Selective block IN:
• BLIN1 Selective block operating mode (ModeBLIN1) OFF-ON IPh/IE-ON IPh-ON IE
• BLIN maximum activation time for phase protections (t B-IPh) 0.10...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
• BLIN maximum activation time for ground protections (t B-IE) 0.10...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Selective block OUT:
• BLOUT1 Selective block operating mode (ModeBLOUT1) OFF-ON IPh/IE-ON IPh-ON IE
• BLOUT Dropout time for phase protections (t F -IPh ) 0.00...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
• BLOUT Dropout time for ground protections (t F -IE ) 0.00...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
• BLOUT Dropout time for ground and phase protections (tF-IPh/IE) 0.00...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

‡ Circuit Breaker monitoring

Circuit breaker diagnostic
Number of CB trips threshold (N.Open) 0...10000 (step 1)
Cumulative CB tripping currents threshold (SumI) 0....5000 I n (step 1 I n )
Cumulative CB tripping I2t threshold (SumI^2t) 0....5000 (I n )2∙s (step 1 (I n )2∙s)
Circuit Breaker opening time for I^2t calculation (t break ) 0.05...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Circuit Breaker maximum allowed opening time (t break >) 0.05...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)

‡ CT supervision - 74CT
74CT Threshold (S<) 0.10...0.95 (step 0.01)
74CT Overcurrent threshold (I * ) 0.10...1.00 I n (step 0.01 In)
S< Operating time delay (t S <) 0.03...200 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Dropout ratio for the I * pickup 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy S< ± 4%
Pickup accuracy I * ± 3% ± 0.5% In
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

‡ Pilot wire diagnostic

• BLOUT1 Diagnostic pulse period (PulseBLOUT1) OFF-0.1-1-5-10-60-120 s
• BLIN1 Diagnostic pulse control time interval (PulseBLIN1) OFF-0.1-1-5-10-60-120 s

‡ Demand measures
• Fix on demand period (t F I X ) 1...60 min (step 1 min)
• Rolling on demand period (t ROL ) 1...60 min (step 1 min)
• Number of cycles for rolling on demand (N. ROL ) 1...24 (step 1)

TECHNICAL DATA NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 23

‡ Oscillography (DFR))[1]
Format COMTRADE
Recording mode circular
Sampling rate 24 samples / power cycle
Set trigger:
• Pre-trigger time 0.05...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
• Post-trigger time 0.05...60.00 s (step 0.05 s)
Set sampled channels:
Instantaneous currents iL1, iL2 , iL3, iE[2]
Set analog channels:
Analog 1...Analog 12 Frequency, IL1, IL2 , IL3, iE [3] , IEC[4] ,
IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2nd, I-2nd /IL
T1...T8[5]
Set digital channels:
Digital 1...Digital 12 K1... K6, K7...K10,
IN1, IN2, IN3...IN42 [6]

‡ PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)[7]

Reference standard IEC 61131-3
Language[8] IL (Instruction List)
Inputs:
Binary inputs IN1, IN2 on board
IN8...IN10 with MRI module
IN11...IN26 with one MID16 module
IN27...IN42 with two MID16 modules
Delayed binary inputs[9] IN1, IN2 on board
IN8...IN10 with MRI module
IN11...IN26 with one MID16 module
IN27...IN42 with two MID16 modules
Start (all elements) Start I>, Start I>>,...etc
Trip (all elements) Trip I>, Trip I>>,...etc
Measures IL1, IL2,...ecc
Temperature Pt100
Block inputs BLK2IN-Iph, BLK2IN-IE,...etc

Outputs:
Relays K11...K6 on board
K7...K10 with MRI module

LEDs START, TRIP, L1...L6 on board

L7...L10 with MRI module
Block outputs BLK2OUT-Iph, BLK2OUT-IE,...etc
Current converter DAC

Note 1 For the DFR function a licence is required; call Thytronic for purchasing.
Note 2 The measured residual current is available only for NA11 protection relays equipped with standard CTs sensor inputs
Note 3 The measured residual current is available only for NA11 protection relays equipped with standard CTs sensor inputs
Note 4 The computed residual current IEC (vector sum of the phase currents) is available for NA11 protection relays equipped with LPCT sensor in-
puts
Note 5 The temperature measuring is acquired by means of RTD probes Pt100 (eight Pt100 inputs with one MPT module); if the module is not available
the concerning measure is meaningless
Note 6 The K7...K10 and IN3...IN42 state is meaningful only when the corresponding I/O circuits are available (MRI and MID16 modules)
Note 7 For the PLC function a licence is required; call Thytronic for purchasing.
Note8 With ThySetter V3.4.3 release and compiler IEC 61131-3 V1.2.7 only the IL language is implemented (Instruction List);
other languages, according with IEC 61131 standard (ST (Structured Text)), LD (Ladder Diagram), FBD (Function Block Diagram), SFC (Sequential
Functional Chart), will be available soon
Note 9 The input state is acquired downstream the tON and tOFF timers

24 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 TECHNICAL DATA

 3.9 MEASURES
Direct
Frequency (f )
RMS value of the fundamental component for phase currents (I L1, I L 2 , I L 3 )
RMS value of the fundamental component for residual current (I E )
Calculated residual current [1] (I EC )

Calculated
Maximum current between I L1-I L2-I L3 (I Lmax)
Minimum current between I L1-I L2-I L3 (I Lmin)
Average current between I L1-I L2-I L3 (I L)

2nd harmonic
Second harmonic component of phase currents (I L1-2nd , I L 2-2nd , I L 3-2nd )
Maximum of the 2nd harmonic phase currents/fundamental component ratio
(I -2nd /I L )
3rd harmonic
Third harmonic component of phase currents (I L1-3rd , I L 2-3rd , I L 3-3rd )
Third harmonic component of residual current (I E-3rd )

4th harmonic
Fourth harmonic component of phase currents (I L1-4th , I L 2-4th , I L 3-4th)
5h harmonic
Fifth harmonic component of phase currents (I L1-5th , I L 2-5th , I L 3-5th)

On demand
Phase fixed currents demand (I L1FIX , I L 2FIX , I L 3FIX )
Phase rolling currents demand (I L1ROL , I L 2ROL , I L 3ROL )
Phase peak currents demand (I L1MA X , I L 2MA X , I L 3MA X )
Phase minimum currents demand (I L1MIN , I L 2MIN , I L 3MIN )

PT100 [2]
Temperature PT1 (T1)
Temperature PT2 (T2 )
Temperature PT3 (T3 )
Temperature PT4 (T4 )
Temperature PT5 (T5 )
Temperature PT6 (T6 )
Temperature PT7 (T7 )
Temperature PT8 (T8 )

Note 1 The computed residual current (vector sum of the phase currents) is provided for NA11 protection relays equipped with LPCT sensor inputs
Note 2 The temperature measuring is acquired by means of RTD probes Pt100 (eight Pt100 inputs with one MPT module); if the module is not available
the concerning measure is meaningless.

TECHNICAL DATA NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 25

 4 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
4.1 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
The following figure illustrates the basic structure of the NA11 relay

MMI
LCD
LEDs
ETHERNET
RS232

RS485
1A/5A

EEprom EEprom SRam INPUT MODULE

Flash SRam
≈
SPI
≈
CPU DSP ≈
Thybus

DUAL
PORT ≈ CTs

RTC
≈ I L1
LPCT Setting

LPCTs CURRENT INPUTS

L1

CPU BOARD L2

≈ I L2
50 A
L3

100 A
200 A

≈
400 A
800 A
I L3 In=50...1250A
POWER FAIL
RESET
+10 V

+24 V
-10 V
+5 V

0V

BINARY INPUTS
IN1
POWER SUPPLY Input
IN2

BLOCK I/O
BLKIN Input

BLKOUT Output

Uaux
RELAYS

K1...K6 Output contacts

POWER SUPPLY BOARD

hw.ai

Printed boards hold the circuit components arranged according to a modular allocation of the main
functions.

26 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Power supply board
All the components necessary for conversion and stabilization functions are present.
Two versions are envisaged suited to the input ranges 24...48 V and 115...230 V.
The circuit provides stabilized voltages of +10 V and -10 V, required for the analogue measurement,
+24V for relays and +5 V for supplying the digital circuits.
The circuit board additionally comprises:
INPUT CIRCUITS:
• Two binary input circuits,
• One block input circuit (BLIN1).
The logical input circuits and the block circuits include photo-couplers which provide for galvanic
separation.
OUTPUT CIRCUITS:
• One block output circuit (BLOUT 1),
• Six output relays (k1...K6).

CPU board
This circuit board contains all the circuits necessary for performing the analogue and digital pro-
cessing of the signals.
Analog processing
The following are envisaged:
• Anti aliasing filter circuits,
• Amplifier circuits for conditioning the input signals,
• Reference voltage adjustment circuits for the measurement A/D converter.
The Pro-n relays use a DSP processor operating at 40 MHz; it performs all the processing on the
analogue signals and furthermore coordinates management of the TX-RX signals to the CPU.
The input currents are sampled at a frequency of 24 samples per period by means of a dual conver-
sion system which allows the attainment of information pertaining to polarity and amplitude with high
resolution. The measurement criterion allows precise measurement of even those signals having a
unidirectional component, such as transient currents with overlapping exponential, which typically
appear during faults.
The circuit board also houses the output relays with the corresponding command and control cir-
cuits, communication circuits, buttons, LCD display, LEDs and the key switch.
CPU
A 32 bit CPU is provided.
The following are envisaged:
• Real Time Clock circuits with oscillator and super capacitor,
• RS232 communication port,
• RS485 communication port,
• Thybus communication circuits for external modules and MMI board,
• Network communication circuits (optional Ethernet).
Memories:
• SRam: high speed static memory, used for data and cache,
• Flash memory: used for fw storage and upgrade,
• EEprom memory: used for calibration data storage,
• Dual port Ram for data transfer between CPU and DSP.

Input board
• Three CTs committed for phase currents acquisition,
• One CT committed for residual current acquisition.
The input circuits are suitable for 1 A or 5 A external CTs.[1]

MMI (keyboard, LED and display)

The MMI module (Man Machine Interface) includes:
• An eight keys 8 keyboard,
• a backlight LCD display,
• Eight signalling LEDs,
The removable plug allows separation of the MMI module for free access to the CPU board when
DIP-switch setting is required.

Note 1 The phase and residual nominal currents must be adjusted by means dip-switch.

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 27

 4.2 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION
The program which handles operation of the Pro-N relays is made up of three fundamental elements
shown in the following block diagram.

Ethernet RS485 RS232

TIMER I/O boards

RTOS timer KEYS

PC com
Sync +
RTOS timer RTC refresh
Messages
EEPROM Binary inputs
RTOS timer update

Output relays
RAM/EPROM Diagnostic
memory check
LEDs
I/O
Data Base DATA BASE Thybus
Fast devices
Counters
EEPROM
Events
MMI Slow devices
sampling Measures
DSP
RTOS timer
Oscillography
KEYS

task Task

Drivers Drivers

RTOS timer Timer

Interrupt sw.ai
Base software
Single modules are application independent with modular and scalable structure.
The system can be assimilated to the PC BIOS (Basic Input-Output System); three main function are
provided:
• Start-up test execution;
• RAM loading of the operating system;
• Provide a suitable interface to access the relay hardware.

Real-time operating system

An embedded operative system is employed suitable for real-time applications (RTOS).
A multithread preemptive structure is able to menage several task with multiple priority levels .
The kernel represents the nucleus of the system: it includes the processing functions closest to the
electronic circuits.
In addition, the kernel manages a service communication protocol known as Basic Protocol (BP).

Task
The task (process e thread) are the base components.
Example are:
• Keyboard management
• RTC (Real Time Clock) updating
• RAM/EEPROM updating
• Diagnostic
• Input acquisition
• Output relay management
• MMI
• I/O updating
• DSP data processing

28 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 Firmware DSP
By means of Discrete Fourier Transform calculation, based on 24 samples/period, information is de-
duced in relation to the amplitude and phase of all the current measurements; these are constantly
updated and at the disposal of all the protection and control application algorithms.

Drivers
Inside the driver library, all the specialized module for protection and control function are provided.
They are the link from kernel and application layer. Examples are:
• Data base management
• PC messages management
• TCP/IP messages management
• Basic Protocol management
• Counter management
• Event and fault management
• Measuring management
• Oscillography management

Application Software
The software acts the specialization of the base system; all protective and control elements are
inside it.
The main modules ate:
• Diagnostic function for application layer,
• Input management (binary inputs),
• Protective functions,
• Event recording,
• Output management (LEDs and relays)
Each element (Kernel, Drivers and Application) may, in turn, be split into modules:

Base protocol (kernel)

The module known as the Basic Protocol (BP) manages the service communication between the
kernel and the other modules through the communication buses with the following services:
• Data and information exchange,
• Calibration,
• Upgrade fw DSP,
• Upgrade application sw

Communication (drivers)
The ModBus TCP/IP protocol, with ethernet interface, the ModBus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3
protocol over RS485 interface and the ModBus RTU RS232 for ThySetter are provided.

MMI (drivers)
The drivers deal with the menu management (MMi and/or communication messages).

Data Base
The data base is split into three main sections:
• RAM for volatile data,
• REE and PAR for non volatile data.

Self test (Application)

The main hw and sw function are permanently verified in background; no additional delay are intro-
duced.
In particular the following function are tested:
• Reference voltages;
• Output relays;
• Sw flow with execution time monitoring;
• REE and PAR data congruence.

Development tools (Builder)

For the development of the project, a CASE instrument has been developed, responsible for the opti-
mized production of software code for the management of collaboration, the database and the MMI
data and the Xml files used for communication. The automatic code generation criteria ensures the
quality of the result in terms of the reusability, verifiability and maintainability of the software life
cycle.

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 29

 4.3 I/O DESCRIPTION
Metering inputs
The following input are provided:
• Three phase current inputs fo traditional CTs or LPCTs (Low Power Current Transformers.
• One residual current input.
• The nominal currents are independently adjustable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches (CTs inputs).

NA11

3 phase CT current inputs

3 phase LPCT current inputs

one residual current input

sensori.ai

The input circuits are appropriately dimensioned in order to withstand the currents which arise
when a fault occurs, both in transient and steady state condition.

Signal processing
Various processing levels are involved:
• Acquisition (base level).
• Direct measures of physical channels (first level).
• Calculated measures (second level).
• Derived (third level).
The measures concerning a level are based on data worked out in the previous level.
For each level the required resources concerning the priority for tasks (conditioning circuits, DSP
and CPU) are on hand.

ACQUISITION (base level)

The input signals are sampled 24 times per power cycle

ACQUISITION

≈ INSTANTANEOUS VALUES

acquisition.ai

- iL1...iL3 phase currents instantaneous value

- iE residual current instantaneous value

From the sampled quantities, several measures are computed for protection, monitoring and meter-
ing purposes.

• Direct
• Calculated
• Harmonics
• On demand
Direct
• Power frequency.

ACQUISITION
CT
i L1
IL1 ≈

i L2 f
IL2 ≈ (Hz)
T

i L3
IL3 ≈
F. a i

Samples are processed by means DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and the phase and
amplitude of fundamental are computed:

30 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 • Phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3

ACQUISITION
TA
i L1, i L2 , i L3 IL1, IL2 , IL3
≈ DFT (In)

IL1.ai

• Residual current IE

ACQUISITION
TA
iE IE
≈ DFT (IEn)

IE.ai

Calculated
For the following measures, the RMS value of fundamental component is returned:
• Maximum current between IL1-IL2-IL3 (ILMAX)
• Minimum current between IL1-IL2-IL3 (ILMIN)
• Average current between IL1-IL2-IL3 (IL)

On demand
• Fixed demand (IL1FIX, IL2FIX, IL3FI)
Inside an adjustable time interval t FIX, an average magnitude is calculated for phase currents IL1,
IL2, IL3 of measures taken every second. The average values are stored at the end of the same time
interval.

IL1
tF I X ∙ 60
1
IL2 IL x F I X
tF I X ∙ 60
¥ IL x n IL1F I X, IL 2 F I X,IL 3 F I X
(In )
IL3 1s n=1
tF I X tF I X tF I X tF I X

F i x -De m a n d . a i

• Rolling demand (IL1ROL, IL2ROL, IL3ROL, ±P ROL, ±Q ROL)

Inside an adjustable time interval NROL∙t ROL , an average magnitude is calculated for phase currents
IL1, IL2, IL3 of measures taken every second, where t ROL is the length of any time subinterval and
NROL is the number of the time intervals. The average values are stored at the end of the same time
subinterva.

Maximum value of averages inside time interval t ROL

Average inside time interval t ROL

IL1
IL1ROL
N R OL t R OL∙60
IL2 IL 2 ROL
IL x ROL = 1 ¥
1
¥ IL x k IL 3 ROL
IL3 NROL tROL∙60 (In )
1s n=1 k=1 n
tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
NROL
Rol-Demand.ai

• Peak (IL1MAX, IL2MAX, IL3MAX)

Inside an adjustable time interval t ROL, the maximum magnitude is calculated for phase currents IL1,

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 31

 IL2, IL of measures taken every second. The average values are stored at the end of the same time
interval t ROL (Rolling demand common parameter).

Massimo valore delle medie nell’inervallo t ROL

Media aritmetica nell’inervallo t ROL

IL1MA X
IL1 IL 2 MA X
t R OL∙60
1 IL 3 MA X
IL2 IL x MA X= MAX
tROL∙60
¥ IL x n (In )
IL3 1s n=1
tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL

Max-Demand.ai

• Minimum (IL1MIN, IL2MIN, IL3MIN)

Inside an adjustable time interval t ROL, the minimum magnitude is calculated for phase currents IL1,
IL2, IL3 of measures taken every second. The average values are stored at the end of the same time
interval t ROL (Rolling demand common parameter).

Minimum value of averaged inside time intervalt ROL

Average inside time intervalt ROL

IL1MIN
IL1 IL 2 MIN
t R OL∙60
1 IL 3 MIN
IL2 IL x MIN = MIN
tROL∙60
¥ IL x n (In )
IL3 1s
Reset
n=1

tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL

Min-Demand.ai

Use of over-described measures is shown in the following tables.

32 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Conventions
Phase rotation direction
The conventional rotation direction for the current phasors is counter-clockwise.

fasori.ai

Cyclic phase sequence order

For three phase rotating currents, a direct cyclic sequence is defined when the three phases are
L1, L2, L3 ordered, while an inverse cyclic sequence is defined when the three phases are L1, L3, L2
ordered..

IL1 IL1

IL3 IL2 IL2 IL3

D i re c t se q uence cy cl i c order Inv ers e s equence cy cl i c orde r

fasori1.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 33

Use of measured values

Selective block output BLOUT1

Selective block input BLIN1
Start (START) Relays K1...K6

Start (START) LEDs L1...L5

Temperature (PT1....PT8)

Second harmonic restraint

Binary inputs IN1, IN2

Selective block - BLOCK2

Trip (TRIP) Relè K1...K6

Trip (TRIP) LEDs L1...L5

IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2nd

Cold Load Pickup (CLP)

Logic block - BLOCK1

IL1, IL2 , IL3
i L1, i L2 , i L3

IE
iE
f
PROTECTION
Thermal with Pt100 probes (26) g
Phase overcurrent (50/51) g g g g g g g g g g g
Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) g g g g g g g g g g g
Breaker failure (BF) g g g g g g g g
CONTROL and MONITORING
CT Monitoring (74CT) g g
Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) g
Second harmonic restraint (2NDH-REST) g
Logic block (BLOCK1) g
Selective block (BLOCK2) g g g
Diagnostic g g g
Element states g
Binary input states g
Selective block state (Block2) g g
Output relay states g g g g
MEASURES
Frequency g
Phase currents g
Residual current g
Temperature (Pt100 on MPT module) g
EVENT RECORDER
Event 0 g g g g g
Event 1 g g g g g
Event ... g g g g g
Event 299 g g g g g
FAULT RECORDER
Fault 0 g g g g g g g
Fault 1 g g g g g g g
Fault ... g g g g g g g
Fault 19 g g g g g g g
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Record 1 g g g g g g g g g g g g g
Record 2 g g g g g g g g g g g g g
Record ... g g g g g g g g g g g g g

34 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Binary inputs
Two binary inputs are available.
The dry inputs must be powered with an external voltage, (usually the auxiliary power supply).
The connections are shown in the schematic diagrams.
The following settings can be used to configure each input:
• Logic Active-ON (activated when powered), or Active-OFF (activated when power is turned off).
• ON Timer (OFF-to-ON time delay) and OFF Timer (ON-to-OFF time delay).
• Binary input allocation.

Adjustable debounce timer allows any transient to decay avoiding false activation of the input; the
positive transition is acquired if the input is permanently high for a time interval longer than the t ON
setting delay; similarly for the negative transitions, the negative transition is acquired if the input is
permanently high for a time interval longer than the t OFF setting delay.

BINARY INPUT

t ON t ON t OFF t OFF

INTERNAL STATE

t
binary-timers.ai

In the above shown diagram, INTERNAL STATE represents the logical state of the binary input used
in the following processing.

Each binary input may be matched to one of the following default functions.
Binary inputs
FUNCTIONS
IN1 IN2

Reset LEDs g g
Set profile (switching setting A and B)) g g
Fault trigger (fault recording) g g
Block2 IPh/IE (selective block from phase and/or ground elements) g g
Block2 IPh (selective block from phase elements) g g
Block2 IE (selective block from ground elements) g g
Block1 (logic block) g g
TCS1 (Trip Circuit Supervision) g g
TCS2 (Trip Circuit Supervision) g g
Trip ProtExt (trip from external protection relays) g g
Reset counters g g
Reset CB Monitor (clear CB monitoring data) g g
52a (CB auxiliary contact) g g
52b (CB auxiliary contact) g g
Open CB g g
Close CB g g
Remote trip g g
Reset on demand measures g g
79 Enable g g
79 Block g g

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 35

 Reset LEDs
If the element tripped have gone back to rest condition, the latched LEDs and/or relays may be
reset.

Set-Reset latch

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
S
Set (ON≡turn on LED/relay)
≥

Reset LEDs Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

&
R ≥
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Reset (ON≡turn off LED/relay) &
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Binary input allocation for reset signalling (LEDs) Reset-led.ai

Set profile
Inside Pro-N devices, two independent setting profiles (A and B) are available. Whereas different
settings are required, they are made in the setting profiles and stored in the non volatile memory of
relay. Applicable setting profile is activated usually via a binary input; when the programmed input is
activated, the profile B becomes operative as a replacement for the default profile A.[1]

Profile B Profile A Profile selection

Profile B Profile A (A, B, from binary input)

Set profile Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF OFF≡Profile A, ON≡Profile B

n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Binary input allocation for switching of setting profiles Switch-profile.ai

Fault trigger
When the programmed input is activated, a trigger is issued for fault record SFR). Data storing takes
place with the same procedure resulting from a trip of any protective elements.

Fault recording

IL1->IL1r
Logic INx t O N INx t O F F IL2 ->IL2r
Fault trigger Protection
.....
element
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Inputs
n.o. T 0 0 T Outputs
Fault cause info
Binary input INx

Binary input allocation for fault recorder trigger Trigger-faults.ai

Note 1 To enable the profile switching the “Input-selected” parameter must be set inside the “Profile selection” submenu.
If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection

36 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 Block2 IPh/IE
A change in status of a binary input effects a block[1] common for the following phase and ground
protective elements:
• I>, I>> and I>>> (50/51),
and ground fault:
• IE >, IE >> and IE >>> (50N/51N).
The application of the IN1 and IN2 binary inputs for the acquisition of Block2 (selective block) com-
ing from external protection relays is shown in the following figure (one phase overcurrent and one
phase and residual overcurrent protection).

towards reset timer

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)
Block2 IN
& xxxxx Trip Block2

t B-Iph
FROM OVERCURRENT PROTECTIONS t B-Iph
≥1 IPh Block2 input
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS T 0

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF IPh/IE Block2

Block2IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block2 IN diagnostic
n.o. T 0 0 T
t B-IE
Binary input INx
t B-IE
≥1 IE Block2 input
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS T 0

Block2 input

Binary input allocation for logic selectivity (Block2) BlockIph-Ie.ai

Block2 IPh
A change in status of a binary input effects a block[2] for the following phase protective elements:
• I>, I>> and I>>> (50/51)
Block2 IE
A change in status of a binary input effects a block[1] for the following earth protective elements:
• IE >, IE >> and IE >>> (50N/51N)
Block1
A change in status of a binary input effects a block for a length of time equal to the activation of the
input[3]; the element pickup that wish be blocked must be enabled (the Block1 parameter must be
set to ON in the concerning menu).[4]
The application of the IN1 binary input for the acquisition of the Block1 (logic block) coming from
external signal is shown in the following figure; in the example the block signal is ORed with Block2
(selective block) to block the generic (xxx) element.

from Block2 (ON≡Block)

≥1 Blocking
Enable (ON≡Enable)
Block1
& xxxx Block1

Block1 Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)

Block1
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Binary input allocation for logic block (Block1) Block1.ai

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the Block 2 function is described in the “Logic selectivity” paragraph.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the Block 2 function is described in the “Logic selectivity” paragraph.
The application of the inputs for the acquisition of Block2 (selective block) for Phase (Block2 Iph) and earth protective functions (Block2 IE) is
similar to that illustrated in the scheme concerning the Block2 IphIIE
Note 3 Unlike the Block2 (selective block), that houses a safety logic founded on programmable timers, the Block1 (logic block) keeps block of the
protection for the whole time when the input is active.
Note 4 The activation of one binary input produces indiscriminately a block of all protective elements programmed for being blocked from Block1

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 37

 TCS1 and TCS2
Trip Circuit Supervision.
Supervision with one or two binary input can be performed.
The exhaustive treatment of the TCS function is described in the concerning paragraph.

+UAUX
Logic IN1 t O N IN1 t O F F
TCS1
n.c. IN1 t ON IN1 t OFF
n.o. 74TCS logic
T 0 0
TRIP Binary input INx

TCS2
Logic IN1 t O N IN1 t O F F
52
n.c. IN1 t ON IN1 t OFF
52a 52b 74TCS logic
n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx

-UAUX
Trip Circuit Supervision - 74TCS with two binary inputs TCS2.ai

Trip ProtExt
The binary input detects a trip coming from an external protective relay: the information is available
for the breaker failure function (BF).

Trip ProtExt Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

IN+
+UAUX n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
IN- n.o. Breaker failure (BF)
-UAUX T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Binary input allocation for trip acquisition from external protection device ExtProt.ai

Reset counters
A change in status of a binary input effects a reset of all start/trip partial counters.[1]

Reset CB Monitor
A change in status of a binary input effects a reset of all counters concerning the circuit breaker
diagnostic:
• Breaking Sum phase IL1
• Breaking Sum phase IL2
• Breaking Sum phase IL3
• Breaking SumI2t phase IL1
• Breaking SumI2t phase IL2
• Breaking SumI2t phase IL3
• CB Open counter
52a and 52b
The CB position can be acquired by means of binary inputs connected to the auxiliary contacts: the
information is used in the following functions:
• CB position (open-closed)
• CB diagnostic (N. of operations, trip time)
• Breaker Failure (BF)

+UAUX
52a Logic INx t O N INx t O F F
IN+
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
IN- n.o. T 0 0 T
52 Binary input INx
52a 52b CB position
CB diagnostic
52b Logic INx t O N INx t O F F Breaker failure (BF)
IN+
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
IN- n.o.
-UAUX T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Binary input allocation for CB state acquisition CB-pos.ai

Note 1 The reset of the total counters is practicable by means ThySetter command with Session Level 1 (available with password)

38 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 Open CB
Close CB
The external acquisition of remote commands allows to drive CB remotely

+UAUX OPEN +UAUX

Command Open CB Logic INx t O N INx t O F F
IN+
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
IN- n.o. T 0 0 T

TRIPPING M ATRIX
52a O -UAUX

(LED+REL AYS)
Binary input INx 52 52b

CLOSE
Command Close CB Logic INx t O N INx t O F F -UAUX I
IN+

IN- n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF

n.o. T 0 0 T
-UAUX Binary input INx

Binary input allocation for CB remote command CB-com.ai

Remote trip
The input activation drives an expressly programmed output relay and LED.

+UAUX
Remote trip

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Remote trip Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

(LED+REL AYS)
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

-UAUX
Binary input allocation for remote trip Remote-trip.ai

Reset demand measures

The input activation makes a reset of all demand measures.

79 Enable
The input activation enables the auto reclosing function.

79 Block
The input activation disables the auto reclosing function.

+UAUX
External trip
79-Ext Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

n.c. IN1 t ON IN1 t OFF

Reclosing (79)
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

-UAUX
Binary input allocation for trip acquisition from external protection device to automatic reclosing activation 79-ext.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 39

Output relays
Six output relays are available (K1...K6):[1]
• K1 and K2 have two changeover contacts (SPDT, type C).
• K3, K4 and K5 have one make contact (SPST-NO, type A).[2]
• K6 has one break contact (SPST-NC, type B).[3]
Each output relay may be programmed with following operating mode:
• Operation MODE (No latched, Pulse, Latched).
• Logic (Energized/De-energized).
To each output relay a programmable timer is matched (Minimum pulse width parameter).
All parameters are available inside the Set\Relays menu.

Input

No-latched operation

t TR Minimum pulse width

Latched operation

Pulse operation
t
t TR Minimum pulse width
Output relay operation Relay-operation-timers.ai

Any change to the settings can be affected at any time, also with the relay on duty, separately for
each relay.
Notes:
• When de-energized operating mode is set, the relay remains in rest condition if no trip command
is in progress.
• When energized operating mode is set, the relay remains in operating condition if no trip command
is in progress and the auxiliary supply is powered on.
• When no-latched operating mode is set (Operation MODE No latched), the output relay reset
at the end of the trip condition. To each output relay a programmable timer is matched (minimum
pulse width operation).
• When latched operating mode is set (Operation MODE Latched), the output relay doesn’t reset
at the end of the trip condition; it stays ON until a reset command is issued (RESET key, ThySetter
or communication command).
• When pulse operating mode is set (Operation MODE Pulse), the output relay reset after a tTR
programmable delay regardless of the trip condition.
• It is advisable to make sure that the output contact technical data are suitable for load (Nominal
current, breaking capacity, make current, switching voltage,...).

Matching every output relay to any protective element is freely programmable inside the Setpoints
submenus according a tripping matrix structure.[4][5]

Note 1 Schematic diagram are shown inside APPENDIX B1.

Note 2 K3 and K4 have a common terminal (A10)
Note 3 K5 and K6 have a common terminal (A13)
Note 4 Matching of the output relay to the protective and control functions can be defined so that any collision from other function is avoided.
All output relay are unassigned in the default setting.
Note 5 Self test relay: it is advisable to plan the following settings:
- Energized operating mode,
- No-latched ,
in order that it stays ON for normal conditions and the other way round it goes OFF if any fault is detected and/or the auxiliary supply turns OFF.

40 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 RELAYS
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6
g g g g g g
Self-test relay g g g g g g

26 Alarm element (Pt1AL-K...Pt8AL-K) g g g g g g

26 Trip element (Pt1TR-K...Pt8TR-K) g g g g g g

I> Start relays (I>ST-K) g g g g g g

I> Trip relays (I>TR-K) g g g g g g
I>> Start relays (I>>ST-K) g g g g g g
I>> Trip relays (I>>TR-K) g g g g g g
I>>> Start relays (I>>>ST-K) g g g g g g
I>>> Trip relays (I>>>TR-K) g g g g g g

IE> Start relays (IE>ST-K) g g g g g g

IE> Trip relays (IE>TR-K) g g g g g g
IE>> Start relays (IE>>ST-K) g g g g g g
IE>> Trip relays (IE>>TR-K) g g g g g g
IE>>> Start relays (IE>>>ST-K) g g g g g g
IE>>> Trip relays (IE>>>TR-K) g g g g g g

I2ndh> Start relays (I2ndh>ST-K) g g g g g g

I2ndh> Trip relays (I2ndh>TR-K) g g g g g g

S< Trip relays (S<TR-K) g g g g g g

74TCS Start relays (74TCS-ST-K) g g g g g g

74TCS Trip relays (74TCS-TR-K) g g g g g g

tB-IPh/IE Elapsed signalling relays (tB-K) g g g g g g

Phase protection output selective block relays (BLK2OUT-Iph-K) g g g g g g
Ground protection output selective block relays (BLK2OUT-IE-K) g g g g g g
Phase and ground protection output selective block relays (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K) g g g g g g

BF Start relays (BF-ST-K) g g g g g g

BF Trip relays (BF-TR-K) g g g g g g

Cycle in progress (79-Run-K) g g g g g g

Reclosure (79-AR-K) g g g g g g
Reclosure fail (79-Fail-K) g g g g g g

Number of CB trips diagnostic relays (N.Open-K) g g g g g g

Cumulative CB tripping currents diagnostic relays (SumI-K) g g g g g g
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t diagnostic relays (SumI^2t-K) g g g g g g
Circuit breaker opening time diagnostic relays (tbreak-K) g g g g g g

Open CB command relays (CBopen-K) g g g g g g

Close CB command relays (CBclose-K) g g g g g g

Remote tripping relays (RemTrip-K) g g g g g g

Not received pulses at BLIN signalling relays (PulseBLIN-K) g g g g g g

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 41

LED indicators
Eight LEDs are available.
• One green LED “ON”: if turned on it means that the device is properly working, if flashing the inter-
nal self-test function has detected an anomaly.
• One yellow LED “START” tagged for START of one or more protective elements.[1]
• One red LED “TRIP” tagged for TRIP of one or more protective elements.[1]
• Five red LEDs “1...5” for highlight the activation of one or more user defined function.
Each output relay may be programmed with following operating mode:
• No-latched: the LED reset at the end of the trip condition.
• Latched: the LED doesn’t reset at the end of the trip condition; it stays ON until a manual reset com-
mand is issued (RESET key, ThySetter or communication command).
Any change to the settings can be affected at any time, also with the relay on duty, separately for
each LED; the concerning parameters are available inside the Set \ LEDs menu.

LEDs

Free allocation of each LED may be set according to the matrix structure shown in the following
page.[2]

Note 1 The START and the TRIP LED are user assignable to any function; other than starting and tripping information can be assigned to them too, just
the same for L1...L5
Note 2 All LEDs are unassigned in the default setting.

42 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 LED
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
START TRIP 1 2 3 4 5
26 Alarm threshold (Pt1AL-L...Pt8AL-L) g g g g g g g
26 Trip threshold (Pt1TR-L...Pt8TR-L) g g g g g g g

I> Start LEDs (I>ST-L) g g g g g g g

I> Trip LEDs (I>TR-L) g g g g g g g
I>> Start LEDs (I>>ST-L) g g g g g g g
I>> Trip LEDs (I>>TR-L) g g g g g g g
I>>> Start LEDs (I>>>ST-L) g g g g g g g
I>>> Trip LEDs (I>>>TR-L) g g g g g g g

IE> Start LEDs (IE>ST-L) g g g g g g g

IE> Trip LEDs (IE>TR-L) g g g g g g g
IE>> Start LEDs (IE>>ST-L) g g g g g g g
IE>> Trip LEDs (IE>>TR-L) g g g g g g g
IE>>> Start LEDs (IE>>>ST-L) g g g g g g g
IE>>> Trip LEDs (IE>>>TR-L) g g g g g g g

Cycle in progress (79-Run-K) g g g g g g g

Reclosure (79-AR-K) g g g g g g g
Reclosure fail (79-Fail-K) g g g g g g g

I2ndh> Start LEDs (I2ndh>ST-L) g g g g g g g

I2ndh> Trip LEDs (I2ndh>TR-L) g g g g g g g

S< Trip LEDs (S<TR-L) g g g g g g g

74TCS Start LEDs (74TCS-ST-L) g g g g g g g

74TCS Trip LEDs (74TCS-TR-L) g g g g g g g

tB-IPh/IE Elapsed signalling LEDs (tB-L) g g g g g g g

Phase protection output selective block LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L) g g g g g g g
Ground protection output selective block LEDs (BLK2OUT-IE-L) g g g g g g g
Phase and ground protection output selective block LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L) g g g g g g g

BF Start LEDs (BF-ST-L) g g g g g g g

BF Trip LEDs (BF-TR-L) g g g g g g g

Number of CB trips diagnostic LEDs (N.Open-L) g g g g g g g

Cumulative CB tripping currents diagnostic LEDs (SumI-L) g g g g g g g
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t diagnostic LEDs (SumI^2t-L) g g g g g g g
Circuit breaker opening time diagnostic LEDs (tbreak-L) g g g g g g g

Open CB command LEDs (CBopen-L) g g g g g g g

Close CB command LEDs (CBclose-L) g g g g g g g

Remote tripping LEDs (RemTrip-L) g g g g g g g

Not received pulses at BLIN signalling LEDs (PulseBLIN-L)

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 43

Communication interfaces
Several communication ports are provided:
• RS232 port on the front side of the NA60 device for local communication (ThySetter).
• RS485 port on the rear side of the NA60 device for bus communication.
• Ethernet port on the rear side of the NA60 device for bus communication.

RS232
A simple DIN to RJ adapter can be used; the L10041 cable can be supplied.
The RS232 port has high priority compared with the Ethernet por.

Female connector
RJ10 Connector 1
6
Pin1 4 2 RXD
7
3 3 TXD
8
1 4 DTR
9
2 5 GND

L10041

serial-sch.ai

If RS232 port is not available on Personal Computer, an USB-RS232 converter must be employed.[1]
The serial port is the simplest access for setting by means the ThySetter software.
RS485
Several protocol are implemented[2]:
• ModBus RTU. Modbus is a serial communications protocol. It is a de facto standard communica-
tions protocol in industry, and is now the most commonly available means of connecting industrial
electronic devices also inside electric utilities and substation.
• IEC 60870-5. The IEC 60870-5 suite of protocol is used for communications from master station to
substation, as well within the substation; the IEC 60870-5-103 (Protection equipment) is available
together the Modbus protocol on some version of Pro-n devices (code NAxx#xxxxC x).

Ethernet
It is provided (optionally) a communication board useful for Ethernet communication with ModBus
TCP/IP protocol.[3]
Modbus/TCP basically embeds a Modbus frame into a TCP frame in a simple manner. This is a con-
nection-oriented transaction which means every query expects a response.
This query/response technique fits well with the master/slave nature of ModBus, adding to the de-
terministic advantage that Switched Ethernet offers industrial users.
In the same way as the RS485 base Modbus, every device is identified by a personal address and the
communication goes in “client-server” mode with answering request from the recipient.
The protective relay can be directly connect to the Ethernet network (no gateway, protocol converter
are needed).
Two port can be implemented:
• 100BASE-TX with RJ45 connector (copper).
• 100BASE-FX with FX connector (optical fiber)[2]
For both modules no hw preset are required.

RJ45 Ethernet+RS485 ports 8

7
FX Ethernet (no RS485 port)
6 RX-
5
4
3 RX+
2 TX- RX
1 TX+
TX
F1
F2
F3
RS485

B- F4
A+ F5

ethernet-sch.ai

Two LEDs are on board (RJ45):

• LINK - (green): The LED lights up if the connection is active.
• TX - (yellow): The LED lights up when data transmission is active.

Note 1 After installation, the same communication port must be selected to define the Thysetter parameters (typically COM4, COM5,...).
Note 2 The RS485 port is not implemented on the Pro-N devices endowed with Ethernet FX port
Note 3 Information about the ModBus map may be find inside the “Remote programming manual”

44 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 4.4 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS
Rated values
Inside the Base menu the following parameters can be set:
• Relay reference name.
• Relay nominal currents (phase and residual), to which the regulation are related.
• Primary nominal values, employed for measures relative to primary values.
• Measurements reading mode.
• Language.
Information for settings:
• Relay reference name.
Alphanumeric mnemonic string (max 16 characters) useful for identification of protected plant.

• Relay nominal frequency fn

This nominal value must be set same as the frequency of the grid.
Example: grid frequency fn = 50 Hz
Relay nominal frequency fn = 50 Hz
• Relay phase nominal current In
This nominal value must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A, same as the secondary CTs
nominal current.
Dip-switches are located on board of the CPU module; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is
described in the “6.5 SETTING NOMINAL CURRENTS In AND IEn” paragraph.
• Relay residual nominal current IEn[1]
This nominal value must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A, same as the secondary CT nomi-
nal current.
Dip-switch is located on board of the CPU module; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is de-
scribed in the “6.5 SETTING NOMINAL CURRENTS In AND IEn” paragraph.
• Phase CT primary current Inp
This parameter affects the measure of the phase currents when the primary measurement read-
ing mode is selected. It must be programmed to the same value of the phase CT primary nominal
current.
Example

52
NA11

KTA = 500A/5A=100
In

Es-In.ai

The phase CT primary current Inp must be set as: Inp = 500 A
• Residual CT primary current IEnp
This parameter affects the measure of the residual current when the primary measurement reading
mode is selected. It must be programmed to the same value of the residual CT(s) primary nominal
current.
Example 1

52
NA11

KTA = 100 A /1 A IEn= 1 A

1x

Es1-IEn.ai

The residual CT primary current IEnp must be set as: IEnp = 100 A

Note 1 The computed residual current is available for NA11 protection relays equipped with LPCT sensor inputs

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 45

 Example 2

52
NA11

KTA = 100A / 5A
3x IEn= 5 A

Es2-IEn.ai

The residual CT primary current IEnp must be set as: IEnp = 100 A

• Measurement reading mode

Measures may be displayed according the following operating modes:
- With RELATIVE setting all measures are related to the nominal value,
- With PRIMARY setting all measures are related to the primary value.

46 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes (26)
Preface
The measure of temperature is acquired by means of Pt100 (RTD Resistive Temperature sensing
Devices) probed, connected to the MPT module.[1]
A direct thermal protection element with eight PT100 thermometric probes (RTD Resistive Thermal
Device) provides protection against premature ageing or breakdown of the insulating materials
through overheating.
Thermal protection using thermometric probes offers greater reliability than Thermal overload-based
indirect protection, since it is not influenced by inaccuracies in the time constant for the thermal
model of the machinery and by variations in the surrounding temperature.

TRIP

t ThALx

t Th> x

Th > x T (°C)
t-int-F26.ai
General operation time characteristic for thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes (26)

For each thermometric probe an alarm (ThALx , where x=1...8 points one of the eight probes) and one
trip adjustable threshold is provided (Th>x ), with adjustable operating time (t ThALx and t Th>x >);if the
measured temperature overcomes the threshold, the relative alarm and/or trip is issued when the
timer expires.
The adjustments are operable in °C.

ThAL x enable Th ALx t ThALx Th> x enable Th> x t Th> x

P t 10 0
Alarm Element Trip Element
T hy bus AL ARM T R IP
MP T
Th>xBF
Th>xBF
&
Trip Th>x

General logic diagram of the thermal elements - (26) all-F26.ai

The probes should be placed in strategic points around the machinery susceptible to the greatest
overheating, such as for example:
- near the generator stator windings, near the step-up transformer windings and/or in the oil, with the
aim of detecting overheating produced by the overload currents,
- near the generator bearings, with the aim of detecting localised overheating due to worn or non-
lubricated bearings.

The Pt100 probes detect the temperature in the range -50 °C...+250 °C (at 0 °C its resistance is 100
ohm); an alarm indicates any interruption or short-circuiting of the probe or related connections to
the MPT module; the information is available inside the Read \ PT100 menu:

• Ptx probe ON to point a measure inside the range

• Ptx probe LOW to point a measure lower the range (short circuit of probe and/or wires)
• Ptx probe HIGH ao point a measure higher the range (breaking of probe and/or wires).
Self reset is performed when faults are cleared.

The measure of each probe is updated at 2 s time intervals.

2.0s

Pt1 Pt2 Pt3 Pt4 Pt5 Pt6 Pt7 Pt8 Pt1

0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s t

Pt1...8 update t-refresh-F26.ai

Note 1 The 26 menu is available when the MPT module is enabled

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 47

 Pt10 0 -xAlarm
Th ALx t ThALx

t ThALx ThALx-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
T° > Th ALx T 0 ThALx-L

(LED+REL AYS)
Th> x t Th> x

Pt100 OK t Th> x Th>x-K

T° ≤ +2 4 5 . 0 ° C &
T° > Pt x > T 0 Th>x-L
Pt1 Pt x Pt10 0 -x Trip
Pt2 Pt100 FAULT
Pt3 & Pt x > Diagnostic TOWARDS DIAGNOSTIC
Pt4
Pt5 T° ≥ - 4 9 . 0 ° C
Pt6
Pt7 TRIP
Pt8 BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & Th>x BF_OUT TOWARDS BF LOGIC
Th>xBF

Logic diagram for thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes (26) Fun-F26.ai

All alarm and/or trip elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the ThALx Enable
e Th>x Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal protection with RTD thermo-
metric probes - 26 \ PTx Probe \ ThALx Alarm (ThALx Trip) where x = 1...8.

Each trip threshold (Th>x) may be associated with the breaker failure (BF) function by setting ON
the Th>xBF parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal protection with RTD thermometric
probes - 26 \ PTx Probe \ ThALx Trip where x = 1...8.[1]

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

48 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Phase overcurrent - 50/51
Preface
Three operation thresholds, independently adjustable (I>, I>>, I>>>) with adjustable delay
(t >, t >>, t >>>).
The first one may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standard, as well as with rectifier, I2t or EM curve.
The second threshold may be programmable with independent or dependent time according to the
I2t curve and the third threshold with independent time.
For each threshold a reset time can be set (t>RES, t>>RES, t>>>RES) useful to reduce the clearing time
for intermittent faults.
The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second and/or third threshold (I>>, I>>>).
Similarly the second threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the third threshold (I>>>).
Operation and settings
Each phase fundamental frequency current is compared with the setting value. Currents above the
associated pickup value are detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate
time a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element it is
restored.
The first threshold (I>) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
characteristic curves:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t >inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t >inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t >inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t >inv · {0.01 / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t >inv · {3.922 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t >inv · {5.64 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Rectifier (RI): t = 2351 · t >inv / [(I/I>inv)5.6 - 1]
• I-squared-t (I 2 t = K): t = 16 · t >inv / (I/I>inv)2
• Electromechanical (EM): t = t>inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (I/I>inv)-1 + 0.339]}

Where:
t: operate time
I>inv : threshold setting
t >inv : operate time setting
The second threshold (I>>) may be programmable with definite or inverse time according to the I2t
curve: t = 16 · t >inv / (I/I>inv)2
The third threshold (I>>>) with definite time.

t>
TRIP

t >>

t >>>

I> I>> I>>> I

General operation time characteristic for the phase overcurrent elements - 50/51 t-int-F50-51.ai

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20
• If I>inv pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In

For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 50 In for standard CT inputs or 35 In for
low power CT inputs.

All overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the I> Enable, I>>
Enable and/or I>>> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51\
I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The first overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the I>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEE MI,
ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, RECTIFIER, I2t, EM) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element \ Setpoints menu.
Note 1 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 49

 The second overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic
by setting the I> Time characteristic (I>>Curve) parameter (DEFINITE, I2t) available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51\ I>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
The trip of I> element may be inhibited by the start of the second and/or third element (I>>, I>>>) by set-
ting ON the Disable I> by start I>>, Disable I>> by start I>>> (I>disbyI>>, I>disbyI>>>) parameters
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I>> Element (I>>> Element) \Setpoints
menus.
Similarly the trip of the I>> element may be inhibited by start of the third element (I>>>) by setting
ON the Disable I>> by start I>>> (I>>disbyI>>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or
B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51\I>>> Element \ Setpoints menu.

All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B (Set \Profile A(or B)\Phase over-
current-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \Setpoints menus).

An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold (t>RES, t>>RES, t>>>RES).

INPUT

t>RES t>RES t>RES

I> Start
t> t>

I> Trip

RESET

t
I> element phase overcurrent timers - 50/51 Timers-F50-51.ai

Each overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the I> BF, I>> BF and/or
I>>> BF parameters are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[1]

For all overcurrent elements, a block from the second harmonic restraint may be set by set-
ting ON the I>2ndh-REST, I>>2ndh-REST, I>>>2ndh-REST parameters inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus.

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may
be blocked for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the ICLP> Mode, ICLP>>
Mode and/or ICLP>>> Mode parameters.
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may
be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Change setting the ICLP> Mode, ICLP>>
Mode and/or ICLP>>> Mode parameters, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP
may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element,(I>> Element,
I>>> Element) \ Definite time (Inverse time) menus.

For both operating modes the CLP Activation time parameters (tCLP>, tCLP>>, tCLP>>>) may
be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element,
I>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

50 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 I> Enable I>Curve ICLP>Mode tCLP> t>RES I> def ICLP> def t> def I> inv ICLP> inv t> inv

IL1 I> Element

IL2 Start I>
IL3 Trip I>

≥ I> inhibition I>2ndh-REST CLPI>

I>BF
& I>BF
Start I2ndh>
Trip I> &

I>BLK1 Start I>

BLK1I>
&
&
Block1

I>BLK2IN Start I>

BLK2INI>
&
&
Block2

I>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
Start I> &

I>> Enable I>>Curve ICLP>>Mode tCLP>> t>>RES I>> def ICLP>> def t>> def I>> inv ICLP>> inv t>> inv

IL1 I>> Element Start I>>

IL2 Trip I>>
IL3
I>>2ndh-REST I> disbyI>> CLPI>>
I>> inhibition
& I>>BF &
Start I2ndh> Start I>>
I>> Trip I>>BF
&
I>>BLK1 Start I>>
BLK1I>>
&
&
Block1

I>>BLK2IN Start I>>

BLK2INI>>
&
Block2 &

I>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
Start I>> &

I>>> Enable ICLP>>>Mode tCLP>>> t>>>RES I>>> def ICLP>>> def t>>> def

IL1 I>>> Element Start I>>>

IL2 I>>>2ndh-REST Trip I>>>
IL3 I> disbyI>>>
& CLPI>>>
Start I2ndh> I>> disbyI>>>
Start I>>> &

Start I>>> &

I>>>BLK1 Start I>>>
BLK1I>>>
&
&
Block1
I>>>BF
I>>>BF
Trip I>>> &
I>>>BLK2IN Start I>>>
BLK2INI>>>
&
&
Block2
I>>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
Start I>>> &

General logic diagram of the phase overcurrent elements - 50/51 all-F50-51.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 51

 For every of the three thresholds the following block criteria are available:

Logical block (Block1)

If the I>BLK1, I>>BLK1 and/or I>>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary in-
put is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever the given
input is active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\Phase over-
current-50/51\ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function
must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set\Inputs\Binary input IN1(2) menus.

Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:

• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\Selective block-BLOCK2\ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the I>BLK2IN, I>>BLK2IN and/or I>>>BLK2IN parameters are set to ON and a binary
input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase elements
(Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block criteria.[2]
The enable I>BLK2IN, I>>BLK2IN and/or I>>>BLK2IN parameters are available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \Setpoints
menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be assigned to the selected
binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(2) menus (IN1 or IN2 matching).

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay (K1...K6):

• If the I>BLK2OUT, I>>BLK2OUT and/or I>>>BLK2OUT enable parameters are set to ON
and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output
by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever
the given element (Start I>, Start I>> e/o Start I>>>) becomes active. The enable I>BLK2OUT,
I>>BLK2OUT and/or I>>>BLK2OUT parameters (ON or OFF) are available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51\ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \Setpoints
menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays
and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section

52 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 ON≡Enable I> overcurrent element
I> Enable
ON≡Inhibit (from I>> and/or I>>> overcurrent element)
I> inhibition
Start I>

I >def I >inv A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

I>ST-K
I L1 (Pickup outside CLP) I>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I L1 ≥ I>
t >inv

I C L P >def I C L P >inv I> Curve t >RES

t >def
(Pickup within CLP) t >RES
& t>
I L1 ≥ I> ≥1 T 0 0 T I>TR-K
T 0 I>TR-L
RESET
I L2

Trip I>
I L3

≥1 CLP I>

t CLP>
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t CLP> Output t CLP> B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking
T 0 C

≥1
ICLP>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

I>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

I> overcurrent element (50/51) block diagram

Block1, Block2

Trip I>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I> BF towards BF logic
I>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tCLP> 0.1 s

Output tCLP>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Phase overcurrent (50/51) - First element logic diagram (I>) Fun_50-51S1.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 53

 Start I>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
I>BLK1 Trip I> & BLK1I>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
& BLK2IN I>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

I>BLK2IN
&

ModeBLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
OFF

TRIPPING M ATRIX
BLIN1 ON IPh

(LED+REL AYS)
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE
ON IE Iph Block2
tB-K
tB-L

Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0 ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS IE/Iph Block2

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

ST-Iph BLK2
BLK2OUT-Iph
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)

Start I> t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

I> Blk2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE
Block2 output &
I>BLK2OUT I>> Blk2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
(ON≡Enable) ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
I>>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L

A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE > Blk2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IE >> Blk2 OUT
≥1 B
IE >>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLOUT1
C Pilot wire output
D
ST-IE BLK2
Block2 output

50-51S1_BL-diagram.ai
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (I>)

54 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 ON≡Enable I>> overcurrent element
I>> Enable
ON≡Inhibit (from I>>> overcurrent element)
I>> inhibition

(ON≡Inhibit)
I>> def State I> disbyl>>
& I> inhibition
& Start I>>
I L1 ≥ I>> def
(Pickup outside CLP)
≥1 Start I>>
I>> inv State
I>>ST-K
I L1 &
I>>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I L1 ≥ I>> inv
t >>inv
I>> Curve t >>RES
I C L P >>def I C L P >>inv t >>def
(Pickup within CLP) t >>RES
& t >>
I L1 ≥ I > > ≥1 T 0 0 T I>>TR-K
T 0 I>>TR-L
RESET
I L2
Trip I>>

I L3

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

≥1 CLP I>>

t C L P >> A = ON - Change setting

B = OFF
A C = ON - Element blocking
t CLP>> Output t CLP>> B
CB-State
T 0 C

≥1
ICLP>>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

I>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

I>> overcurrent element (50/51) Block diagram

Block1, Block2

Trip I>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I>> BF towards BF logic
I>>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tCLP>> 0.1 s

Output tCLP>>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Second element logic diagram (I>>) Fun_50-51S2.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 55

 Start I>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
I>>BLK1 Trip I>> & BLK1I>>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
& BLK2IN I>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

I>>BLK2IN
&

ModeBLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
OFF

TRIPPING M ATRIX
BLIN1 ON IPh

(LED+REL AYS)
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE
ON IE Iph Block2
tB-K
tB-L

Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0 ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS IE/Iph Block2

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

ST-Iph BLK2
BLK2OUT-Iph
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

Start I>>
(LED+REL AYS)

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
I> Blk2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE
Block2 output &
I>>BLK2OUT I>> Blk2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
(ON≡Enable) ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
I>>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L

A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE > Blk2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IE >> Blk2 OUT
≥1 B
IE >>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLOUT1
C Pilot wire output
D
ST-IE BLK2
Block2 output

50-51S2_BL-diagram.ai
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (I>>)

56 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 (ON≡Inhibit)
I> disbyl>>>
& I> inhibition
ON≡Enable 3rd overcurrent element Start I>>>
I>>> Enable

(ON≡Inhibit)
I>> disbyl>>>
& I>> inhibition
Start I>>>

I >>>def Start I>>>

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

I L1 (Pickup outside CLP) Start I>>> I>>>ST-K

I L1 ≥ I>>>

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I>>>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
I C L P >>>def t >>>RES
t >>>def
(Pickup within CLP) t >>>RES
& t >>>def
I L1 ≥ I>> > ≥1 0 T I>>>TR-K
T 0 I>>>TR-L
RESET
I L2
Trip I>>>

I L3

≥1 CLP I>>>

t C L P >>>
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t CLP>>> Output t CLP>>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C

≥1
ICLP>>>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

I>>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

I>>> overcurrent element (50/51) Block diagram

Block1, Block2

Trip I>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I>>> BF towards BF logic
I>>>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tCLP>>> 0.1 s

Output tCLP>>>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Third element logic diagram (I>>>) Fun_50-51S3.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 57

 Start I>>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
I>>>BLK1 Trip I>>> & BLK1I>>>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
& BLK2IN I>>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

I>>>BLK2IN
&

ModeBLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
OFF

TRIPPING M ATRIX
BLIN1 ON IPh

(LED+REL AYS)
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE
ON IE Iph Block2
tB-K
tB-L

Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0 ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS IE/Iph Block2

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

ST-Iph BLK2
BLK2OUT-Iph
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

Start I>>>
(LED+REL AYS)

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
I> Blk2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE
Block2 output &
I>>>BLK2OUT I>> Blk2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
(ON≡Enable) ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
I>>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L

A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE > Blk2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IE >> Blk2 OUT
≥1 B
IE >>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLOUT1
C Pilot wire output
D
ST-IE BLK2
Block2 output

50-51S3_BL-diagram.ai
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the third element (I>>>)

58 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N
Preface
Three operation thresholds, independently adjustable (IE >, IE >>, IE >>>) with adjustable delay (t E >,
t E >>, t E >>>).
The first one (IE >) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standard, as well as with EM curve.
The second and third thresholds (IE >>, IE >>>) with independent time.
For each threshold a reset time can be set (t E>RES, t E>>RES, t E>>>RES) useful to reduce the clearing
time for intermittent faults.
The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second and/or third threshold (IE >>, IE >>>).
Similarly the second threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the third threshold (IE >>>).
Operation and settings
The residual fundamental frequency current) [1] is compared with the setting value. Current above
the associated pickup value is detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate
time a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element it is
restored.
The first threshold (IE >) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
characteristic curves:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t E >inv / [(IE /IE >inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t E >inv / [(IE /IE >inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t E >inv / [(IE /IE >inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t E >inv · {0.01 / [(IE /IE >inv)0.02 - 1] +
0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t E >inv · {3.922 / [(IE /IE >inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t E >inv · {5.64 / [(IE /IE >inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Electromechanical (EM): t = t E >inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (IE /IE >inv)-1 + 0.339]}

Where:
t: operate time
IE >: pickup value
t E >inv : operate time setting

tE>
TRIP

t E >>

t E >>>

IE> I E >> I E >>> IE t-int-F50N-51N.ai

General operation time characteristic for the residual overcurrent elements - 50N/51N

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 IE >
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[2] 1.1 ≤ IE /IE >inv ≤ 20
• If IE >inv pickup ≥ 2.5 IEn, the upper limit is 10 IEn

For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 10 IEn.

All residual overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the IE> En-
able, IE>> Enable and/or IE>>> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual
overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The first overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time
characteristic by setting the IE>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A,
IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEE MI, ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, EM) available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element \ Setpoints menu.
Note 1 The measured residual current IE is employed for NA11 protection relays equipped with standard CT sensor inputs
The computed residual current IEC (vector sum of the phase currents) is employed for NA11 protection relays equipped with LPCT sensor
inputs
Note 2 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 59

 The trip of IE > element may be inhibited by the start of the second and/or third el-
ement (IE >>, IE >>>) by setting ON the Disable IE> by start IE>>, Disable IE> by
start IE>>> (IE>disbyIE>>, IE>disbyIE>>>) parameters available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B)\ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE>> Element (IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus.
Similarly the trip of the IE >> element may be inhibited by start of the third element (IE >>>) by setting
ON the Disable IE>> by start IE>>> (IE>>disbyIE>>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE>>> Element \Setpoints menu.
All the named parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B (Set \ Profile A(or B)\
Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus).

An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold t E>RES, t E>>RES, t E>>>RES).

INPUT

t E>RES t E>RES t E>RES

IE> Start
t E> t E>

IE> Trip

RESET
t
IE> element residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Timers Timers-F50N-51N.ai

Each residual overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the IE> BF, IE>> BF
and/or IE>>> BF parameters are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set\Pro-
file A(or B)\ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \Setpoints
menus.[1]

For all overcurrent elements, a block from the second harmonic restraint may be set by setting
ON the IE>2ndh-REST, IE>>2ndh-REST, IE>>>2ndh-REST parameters inside the Set\Pro-
file A(or B)\ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \Setpoints
menus.

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may
be blocked for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the IECLP> Mode, IECLP>>
Mode, IECLP>>> Mode parameters.

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may
be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode (ON-Change setting = IECLP> Mode, IECLP>> Mode, IECLP>>>
Mode) and the concerning operating time within the CLP (tECLP>, tECLP>>, tECLP>>>) may
be adjusted inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element,
IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP ( IECLP>def,
IECLP>inv,....) may be adjusted inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \
IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \ Definite time (Inverse time) menus.

For every of the four thresholds the following block criteria are available:
Logical block (Block1)
If the IE>BLK1, IE>>BLK1 and/or IE>>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a bi-
nary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever
the given input is active.[2] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\
Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \Setpoints menus, while
the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set\Inputs\Binary input
IN1(2) menus.

Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section

60 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 IE> Enable IE>Curve IECLP>Mode tECLP> tE>RES IE> def IECLP> def tE> def IE> inv IECLP> inv tE> inv

IE> Element
IE Start IE>
Trip IE>

≥ IE> inhibition IE>2ndh-REST CLPIE>

IE>BF
& IE>BF
Start I2ndh>
Trip I> &
IE>BLK1 Start I>
BLK1IE>
&
&
Block1

IE>BLK2IN Start I>

BLK2INIE>
&
&
Block2

IE>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
Start IE> &

IE>> Enable IECLP>>Mode tECLP>> tE>>RES IE>> def IECLP>> def tE>> def

IE>> Element Start IE>>

IE
Trip IE>>

IE>>2ndh-REST IE> disbyIE>> CLPIE>>

IE>> inhibition
& IE>>BF &
Start I2ndh> Start IE>>
IE>> Trip IE>>BF
&
IE>>BLK1 Start IE>>
BLK1IE>>
&
&
Block1

IE>>BLK2IN Start IE>> BLK2INIE>>

&
Block2 &

IE>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
Start IE>> &

IE>>> Enable IECLP>>>Mode tECLP>>> tE>>>RES IE>>> def IECLP>>> def tE>>> def

IE>>> Element Start IE>>>

IE
IE>>>2ndh-REST Trip IE>>>
IE> disbyIE>>>
& CLPIE>>>
Start I2ndh> IE>> disbyIE>>> Start IE>>> &
Start IE>>> &
IE>>>BLK1 Start IE>>>
BLK1IE>>>
&
&
Block1
IE>>>BF
IE>>>BF
Trip IE>>> &
IE>>>BLK2IN Start IE>>>
BLK2INIE>>>
&
&
Block2
IE>>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
Start IE>>> &

General logic diagram of the residual overcurrent elements - 50N/51N all-F50N-51N.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 61

 Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.
Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:
• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the IE>BLK2IN, IE>>BLK2IN and/or IE>>>BLK2IN parameters are set to ON and a
binary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase ele-
ments (Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block
criteria.[1] The enable IE>BLK2IN, IE>>BLK2IN and/or IE>>>BLK2IN parameters are avail-
able inside the Set \ Profile A(or B)\ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element,
IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be
assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(2) menus (IN1 or
IN2 matching).

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay (K1...K6):

• If the IE>BLK2OUT, IE>>BLK2OUT and/or IE>>>BLK2OUT enable parameters are set to
ON and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output
by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the
given element (Start IED>, Start IED>>, Start IED>>> and/or Start IED>>>>) becomes active. The
enable IED>BLK2OUT, IED>>BLK2OUT, IED>>>BLK2OUT and/or IED>>>>BLK2OUT
parameters (ON or OFF) are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B)\ Residual overcurrent-
50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \Setpoints menus, while the BLK2OUT-
Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L,
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selec-
tive block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section

62 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 ON≡Enable IE> residual overcurrent element
IE> Enable
ON≡Inhibit
IE> inhibition
(from IE>> and/or IE>>> residual overcurrent element)

Start IE>
I E> def State

&
I E ≥ I E> def IE>ST-K
(Pickup outside CLP) IE>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
≥1

(LED+REL AYS)
I E> inv State t E>inv
I E> Curve t E>RES
IE & t E>def
I E ≥ I E> inv t >RES
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1” & t E>
T 0 0 T IE>TR-K
I EC L P >def I EC L P >inv T 0 IE>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
I E ≥ I E CL P >
Trip IE>

t EC L P > ≥1 CLP I E>

A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t ECLP> Output t ECLP> B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking
T 0 C

≥1
IECLP>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

IE>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

IE> overcurrent element (50N/51N) Block diagram

Block1, Block2

Trip IE>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IE> BF towards BF logic
IE>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tECLP> 0.1 s

Output tECLP>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - First element logic diagram (IE>) Fun_50N-51NS1.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 63

 Start IE >
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IE>BLK1 Trip IE > & BLK1IE>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
& BLK2IN IE>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IE>BLK2IN
&

ModeBLIN1
OFF

TRIPPING M ATRIX
BLIN1 ON IPh

(LED+REL AYS)
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE
ON IE Iph Block2
tB-K
tB-L
t B-Iph BLK2IN-Iph
Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0 ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
IE/Iph Block2
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

ST-Iph BLK2
BLK2OUT-Iph
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

Start IE >
(LED+REL AYS)

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
I> Blk2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE
Block2 output &
IE>BLK2OUT I>> Blk2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
(ON≡Enable) ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
I>>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L

A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE > Blk2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IE >> Blk2 OUT
≥1 B
IE >>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLOUT1
C Pilot wire output
D
ST-IE BLK2
Block2 output
50N-51NS1_BL-diagram.ai

Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (IE>)

64 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 ON≡Enable IE>> residual overcurrent element (ON≡Inhibit)
IE>> Enable IE> disbylE>>
& IE> inhibition
Start IE>>
ON≡Inhibit
IE>> inhibition
(from IE>>> residual overcurrent element)
Start IE>>
Start IE>>

IE>>ST-K
IE>>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I E>>def State
(Pickup outside CLP)
& t E >>RES
t E >>def
I E ≥ I E>> def
t E >>RES
& t E >>
IE A =“0 or OFF” A =“1” 0 T IE>>TR-K
I EC L P >>def T 0 IE>>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
Trip IE>>
I E ≥ I EC LP > > d e f

≥1 CLP IE>>

t E C L P >>
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t ECLP>> Output t ECLP>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C

≥1
IECLP>>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

IE>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

IE>> overcurrent element (50N/51N) Block diagram

Block1, Block2

Trip IE>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IE>> BF towards BF logic
IE>>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tECLP>> 0.1 s

Output tECLP>>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Second element logic diagram (IE>>) Fun_50N-51NS2.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 65

 Start IE >>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IE>>BLK1 Trip IE >> & BLK1IE>>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
& BLK2IN IE>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IE>>BLK2IN
&

ModeBLIN1
OFF

TRIPPING M ATRIX
BLIN1 ON IPh

(LED+REL AYS)
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE
ON IE Iph Block2
tB-K
tB-L

Logic t B-Iph BLK2IN-Iph

INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0 ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
IE/Iph Block2
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

ST-Iph BLK2
BLK2OUT-Iph
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

Start IE >>
(LED+REL AYS)

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
I> Blk2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE
Block2 output &
IE>>BLK2OUT I>> Blk2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
(ON≡Enable) ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
I>>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L

A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE > Blk2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IE >> Blk2 OUT
≥1 B
IE >>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLOUT1
C Pilot wire output
D
ST-IE BLK2
Block2 output
50N-51NS2_BL-diagram.ai

Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (IE>>)

66 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 (ON≡Inhibit)
IE>disbylE>>>
& IE> inhibition
ON≡Enable IE>>> residual overcurrent element Start IE>>>
IE>>> Enable

(ON≡Inhibit)
IE>>disbylE>>>
& IE>> inhibition
Start IE>>>

Start IE>>>

Start IE>>> IE>>>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I E >>>def State IE>>>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
(Pickup outside CLP)
& t E>>>RES
t E>>>def
I E ≥ I E>>> def
t E>>>RES
& t E>>>def
IE 0 T IE>>>TR-K
I EC L P >>>def A =“0 or OFF” A =“1” T 0 IE>>>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
Trip IE>>>
I E ≥ I EC LP > > > d e f

≥1 CLP IE>>>
t EC L P >>>
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t ECLP>>> Output t ECLP>>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C

≥1
IECLP>>>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

IE>>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

IE>>> residual overcurrent element (50N/51N) Block diagram

Block1, Block2

Trip IE>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IE>>> BF towards BF logic
IE>>>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tECLP>>> 0.1 s

Output tECLP>>>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Third element logic diagram (IE>>>) Fun_50N-51NS3.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 67

 Start IE >>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IE>>>BLK1 Trip IE >>> & BLK1IE>>>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
& BLK2IN IE>>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IE>>>BLK2IN
&

ModeBLIN1
OFF

TRIPPING M ATRIX
BLIN1 ON IPh

(LED+REL AYS)
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE
ON IE Iph Block2
tB-K
tB-L
t B-Iph BLK2IN-Iph
Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0 ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
IE/Iph Block2
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

ST-Iph BLK2
BLK2OUT-Iph
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

Start IE >>
(LED+REL AYS)

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
I> Blk2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE
Block2 output & I>> Blk2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
IE>>>BLK2OUT ≥1
(ON≡Enable) I>>> Blk2 OUT T 0 t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L

A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE > Blk2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IE >> Blk2 OUT
≥1 B
IE >>> Blk2 OUT T 0 BLOUT1
C Pilot wire output
D
ST-IE BLK2
Block2 output
50N-51NS3_BL-diagram.ai

Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the third element (IE>>>)

68 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Breaker failure - BF
Preface
When the protection issues a trip command but, because an anomaly, the circuit breaker cannot
open, the breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers.
The breaker failure function may be started by internal protective function (if associated with BF) or
by external protections.
Operation and settings
The starting of the timer occurs if both the following conditions are filled:
A) Start and trip of internal protective elements (trip of elements matched with BF protection) or, trip
of external protections acquired by means binary input, if enabled;
B) The CB is closed (the CB state may be acquired by means two binary inputs connected to the
auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b) or the fundamental component of at least one phase current
IL1, IL2 , IL3 is greater than the IBF> adjustable threshold or the fundamental component of the
residual current IE is greater than the IEBF> adjustable threshold.
The breaker failure protection reliability is improved by means of the CB position control or phase
or residuaI current measure; the trip can arise also for wrong auxiliary contacts state (if the current
is greater than the adjustable threshold ) or for trip of external protections (frequency, voltage,..)
without current (with CB closed information supplied from state of auxiliary contacts).
If the information concerning the CB position is not achievable (for instance the auxiliary contacts
are unavailable), such control must be disabled.

If both conditions are held along the set operate time t BF, the BF element trips at deadline, vice versa
the timer is cleared and the function is restored.
To the purpose to restore the BF element as quickly as possible, with start of the same protection
(see A condition), additionally to the trip of some internal protections, their starts are required (start
reset is faster than trip reset).

The element may be enabled or disabled by setting ON the BF Enable parameter available inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker failure-BF menu.

BF Enable I BF > I EBF > t BF

I L1. . . I L3
Tr ip B F
IE S t ar t B F
52a
52b
Tr ip P ro t E x t

BF-BLK1 Block1
& B L K1 B F
Block1

Schema a blocchi generale della funzione di mancata apertura interruttore (BF) all-FBF.ai

All the IBF>, IEBF and t BF parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B; they are avail-
able inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker failure-BF menu.

BF start from Circuit breaker

If the CB Input parameter (BF Start from circuit breaker) is set to ON, and two binary inputs are
designed for acquire the 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts[1], the control of the CB position is enabled. If
the information concerning the CB position is not available, such control must be disabled by setting
OFF the CB Input parameter. The parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker
failure-BF menu, the 52a and 52b function must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside
Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).
To enable the breaker failure protection to operate with trips coming from external protections, one
binary input must be designed to acquire the relative contacts. The TripProtExt function must be
assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(2...) menus (IN1 or IN...
matching).
Logical block (Block1)
If the BF-BLK1 parameter (BF logical block) is set to ON, and a binary input is designed for logical
block (Block1), the breaker failure protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active. The
trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[2] The enabling parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker failure-BF
menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \
Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).

Note 1 Both auxiliary contact state 52a and 52b must be acquired (two binary inputs are required) with Fw version previous to 1.60; with later versions,
giving up an inconsistency occurs, one logical input for the acquisition of a contact (52nd or 52b ) may suffice
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the logic block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING
section

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 69

 I BF >
I L1
I L2 Start IBF>
I L3 Max I L1 ...I L3 ≥ I BF >

I EBF > Start BF

Start IEBF>
IE ≥1 Start BF

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I E ≥ I EBF > &

(LED+REL AYS)
CB Input t BF

52a Logic INx t ON INx t OFF “1” t BF Trip BF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF T 0
52a RESET
n.o. T 0 0 T CB Input OFF
Binary input INx Trip BF
ON≡CB Closed CB Input ON
&

52b Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. 52b
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Trip ProtExt Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T ≥1 Trip Int/Ext
Binary input INx

Trip int-prot
Start BF
Block1 enable (ON≡Enable) &
BF-BLK1 Trip BF & BLK1 BF
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Logic diagram concerning the breaker failure element -BF Fun-BF_Pro-n.ai

70 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 4.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING
Automatic reclosure - 79
Preface
The automatic reclosure function is well-used on overhead lines (when faults are self-extinguish
after tripping of protection relays).
Operation and settings
The following sequences may be selected:
• Rapid reclosure,
• Rapid reclosure followed by one slow reclosure,
• Rapid reclosure followed by one slow reclosure and one or more delayed reclosures (1...5).
Starting of the automatic reclosing function can be raised by internal protective elements or exter-
nally by means binary input signals (eg: external protection device contacts or operating switches).
The following logics may be set (binary inputs allocation):
• 52a - 52b (Circuit breaker state); the CB position is indispensable for the auto reclosure function.
• Blocking; exclusion command (pulse),
• Enabling; activation command (pulse).

The following output functions may be coupled to the output relays:

• CB reclosing command; it is indispensable for the auto reclosure function.
• Reclosure fail.
• Cycle in progress.

The following timers are provided:

• trdt Rapid reclosure dead time
• tsdt Slow reclosure dead time
• tr Reclaim time
• td Manual close fault discrimination time
• td1 Slow reclosure fault discrimination time
• td2 Delayed reclosure fault discrimination time.

• Rapid reclosure dead time (trdt )[1]

It is the time interval from the CB opening command and the CB reclosing command.
The setting time for the rapid reclosure is a compromise from the time required for the arc extinction
on the fault location and the max allowable out of service time of the line.
The parameter must be adjusted on the basis of the extension and grid voltage. The minimum value
should allow the arc deionization and the insulation restoring in order to comply with the mechanical
characteristics of the circuit breaker and the residual arc extinction.

• Slow reclosure dead time (tsdt )[1]

It is the time interval from the failed fast reclosure and the start of slow reclosure sequence.
The setting time for the waiting time is a function of the mechanical characteristics of the circuit
breaker (data must be supplied by manufacturer). For newest circuit breakers typical values are 60 s
and 180 s for oldest circuit breakers.

• Reclaim time (tr)

It is the time interval following the initiation of reclosure command.
If no trip operation arises within the reclaim time the reclosing operation is regarded as successful
and the device is ready for a new sequence.
If any trip arises within the reclaim time the cycle goes on with sequence depending from the set-
ting mode.

• Slow reclosure fault discrimination time (td1) and Delayed reclosure fault discrimination time (td2 )
If any trip arises within the time interval td1 or td2 (slow or delayed reclosure), the cycle goes off and
the failed reclosure is issued.

• Manual close fault discrimination time (td)

If any trip arises within the time interval following the intentional close CB command , the cycle goes
off and the failed reclosure is issued; if no trip are detected the reclosing sequence goes on with the
programmed delayed reclosures.

Note 1 The reclosing waiting time is calculated from the first event that is detected between the reset of the trip element and the open state acquisition
of the circuit breaker

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 71

 Rapid reclosing
Successful rapid reclosure; no faults (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time.
After the reclaim time the system comes back to reset; any new trip starts a rapid reclosing se-
quence again.

CB State CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

trdt
tr

Reclaim timer

Successfully rapid reclosure 79-diafram.ai

Unsuccessful rapid reclosure; new fault (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time.
The automatic reclosing system is blocked and a failed reclosure command is issued.
After the reclaim time, following a closed CB condition without any faults, the system comes back
to reset.

CB State CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

trdt
tr tr

Reclaim timer

Fallita richiusura

Unsuccessful rapid reclosure 79RF-diafram.ai

Rapid reclosing and slow

reclosing
Successful rapid + slow reclosure; a fault (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time.
After the slow reclosure dead time (tsdt ) a slow reclosure is operated.
Because no trip occurs within the reclaim time the system comes back to reset; any new trip starts
a rapid + slow reclosing sequence again.

CB State CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

trdt tsdt
tr tr

Reclaim timer

Discrimination timer

td1 t

Rapid reclosure over a fault and subsequent successfully slow reclosure 79RL-diafram.ai

72 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 Unsuccessful rapid + slow reclosure; new fault (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim
time and the next slow reclosure is issued with fault within the slow reclosure fault discrimination
time td1;
The automatic reclosing system is blocked and a failed reclosure command is issued.

CB CLOSED

CB State CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPEN

trdt tsdt
tr tr

Reclaim timer

Discrimination timer

td1

Failed reclosure

t
Rapid reclosure over a fault and subsequent slow reclosure still over a fault 79RLF-diafram.ai

Rapid + slow reclosures and

subsequent delayed reclosures
Successful rapid + slow + delayed reclosures; a fault (CB opening command) occurs within the
reclaim time.
After the slow reclosure dead time (tsdt ) a slow reclosure is operated on fault detected later than td1
but within the reclaim time tr ; once the reclaim time has elapsed, the delayed reclosing is issued.

CB OPEN

CB State CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB CLOSED

trdt tsdt
tr tr tr

Reclaim timer

Discrimination timer

td1 td2

Failed reclosure

t
Rapid reclosure over a fault and subsequent slow and delayed reclosures 79RLM-diafram.ai

The delayed reclosure starts the timer td2 (Delayed reclosure fault discrimination time); at the same
time the reclaim timer tr is started; if no more trip within tr, once the reclaim time has elapsed, the
system comes back to reset.
Vice versa, if a further trip within td2 arises, the automatic reclosing system is blocked and a failed
reclosure command is issued.
Following trips after the td2 (Delayed reclosure fault discrimination time) up to five reclosures may be
programmed by means the N.DAR parameter available inside the Set \ Auto-reclose - 79 menu.
The intentional CB closing command start the reclaim (tr) and Manual close fault discrimination (td)
timers.

With Rapid-reclose setting (79 Mode = Rapid), any trip within the tr time interval causes a blocking
of the sequence and a failed reclosure signal is issued (Unsuccessful rapid reclosure).
With Rapid+Slow reclose setting (79 Mode = Rapid+Slow) and td timer enabled (MC-td-EN=ON), any
trip inside the td time interval causes a a block of the reclosure sequence and a failed reclosure
signal is issued, whereas any trip inside the tr time interval and after the td time interval issues an
open CB command and a delayed reclosure attempt.

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 73

 td Enable

CB OPEN

CB State CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB CLOSED

trdt tsdt
tr tr tr

CB Intentional close

Reclaim time

Slow reclosure and delayed

reclosure fault iscrimination
time td1 td2

Manual close fault

discrimination time

td td td
Reclosure failed

t
Successful auto-reclosure (fast + slow + delayed reclosures) - CB Intentional close 79RLMI-diafram.ai

The element may be enabled or disabled by setting ON the 79 Enable parameter available inside
the Set \ Auto-reclose-79 menu.

79 Enable 79 Mode N.DAR t rdt t sdt tr td1 td2 td MO - R ES

52a/52b
79-I> 79-I>> 79-I>>>
Tr ip P ro t E x t
& & & 7 9 - Run - K
79 79 79
79-AR-K

79-IE> 79-IE>> 79-IE>>> 7 9 - F ail - K

& & &

79 79 79

General logic diagram of the automatic reclose function - 79 all-F79.ai

74 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Logical block - BLOCK1
To the purpose to block off the trip of one protection element, the logical block function (Block1) may
be matched with binary inputs.[1]
The binary-matching may be set inside the Inputs submenu; to the purpose the Block1 parameter
must be selected for INx matching (x=1, 2)
A protective element, where the logical block is enabled, is blocked off whenever the given input is
ON.
For a given protective element, the logical block state is reading available (ThySetter and communi-
cation interfaces); it is ON the following condition are at the same time observed:
• Binary input ON
• Element start ON
• Element Trip OFF.

Generic protective element Start

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Threshold
Operate time

Input Measure Operate time

Trip
T 0
RESET

Start
&
Customized Block1 info
Trip & BLK1xxx
Enable (ON≡Enable)
xxxBLK1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block1 info (internal state)
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

General logic diagram of the logic block - Block1 Blocco_L.ai

The logical block it is not liable for any inhibition time-out, so the protective element is disabled for
the whole time when the input is ON.[2]

Start
Operate time

Trip

Block1 (input)

Block1 (output)
t
Logic block timers - Block1 Timers-Block1.ai

Activation of any binary input assigned ti logic block (Block1) function effects a block of all the
CAUTION protective elements where the logic block is enabled

Note 1 In the following treatment, the logical block is defined as “Logical block” or “Block1”
Note 2 The Block 1 signal forces a timer reset

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 75

 BLK1 I> 50/51 element

Reset timers BLK1 I>> 50/51 element

(ON≡element inhibition) BLK1 I>>> 50/51 element
Start BLK1 IE> 50N/51N element
Enable (ON≡Enable) & Customized Block1 info
xxxBLK1 Trip & BLK1 IE>> 50N/51N element
&
BLK1 IE>>> 50N/51N element
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF BLK1 74TCS 74TCS element
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF BLK1 S< 74CT element
n.o. T 0 0 T
BLK1 BF BF element
Binary input INx

Block1 info
Block1 (internal state)

Logic diagram concerning the logic block element -Block1 Block1_L.ai

76 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Selective block -BLOCK2[1]
Preface
The logic selectivity function has been developed to the purpose to reduce the clearing times for
faults closes to the source.
The output blocking circuits of one or several Pro_N relays, shunted together, must be connected
to the input blocking circuit of the protection relay, which is installed upwards in the electric plant.
The output circuit works as a simple contact, whose condition is detected by the input circuit of the
upwards protection relay.
The logic selectivity function can be realized through any combination of the following I/O circuits:
• One committed pilot wire input BLIN1...ON Iph, ON...Iph/IE, ON...IE.
• One committed pilot wire output BLOUT1...ON Iph, ON...Iph/IE, ON...IE.
• One or more than one independent binary inputs programmed with Block2 Iph, Block2 Iph/IE
or Block2 IE.
• One or more than one independent output relays programmed with BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-
Iph/IE-K or BLK2OUT-IE-K.

In reference to the following schematic diagram, the some protection functions of the relay placed
on the feeder may be blocked by downstream protective relays.

TRIP
BLOUT1 Pro_N

TRIP TRIP
BLIN1
TRIP
BLIN1 BLOUT1 Pro_N BLIN1 BLOUT1 Pro_N
Pro_N
INx=Blocco selettivo Iph

TRIP
Any device
BLK2OUT-Iph-K

Logic selectivity logica_acc.ai

Input selective block

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1

The input is a polarized wet type powered by internal isolated supply; it must be drive by an output
block signal coming from a Pro-N device or by a free voltage contact.

WARNING Never connect power to the block input circuit; the electronic circuit can be demaged

The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria by phase elements (Block2
Iph), by earth elements (Block2 IE) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) when the input
BLIN1 is active. The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the
ModeBLIN1 parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block
IN menus.

Use of binary inputs

If the xxBLK2IN parameters (enable) are set to ON and a binary input is designed for selective
block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase elements (Block2 Iph), by earth elements
(Block2 IE) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE), according the selectivity block criteria,
when the input (IN1 and/or INx) is active.
The Block2 Iph, Block2 IE and Block2 Iph/IE matching must be assigned to the selected binary
inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input 1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary input x menus.
When a binary input is programmed for selective block input, the IN1 tON, INx tON, IN1 tOFF and
INx tOFF time delays must be reset to zero; the Logic parameters (ON/OFF) must be programmed
in the same way of the related output relay connected with-it.

Note 1 The “Logic selectivity” and “Block2“ terms are employed without distinction

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 77

 Operation
For any protective element, three main conditions can arise:
A) Start = OFF: the element is at rest (no trip) regardless of the input/output blocks.
B) Start = ON: the element trips if no selective block input becomes active during the operate time.
C) Start = ON: if the selective block input (BLIN1 and/or binary input) becomes active, the element
goes in selective block state wherein the operate timer is forced to reset, so the element cannot
trip. After an adjustable time t B-Iph (common for phase protection elements) or t B-IE (common for
earth protection elements), the selective block input is disregarded and the operate timer can
start again. Information about t B-Iph and or t B-IE expired is available for reading (tB timeout data
inside Read \ Selective block - BLOCK2 \ Block2 input menu) and can drive an output relay and
or a LED (tB-K and or tB-K parameters inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block - BLOCK2 \
Selective block IN submenu).

Start I>
&
Trip I>
Block2 input enable (I> element)
I>BLK2IN & BLK2IN I>
(ON≡Enable) &

Start xx
&
Trip xx
Block2 input enable (I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>, IE>>>, elements)
xxBLK2IN & BLK2IN xx
&

PulseBLIN1
Permanently “ON”
Shorted BLIN1
Pilot wire
T 0 Diagnostic No pulses
Breaked BLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
ModeBLIN1
Pulse BLIN1

TRIPPING M ATRIX
OFF

(LED+REL AYS)
BLIN1 ON IPh
ON IPh/IE
ON IE
Pilot wire input Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS

Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0 ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Logic diagram concerning the selective block intput - Block2 input Block2-in-diagram.ai

With a setting other than 0.00 s, the t B-Iph and t B-IE timers may be used to have a backup protection
available against pilot wire short circuit.[1]
The t B-Iph and/or t B-IE timers must be adjusted according the following rule (example for t B-Iph):
t B-Iph = t F v + εt + εs
where t F v is the value of block output timer related to the downstream relay (example t F-Iph), εt is a
chronometric selectivity margin to apply in comparison to the t B-Iph time related to the downstream
relay (does not take into account if such margin has been considered for the t F-Iph setting), εs is a
safety margin. The chronometric selectivity applied among the t B-x times of the relays in accelerated
logic system allows to avoid more the contemporary circuit breaker opening after the clearing of a
fault in a line of concomitant plant to the short-circuit of the pilot wires concerning the same line.

Note 1 In the absence of suitable provisions, a short circuit on a pilot wire causes the block of the receiving relay, so a possible fault (contemporary or
following) inside the protected zone, cannot be cleared that being the case the protective relay blocked.

78 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 To enable the selectivity logic input for a generic xx element, the xxBLK2IN parameters must be
set to ON inside the Set \ Parametri di configurazione A (o B) \ xxx \ Setpoints menus concerning all
element where the selective block is available, eg:
I>BLK2IN inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element \ Setpoints menu.

INPUT BLOCK
(binary input and/or BLIN1)

BLIN2IN-Iph/BLIN2IN-IE

t B-Iph/t B-IE

tB timeout
t
tB timer TB-timer.ai

Output selective block

Use of output relays
If the xxBLK2OUT, xxBLK2OUT and/or xxBLK2OUT enable parameters are set to ON and a
output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output by phase
elements (BLK2OUT-Iph), by ground elements (BLK2OUT-IE) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-
Iph/IE), whenever the given start is active.
The BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays must be set in-
side the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu; the same for ad-
dressing the LED indicators (BLK2OUT2-Iph-L, BLK2OUT2-IE-L and BLK2OUT2-Iph/IE_L).
When output relays are programmed for selective block output, the t TR time delays must reset to
zero; the operation mode must be set with self reset (No-latched inside Set \ Relays submenu) and
the Logic parameters (Energized/De-energized) must be programmed in the same way of the
related binary input connected with-it.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1

The output is a dry static relay.
The information about phase (ON IPh), earth (ON IE), or phase+earth (ON IPh/IE) concerning the
sending block out signal may be select by means of the ModeBLOUT1 parameter inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.
The parameters can be set separately for A and B profiles.

Operation
The selective block outputs go ON at the same time of the xx element start; they hold steady (even
if the start reset to zero) for along the t F-IPh, t F-IE and t F-IPh/IE adjustable times for phase, earth and
phase+earth functions.
The timers starts when one or more selective block function goes ON; when a timer expires, the
selective block outputs are disregarded (even if the start holds steady).

The t F-IPh and t F-IE counters start when the output selective block becomes active. When the coun-
ters expire the block selective output is forced off (despite the start xxx remain active).
If the t F-IPh, t F-IE e t F-IPh/IE timers are cleared the selective block output state is freeze up to the start
xxx remain active.
With a setting other than 0.00 s, the t F-IPh, t F-IE e t F-IPh/IE timers may be used to provide a backup
protection against breaker failure inside a selectivity logic system, as well as to hold blocked up-
stream protective relays up after the fault is cleared with CB opening to provide solution against
unwanted trips because of a larger reset time compared with the downstream relay (the selectivity
will be lost).

Start xx
(internal elements)

BLK2OUT-Iph
BLK2OUT-IE
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t
t F-IPh, t F-IE, t F-IPh/IE t F-IPh, t F-IE, t F-IPh/IE

tF timers TF-timer.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 79

 ST-Iph BLK2

BLK2OUT-Iph
Start I> t F-IPh
I> Block2 OUT
Block2 output & t F-IPh
I>> Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IPh-K
I>BLK2OUT ≥1

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(ON≡Enable)

(LED+REL AYS)
I>>> Block2 OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh-L
BLK2OUT-IE
BLK2OUT-IE-K
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L

A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE > Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IE >> Block2 OUT ≥1
Start IE >>> B BLOUT1
IE >>> Block2 OUT T 0
Block2 output & C
IE>>>BLK2OUT D
(ON≡Enable) Pilot wire output
ST-IE BLK2

Logic diagram concerning the selective block output - Block2 output

Block2-diagram.ai

With traditional selective logic systems, in the absence of suitable cares, the event of a circuit
breaker failure causes the block of the receiving relays situated upstream the circuit breaker, so the
fault cannot be cleared.
When using the Pro-N devices inside the selective logic systems, the answer to the circuit breaker
failure problem can be solved by means of, (as well as the BF-Breaker Failure element) or by means
of a threshold adjusted for time selectivity, through use of the output block reset timer too with the
intent that avoid permanently block of all upstream relays by downstream block signals (the only one
unblocked relays deals to the fault breaker).
The t F-IPh, t F-IE, t F-IPh/IE timers must be adjusted according the following rule (example for t F-Iph):
t F-Iph = t + TAP + trip + εt + εs
where t is the larger phase protection operate time, TAP is the circuit breaker operate time (with arc
extinction), trip is the larger reset time of all protective relays inside the selective logic system, εt is
an potential selectivity margin relative to the t F-x time of the downstream relays, εs is a safety margin
need to include timers errors (tolerances).

Diagnostic
To guarantee maximum fail-safety, the relay performs a run time monitoring for pilot wire continuity
and pilot wire shorting.[1]
Exactly the output blocking circuit periodically produces a pulse, having a small enough width in
order to be ignored as an effective blocking signal by the input blocking circuit of the upstream
protection, but suitable to prove the continuity of the pilot wire.
Furthermore a permanent activation (or better, with a duration longer than a preset time) of the
blocking signal is identified, as a warning for a possible short circuit in the pilot wire or in the output
circuit of the downstream protection.

Permanently “ON”
Pilot wire Shorted BLIN

Pulse BLIN1 T 0 Diagnostic No pulses

Breaked BLIN
TRIPPING M ATRIX

BLOUT1
(LED+REL AYS)

BLIN1
BLOCK OUT Pilot wire output Pilot wire link
≥1 BLOCK IN
Pulse Pulse BLIN1
generator Pilot wire input

Pulse BLOUT1 Pulse BLOUT1

The periodic pulses that are sent by output circuit may be enabled or disabled by means the Pulse-
BLOUT1 parameter available inside the Set \ Pilot wire diagnostic menu; with OFF setting the
pulses are disabled.[2]
If no pulses are received inside an adjustable time window at the selective block input circuit, a
break pilot wire alarm is issued; the information is available for reading (Breaked BLIN1 data inside
Read \ Pilot wire diagnostic submenu) and can drive an output relay and or a LED (PulseBLIN-K
and or a PulseBLIN-L parameters inside Set \ Pilot wire diagnostic submenu).

Note 1 Full diagnostic of pilot wires is only available when committed pilot wire input/outputs are employed
Note 2 When several outputs are parallel linked the pulse emission must be enabled inside one device only, sooner inside the outermost device

80 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 The control window may be programmed for OFF (no control) - 0.1 -1 - 5 - 10 - 60 - 120 s; the
Pulse BLIN1 parameter is available inside the Set \ Pilot wire diagnostic menu; with OFF setting of
the the PulseBLIN1 parameter the pulse control is disabled.
The same setting must be for input and output (PulseBLIN1 and PulseBLOUT1).

In the following example the output pulses must be enabled inside the device B only (2nd logic se-
lectivity level) and D (1st logic selectivity level).

2nd logic selectivity level 1st logic selectivity level

2
CB2
1
TRIP
BLOUT1 B

CB1 Pro_N
CB3 CB4
LOAD

TRIP TRIP
BLIN1
TRIP BLIN1 BLOUT1 C BLIN1 BLOUT1 D
A
Pro_N Pro_N
Pro_N
Logic selectivity logica_acc-esempio.ai

Setting example
In reference to the above shown schematic diagram, the logic selectivity is performed by means of
the dedicated I/O for the short circuit elements of A, B and C protective relays, so that if a fault arises
in (2), the open order or circuit breaker CB2 is issued and no trip is issued by A device.
A command must be issued for the main circuit breaker CB1 by the A relay with a fault in (1).

A Protection
I>> element with definite time set to 4.5 In with operate time to 0.10 s blocked by start of B and/or C
protection.
Settings:
• I>> def = 4.5 In
• t >> def = 0.100 s
• PulseBLOUT1 = OFF
• PulseBLIN1 = 1 s
• I>>BLK2IN = ON
• I>>BLK2OUT = OFF
• t B-IPh = 0.30 s

B Protection
I>> element with definite time set to 4.0 In with operate time to 0.10 s with emission of block output
toward A protection relay.
Settings:
• I>> def = 4.0 In
• t >> def = 0.100 s
• I>>BLK2IN = OFF
• I>>BLK2OUT = ON
• PulseBLIN1 = OFF
• PulseBLOUT1 = 1 s
• t F-IPh = 0.25 s

C Protection
I>> element with definite time set to 4.0 In with operate time to 0.10 s with emission of block output
toward A device and block input from D protection relay.
Settings:
• I>> def = 4.0 In
• t >> def = 0.100 s
• I>>BLK2IN = ON
• I>>BLK2OUT = ON
• PulseBLIN1 = 1 s
• PulseBLOUT1 = OFF
• t F-IPh = 0.25 s
• t B-IPh = 0.30 s

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 81

Remote tripping
Preface
Some output relays may be programmed for remote trip function resulting from a command coming
from a binary input.
If a binary input is designed for remote trip acquisition, an output relay allocated to the same function
is triggered when the input (IN1 and/or INx) is active.

Operation and settings

The Remote trip matching must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \
Binary input IN1...INx menus.
When a binary input is programmed for remote trip acquisition, the IN1 tON, INx tON, IN1 tOFF
and INx tOFF time delays must be reset to zero; the Logic parameters (ON/OFF) must be pro-
grammed in the same way of the related circuit connected with-it.
The RemTrip-K matching must be assigned to the selected output relays inside the
Set \ Remote tripping submenu; the same for addressing the LED indicators (RemTrip-L).
When output relays are programmed for remote tripping, the t TR time delays must reset to zero;
the operation mode must be set with self reset (No-latched inside Set \ Relays submenu) and the
Logic parameters (Energized/De-energized) must be programmed in the same way of the related
binary input connected with-it.

All the parameters are common for A and B Profiles.

+UAUX
Remote trip
Remote trip

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Remote trip Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

(LED+REL AYS)
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF RemTrip-K
n.o. T 0 0 T RemTrip-L
Binary input INx

-UAUX
Remote trip logic diagram Fun-Remote-trip.ai

82 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Frequency tracking
Within the frequency range 45...55 Hz (fn = 50 Hz). or 54...63 Hz (fn = 60 Hz), a frequency tracking al-
gorithm adjusts the currents sampling frequency, so as to keep the number of samples in any given
period constant.
With 24 samples for periods the sampling rate is adjusted from 1.08 kHz with f = 45 Hz to 1.512 kHz with
f= 63 Hz
For a frequency step change the tracking response time is 10 Hz/s.
The frequency measure is based on the largest phase current.

• If the larger phase input current is lower than 25% In the sampling frequency is fixed to fn
(50 or 60 Hz).
• If the measured frequency is outside the locking range, the sampling frequency is fixed to the lower
or upper value (45 or 55 Hz with fn = 50 Hz, 54 or 63 Hz with fn = 63 Hz).

I L1
I L2 Frequency tracking
I L3 Max I L1...L3 > 0.25 I n

Max I L1...L3 Nominal frequency f n = 50 Hz

40 Hz 60 Hz Displayed value

45 Hz 55 Hz Locked frequency

0.25 I n
50 Hz (0 Hz) Locked frequency (Displayed value)

40 45 55 60 f (Hz)

Max I L1...L3 Nominal frequency f n = 60 Hz

40 Hz 70 Hz Displayed value

54 Hz 63Hz Locked frequency

0.25 I n
60 Hz (0 Hz) Locked frequency (Displayed value)

40 54 63 70 f (Hz)
Frequency tracking IF.ai

All protective elements are always operative; accuracy is guaranteed inside locked frequency
band.

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 83

Second Harmonic Restraint - 2ndh-REST
Preface
When a power transformer is energized, as well know an inrush current flow in the side that have
been energized with an amount and duration that depend by many factors which:
• Instantaneous value of the supply voltage at the time where the transformer is energized
• Transformer design, magnetization characteristic and size
• Residual flux
The maximum amount of the inrush current is produced by energizing the transformer at the zero
point of the voltage wave, when it increase or decrease with the residual flux respectively positive
or negative. Moreover the ratio between the maximum amount of the inrush current and the nominal
current of the transformer decrease if the size of transformer increase, whereas the duration of the
inrush current increase with the size of transformer.
Since an high second harmonic component is always present in the inrush current, to avoid un-
wanted tripping, the second harmonic restraint is available to restraint any selected threshold of
NA11 protective relay:
• Phase overcurrent - 50/51
• Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N
Moreover one or more output contacts may be allocated to the 2NDH-REST function in order to block
any external protection relays where second harmonic restraint is not available.

Operation and settings

Each second harmonic component of phase currents (IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2nd) is compared with the
I2ndh> adjustable threshold.
When one or more currents overcome the setting threshold a start is issued.
The start may be employed to block-off one or more 50/51/50N/51N elements or to block-off external
protections by means output relays (this can be usefully used in order to restraint external protection
relays where second harmonic restraint is not available).
For the purpose to keep in block state the selected elements, an adjustable t 2ndh>RES reset delay is
provided.

ON≡Enable
I2ndh> Enable
Start I2ndh>

I 2ndh >

I L1-nd t 2ndh>RES

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I L1-nd ≥ I 2 ndh>
t 2ndh>RES I2ndh>ST-K
I L2-nd & I2ndh>ST-L
≥1 0 T
I L2-nd ≥ I 2 ndh>

I L3-nd
I L3-nd ≥ I 2 ndh>

Logic diagram concerning the second harmonic restraint function - 2NDH/REST 2NDH-REST-diagram.ai

The setting of I2ndh> and t2ndh>RES parameters are available inside the
Set \ Profile A(B) \ Second Harmonic Restraint menus.

The second harmonic element may be enabled or disabled; to enable it, the I2ndh> Enable param-
eter must be set to ON inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Second Harmonic Restraint menus.

All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.

The output may be assigned to the selected I2ndh>-ST-K output relays inside the
Set \ Profile A(B) \ Second Harmonic Restraint submenu; the same for addressing the LED indicators
(I2ndh>-ST-L).

When output relays are programmed for second harmonic element output, the t TR time delays must
reset to zero; the operation mode must be set with self reset (No-latched inside Set\Relays sub-
menu) and the Logic parameters (Energized/De-energized) must be programmed in the same
way of the related binary input connected with-it.

84 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Cold Load Pickup - CLP
Preface
CLP feature allows selected thresholds of phase and ground overcurrent protections to be changed
or blocked for a set time in order to overcome transient overcurrents.
The trigger of the CLP feature is the logical condition of circuit breaker closed, that Pro-N relay de-
tect by means of two digital inputs connected to the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.
When the circuit breaker closed condition is detected, the CLP timer set in the submenu of CLP func-
tion is initiated and, throughout the CLP set time:
• The threshold is blocked if CLP is set to ON threshold block.
• The threshold is changed to the value that is set if CLP is set to ON threshold change.
When CLP timer has elapsed, the threshold is unblocked if CLP is set to ON threshold block or the
threshold is revert back to the original value if CLP is set to ON threshold change.
Note that when the circuit breaker is open, the threshold is already blocked if CLP is set to ON
threshold block or the threshold is already changed to the value if CLP is set to ON threshold change:
this is useful in order to avoid unwanted tripping due to unblocked threshold or threshold with his
original value for cases where a delay of the circuit breaker closing happen, i.e. where the three
poles of the CB do not close at the same time or during long CB closing time.
Typical applications where the CLP feature may be useful are for overcurrent protections on feeders
where the circuit breaker closing starts air conditioning/heating loads after a long cooling time, mo-
tors or more generally momentary large loads.
The CLP may be also useful for instantaneous ground fault overcurrent protections on motors start-
ing, because it is likely that incorrect operation of the protection would occur on imbalance transient
secondary current due to asymmetric line CTs saturation.
Depending upon the magnitude and duration of the starting current, it may be necessary to block
operation of thresholds or raising his setting. Also a combination of both blocking some thresholds
and raising others may be adopted.
For each threshold the CLP function may be disabled (OFF), enabled with threshold blocking (ON-
Element blocking) or enabled with threshold change (ON-Change setting) by means the xx-
CLPx Mode parameter.
The operating mode and the relative activation time concerning each threshold of the 50/51and
50N/51N elements are adjustable inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\xxx - xx \ xxx Element \Setpoints
menus.

Generic protec t iv e e le me n t
(Threshold outside CLP) Start Ixx

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I xx

(LED+REL AYS)
Input STEADY STATE THRESHOLD t x x RES
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1” Operate time
t x x RES
t xx
I C L P xx 0 T
T 0
TRANSIENT THRESHOLD ICLPxxMode RESET
A = ON - Change setting Trip Ixx
B = OFF
t C L P xx C = ON - Element blocking
A
t CLPxx B
C
≥1 CLP Ixx
2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable) T 0
Ixx2ndh-REST
& ≥1

Start I2ndh> Block1, Block2

CB State CB OPEN CB OPEN

CB State (52a=OFF) CB CLOSED (52a=ON) (52a=OFF)

tCLPxx 0.1 s
Output tCLPxx

t
TRANSIENT THRESHOLD/ STEADY STATE TRANSIENT THRESHOLD/
BLOCK THRESHOLD/UNBLOCK BLOCK
Cold Load Pickup logic diagram - CLP

Example: to change the first threshold of the definite time overcurrent element 50/51 within CLP dur-
ing a 0.1 s time interval:
• The ICLP> Mode parameter must be set as ON-Change setting,
• The tCLP> parameter must be adjusted to a wanted value (0.1 s) inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\
Phase overcurrent - 50/51\ I> Element \ Setpoints menu,
• The threshold within CLP parameter ICLP>def must be adjusted to a wanted value inside the
Set\Profile A(or B)\ Phase overcurrent - 50/51\ I> Element \ Definite time menu.

CB position can be acquired by means one or two binary inputs; allocation of 52a and 52b func-
tions is available inside the Set\Inputs\Binary input IN1...INx menu.
FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 85
CT supervision - 74CT
Preface
The CT monitoring function is employed to issue an alarm when secondary phase CTs and/or phase
input of the NA60 relay failure are detected.
Interruptions are detected by means of a symmetry criterion of the IL1, IL2 , IL3 input currents.
The symmetry factor is calculated comparing the minimum and maximum of the fundamental compo-
nents of the three phase currents (ILMIN / ILMAX ).
Operation and settings
The starting of the timer occurs if both the following conditions are filled:
A) (ILMIN / ILMAX ) < S< that is the symmetry factor is lower than the S< adjustable threshold;
B) ILMAX > I*
Where
I*: maximum phase current threshold
S<: element pickup value
If both conditions are filled over the t S< adjustable time an alarm is issued

The output may be assigned to the selected S<TR-K output relays inside the Set \ CT supervision-
74CT submenu; the same for addressing the LED indicators S<TR-L.

If the S<-BLK1 parameter is set to ON, and a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the
CT supervision function is blocked off whenever the given input is active. The trip timer is held in re-
set condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes down.[1] The S<-BLK1
parameter is available inside the Set \ CT supervision-74CT submenu.

All the parameters are common for A and B Profiles

E’ selezionabile l’abilitazione (ON) o disabilitazione (OFF) della funzione.

I LMIN
tgα=S<

NO TRIP

TRIP

α
I* I LMA X
Current asimmetry monitoring - 74CT char74CT.ai

I L1 S< Trip S<

I L2
I MAX
I MIN ts <
TRIPPING M ATRIX

I L3
(LED+REL AYS)

I MAX < S<

t S< S<TR-K
I* &
T 0 S<TR-L
RESET
I MIN Start I*
I MIN >I*

Block1 input (ON≡Block)

S<BLK1 & BLK1 S<
&
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Enable (ON≡Enable)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

CT monitoring logic diagram - 74CT Fun-74CT.ai

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logic block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING
section

86 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS
Preface
The trip circuit can be monitored to signal possible anomalies that would lead to the missing opening
of circuit breaker when trip and/or operator command are issued.
Circuit interruption as well as missing of auxiliary voltage and/or coil faults are detected.
Supervision with one or two binary inputs can be select; depending on association of binary inputs,
the corresponding logic is automatically selected.
For this purpose the TCS1 and TCS2 (if two binary input are used) matching must be assigned to the
selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary input INx
menus.
When a binary input is programmed for the TCS function, the IN1 tON, INx tON, IN1 tOFF and
INx tOFF time delays must be reset to zero and the Logic parameter must be set to Active-ON
inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary input INx menus.

Operation and settings

The 74TCS element may be enabled or disabled; to enable it, the 74TCS Enable parameter must be
set to ON inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Trip circuit supervision-74TCS submenu.

A logic block can be set from une binary input.[1]

If the 74TCS-BLK1 parameter is set to ON, and a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1),
the TCS supervision function is blocked off whenever the given input is active. The trip timer is held
in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes down. The 74TCS-
BLK1 parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Trip circuit supervision-74TCS submenu.

All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.

Two inputs supervision

With two binary input all malfunctions are detected (inclusive of mechanics faults).
The binary inputs are connected to the trip and to the 52b contacts.
The CB auxiliary voltage must be 36 V at least (twice the minimum threshold for every binary input).

+UAUX
Pro-N
TCS1

Binary input IN1 Towards 74TCS logic

TRIP

TCS2

Binary input IN2 Towards 74TCS logic

52
52a 52b

-UAUX
Trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs - 74TCS TCS2s.ai

The faulty condition is detected occurs if both the following conditions are filled:
A) The TRIP contact is closed (external protection relay tripped);
B) The circuit breaker is closed (52a closed and 52b open).

Because such conditions can arise with healthy circuit too (e.g. a trip command is issued by the
protection relay but the CB opening time is still in progress), to avoid untimely operations the previ-
ous condition are checked every 80 ms and the output is issued after a 2 s delay; outputs are reset
to zero if at least the A or B condition become false after 0.6 s delay.[2]

Note 1 Since two binary inputs are just used (TCS1 and TCS2), an external I/O module is required for the logic block function. The exhaustive treatment
of the logic block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING section
Note 2 Following assumption are considered for the framework:
Logic: ON,
Timers tON and tOFF: reset to zero
TRIP contact of the protection: DE-energized, No latched

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 87

 TCS1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Start 74TCS
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 TT
Start 74TCS 74TCS-ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Binary input INx

(LED+REL AYS)
74TCS-ST-L
&
TCS2 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
n.c. INx t ON 2s 0.6 s 74TCS-TR-K
INx t OFF &
n.o. T 0 0 T 74TCS-TR-L
T 0 0 TT
RESET
Binary input INx
Trip 74TCS
Trip 74TCS
Enable (ON≡Enable)
74TCS Enable
Start 74TCS
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
74TCS-BLK1 Trip 74TCS & BLK1 74TCS
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 TT
Binary input INx

Logic diagram concerning the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs - 74TCS Fun-74TCS2.ai

One input supervision

By means of the right sizing of a resistor, the trip circuit supervision may be performed even with
lower control voltage (e.g. when the control voltage is less than 36 V required for driving of two
binary inputs, typically UAUX = 24V).
The binary input is connected to the trip and an external resistor must be connected the 52b auxiliary
contact.

+UAUX
Pro-N
TCS1
TRIP
Binary input INx Towards 74TCS logic

R
52
52a 52b

-UAUX
Trip circuit supervision with one binary inputs - 74TCS TCS1.ai

The fault condition of the trip circuit is detected by binary input power down.
With healthy circuit and TRIP contact closed, the binary input is feed across the 52a path (CB closed)
or across the resistor R and 52b path (CB open).
When the TRIP contact turns ON, the binary input becomes short-circuited; to avoid untimely opera-
tions the previous condition are checked every 80 ms and the output is issued after a 40 s delay in
order to allow the fault clearing and the consequent reset of the TRIP protection.
Outputs are reset to zero after 6 s from the TRIP contact open.[1]

Note 1 The trip contact (TRIP) of the protection relays must be set with automatic reset (No-latched operating mode).

88 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 Start 74TCS

TCS1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Start 74TCS 74TCS-ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF 74TCS-ST-L
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
40 s 6s 74TCS-TR-K
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
T 0 0 T 74TCS-TR-L
74TCS Enable
RESET Trip 74TCS
Trip 74TCS
Start 74TCS
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
74TCS-BLK1 Trip 74TCS & BLK1 74TCS
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Logic diagram concerning the trip circuit supervision with one binary inputs - 74TCS Fun-74TCS1.ai

How to calculate resistance

Both the following conditions must be filled:
1) The circuit breaker coil must no be powered when the CB is open and an open command is is-
sued;
2) The binary input is energized when the trip contact open.

1) If the circuit breaker is just open an unnecessary excitation must be avoided; the most critical
event arises when the TRIP contact is closed (e.g. manual or test command), so with minimal
series resistance. To avoid an unwanted excitation the series resistance must be higher than a
minimum value defined as:

Rmin = R TC · (UAUX - U TCmin) / U TCmin

where:
U TCmin: minimum coil excitation voltage
UAUX : auxiliary voltage
R TC : coil resistance

2) To energize the binary input circuit when the TRIP contact and CB open, the series resistance
must be lowerer than a maximum value defined as:

Rmax = [(UAUX - UDIGmin) / IDIG] - R TC

where:
UDIGmin: minimum binary input excitation voltage (18 V)
UAUX : auxiliary voltage
R TC : coil resistance
IDIG: binary input excitation current (0.003 A)

To satisfy the above requirements, the R value must be chosen between the Rmin and Rmax values;
typically the normalized value nearest the arithmetic mean:

R = (Rmin + Rmax) / 2

The power dissipated by the R resistor is:

P R = R · I 2 = R · [UAUX / (R + R TC)] 2

Example
UAUX = 110 Vcc (auxiliary voltage)
P TC = 50 W (coil power)
R TC = UAUX 2 / P TC = 242 Ω (coil resistance)
U TCmin = 77 V (minimum coil excitation voltage = 70% UAUX )
UDIGmin = 18 V (minimum binary input excitation voltage)
IDIG = 0.003 A (binary input excitation current)

Rmin = R TC · (UAUX - U TCmin) / U TCmin = 242 · (110 - 77) / 77 = 103.7 Ω

Rmax = [(UAUX - UDIGmin) / IDIG] - R TC = [(110 - 18) / 0.003] - 242 = 30425 Ω

R = (Rmin + Rmax) / 2 = (103.7 + 30425) / 2 = 15264 Ω ~ 15 k Ω

P R (Power dissipated by the R resistor) = UAUX 2 /R = 110 2 / 15000 = 0.8 W

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 89

Circuit breaker supervision
Preface
Several diagnostic metering and monitoring function are available:
• By means 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts, the CB position is acquired. Depending on such information
the Open and/or Close commands can be safely issued by user.
• An adjustable threshold can be set for a wear estimate of the breaker contacts; the current values
(ΣI or ΣI2) are summed and compared to a user-adjustable threshold. When the threshold or the
number of operations is exceeded the relay can activate an output relay. The function helps to
adjust maintenance planning.
• By means 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts, the opening time is calculated and compared to a user-ad-
justable threshold. If the threshold is exceeded the relay can activate an output relay.

Opening transition Towards CB diagnostic

CB monitoring
+UAUX
52a Logic INx t O N INx t O F F 52a ON/OFF
IN+
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
IN- n.o. T 0 0 T

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Binary input INx
52

(LED)
52a 52b t mask

t mask
52b Logic INx t O N INx t O F F =1
T 0
IN+
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
IN- n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx 52b ON/OFF
-UAUX
Logic diagram concerning the circuit breaker diagnostic function Fun-CB-position.ai

Operation and settings

According to the conventional contact position
• 52a is the auxiliary contact that is in the same position as the circuit breaker, (52a open = CB
open),
• 52b is the auxiliary contact that is in the opposite position as the circuit breaker, (52a open = CB
closed).
To acquire the CB position, the 52a and 52b function must be set inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary
input 1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary input x menus. The IN1 tON, INx tON, IN1 tOFF and INx tOFF
time delays must be reset to zero and the Logic parameter must be set to Active-ON inside the Set
\ Inputs \ Binary input IN1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary input INx menus.

CIRCUIT BREAKER COMMANDS

Two output relays can be set to command CB opening and closing; the CBopen-K and CBclose-K
function must be set inside the Set \ Circuit breaker supervision \ LEDs-relays allocation menu; the
CB position can be visualized by means two LEDs (CBopen-L and CBclosed-L parameters).
All the parameters are common for Profile A and Profile B.

CIRCUIT BREAKER DIAGNOSTIC

Four different criteria can be select.
1) Number of CB trip mode (ModeN.Open ON). When the number of operations (N.Open) is ex-
ceeded, an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
2) Cumulative CB currents mode (ModeSumI ON). When the per-phase value exceeds the thresh-
old, an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
3) Cumulative CB I2t mode (ModeSumI^2t ON). The tripping energy I2t is calculated on the base of
current measure at the time of the open command on the base of the circuit breaker opening time
provided for I2t calculation (tbreak). When the per-phase value exceeds the threshold, an output
relay and/or LED can be activated.
4) CB operating time mode (Mode-tOpen ON). The time interval between the trip command and the
CB open acquisition is calculated on the base of a programmable relay (Ktrig-break). When the
time interval (tbreak>) is exceeded, an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
The four criteria can be contemporaneously or separately set.
All the named parameters are available inside the Set\Circuit Breaker supervision\CB Diagnostic
menu.
Tutti i suddetti parametri, nonché l’associazione delle uscite ai relè finali ed ai LED, sono presenti nel
menù Set\Monitoraggio interruttore\Diagnostica interruttore.

90 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 State N.Open

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Mode- N .Open

(LED+REL AYS)
N .Open
N.Open-K
&
From CB position Opening transition N.Open-L
≥

CB Diagnostic - Number of trips

State SumI
Mode-SumI

TRIPPING M ATRIX
IL1

(LED+REL AYS)
¥I SumI
SumI-K
IL2 &
¥I Max SumI-L
From CB position Opening transition Max ≥ Sum I
IL3
¥I
SumIL1

SumIL2

SumIL3

CB Diagnostic - Cumulative tripping currents

State SumI^2t

TRIPPING M ATRIX
IL1 Mode-SumI^2t

(LED+REL AYS)
¥ I2t Sum I^2t
SumI^2t-K
IL2 &
¥I2t Max SumI^2t-L
From CB position Opening transition Max ≥ Sum I^2t
IL3
¥I2t

SumIL1^2t

SumIL2^2t

SumIL3^2t

CB Diagnostic - Cumulative tripping energy I2t

TRIPPING M ATRIX

Mode-tOpen
(LED+REL AYS)

State tbreak
Ktrig-break t break
tbreak-K
&
tbreak-L
≥
From CB position Opening transition

CB Diagnostic - CB operating time Fun-CB-diagnostic.ai

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 91

Demand measures
Demand measures are calculated as:
Fixed demand
Fixed demand IL1FIX , IL2FIX , IL3FIX
Every fixed demand period t FIX an average magnitude is calculated based on samples taken every 1
second. Update is carried out at the end of the same period. The fixed demand measures may be reset
to zero by means the Reset on demand measures command (Thysetter Commands menu).
The tFIX parameter (Fixed demand period) is available inside the Set\Demand measures menu.
Rolling demand
Rolling demand IL1ROL , IL2ROL , IL3ROL
The average magnitude is calculated inside a mobile window of N·T length where:
• N is the user-defined number of cycles and,
• T is the user-defined sub-period.
An average magnitude is calculated based on samples taken every 1 second; update is carried out
at the end of the every sub-period. The rolling demand measures may be reset to zero by means the
Reset on demand measures command (Thysetter Commands menu).
The tROL (Rolling demand period) and N.Rol (Number of cycles for rolling on demand) parameters are
available inside the Set\Demand measures menu.
Peak demand
Peak demand IL1MAX , IL2MAX , IL3MAX
Every sub-period t ROL the maximum value of the average magnitude is calculated based on samples
taken every 1 second. Update is carried out at the end of the same period. The peak demand mea-
sures may be reset to zero by means the Reset on demand measures command (Thysetter Commands
menu).
The tROL (Rolling demand period) parameter is the same for rolling demand setting.
Minimum demand
Minimum demand IL1MIN, IL2MIN, IL3MIN
Every sub-period t ROL the minimum value of the average magnitude is calculated based on samples
taken every 1 second. Update is carried out at the end of the same period. The peak demand mea-
sures may be reset to zero by means the Reset on demand measures command (Thysetter Commands
menu).
The tROL (Rolling demand period) parameter is the same for rolling demand setting.

Oscillography
Trigger Setup
Following parameters, available inside the Set\Oscillography\Trigger Setup menu, are user-program-
mable:
• Pre-trigger time and Post-trigger time.

Trigger

pre-trigger post-trigger Time

Oscillography trigger.ai

• Element pickup trigger; the information recording starts when a state transition on any protec-
tive element occurs if the parameter is set to ON.
• Trigger from outputs; the information recording starts when a state transition on the selected
output relay occurs if the parameter is set (K1...K6).
• Binary input trigger; the information recording starts when a state transition on the selected
binary input occurs if the parameter is set to ON.
• Trigger from inputs; the information recording starts when a state transition on the selected
binary input occurs if the parameter is set (IN1...IN2).
• 80% Buffer alarm; when the 80% of the buffer space is reached an alarm may be issued if the
parameter is set to ON.

Set sampled channels

The desired sampled quantities may be select inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Set sampled channels
menu (iL1, iL2 , iL3 , iE ).
Set analog channels
The desired sampled quantities may be select inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Set analog channels
menu.
Everyone of twelve analog channel may be associated to one of the selected measures (Frequency,
IL1, IL2 , IL3 , IE , IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2nd, I-2nd/IL , T1...T8[1]).
Set digital channels
The desired digital quantities may be select inside the Set \ Oscillography \Set digital channels
menu.
Everyone of twelve digital channel may be associated to one of the selected I/O signal (K1... K6, K7...
K10, IN1, IN2, IN3...IN42 [2]).

Note 1 The temperature measure is acquired by means of Pt100 probes (eight inputs on MPT module)
Note 2 The output relay K7...K10 and binary input IN3...IN42 states is meaningful when the I/O circuits are present (MRI and MID16 modules)

92 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

 5 M E A S U R E S , L O G I C S TAT E S A N D C O U N T E R S
Measures
• Frequency (f )
• RMS value of fundamental component for phase currents (I L1, I L 2 , I L 3 )
• RMS value of fundamental component for measured residual current (I E )
• RMS value of fundamental component for calculated residual current (I Ec) [1]

Calculated
• Maximum current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 (I Lmax)
• Minimum current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 (I Lmin)
• Average current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 (I L)

2nd harmonic
• Second harmonic phase currents (I L1-2nd , I L 2-2nd , I L 3-2nd )
• Maximum of the second harmonic phase currents/ fundamental component percentage ratio I-2nd /IL
(I -2nd /I L )

3rd harmonic
• Third harmonic phase currents (I L1-3rd , I L 2-3rd , I L 3-3rd )
• Third harmonic of residual current[2] (I E-3rd )

4th harmonic
• Fourth harmonic phase currents (I L1-4th , I L 2-4th , I L 3-4th)

5th harmonic
• Fifth harmonic phase currents (I L1-5th , I L 2-5th , I L 3-5th)

Demand phase
• Phase fixed currents demand (I L1FIX , I L 2FIX , I L 3FIX )
• Phase rolling currents demand (I L1ROL , I L 2ROL , I L 3ROL )
• Phase peak currents demand (I L1MA X , I L 2MA X , I L 3MA X )
• Phase minimum currents demand (I L1MIN , I L 2MIN , I L 3MIN )

Protection
For each protection threshold, the following data are available:
• Start ON/OFF
• Trip ON/OFF
• Logic block (Block1) ON/OFF
• Selective block (Block2) ON/OFF
• Cold Load Pickup ON/OFF

Delayed inputs
The binary input states, acquired downstream the delay timers are available:
• IN1 ON/OFF
• IN2 ON/OFF
• INx ON/OFF

Internal states
The state of the functions assigned to binary inputs are available:
• Reset LEDs ON/OFF
• Profile selection ON/OFF
• Fault trigger ON/OFF
• IE /IPh Block2 ON/OFF
• IPh Block2 ON/OFF
• IE Block2 ON/OFF
• Block1 ON/OFF
• Tcs1 ON/OFF
• Tcs2 ON/OFF
• Trip External protections ON/OFF
• Reset partial counters ON/OFF
• Reset CB monitoring data ON/OFF
• 52a ON/OFF
• 52b ON/OFF
• Open CB ON/OFF
• Close CB ON/OFF
• Remote trip ON/OFF
• Reset on demand measures ON/OFF
• Auto-reclose enable ON/OFF
• Block auto-reclose ON/OFF

Note 1 The computed residual current is available for NA11 protection relays equipped with LPCT sensor inputs
Note 2 The third harmonic component of the residual current is available for NA11 protection relays equipped with CT inputs

MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 93

Relays
For every output relay, the output operating state and diagnostic are available (Read \Relays menu):
• K1 State ON/OFF
• K1 Diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• K2 State ON/OFF
• K2 Diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• ......
• K6 State ON/OFF
• K6 Diagnostic OK/NOT OK

Counters
For every element two set of counters are available (Partial counters and Total counters); the partial
counters can be cleared by the user level, while the Total counter reset can be achieved with pass-
word (Session Level 1).
Every partial counter is reset to zero when ten thousand count is passed.
All partial counters can be cleared by means a single command; for this purpose the Reset partial
counters command must be issued (Commands\Reset submenu).
• 79 - counter
• 50/51 - counter
• 50N/51N - counter
• 2ndh-REST - counter
• 74TCS - counter
• CB - counter
• 74CT - counter
• BF - counter
Partial counters
• xx Start partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Trip partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block1 partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block2 partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
Total counters
• xx Start total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Trip total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block1 total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block2 total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999

Self test
Lower level diagnostic (MINOR) can be output or ignored; for this purpose the MINOR Fail alarm
parameter can be set ON or OFF inside the Set\Self test relay submenu.
Following anomalies (MINOR) are not relevant (the protective elements continue to work):
• Errors concerning the digital fault recorder.
• Internal bus.
The self test information are:
• Protection and controls ON SERVICE/OUT OF SERVICE
• System diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• Device diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• Program diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• Data-base boot OK/NOT OK
• Data-base runtime OK/NOT OK
• DSP boot OK/NOT OK
• DSP run-time OK/NOT OK
• Memory boot OK/NOT OK
• Memory run-time OK/NOT OK
• Data Bus heavy OK/NOT OK
• Data Bus minor OK/NOT OK
• Oscillography run-time OK/NOT OK
• PLC boot OK/NOT OK
• PLC run-time OK/NOT OK
• Protection I/O assigned verify startup OK/NOT OK
• Protection I/O assigned verify run-time major OK/NOT OK
• Protection I/O assigned verify run-time minor OK/NOT OK
• Total protection I/O assigned not-matching 0...
• Protection I/O assigned not-matching OK/NOT OK
• PLC I/O assigned verify startup OK/NOT OK
• PLC I/O assigned verify run-time major OK/NOT OK
• PLC I/O assigned verify run-time minor OK/NOT OK
• Total PLC I/O assigned not-matching 0...
• MMI module Boot OK/NOT OK
• MMI module Run-time OK/NOT OK
• MRI module Boot OK/NOT OK
• MRI module Run-time OK/NOT OK
• MID16-1 module Boot OK/NOT OK
• MID16-1 module Run-time OK/NOT OK
• MID16-2 module Boot OK/NOT OK
• MID16-2 module Run-time OK/NOT OK

94 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS

 • PT100 module Boot OK/NOT OK
• PT100 module Run-time OK/NOT OK
• Current loop module Boot OK/NOT OK
• Current loop module Run-time OK/NOT OK
The diagnostic alarms can be allocated to an output relay; for this purpose the Self-test relay pa-
rameter can be set (K1...K6) inside the Set \ Self-test Relay submenu.

Pilot wire diagnostic

Detailed diagnostic information about the pilot wire are available.
(Read\pilot wire diagnostic).
• BLIN1 pilot wire breaking diagnostic state ON/OFF
• Pilot wire BLIN1 shorted ON/OFF

Selective Block - BLOCK2

The input and output state concerning the selective block are available (Read \Selective block-
BLOCK2).
Block2 input
• Phase protections input selective block state BLK2IN-Iph ON/OFF
• Ground protections input selective block state BLK2IN-IE ON/OFF
• tB-Iph/IE Elapsed state tB timeout ON/OFF
Block2 output
• Starting state of phase protections enabled
for external selective block on output ST-Iph-BLK2 ON/OFF
• Starting state of ground protections enabled
for external selective block on output ST-IE-BLK2 ON/OFF
• Phase protections output
selective block state BLK2-OUT-Iph ON/OFF
• Ground protections
output selective block state BLK2-OUT-IE ON/OFF
• Phase and ground protections
output selective block state BLK2-OUT-Iph/IE ON/OFF

Fault recording - SFR

Recording is triggered by one or more causes (up to 8 simultaneous):
• Activation (OFF-ON transition) of any relay programmed for trip of protection or control element
• External trigger (binary input programmed as Fault trigger)
Twenty events are recorded into a circular FIFO (First In, First Out) buffer.[1][2]
Following information are stored in every record:
• Fault counter[3]
• Date and time
• Fault cause (element trip)
• Phase currents IL1r, IL2r, IL3r
• Residual current IEr or IECr
• Inputs
• Outputs
• Fault cause info (eg. faulted phase)

Event recording - SER

Recording is triggered by one or more causes:
• Start and/or trip of any enabled protection or control element
• Binary input activation (OFF-ON or ON-OFF transition)
• Power-on or power-down (Auxiliary power supply)
• Setting change.
Three hundred events are recorded into a circular FIFO (First In, First Out) buffer.[2][4]
Following information are stored in every record:
• Event counter[5]
• Date and time
• Event cause (binary input/element trip/setting change)

Oscillography - DFR
Upon programmable trigger, the fault records are recorded in COMTRADE format; the sampled mea-
sures (24 sample per cycle) are stored in a circular shift memory buffer.
The fault record are self-triggered; they are stored in sequential order up the allocated memory is
used up after which the oldest memory is overwritten.
An operating procedure example for the digital fault recording is illustrated inside the ThySetter
section.

Note 1 Fault 0 is the newest fault, while the Fault 19 is the oldest fault
Note 2 Data are stored in non volatile memory; they are held in spite of power down
Note 3 Counter is updated at any new record; it may be cleared by means ThySetter
Note 4 Event 0 is the newest event, while the Event 299 is the oldest event
Note 5 Counter is updated at any new record; it may be cleared by means ThySetter

MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 95

 Following parameters are user-programmable:
• Pre-trigger and post-trigger time
• Selected sampled quantities.
• Analog channels (1...12) allocation.
• Digital channels (1...12) allocation (output relay and/or binary inputs).
• Trigger setup; the information storage starts when a state transition on the selected signal occurs.
(protective element start and/or trip, output relay and/or binary input switching).
• Alarm: when the 80% of the buffer space is reached an alarm may be issued. The system being
of linear type, the records are back-to-back recorded to the end of available memory; the alarm
output is a warning in order that the user may download the data RAM[1] to clear memory for new
records

Trigger

pre-trigger post-trigger Time

Trigger oscillografia trigger.ai

COMTRADE
Records are recorded in COMTRADE format; (Common Format for Transient Data); This is a standard
for the data exchange for various types of tests or simulation datas, etc, for power system applica-
tions.
The measurements are recorded in ASCII or BINARY format. COMTRADE files always come by
pairs:
• The “.CFG”-file describing the configuration: number of analog and digital channels, sampling rate,
scale factors, etc.
• The “.DAT”-file containing the data

The COMTRADE is part of IEC 60255-24 standard.

The recording can be analyzed by mean of ThySetter sw or any other standard compliant viewer.

The record quantity is depending on settings of following parameters:

• Pre-trigger and post-trigger times
• Number of allocated channels.

By means of the following formula the record quantity may be evaluated:

600 59 s 50 (Hz)
N = int · ·
24 + 24 v i + 4 v RMS + nB (tpre + tpost )(s) f (Hz)

where:
N: record quantity
v i: sampled measures
v RMS : analog measures (RMS)
nB: logic variables
tpre: pre-trigger time interval
tpost : post-trigger time interval
f : frequency

Example 1
With the following setting:
• Pre-trigger: 0.2 s
• Post-trigger: 0.1 s
• Sampled measures: iL1, iL2 , iL3 , iE
• Analog measures: IL1, IL2 , IL3 , IE
• Logic variables: K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, IN1, IN2

819 record can be stored if f = 50 Hz, since:

600 59 s 50 (Hz)
N = int · · = 819
24 + 24 · 4 + 4 · 4 + 8 (0.1 + 0.2 )(s) 50 (Hz)

Example 2
With following setting:

• Pre-trigger: 0.5 s
• Post-trigger: 0.5 s
• Sampled data: iL1, iL2 , iL3 , iE
• Analog channels: IL1, IL2 , IL3 , IE
• Digital channels: K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, IN1, IN2
up to 204 records can be stored if f = 60 Hz, since:
Note 1 Data are stored into volatile memory RAM, they are lost when power goes down

96 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS

 600 59 s 50 (Hz)
N = int · · = 204
24 + 24 · 4 + 4 · 4 + 8 (0.5 + 0.5 )(s) 60 (Hz)

Phase/to/phase fault record oscillo-phase.ai

Phase/to/earth fault record oscillo-earth.ai

MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 97

 6 I N S TA L L AT I O N
6.1 PACKAGING
Packaging consists of a paperboard packaging guaranteeing adequate protection for transport and
storage under normal environmental conditions.
The Pro-N protection relays must be stored within the required temperature limits; the relative hu-
midity should not cause condensation or formation of frost.
It is recommended that the devices are stored in their packaging; in the case of long storage, espe-
cially in extreme climatic conditions.
It is recommended that the packaging not be disposed of into the environment, but kept in case the
relay should be moved at some later time.

6.2 MOUNTING
The Pro-N protection relays are housed inside metal cases suitable for various kinds of assembly:
• Flush mounting
• Projecting mounting
• With separate operator panel
• Rack.
Removability is ensured to facilitate maintenance operations so that the electronic module can be
replaced; this provides minimum downtime and maximum protection availability.
Flush mounting
The fixed case, fitted with special fastening brackets, is mounted on the front of electric control
board, previously drilled as indicated in the drawing.
In case of side-by-side mounting of several relays the minimum drilling distance is determined by
the front dimensions indicated in the overall dimensions drawing, increased by 3 mm, to ensure an
adequate tolerance and gasket space between adjacent relays.
The depth dimension, as indicated in the drawing, must be increased by as much as needed to allow
room for the wiring.

107 205 30 101

D1

A1
A2
C1 C2
A3 F1
A4 RX F2
A5 F3
A6 TX F4
A7 F5
A8 C3 C4
A9 B1
A10
177

171

B2
149

A11 B3
A12 B4
ON 1 2 3 4 5 START
A13 B5
TRIP A14 C5 C6 B6
A15 B7
A16 B8

A17
A18
A19
A20 C7 C8

A21
A22

E1

102.5 ±0.3
70
161
154

Flush mounting N.4 fori ø 3,5 Flush-mount.ai

NOTE Separation of fixed and removable parts is NOT required

98 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INSTALLATION

 • Remove the upper tile and open the little door to access the fastening screws.

Removing tie to access the fastening screws Remove-tile.ai

• The fixed case is fastened by means of four screws onto the panel as indicated in the drawing.

Four screws Flush-mount1.ai

Projecting mounting
• Remove the ground screw and open the little door to access the fastening screws.
• Make all connections and join the relay to the framework with front and earth screws.
In case of side-by-side mounting of several relays, the minimum fixing distance is determined by the
dimensions of the mounting plate indicated in the overall dimensions drawing, increased horizontally
and vertically by as much as needed to allow room for the wiring and to ensure an adequate toler-
ance between devices.

275
120

ON 1 2 3 4 5
START
80

TRIP
31

Projecting mounting Projecting.ai

INSTALLATION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 99

 Separate operator panel
The solution with projecting assembly and a separate operator panel is particularly suitable for
limited in depth installations.
Cutout dimension and mounting steps concerning the separate operator panel are the same for the
flushing mounting (see previous pages).

212.5 128.5
25 15 110
107 5 30

D1

A1
A2
C1 C2
A3 F1
A4 RX F2
A5 F3
A6 TX F4
A7 F5
A8 C3 C4
A9 B1
A10 B2

200
168
170
177

A11 B3
A12 B4
ON 1 2 3 4 5 START A13 B5
A14 C5 C6 B6
TRIP
A15 B7
A16 B8

A17
A18
A19
A20 C7 C8

A21
A22

E1

20
N.4 fori ø 4,5
Separate operator panel Separate-mount.ai

A standard direct shielded cable with RJ45 connectors must be used for connections.

Separate operator panel Separate-mount1.ai

100
100 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INSTALLATION
 Rack mounting
For mounting inside a standardized 19-inch system (EIA 310-D, IEC 60297 and DIN 41494 SC48D), the
MAR adapter is required (available on request).

482.6
465
177 (4U)
101.6

ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START

TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP

Rack mounting Rack-mount.ai

To allow opening of the keyboard door a one unit space must be provided when several rack are
overlapping mounted.

Rack mounting Rack-mount1.ai

INSTALLATION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 101

 6.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Electrical connections should be made by referring to the connection diagram; in cases where cer-
tain of the circuits (communication, block, or others) are not used, the relevant connections must
remain open. Examples of connection diagrams are reported on Appendix to this manual.

CAUTION Devices must be installed by qualified personnel only. No liability is accepted from Thytronic due to improper use.
For the A1...A22 connections, screw terminals with following characteristics are available:
• Nominal cross section: 0.14...2.5 mm2 (AWG 26...16) for single conductor
da 0.14 a 0.75 mm2 for two conductors with same cross section
• Tightening torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm
• Stripping length: 8 mm
For the F1...F5 (RS485) connections, screw terminals with following characteristics are available:
• Nominal cross section: da 0.2 a 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24...12) for single conductor
da 0.2 a 1.5 mm2 for two conductors with same cross section
• Tightening torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm
• Stripping length: 10 mm
Traditional CTs inputs
The connections to the current signal inputs C1...C8 can be made by ring lugs suitable for M4 screws
and an insulating panel covering the terminals may be mounted for safety purposes.
D1

≅ A1 A1 RJ45 Ethernet connection

UAUX
A2 A2
C1 C2
A3 A3 F1
K1 A4 A4 RX F2 RS485
A5 A5 F3
B-
A6 A6 TX F4
K2 A7 A7 F5 A+
A8 A8 C3 C4
K3 A9 A9 B1
A10 A10 B2
K4 A11 A11 B3
K5 A12 A12 B4
A13 A13 B5
K6 A14 A14 C5 C6 B6
BLOUT-
BLOUT+
A15 A15 B7
A16 A16 B8
BLIN-
BLIN+
A17 A17
A18 A18

IN1
A19 A19
A20 A20 C7 C8

A21 A21
IN2
A22 A22 RJ45 Thybus connection
E1

Amperometric inputs

LPCTs inputs
The connections to the current signal inputs L1...L3 must be made by RJ45 plugs coupled with LPCT cables.
D1

LPCT Setting
≅ A1 A1 RJ45 Ethernet connection
UAUX L1
A2 A2

A3 A3
F1
K1 A4 A4 L2 RX
F2 RS485
A5 A5
F3 B-
A6 A6 L3 TX F4
K2 A7 A7 50 F5 A+
100
A8 A8 200
400
K3 A9 A9 800 B1
A10 A10 In=50...1250A B2
K4 A11 A11 B3
EX. In=300A
K5 A12 A12
(100+200)
B4
A13 A13 B5
K6 A14 A14 B6
BLOUT- L1 B7
BLOUT+
A15 A15
Amperometric inputs
A16 A16 B8
BLIN-
BLIN+
A17 A17
A18 A18 L2

IN1
A19 A19
A20 A20
L3
A21 A21
IN2
A22 A22
RJ45 Thybus connection
E1

102
102 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INSTALLATION
 By means DIP-switches the rate primary current must be adjusted.[1]
The following setting are possible for In (rated primary current):
• 50 - 100 -150 - 200 - 250 - 300 - 350 - 400 - 450 - 500 - 550 - 600 - 650 - 700 - 750 - 800 - 850 - 900 - 950
- 1000 - 1050 - 1100 - 1150 - 1200 - 1250 A.

D1
50
100
A1
200
L1
A2 400
A3 800
F1
A4 L2 RX
F2
A5 In=50...1250A
F3
A6 L3 TX F4
A7 50 F5
100
A8 200
400
A9 800 B1
A10 In=50...1250A B2
Setting examples:
A11 B3
A12
EX. In=300A
(100+200)
B4 - In = 50 A
A13 B5
A14 B6 (50)
L1 B7
A15
A16 B8

A17 - In = 300 A
A18 L2
(100+200)
A19
A20
A21 L3
A22 - In = 1250 A

(50+400+800)
E1

Earthing
A protective ground connection is required, which must be connected to the suitable screw with a
separate lead of at least 2.5 mm2.

Ground screw
Earthing rear.ai

Note 1 The three groups of Dip-switches must be adjusted with same setting
For more information about technical data of the LPCT current transformers please contact Thytronic

INSTALLATION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 103

 Core balanced CT
Proper installation is shown in fig. 1a and 1b.
The current balance transformer, when used for measuring residual current, must be crossed in the
same direction by all active conductors and hence, also by the neutral conductor if distributed, with
the exception of the ground connection protective conductor. The drawing below shows cases of
assembly of the toroid on unscreened and screened cables; prior to proceeding with assembly, it is
necessary to check that there are no screen-to-ground connections upstream of the sensor.

Source Source

Insulated cables

Shielded cables

Armoring Armoring

Load Load
Fig. 1a Fig. 1b
Current balanced transformer Toroide.ai

In order to ensure a linear response from the sensor, the cables must be positioned in the centre
of the transformer so that the magnetic effect of the three cables is perfectly compensated in the
absence of residual current (Fig.2a).
Hence, the assembly indicated in the drawing of fig.2b, in which phase L3 causes local magnetic
saturation whereby the vectorial sum of the three currents would be non-null, should be avoided.
The same considerations also apply when the sensor is positioned near bends in the cabling.
It is recommended that the transformer be placed away from bends in the conductors).

L1 L1

L2 L3 L2 L3

Fig. 2a Fig. 2b Fig. 2c

Current balanced transformer Toroide.ai

104
104 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INSTALLATION
Standard CT amperometric inputs
The amperometric input circuits are assembled inside the fixed module, so no short circuit on the
secondary CTs must be provided when the removable module is pulled out
In the event of case replacement, some camps must be provided externally to shorting the second-
ary CTs circuits to avoid secondary open circuit of CTs that may endanger equipment or people.

CAUTION In case of disconnection CT wiring to the case, pay attention must to do not open live circuits.

When making the current connections, attention must be paid to not exceeding the performance
of the line current transformers. To be exact, the total load, constituted by the protective relay, any
other protective relays or measuring instruments and the resistance of the connections, must not ex-
ceed the line CT performance. In particular, consumption of the relay input circuit must not exceed
0.2 VA while the load (expressed in VA) constituted by the conductors is given by:

0.018 × L × In 2 / S
where:
L the overall length, expressed in m, of the two conductors in relation to each phase;
In nominal current of the line CT expressed in A;
S cross sectional area of the current conductors expressed in mm2.
It is recommended that cabling of a suitable thickness be used in order to limit wear of the CT sec-
ondary circuits.

Binary inputs
The dry input circuits, despite being galvanically isolated, must preferably be supplied with the same
auxiliary voltage of the control panel.
The inputs are polarity free with wide voltage rang.

+UAUX

A B A19
IN1
A20

-UAUX A21
IN2
A22

Binary inputs Binary-sch.ai

The optoisolated inputs are immune to transitory interferences, however the following recommenda-
tion must be considered in high disturbed environments:
• Position input wiring away from high energy sources.
• Set a debounce timer (tON and/or tOFF) to alloy the transient to decay.
• Use shielded cables with ground connection on only one end (preferably at the relay side.
Output relays
Six output relays are available.
It is advisable to verify that the technical characteristic of the contacts be suitable for the applied
load (about current, nominal voltage, make and break current , etc..).
Output relay K1 and K2 have one change over contacts (SPDT, type C).
Output relay K3 and K4 have one make contact (SPST-NO, type A) and a common reference (A10
terminal).
Output relay K5 and K6 have one make contact (SPST-NO, type A for K5), one break contact (SPST-
NC, type B for K6) and a common reference (A13 terminal).
All contacts are shown in de-energized state for standard reference.

INSTALLATION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 105

 RS232 port
The link from PC and NA11 serial port must be established by means a L10041 cable.
The RS232 port takes priority over other communication links (Ethernet or RS485 port).

USB-RS232 converter
Female connector L10041
RJ10 Connector 1
6
Pin1 4 2 RXD
7
3 3 TXD
8
1 4 DTR
9
2 5 GND

(if none RS232 PC port is available)

serial1-sch.ai

When no RS232 port is available on Personal Computer, a suitable USB to RS232 converter must be
employed.
After installation, the same communication port must be selected to define the Thysetter parameters
(typically COM4, COM5,...).

Ethernet port
A RJ45 or FX optics fiber is provided.
An Ethernet port may be provided with RJ45 or FX optics fiber interface.
For testing a PC may be directly connect to the NA11 Ethernet port on the rear side.
With TX interface a cross cable must be employed, while an Ethernet-optical fiber converter, suit-
able for 100 Mb data rate must be employed if an FX port is implemented.

cross cable

ethernet-wiring.ai

The link must be enabled by means ThySetter sw and RS232 connection:

• Set the IP address (Host IP address e IP net mask) in order that the NA11 and PC parameters
are matched; the parameters are inside the Communication \ Ethernet submenu.
• Set to OFF the Autonegotiation parameter of NA11 device (Autonegotiation parameter inside
Communication \ Ethernet submenu).
For security reasons, a change of the Ethernet communication parameters become active only after
an hw reset.

106
106 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INSTALLATION
 RS485 port
RS485 communication circuit connections must be made using screened twisted pair cable observ-
ing the polarities; screening must only be connected to the end terminating at the RS485 interface
circuit pertaining to the monitoring unit.
It is recommended to terminate the line at the extremities of the same; this must be performed on the
RS485 line control unit and on the NA11 device placed at the furthest point connecting the specially
provided resistor; termination can be made by means a jumper between the F2-F3 terminals.
Termination resistors allow adjusting the impedance of the line, reducing the influence of the induc-
tive components of the same, which might compromise good communication.

PRO-N PRO-N

K1 A3
A4
A5
K2 A6
C1
A7
I L1 A8

OUTPUT RELAYS
C2
C3 K3 A9

CURRENT INPUTS
C4
I L2
K4 A10
C5 A11
I L3 K5 A12
C6
K6 A13
C7
IE A14
C8
F1 F1
F2 F2
F3 F3
RS485

RS485
B- F4 B- F4
A+ F5 A+ F5
ETHERNET

A1 ≅ D1
UAUX
A2
THYBUS

SUPERVISION UNIT E1

B-
BLOCK OUT

RS485
BLOCK IN

BLOUT-
A17 A15
BLOUT+
120 Ω A18 A16
A+

A19
BINARY INPUTS

IN1 FRONT PANEL

A20
RS232

A21
IN2
A22

RS485-wiring.ai

INSTALLATION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 107

 Thybus port
In order to extend I/O capability, the Pro_N relays can be customized through external auxiliary mod-
ules; moreover 4...20 mA converter and temperature measuring modules are provided.
The modules do not need external auxiliary supply. It is fed directly by Thybus port.
The Thybus link must be carried out by means category 5 shielded cable with RJ45 connectors

MRI
THYBUS INTPUT THYBUS OUTPUT

Pro_N
52
IN1
51
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 50 K1 5
IN2
49 6
THYBUS

A1 ≅ E1 7
UAUX 48
A2 IN3
47 11
K2

OUTPUT RELAYS
43

BINARY INPUTS
IN4
12
BLOCK OUT

42 13
BLOCK IN

BLOUT-
A17 A15
BLOUT+ OUTPUT
OUTPUT INPUT
INPUT ON 41
A18 A16 IN5 16
RUN
BUS

BUS K3
ON

MODULO 4 RELE’ + 8 INGRESSI DIGITALI MID8 40

1
2
3
4
5
MODULO INGRESSI REMOTI
4 RELAYS + 8 BINARY INPUTS MODULE
RUN MRI 15
35 14
IN6
A19 34
BINARY INPUTS

IN1 33 K4 22
FRONT PANEL
A20 IN7 21
RS232

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 32 20
A21
IN2 31
A22 IN8
30
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
3

PT8 MPT8 PT7 MPT7 PT6 MPT6 PT5 MPT5

MPT
THYBUS INPUT THYBUS OUTPUT
OUTPUT INPUT
RUN
BUS
ON

MODULO PT100
MPT
PT100 MODULE

PT1 MPT1 PT2 MPT2 PT3 MPT3 PT4 MPT4

6 PT1 PT8
49
7 MPT1 T1 T8 MPT8 48
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 8 47
PT2 PT7
11 44
MPT2 T2 T7 MPT7
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 12 43
13 42
PT3 PT6
15 40
MPT3 T3 T6 MPT6
16 39
17 38
PT4 PT5
OUTPUT INPUT ON
20 35
MPT4 T4 T5 MPT5
BUS 21 34
RUN
MODULO INGRESSI REMOTI MID-16 22 33

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
MID16
THYBUS INTPUT THYBUS OUTPUT
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28

52 5
IN1 IN9
51 6
50 7
IN2 IN10
49 8
OUTPUT INPUT ON
48 11
BUS IN3 IN11
MODULO INGRESSI REMOTI RUN
MID-16
47 12
43 13
BINARY INPUTS

IN4 IN12
42 14
41 15
IN5 IN13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 40 16
35 20
IN6 IN14
34 21
33 22
IN7 IN15
32 23
31 24
IN8 IN16
30 25
3

108
108 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INSTALLATION
 The maximum length of the Pro-N device - module link is:
• 2 m for MRI module (max one module)
• 20 m for MMOS-4 module (max one MMI module)
• 30 m for MID16 and MPT modules
• 2 m for MPT module (max one Pt100 module)
• 2 m for MCI module (max one current converter module)
For upgrading, that may be operated at any time with in service devices too, the following operations
must be performed:
• Turn OFF power supply
• Connect the auxiliary modules to the Thybus port in daisy chain mode following the INPUT-OUTPUT
sequence.[1]
• If two MID16 (binary inputs) are installed, the hardware address must be set to avoid communica-
tion collisions on the Thybus; for this purpose the default address must be changed on one module,
by means of dip-switch on the top circuit board (front plate must be removed).

default address modified address (2nd MID16 module)

8 1 8 1
OFF OFF

S1 ON S1 ON

MID16 hardware address setting DIP-MID16.ai

• Turn on power
• Go on to the sw setting (see SETTING section of instruction manual).

Note 1 The insertion order is free.

One MRI module, two MID16 modules, one MPT module, one MCI module and one MMI module (separate operator panel) can be connect at the
same time to the Thybus port (maximum expansion).

INSTALLATION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 109

 Block circuits
Block circuits may be connected to equipment located in a different switchboard: For the aim of
reliability, it is recommended to use conductors having a cross sectional thickness of at least 1 mm2
and to not exceed 5 km in length. For connections that are particularly critical in terms of electro-
magnetic pollution, it is recommended to use BFO adaptor modules with fibre optic connection.

TRIP I>>
BLIN1
BLOUT1

BLIN1
TRIP I>> Block2 IPh TRIP I>>
BLIN1
BLOUT1

TRIP I>>
Any device

Logic selectivity with BFO Block-sch.ai

When devices without committed pilot wire circuits must be embedded (devices other than Pro_N),
or in the event that further I/O circuits are need, output relays and binary inputs can be customized
to work in the logic selectivity system together with the committed pilot wire circuits.

S1
TRIP I>>
PRO_N

A19
BINARY INPUTS

Uaux
A20
A21
A22
BLOCK OUT

A17
BLOCK IN

BLOUT-
A15
A18 BLOUT+
A16
BLIN1

S2 S3
BLOUT1

TRIP I>> TRIP I>> PRO_N

START I>> A15

BLOCK OUT
BLOCK IN

BLOUT-
A17
BLOUT+ A16
A18

A19
BINARY INPUTS

A20
A21
A22

Example for accelerated protection system with joint use of binary input and pilot wire links Block-misto.ai

A ring network example[1] is shown on the following pages.

Block out signals concerning the NA11 devices (S3.1, S3.2 e S3.3) are split on two isolated outputs by
means of MRB devices (B2.1, B2.2 and B2.3) to allow proper selectivity logic operation..

Nota 1 All diagram must be considered just as example; they cannot be comprehensive for real applications.

110
110 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
Selectivity logic example
B1 B2 B3
RX2 BFO TX1 RX2 BFO TX1 RX2 BFO TX1
FO B1.1 Cu FO B1.2 Cu FO B1.3 Cu
Cu FO Cu FO Cu FO
FO Cu FO Cu FO Cu
Cu FO Cu FO Cu FO
TX2 RX1 TX2 RX1 TX2 RX1

NA60 NA60 NA60 NA60 NA60 NA60

BLIN
BLIN
BLIN
BLIN
BLIN
BLIN

S1.1 S2.1 S1.2 S2.2 S1.3 S2.3

67-67N 67-67N 67-67N 67-67N 67-67N 67-67N

BLOUT
BLOUT
BLOUT
BLOUT
BLOUT
BLOUT

MRB MRB MRB

NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009

B1.1 B1.2 B1.3

BLOUT1
BLOUT2
BLOUT3
BLOUT1
BLOUT2
BLOUT3
BLOUT1
BLOUT2
BLOUT3

BLIN1
BLIN1
BLIN1

BLOUT BLOUT BLOUT

50-51 50-51 50-51

50N 50N 50N
NA11 NA11 NA11
S3.1 S3.2 S3.3

SWITCHGEAR 1 SWITCHGEAR 2 SWITCHGEAR 3

111
112
112
SWITCHGEAR 1 SWITCHGEAR 2 SWITCHGEAR 3

Selectivity logic example

NA60 S1.1 NA60 S2.1 NA60 S1.2 NA60 S2.2 NA60 S1.3 NA60 S2.3

A16 A16 A16 A16 A16 A16

A15 A15 A15 A15 A15 A15

A18 A18 A18 A18 A18 A18

A17 A17 A17 A17 A17 A17

NA10 S3.1 MRB B1.1 NA10 S3.2 MRB B1.2 NA10 S3.3 MRB B1.3
3 3 3
BLOUT1 BLOUT1 BLOUT1 4
4 4

A16 BLOUT+ 11 BLIN- A16 BLOUT+ 11 BLIN- A16 BLOUT+ 11 BLIN-

5 5 5
BLOUT2 BLOUT2 BLOUT2
A15 BLOUT- 12 BLIN+ A15 BLOUT- 12 BLIN+ 6 A15 BLOUT- 12 BLIN+ 6
6

NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009

A18 7 A18 7 A18 7
BLOUT3 8 BLOUT3 8 BLOUT3 8
A17 A17 A17

BFO B1.1 BFO B1.2 BFO B1.3

RX2 20 RX2 20 RX2 20
OUT2 21 OUT2 21 OUT2 21

TX2 IN2+ 30 TX2 IN2+ 30 TX2 IN2+ 30

IN2- 29 IN2- 29 IN2- 29

RX1 22 RX1 22 RX1 22

OUT1 23 OUT1 23 OUT1 23

INSTALLATION
 6.4 NOMINAL CURRENT I n AND I En SETTING FOR TRADITIONAL CTs
Factory default settings:
• Nominal phase current In: 5 A
• Nominal residual current IEn: 1 A

To modify settings the plug-in module must be extracted from the case.

Turn off power supply before extracting or re-inserting the relay.

CAUTION If an attempting is made to insert a relay into an un-matching case, a mechanical code will prevent
full insertion. Demage can result if excessive force is applied.

The following operations must be performed:

• Remove the auxiliary supply
Unplug the RS485 and RJ45 cables (Ethernet and/or Thybus)

RS485 and RJ45 connectors Disconnect.ai

• Remove the upper tile and open the little door to access the fastening screws.

Removing tie to access the fastening screws Remove-tile.ai

INSTALLATION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 113

 • Unscrew gradually back to back the four fastening screw in order avoid loss of the internal washer.
Unmounting of the case from the switchboard is not needed.

Unmounting set-in.ai

• Split the MMI module and disconnect cable

Split MMI module from fixed module Split-MMI.ai

114
114 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INSTALLATION
 • Pull out the removable module grabbing the metal handles.

Pull-out the module from the case extract.ai

• Lean out the module on the grounded surface[1],

• Set the dip-switches on the right-hand circuit board in accordance with the drawing shown be-
low,

Note 1 There are components present which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
When the module is removed, it is important to pay particular attention to avoid any accidental contact with the internal components.
In order to avoid the static electricity accumulated in the human body from causing damage, it is recommended to observe the following precautions:
- eliminate any potential differences between the human body and the device by touching the metallic case,
- avoid touching the printed circuit and connections (tracks, component terminals),
- avoid handing the device to others,
- set the programming DIPs by using antistatic tools.

INSTALLATION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 115

 Dip-switch localization concerning the nominal current setting inside the CPU board set-in-0.ai

• Move dip-switches according the following layout.

IL1
IL2
IL3
IE

ETHERNET
5A Default settings:
S5 - In =5 A
1A - IEn =1 A
1 2 3 4
485
IL1
IL2
IL3
IE

5A Settings:
S5 - In =1 A
1A - IEn =1 A
1 2 3 4
IL1
IL2
IL3
IE

5A Settings:
S5 - In =1 A
1A - IEn =5 A
IL1
IL2
IL3
IE

5A
1 2 3 4
S5
IL1
IL2
IL3

1A
IE

1 2 3 4
5A Settings:
S5 - In =5 A
THYBUS
1A - IEn =5 A
1 2 3 4

Dip-switch localization concerning the nominal current setting inside the CPU board set-In.ai

• Reassemble all parts with the previous operations in reverse order.

• Reconnect the RS485 and RJ45 cables (Ethernet and/or Thybus).

116
116 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 INSTALLATION
 6.5 LED ALLOCATION
Following indicator LEDs are available on the front panel:

• LED ON (green): if no diagnostic anomalies are detected, the green LED is turned ON while any fault
is highlighted by flashing.
• LEDs 1...5 (red) are freely assignable from the user to any protective and/or control functions.
• LED START (yellow) committed for start information of any protective functions.
• LED TRIP (red) committed for trip information of any protective functions.

Start
ON & Diagnostic Trip

LED 1...5
user-programmable

LEDs Label_LED

6.6 FINAL OPERATIONS

Before energizing the electric board, it is advisable to check that:

• The auxiliary voltage in the panel falls within the operative range of Pro_N relays.
• The rated current (1 A or 5 A) of the line CT’s corresponds to the setting of Pro_N relays.
• All wirings are correct.
• All screws are tightly screwed.

INSTALLATION NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 117

 7 PROGRAMMING AND SETTINGS
All relay programming and adjustment operations may be performed through MMI (keyboard and
display) or using a Personal Computer with the aid of the ThySetter software.

Per motivi di sicurezza, la modifica di alcuni parametri richiede il reset hardware del relè:
- Grandezze nominali.
WARNING - Parametri relativi alla comunicazione Ethernet (IP host address, IP net mask, Autonegotiation).
La modifica diventa operativa dopo lo spegnimento e la rialimentazione del relè.

7.1 SW ThySetter
The ThySetter sw is a “browser” of data (setting, measure, etc..); it implements an engine that is
afford to rebuild the menu set up and the relationships to data concerning all Thytronic protective
relays by means of XML files.

ThySetter installation
The latest release of ThySetter can be downloaded free of charge from the www.pro-n.it site (Soft-
ware pc - area download).

ThySetter use
Please refer to ThySetter user manual for detailed instructions.
The document is available on www.pro-n.it site (Software pc - area download) site.

118
118 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 7.2 MMI (Man Machine Interface)

On the front panel there are eight buttons which allow the user to perform all the settings, reading
and modification operations.[1]

LEDs

OPEN CB

CLOSE CB

The adjustment of the settings and the operation mode of the output relays must be performed while
the unit is electrically powered; the alphanumeric display shows the necessary information with
reference to the operations performed through the keyboard. One minute after the keyboard is not
more in use, the display backlight switches automatically to OFF.
All preset values are permanently stored in the nonvolatile memory.
The buttons take the following operations:
- (Up) move the cursor upwards to the preceding menu options
- (Down) move the cursor downwards to the subsequent menu options
- (Left) move the cursor upwards to the preceding menu options
- (Right) move the cursor downwards to the subsequent menu options
- (Enter) access to the selected menu with the option of modifying any given parameter
- (Reset) abort the current changes and/or accessing the previous menu
- Circuit breaker Open command
- Circuit breaker Close command
At power-up, the display shows the text:
“THYTRONIC
PRO-NA11-xxx-x serial number
date and time: (01/01/2000 00:00”
The ON green Led points out the auxiliary power supply voltage (permanent lighted) and possible
faults (blink lighted).
The display backlight is automatically activated when any key switch is set.
By means of the (Up) or (Down) buttons, it is possible to cyclically browse through the menu
options:
READ, SET, COMMUNICATION, TEST
Having identified the sub-menu of interest, it is possible to gain access by using the (Right) button
and then analogously, run through the relevant options by using the (Up) or (Down) buttons.
The full menu tree and some examples are showed in the following pages (numerical values and
settings are pointed out as examples and does not agree with real situations.

Reading variables (READ)

All data (measure, settings, parameters, etc...) may be displayed:
“SERIAL NUMBER >>”
“INFO >>”
“MEASURES >>”
“ACTIVE PROFILE >>”
“PROTECTIONS >>”
“PLC >>”
“CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION >>”
“DELAYED INPUTS >>”
“INTERNAL STATES >>”
“RELAYS >>”
“PARTIAL COUNTERS >>”
“TOTAL COUNTERS >>”
“SELF-TEST >>”
“PILOT WIRE DIAGNOSTIC >>”
“SELECTIVE BLOCK BLOCK2 >>”
“FAULT RECORDING >>”
“EVENTS RECORDING >>”
Note 1 Setting changes are enabled when the La mEnabling setting by MMI parameter is set

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 119

Setting modifying (SET)
All changes in the setting parameters are carried out through MMI only if the Enable setting by MMI
parameter is ON. (ENABLE SETTING BY MMI submenu inside the SET menu).
To effect a change, having identified the parameter intended for change, the following procedure
must be performed:
• Select the parameter going through the menus by means the , and keys.
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by
flashing of the START and TRIP LEDs and by appearance of the pointer on the bottom.
• Move the cursor over the parameter intended for change using the (Enter) button,
• Change the parameters by means the (increment) or (decrement) buttons,
• Press the (Enter) button to move the cursor over the last parameter in the display,
• Press the (Enter) button once again; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps
flashing),
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; new message appears: “Confirm settings?”
• Answer to the message ENTER: YES to confirm changes or RESET: NO to abort.
The end of the START LED blinking points out the end of procedure; the changes become right now
active.
The abort command may be used to abandon changes (prior to use of the ENTER: YES); the same
effect is achieved by removing the auxiliary power supply to the NA60 relay.

As example, to set the operating mode of the K1 output relay as ENERGIZED, LATCHED, the following
procedure must be issued:
• By means (Down) button select the Set menu “SET >>”,
• Press the (Right) button to enter; the following submenu title i displayed: “BASE >>”
• Scroll menus by means (Down) button
“INPUTS >>”
“RELAYS >>”
“LEDS >>”
“SELF-TEST RELAY >>”
“MMI >>”
“AUTO-RECLOSE 79 >>”
“PROFILE SELECTION >>”
“PROFILE A >>”
“PROFILE B >>”
“PLC >>”
“CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION 52 >>”
“CT SUPERVISION 74CT >>”
“REMOTE TRIPPING >>”
“PILOT WIRE DIAGNOSTIC >>”
“DEMAND MEASURES >>”
• Select the Set menu “RELAYS >>”, the “K1 relay Setpoints >>” message is dis-
played,
• Press the (Right) button to enter; the following messages are displayed:
“Logic DE-ENERGIZED Mode NO LATCHED”
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by
the both START and TRIP flashing.
• Move the cursor over the parameter intended for change using the (Enter) button, (in our case
on the message “Logic DE-ENERGIZED”,
• Change the parameters by means the (increment) or (decrement) buttons, “Logic ENER-
GIZED”,
• Press the (Enter) button to move the cursor over the last parameter in the display, “Mode NO
LATCHED”,
• Change the parameters by means the (increment) or (decrement) buttons, “Mode
LATCHED”,
• Press the (Enter) button once again; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps
flashing),
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; new message appears: “Confirm settings?”
• Answer to the message ENTER: YES to confirm changes or RESET: NO to abort.
The end of the LED blinking points out the end of procedure.

120
120 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
TEST
The operational tests with command of the selected output relays may be activated.
By means of (Up) or (Down) buttons it is possible to browse the main menu till the “TEST”
message; to enter you must press the (Right) button.[1]
The display message “Test state: OFF” shows the test state (OFF or test in progress).
• Test K2
• Test K3
• Test K4
• Test K5
• Test K6
As example, to start the test of K1, the following procedure must be issued:
• Select the Start test menu “Start test >>”.
• Press the (Right) button to start; the test in progress status is highlighted by activation of all
LEDs,
• Come back by pressing the (Left) button and select the relay to be tested by means the or
buttons until the message “Test K1 >>” is displayed.
• Press the (Right) button to start the test.
• To terminate the test, it is necessary to select the “Stop test >>” message and press the
(Right) button to end the test. In any case the test will be automatically terminated after a delay of
one minute.

COMMUNICATION
Inside the COMMUNICATION menu it is possible to read/modify the setting data of the RS485 Proto-
col and Ethernet parameters.
By means of (Up) or (Down) buttons it is possible to browse the main menu till the “RS485
Protocol >>” or “Ethernet parameters >>” message; to enter you must press the
(Right) button.
As example, to select the address 12 for the ModBus protocol, the following procedure must be
issued:
• Select the Communication menu “COMMUNICATION >>”.
• By means (Down) button select the “RS485 Protocol >>”.
• Press the (Right) button to enter; the following message is displayed:
“Protocol MODBUS”
“Address 1”
“9600 baud”
• Start the procedure to effect a change explained in the Setting modifying (SET) paragraph:
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by
the both START and TRIP flashing.
• Move the cursor over the parameter intended for change using the (Enter) button, (in the ex-
ample on the 1 address),
• Change the parameters by means the (increment) button (up to 12 address),
• Press the (Enter) button to move the cursor over the last parameter in the display,
• Press the (Enter) button once again; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps
flashing),
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; new message appears: “Confirm settings?”
• Answer to the message ENTER: YES to confirm changes or RESET: NO to abort.
The end of the LED blinking points out the end of procedure.

Circuit breaker commands

By means of the (Open) and (Close) keys, the circuit breaker commands may be issued.
The committed output relays must be enabled inside the Circuit Breaker supervision \
LEDs-relays allocation menu.

Note 1 Instantly all the relays are switched in rest state, including relays programmed as “normally energized”

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 121

 7.3 MENU TREE

THYTRONIC
PRO-NA11-C00-c
DATE: 01/08/2007
TIME: 17:29:59 IL1 0.000 In
IL2 0.000 In
MMI module ON IL3 0.000 In
MODULES MRI module ON IE 0.000 IEn
------------------ ILmax 0.000 In
ILmin 0.000 In
IL 0.000 In

Serial number IL1-2nd 0.000 In

SERIAL NUMBER 200225 IL2-2nd 0.000 In
IL3-2nd 0.000 In
I-2nd/IL 0.000 %
Code NA10 IL1-3rd 0.000 In
INFO Ver.sw 1.21 IL2-3rd 0.000 In
DSP fw Rel 1.10 IL3-3rd 0.000 In
IE-3rd 0.000 IEn
IL1-4th 0.000 In
MEASURES IL2-4th 0.000 In
IL3-4th 0.000 In
IL1-5th 0.000 In
IL2-5th 0.000 In
IL3-5th 0.000 In
f 50.000 Hz
IL1FIX 0.000 In
IL2FIX 0.000 In
IL3FIX 0.000 In
IL1ROL 0.000 In 50/51
IL2ROL 0.000 In Start I> OFF
IL3ROL 0.000 In Trip I> OFF
CLP I> OFF
IL1MAX 0.000 In
BLK1 I> OFF
IL2MAX 0.000 In
BLK2IN I> OFF
ACTIVE PROFILE Profile A IL3MAX 0.000 In
IL1MIN 0.000 In Start I>> OFF
IL2MIN 0.000 In Trip I>> OFF
IL3MIN 0.000 In CLP I>> OFF
BLK1 I>> OFF
BLK2IN I>> OFF
ActiveMode 79 OFF
Run 79 OFF Start I>>> OFF
CycleState 79 Rest Trip I>>> OFF
Residual-time 79 CLP I>>> OFF
0s BLK1 I>>> OFF
LastEvent 79 BLK2IN I>>> OFF
No events
79
50/51
50N/51N
PROTECTIONS 2ndh-REST 50N/51N
Start I2ndh> OFF
74TCS Start IE> OFF
BF Trip IE> OFF
74CT Start 74TCS OFF CLP IE> OFF
READ Trip 74TCS OFF BLK1 IE> OFF
BLK1 74TCS OFF BLK2IN IE> OFF

BF Start IE>> OFF

Trip Int/Ext OFF Trip IE>> OFF
Start IBF> OFF CLP IE>> OFF
Start IEBF> OFF BLK1 IE>> OFF
Start BF OFF BLK2IN IE>> OFF
Trip BF OFF Start IE>>> OFF
BLK1 BF OFF Trip IE>>> OFF
CLP IE>>> OFF
BLK1 IE>>> OFF
74CT
BLK2IN IE>>> OFF
Start I* OFF
Trip S< OFF
BLK1 OFF

User SW name: xxx

DATE: 01/08/2007
PLC state: RESET
PLC version: 01.01
PLC
Error: none
Warning: none PLC State 1: 0
PLC State 2: 0
PLC STATES
PLC State x: 0
PLC State 32: 0

CB-OPEN Cmd OFF

CB-CLOSE Cmd OFF
CB state ?
CB COMMANDS State N.Open OFF
CIRCUIT BREAKER CB POSITION State SumI OFF
SUPERVISION CB DIAGNOSTIC State SumI^2t OFF
State tbreak OFF
SumIL1 0 In
SumIL2 0 In
SumIL3 0 In
SumIL1^2t 0 In^2s
Binary IN1 OFF SumIL2^2t 0 In^2s
PROCEED READ MENU’ DELAYED INPUTS Binary IN2 OFF SumIL3^2t 0 In^2s
NA10_menu1.ai

122
122 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 INTERNAL STATES ParRR79cnt 0
LEDs reset OFF ParSR79cnt 0
Prof. switch OFF ParDR79cnt 0
Block1: OFF ParFR79cnt 0
Block2: ParFR79Ecnt 0
PREVIOUS READ MENU’ Generic OFF
Block2 50 OFF ParStI>cnt 0
Block2 50N OFF ParTrI>cnt 0
TCS1 OFF ParBk1I>cnt 0
TCS2 OFF ParBk2I>cnt 0
INTERNAL STATES ParStI>>cnt 0
Ext.trip BF OFF
Remote trip OFF ParTrI>>cnt 0
52a OFF ParBk1I>>cnt 0
52b OFF ParBk2I>>cnt 0
CB OPEN Cmd OFF ParStI>>>cnt 0 TotRR79cnt 0
CB CLOSE Cmd OFF ParTrI>>>cnt 0 TotSR79cnt 0
CB Monitor OFF ParBk1I>>>cnt 0 TotDR79cnt 0
Reset count. OFF ParBk2I>>>cnt 0 TotFR79cnt 0
Fault trig OFF TotFR79Ecnt 0
ParStIE>cnt 0
Reset Demand OFF
ParTrIE>cnt 0
StI>cnt 0
K1 relay OFF ParBk1IE>cnt 0
TotTrI>cnt 0
K1 coil OK ParBk2IE>cnt 0 TotBk1I>cnt 0
K2 relay OFF ParStIE>>cnt 0
TotBk2I>cnt 0
K2 coil OK ParTrIE>>cnt 0
TotStI>>cnt 0
K3 relay OFF ParBk1IE>>cnt 0
TotTrI>>cnt 0
K3 coil OK ParBk2IE>>cnt 0
RELAYS TotBk1I>>cnt 0
K4 relay OFF ParStIE>>>cnt 0
TotBk2I>>cnt 0
K4 coil OK ParTrIE>>>cnt 0
TotStI>>>cnt 0
K5 relay OFF ParBk1IE>>>cnt 0
TotTrI>>>cnt 0
K5 coil OK ParBk2IE>>>cnt 0
TotBk1I>>>cnt 0
K6 relay OFF ParStI2ndh>cnt 0 TotBk2I>>>cnt 0
K6 coil OK
ParTr74TCScnt 0
79 Counters ParBk1-74TCScnt 0 TotStIE>cnt 0
50/51 Counters TotTrIE>cnt 0
50N/51N Counters ParN.OpenCBcnt 0 TotBk1IE>cnt 0
2ndh-REST Counters ParTr74CTcnt 0 TotBk2IE>cnt 0
PARTIAL COUNTERS 74TCS Counters ParBk1-74CTcnt 0 TotStIE>>cnt 0
CB Counters ParTrIE>>cnt 0
74CT Counters ParStBFcnt 0 TotBk1IE>>cnt 0
BF Counters ParTrTrcnt 0 TotBk2IE>>cnt 0
ParBk1BFcnt 0 TotStIE>>>cnt 0
79 Counters TotTrIE>>>cnt 0
50/51 Counters TotBk1IE>>>cnt 0
50N/51N Counters TotBk2IE>>>cnt 0
2ndh-REST Counters
TOTAL COUNTERS 74TCS Counters TotStI2ndh>cnt 0
CB Counters
74CT Counters TotTr74TCScnt 0
READ BF Counters TotBk1-74TCScnt 0
Protections TotN.OpenCBcnt 0
ON SERVICE
Global self-testOK TotTr74CTcnt 0
System OK TotBk1-74CTcnt 0
Data-base:
boot OK TotStBFcnt 0
run-time OK TotTrTrcnt 0
Data BUS: TotBk1BFcnt 0
heavy OK
minor OK
DSP:
state RUN
boot OK
run-time RUN
Ram:
boot OK
run-time OK
SELF-TEST Oscillography:
run-time OK
PLC:
boot OK
run-time OK
I/O verify:
boot OK
major OK
minor OK
I/O verify PLC:
boot OK
major OK
minor OK
PLC:
boot OK
run-time OK
Program OK
PILOT WIRE BreakedBLIN1 OFF
DIAGNOSTIC ShortedBLIN1 OFF BLOCK2IN-IPh OFF
BLOCK2IN-IE OFF ST-IPh-BLK2 OFF
SELECTIVE BLOCK BLOCK2 INPUT tB timeout OFF ST-IE-BLK2 OFF
BLOCK2 BLOCK2 OUTPUT BLK2OUT-IPh OFF
BLK2OUT-IE OFF
Fault 0 (last) Fault 0 Cause:
No faults BLK2OUT-IPh/IE OFF
Fault 1
FAULT RECORDING Fault 2 Operating phase:
Fault ... Date:
Fault 299 Time:
IL1r: 0 In
Event0 (last): IL2r: 0 In
Settings IL3r: 0 In Fault .. cause:
Date No faults
IEr: 0 IEn
Time Operating phase:
Binary IN:
Date:
Event1: Relay OUT:
Time:
EVENTS RECORDING Settings IL1r: 0 In
Date IL2r: 0 In
Time Eventx:
Settings IL3r: 0 In
Date IEr: 0 IEn
Event19: Binary IN:
Time
Settings Relay OUT:
Date
Time NA10_menu2.ai

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 123

 Plant
.................
Reading RELATIVE
In 5 A
BASE
Inp 100 A
IEn 1 A Logic Active-ON
IEnp 100 A ON Delay
fn 50 Hz tIN1ON 0 s
OFF Delay
tIN1OFF 0 s
IN1 matching None
Binary input IN1 Logic Active-ON
BINARY INPUTS Binary input IN2 ON Delay
Binary input INx tIN2ON 0 s
OFF Delay
tIN2OFF 0 s
IN2 matching None

Logic DE-ENERGIZED
K1 relay Mode NO LATCHED
K2 relay Min. pulse width
K3 relay tTR1 150 ms
RELAYS K4 relay
Logic DE-ENERGIZED
K5 relay
Mode NO LATCHED
Kx relay
Min. pulse width
tTR6 150 ms
Start LED logic
NO LATCHED
Trip LED logic
NO LATCHED
LED 1 logic
NO LATCHED
LEDs LED 2 logic
NO LATCHED
LED 3 logic
NO LATCHED
LED 4 logic
NO LATCHED
LED x logic
NO LATCHED

Minor failure
SELF-TEST alarm YES
Self-test relay -

Param. setting
MMI
enable ON

79 Enable OFF
79 Mode Rapid+Slow
N.DAR 3
trdt 0.3 s
tsdt 30 s
tr 180 s
td1 5 s
SET td2 5 s I> Enable OFF
MC-td-en OFF ICLP> Mode OFF
td 5 s tCLP> 0.1 s
MO-RES ON t>RES 0 s
Phase trip Type Characteristic:
79-I> OFF
AUTO/RECLOSE 79 79-I>> OFF I>Curve DEFINITE
79-I>>> OFF I>def enable OFF
Earth trip I>def 1 In
79-IE> OFF ICLP>def 2 In
79-IE>> OFF t>def 1 s
79-IE>>> OFF I>inv enable OFF
Relay 79 I>inv 1 In
79-Run-K - ICLP>inv 2 In
79-AR-K -
79-Fail-K - t>inv 10 s I>> Enable OFF
LEDs 79 I>BLK1 OFF ICLP>> Mode OFF
79-Run-L - I>BLK2IN OFF tCLP>> 0.1 s
79-AR-L - I>BLK2OUT OFF t>>RES 0 s
79-Fail-L - I>2ndh-REST OFF Type Characteristic:
I>BF OFF I>>Curve DEFINITE
Relays I> I>>def enable OFF
I>ST-K - I>>def 1 In
Active Profle
I>TR-K - ICLP>>def 2 In
A
LEDs I> t>>def 1 s
I>ST-L - I>>inv enable OFF
I>TR-L - I>>inv 1 In
I> Element
50/51 I>> Element ICLP>>inv 2 In
I>>> Element t>>inv 5 s
I>>> Enable OFF I>>BLK1 OFF
ICLP>>> Mode OFF I>>BLK2IN OFF
tCLP>>> 0.1 s I>>BLK2OUT OFF
t>>>RES 0 s I>>2ndh-REST OFF
I>>>def enable OFF I>>BF OFF
PROFILE A I>>>def 1 In I>disbyI>> OFF
ICLP>>>def 2 In Relays I>>
t>>>def 1 s I>>ST-K -
I>>>BLK1 OFF I>>TR-K -
I>>>BLK2IN OFF LEDs I>>
I>>>BLK2OUT OFF I>>ST-L -
I>>>2ndh-REST OFF I>>TR-L -
I>>>BF OFF
I>disbyI>>> OFF
I>>disbyI>>> OFF
Relays I>>>
I>>>ST-K -
I>>>TR-K -
LEDs I>>>
PROCEED SET MENU’ PROCEED PROFILE A MENU’ I>>>ST-L -
I>>>TR-L -
NA10_menuset1.ai

124
124 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 PREVIOUS PROFILE A MENU’
IE> Enable OFF
IECLP> Mode OFF
tECLP> 0.1 s
tE>RES 0 s
PREVIOUS SET MENU’ Type Characteristic:
IE>Curve DEFINITE
IE>def enable OFF
IE>def 1 IEn
IECLP>def 2 IEn
tE>def 1 s
IE>inv enable OFF
IE>inv 1 IEn
IECLP>inv 2 IEn
tE>inv 10 s
IE>BLK1 OFF
IE>BLK2IN OFF
IE>BLK2OUT OFF IE>> Enable OFF
IE>BLK4 OFF IECLP>> Mode OFF
IE>2ndh-REST OFF tECLP>> 0.1 s
IE>BF OFF tE>>RES 0 s
Relays IE> IE>>def enable OFF
IE>ST-K - IE>>def 1 IEn
IE>TR-K - IECLP>>def 2 IEn
LEDs IE> tE>>def 1 s
IE>ST-L - IE>>BLK1 OFF
IE> Element IE>TR-L - IE>>BLK2IN OFF
50N/51N IE>> Element IE>>BLK2OUT OFF
IE>>> Element IE>>BLK4 OFF
IE>>> Enable OFF IE>>2ndh-REST OFF
IECLP>>> Mode OFF IE>>BF OFF
tECLP>>> 0.1 s IE>disbyIE>> OFF
tE>>>RES 0 s Relays IE>>
IE>>>def enable OFF IE>>ST-K -
IE>>>def 1 IEn IE>>TR-K -
IECLP>>>def 2 IEn LEDs IE>>
tE>>>def 1 s IE>>ST-L -
IE>>>BLK1 OFF IE>>TR-L -
I2ndh> Enable OFF IE>>>BLK2IN OFF
I2ndh> 10 % IE>>>BLK2OUT OFF
SET
t2ndh>RES 0.1 s IE>>>BLK4 OFF
2nd-REST Relays I2ndh> IE>>>2ndh-REST OFF
I2ndh>ST-K - IE>>>BF OFF
LEDs I2ndh> IE>disbyIE>>> OFF
I2ndh>ST-L - IE>>disbyIE>>> OFF
Relays IE>>>
IE>>>ST-K -
74TCS Enable OFF IE>>>TR-K -
74TCS-BLK1 OFF LEDs IE>>>
Relays 74TCS IE>>>ST-L -
IE>>>TR-L -
74TCS-ST-K -
74TCS
74TCS-TR-K -
LEDs 74TCS
74TCS-ST-L -
74TCS-TR-L -
ModeBLIN1 OFF
tB-IPh 2 s
ModeBLOUT1 OFF
tB-IE 2 s
tF-IPh 1 s
BLOCK2 INPUT Relays BLOCK2IN
tB-K - tF-IE 1 s
BLOCK2 LEDs BLOCK2IN tF-Iph/IE 1 s
tB-L - Relays BLOCK2OUT
BLK2OUT-IPh-K -
BLOCK2 OUTPUT BLK2OUT-IE-K -
BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K-
BF Enable OFF LEDs BLOCK2OUT
IBF> enable ON BLK2OUT-IPh-L -
IBF> 0.1 In BLK2OUT-IE-L -
IEBF> enable ON BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L-
IEBF> 0.1 IEn
tBF 1 s
BF-BLK1 OFF
BF
CB Input ON
Relays BF
BF-ST-K -
BF-TR-K -
LEDs BF
BF-ST-L -
BF-TR-L -

PROFILE B SAME FOR PROFILE A

Switch 1: 0
Enable ON Switch 2: 0
Relays K1 Switch x: 0
PLC LEDS L1 Switch 32: 0
ModeN.Open OFF
PLC SWITCHES PLC Timer 1: 0 N.Open 10000
PLC TIMERS PLC Timer 2: 0 ModeSumI OFF
PLC Timer x: 0 SumI 5000 In
PLC Timer 24: 0 ModeSumI^2t OFF
tbreak 0.05 s
CBopen-K - SumI^2t 5000In^2s
CBclose-K - Mode-tOpen OFF
LEDs-Relays allocation CBopen-L - Ktrig-break -
CIRCUIT BREAKER tbreak 1 s
SUPERVISION CBclose-L -
Relays
CB Diagnostic N.Open-K -
SumI-K -
SumI-2t-K -
tbreak-K -
LEDs
N.Open-L -
SumI-L -
SumI-2t-L -
tbreak-L -
PROCEED SET MENU’ PROCEED PROFILE A MENU’ NA11_menuset2.ai

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 125

 PREVIOUS PROFILE A MENU’

PREVIOUS SET MENU’

74CT Enable OFF

S< 0.5
I*enable ON
I* 0.1 In
CT SUPERVISION tS< 1 s
74CT S<BLK1 OFF
Relays S<
S<TR-K -
LEDs S<
S<TR-L -

Relays
REMOTE RemTrip-K -
TRIPPING LEDs
RemTrip -
SET

PulseBLOUT1 OFF
PulseBLIN1 OFF
PILOT WIRE Relays
DIAGNOSTIC PulseBLIN1-K -
LEDs
PulseBLIN1-L -

Periods
DEMAND tFix 15 min
MEASURES tRoll 5 min
N.ROL 12

Protocol MODBUS
RS485
Address 1
Protocol
9600 baud
COMMUNICATION IP Address
200.1.2.222
Ethernet SubNet Mask
Parameters 255.255.255.0
Autonegotiation ON
NTP Synch. OFF
Test state: OFF
Stop test? >>
Start test? >>
Test K1 ? >>
TEST Test K2 ? >>
Test K3 ? >>
Test K4 ? >>
Test K5 ? >>
Test K6 ? >>

NA60_menuset5.ai

126
126 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 7.4 MAINTENANCE

The Pro-N relays do not require any particular maintenance; all circuits use high quality static com-
ponents, the subassembly products undergo dynamic checks on their functioning before the final
assembling of the complete equipment. The dedicated circuits and the firmware for the self-test
function continuously check the relay operation; the continuously operating auto-zeroing function
dynamically corrects the measuring errors due to offset, heat dependent drifts, aging of components,
etc.
The microprocessor is equipped with a watch-dog circuit which restores the correct operation of
the firmware in case of fault.
The possibility of reading the value of the signals measured on the display (the NA60 relay used as an
ammeter) allows one to check both the system parameters and the operation of the protection relays
at any time. The NA60 relay can be preset as well to show the current values referred to the nominal
current of the current transformers, as directly in primary amperes (according to the preset value of
CT’s nominal primary current); the same is done for the input voltages.
If connected to the central control unit, all data available on the display can be checked and pro-
cessed thus performing a continuous check and maintenance.

7.5 REPAIR
No repair of possible faults by the client is foreseen; if following to any irregularity of operation, the
above tests confirm the presence of a fault, it will be necessary to send the relay to the factory for
the repair and the consequent settings and checks.

7.6 PACKAGING
The Pro-N devices must be stored within the required temperature limits; the relative humidity should
not cause condensation or formation of frost.
It is recommended that the devices are stored in their packaging; in the case of long storage, espe-
cially in extreme climatic conditions, it is recommended that the device is supplied with power for
some hours before the commissioning, in order to bring the circuits to the rating conditions and to
stabilize the operation of the components.

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 127

 8 APPENDIX
8.1 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time IEC curves
‡ Mathematical formula
The mathematical formula, according the IEC 60255-3/BS142 standards is:[1]

K
t = t> inv ·
[(I/I> inv)α-1]

Where:
• t = operate time (in seconds)
• t I>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds)
• I = input current
• I>inv = threshold setting

K coefficient:
• K = 0.14 for IEC-A curve (Normal inverse)
• K = 13.5 for IEC-B curve (Very inverse)
• K = 80 for IEC-C curve (Extremely inverse)

α curve shape constant:

• α = 0.02 for IEC-A curve (Normal inverse)
• α = 1 for IEC-B curve (Very inverse)
• α = 2 for IEC-C curve (Extremely inverse)

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I /I>inv ≤ 20
• If I> pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In

Note 1 Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/51 and
50N/51N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section
Note 2 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point
Nota 3 With setting more than 2.5 In for the 50/51 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/51N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50
In and 10 IEn respectively.

128
128 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
‡ Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)

t [s]
10000 0.14
t =t> inv ·
[(I/I> inv)0.02-1]

1000

t> inv = 60 s
100

t> inv = 10 s

t> inv = 5 s
10

t> inv = 1 s

t> inv = 0.5 s

1

t> inv = 0.2 s

t> inv = 0.1 s

0.1 t> inv = 0.02 s

0.01
I /I>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 700
F_51-IECA-Char.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 129

‡ Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)

t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 13.5
[(I/I> inv) -1]

1000

100

t> inv = 60 s

10
t> inv = 10 s

t> inv = 5 s

1
t> inv = 1 s

t> inv = 0.5 s

t> inv = 0.1 s

t> inv = 0.2 s

0.1 t> inv = 0.02 s

0.01
I /I>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 14.5
F_51-IECB-Char.ai

130
130 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
‡ Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)

t [s]
100000
t =t> inv · 80
[(I/I> inv)2-1]

10000

1000

100

t> inv = 60 s
10

t> inv = 10 s

1 t> inv = 5 s

t> inv = 1 s

0.1
t> inv = 0.02 s t> inv = 0.1 s t> inv = 0.2 s t> inv = 0.5 s

0.01 I /I >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 9
F_51-IECC-Char.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 131

‡ Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)

t [s]
10000 0.14
t =t E> inv ·
[(IE/IE> inv)0.02-1]

1000

t E>inv = 60 s
100

t E>inv = 10 s

t E>inv = 5 s
10

t E>inv = 1 s

t E>inv = 0.5 s
1

t E>inv = 0.2 s

t E>inv = 0.1 s

0.1 t E>inv = 0.02 s

0.01
IE /IE >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 700
F_51N-IECA-Char.ai

132
132 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
‡ Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)

t [s]
10000
t =t E> inv · 13.5
[(IE/IE> inv) -1]

1000

100

t E>inv = 60 s

10
t E>inv = 10 s

t E>inv = 5 s

1
t E>inv = 1 s

t E>inv = 0.5 s
t E>inv = 0.1 s

t E>inv = 0.2 s

0.1 t E>inv = 0.02 s

0.01
I E /IE >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 14.5
F_51N-IECB-Char.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 133

‡ Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)

t [s]
100000 80
t =t E> inv ·
[(IE/IE> inv)2-1]

10000

1000

100

t E> inv = 60 s
10

t E> inv = 10 s

1 t E> inv = 5 s

t E> inv = 1 s

0.1
t E> inv = 0.02 s t E> inv = 0.1 s t E> inv = 0.2 s t E> inv = 0.5 s

0.01 IE /IE >inv

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 9
F_51-IECC-Char.ai

134
134 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 8.2 APPENDIX A2 - Inverse time ANSI/IEEE curves
‡ Mathematical formula
The mathematical formula, according the ANSI/IEEE standards is:[1]

K
t = t> inv · +L
[(I/I> inv)α-1]

Where:
• t = operate time (in seconds)
• t I>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds)
• I = input current
• I>inv = threshold setting

K coefficient:
• K = 0.01 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve
• K = 3.922 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve
• K = 5.64 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

α curve shape constant:

• α = 0.02 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve
• α = 2 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve
• α = 2 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

L coefficient:
• L = 0.023 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve
• L = 0.098 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve
• L = 0.024 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I /I>inv ≤ 20
• If I> pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In

Note 1 Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/51 and
50N/51N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section
Note 2 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point
Nota 3 With setting more than 2.5 In for the 50/51 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/51N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50
In and 10 IEn respectively.

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 135

‡ Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)

t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 0.01
+ 0.023
[(I/I> inv)0.02 -1]

1000

100

t> inv = 60 s
10

t> inv = 10 s

1 t> inv = 5 s

t> inv = 0.1 s t> inv = 1 s

t> inv = 0.5 s
t> inv = 0.2 s
0.1
t> inv = 0.02 s

0.01
I /I >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 1.664
F_51-ANSIMI-Char.ai

136
136 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
‡ Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)

t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 3.922
+ 0.092
[(I/I> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

10

t> inv = 60 s

t> inv = 10 s
1
t> inv = 0.02 s

t> inv = 0.1 s t> inv = 5 s

t> inv = 0.2 s

t> inv = 0.5 s

t> inv = 1 s
0.1

0.01
I /I >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 2.306
F_51-ANSIVI-Char.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 137

‡ Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)

t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 5.64
+ 0.024
[(I/I> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

10

t> inv = 60 s

1
t> inv = 0.02 s

t> inv = 0.1 s

t> inv = 0.2 s t> inv = 10 s

t> inv = 0.5 s

t> inv = 5 s
t> inv = 1 s

0.1

0.01
I /I >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 2.789
F_51-ANSIEI-Char.ai

138
138 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
‡ Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)

t [s]
10000 0.01
t =t E> inv · + 0.023
[(IE/IE> inv)0.02 -1]

1000

100

t E > inv = 60 s
10

t E > inv = 10 s

1 t E > inv = 5 s

t E > inv = 0.1 s t E > inv = 1 s

t E > inv = 0.5 s
t E > inv = 0.2 s

0.1

t E > inv = 0.02 s

0.01
IE /IE >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 1.664
F_51N-ANSIMI-Char.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 139

‡ Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)

t [s]
10000
t =tE > inv · 3.922
+ 0.092
[(IE /IE > inv)2 -1]

1000

100

10

t E > inv = 60 s

t E > inv = 10 s
1
t E > inv = 0.02 s

t E > inv = 0.1 s t E > inv = 5 s

t E > inv = 0.2 s

t E > inv = 0.5 s

t E > inv = 1 s
0.1

0.01
IE /IE >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 2.306
F_51N-ANSIVI-Char.ai

140
140 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
‡ Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)

t [s]
10000
t =t E> inv · 5.64
+ 0.024
[(IE/IE> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

10

t E > inv = 60 s

1
t E > inv = 0.02 s

t E > inv = 0.1 s

t E > inv = 0.2 s t E > inv = 10 s

t E > inv = 0.5 s

t E > inv = 5 s
t E > inv = 1 s

0.1

0.01
IE /IE >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 2.789
F_51N-ANSIEI-Char.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 141

 8.3 APPENDIX A3 - Inverse time - RECTIFIER, I2t and EM curves

‡ Mathematical formula
The mathematical formula for RECTIFIER, I-squared-t (I2t) and Electromechanical curves (EM) is:[1]

K
t = t>inv ·
A·(I/I> inv)α-B]

Where:

• t = operate time (in seconds)

• t I>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds)
• I = input current
• I>inv = threshold setting

K = coefficient:
• K = 2351 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• K = 16 for I2t curve
• K = 0.28 for Electromechanical curve (EM)

α = curve shape constant:

• α = 5.6 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• α = 2 for I-squared-t (I2t) curve
• α = -1 for Electromechanical curve (EM)

A = coefficient:
• A = 1 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• A = 1 for I-squared-t (I2t) curve
• A = -0.236 for Electromechanical curve (EM)

B = coefficient:
• B = 1 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• B = 0 for I-squared-t (I2t) curve
• B = -0.339 for Electromechanical curve (EM)

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20
• If I> pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In

Note 1 Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/51 and
50N/51N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section
Note 2 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point
Nota 3 With setting more than 2.5 In for the 50/51 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/51N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50
In and 10 IEn respectively.

142
142 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
‡ Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Rectifier curves

t [s]
1000 000 2351
t =t> inv ·
[(I/I> inv)5.6 -1]

100 000

10 000

1000

100 t> inv = 60 s

t> inv = 10 s

t> inv = 5 s
10

t> inv = 1 s

t> inv = 0.5 s

1
t> inv = 0.1 s

0.1 t> inv = 0.02 s

t> inv = 0.1 s

0.01
I /I >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 4
F_51-RI-Char.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 143

‡ Phase overcurrent 50/51 - I2t inverse curves (I2t=K)

t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 16
[(I/I> inv)2]

1000

100

10

t>inv = 60 s
t>>inv = 60 s

t>inv = 1 s
t>>inv = 1 s
1
t>inv = 0.5 s
t>>inv = 0.5 s
t>inv = 0.2 s
t>inv = 10 s
t>>inv = 0.2 s
t>>inv = 10 s

t>inv = 0.02 s t>inv = 5 s

t>>inv = 0.02 s t>>inv = 5 s

0.1
t>inv = 0.1 s
t>>inv = 0.1 s

I /I >inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
I /I >>inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 4
F_51-I2t-Char.ai

144
144 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
‡ Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)

t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 0.28
-0.236 · [(I/I> inv)-1 -0.339]

1000

100

t> inv = 60 s

10 t> inv = 10 s

t> inv = 5 s

1
t> inv = 1 s

t> inv = 0.5 s

t> inv = 0.02 s t> inv = 0.2 s

t> inv = 0.1 s

0.1

0.01
2 3 4 5 6
I /I>inv
7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 4
F_51-EM-Char.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 145

‡ Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)

t [s]
10000
t =tE > inv · 0.28
-0.236 · [(IE /IE > inv)-1 - 0.339]

1000

100

t E > inv = 60 s

10 t E > inv = 10 s

t E > inv = 5 s

1
t E > inv = 1 s

t E > inv = 0.5 s

t E > inv = 0.02 s t E > inv = 0.2 s

t E > inv = 0.1 s

0.1

0.01
2 3 4 5 6
IE /IE >inv
7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 4
F_51N-EM-Char.ai

146
146 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 8.4 APPENDIX B1 - I/O Diagram

L1 L2 L3 NA11

P1 C1
S1

TRADITIONAL CTs CURRENT INPUTS

IL1
S2 C2
P2 K1 A3
C3 A4
IL2 In A5
C4 1A/5A K2 A6
C5 A7

OUTPUT RELAYS
IL3 A8
C6 K3 A9
P1 C7 K4 A10
S1
IE A11
S2 C8
P2 K5 A12

K6 A13
Alternative A14

P1
S1 4 + LPCT Setting
F1
IL1
LPCTs CURRENT INPUTS

S2 6 - L1 F2
RS485

P2 F3
L2 B-
4 + F4
A+
IL2 F5
6 - L3

50 A
100 A
200 A

4 +
400 A
800 A
IL3 In=50...1250A
ETHERNET

6 -
D1

THYBUS
E1
A1 ≅
UAUX
A2
BLOCK OUT
BLOCK IN

A17 BLOUT-
A15
BLOUT+
A18 A16
BINARY INPUTS

A19
IN1 FRONT PANEL
A20
RS232

A21
IN2
A22

Input/Output circuits NA11-I-O.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 147

 8.5 APPENDIX B2 - Interfaces

F1
F2
RS485

F3
B- F4 Supervision
A+ F5 unit
ETHERNET

D1
HUB

THYBUS
E1 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28

OUTPUT INPUT
N.8 Pt100
RUN
BUS
ON

MODULO PT100
MPT
PT100 MODULE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28

OUTPUT INPUT
N.16 binary inputs
RUN
BUS
ON

MODULO INGRESSI REMOTI MID16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28

N.8 binary inputs

+ 4 output relay
OUTPUT
OUTPUT INPUT
INPUT ON
RUN
BUS
ON

BUS
MODULO 4 RELE’ + 8 INGRESSI DIGITALI MID8
1
2
3
4
5

MODULO INGRESSI REMOTI RUN MRI

4 RELAYS + 8 BINARY INPUTS MODULE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

FRONT PANEL
RS232

Interfaces.ai

148
148 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 8.6 APPENDIX B3 - Connection diagrams
Note: Some typical connection diagram are shown.
All diagram must be considered just as example; they cannot be comprehensive for real applications.
For all diagrams the output contacts are shown in de-energized state for standard reference.

L1
L2
L3

NA11

P1 C1
S1
IL1
S2 C2
P2
C3
IL2 74CT 50/51
C4
C5
IL3
C6
50BF

P1 C7
S1
IE 50N/51N
S2 C8
P2

79

A19
BINARY INPUTS

IN1
A20
CB position
A21
IN2
A22

Three phase CTs and residual current from core balanced CT NA11-SCH.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 149

 L1
L2
L3

NA11

P1 C1
S1
IL1
S2 C2
P2
C3
IL2 74CT 50/51
C4
C5
IL3
C6
50BF

P1 C7
S1
IE 50N/51N
S2 C8
P2

79

A19
BINARY INPUTS

IN1
A20
CB position
A21
IN2
A22

Two phase CTs and residual current from core balanced CT NA11-SCH2.ai

150
150 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 L1
L2
L3

NA11

P1 C1
S1
IL1
S2 C2
P2
C3
IL2 74CT 50/51
C4
C5
IL3
C6
50BF

C7
IE 50N/51N
C8

79

A19
BINARY INPUTS

IN1
A20
CB position
A21
IN2
A22

Three phase CTs and residual current from common return of phase CTs (Holmgreen) NA11-SCH4.ai

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 151

 L1 L2 L3

NA11

P1
S1
S2
P2

P1 C1
S1
IL1
S2 C2
P2
C3
IL2 74CT 50/51
C4
C5
IL3
C6
50BF

C7
IE 50N/51N
C8

79

A19
BINARY INPUTS

IN1
A20
CB position
A21
IN2
A22

Transformer protection example - low voltage side NA11-SCH5.ai

152
152 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 8.7 APPENDIX C - Dimensions

FRONT VIEWS REAR VIEWS

128.5
107 120 101 ø 4.5 110

D1 D1

A1 A1
A2 A2
C1 C2 C1 C2

ø 4.5 A3
A4 RX
F1
F2
A3
A4 RX
F1
F2
A5 F3 A5 F3
A6 TX F4 A6 TX F4
A7 F5 A7 F5
A8 C3 C4 A8 C3 C4
A9 B1 A9 B1
A10 A10
177

B2 B2

171
149

200
168
A11 B3 A11 B3
A12 B4 A12 B4
ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START
A13 B5 A13 B5
80

TRIP TRIP A14 C5 C6 B6 A14 C5 C6 B6

A15 B7 A15 B7
A16 B8 A16 B8

A17 A17
A18 A18
A19 A19
A20 C7 C8 A20 C7 C8

A21 A21
A22 A22
31

E1 E1

20
FLUSH MOUNTING PROJECTING MOUNTING FLUSH MOUNTING PROJECTING MOUNTING
(Separate operator panel)

SIDE VIEWS
212.5 275
25 15
205 30 5 30 ø 4.5
170

FLUSH MOUNTING SEPARATE PROJECTING MOUNTING PROJECTING MOUNTING

OPERATOR PANEL (Separate operator panel) (Stand alone)

RACK MOUNTING FLUSH MOUNTING CUTOUT

482.6 102.5 ±0.3
465 70
177 (4U)

161
101.6

154

ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START

TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP

N.4 holes ø 3.5

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 153

 8.8 APPENDIX D - Setting table

Description Parameter Unit Setting range

Note The temperature (26 element), output relay K7...K10, L6...L10 LEDs and binary input IN3...IN42 settings are available only when the concerning
I/O circuits are implemented (MPT, MRI and MID16 modules on Thybus)

Set
Base
Relay reference name
Relay nominal frequency - fn Hz 50 ... 60 step = 10
Relay phase nominal current - In 1A|5A
Relay residual nominal current - IEn 1A|5A
1 ... 499 step = 1
Phase CT primary nominal current - Inp A 500 ... 4990 step = 10
5000 ... 10000 step = 100
1 ... 499 step = 1
Residual CT primary nominal current - IEnp A 500 ... 4990 step = 10
5000 ... 10000 step = 100
Measurements reading mode RELATIVE | PRIMARY
Language English | Turkish | Russian
Inputs
Binary input IN1
IN1
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN1 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN1 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN1 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN2
IN2
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN2 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN2 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN2 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN3
IN3
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN3 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN3 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

154
154 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN3 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN4
IN4
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN4 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN4 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN4 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN5
IN5
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN5 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN5 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN5 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN6
IN6
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN6 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN6 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN6 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN7
IN7
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN7 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN7 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN7 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN8

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 155

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
IN8
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN8 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN8 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN8 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN9
IN9
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN9 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN9 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN9 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN10
IN10
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN10 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN10 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN10 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN11
IN11
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN11 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN11 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN11 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN12
IN12
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN12 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

156
156 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
IN12 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN12 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN13
IN13
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN13 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN13 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN13 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN14
IN14
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN14 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN14 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN14 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN15
IN15
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN15 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN15 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN15 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN16
IN16
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN16 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN16 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 157

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN16 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN17
IN17
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN17 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN17 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN17 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN18
IN18
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN18 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN18 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN18 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN19
IN19
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN19 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN19 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN19 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN20
IN20
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN20 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN20 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN20 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN21

158
158 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
IN21
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN21 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN21 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN21 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN22
IN22
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN22 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN22 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN22 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN23
IN23
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN23 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN23 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN23 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN24
IN24
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN24 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN24 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN24 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN25
IN25
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN25 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 159

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
IN25 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN25 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN26
IN26
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN26 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN26 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN26 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN27
IN27
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN27 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN27 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN27 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN28
IN28
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN28 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN28 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN28 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN29
IN29
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN29 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN29 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

160
160 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN29 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN30
IN30
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN30 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN30 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN30 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN31
IN31
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN31 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN31 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN31 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN32
IN32
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN32 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN32 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN32 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN33
IN33
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN33 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN33 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN33 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN34

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 161

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
IN34
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN34 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN34 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN34 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN35
IN35
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN35 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN35 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN35 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN36
IN36
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN36 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN36 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN36 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN37
IN37
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN37 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN37 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN37 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN38
IN38
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN38 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

162
162 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
IN38 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN38 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN39
IN39
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN39 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN39 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN39 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN40
IN40
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN40 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN40 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN40 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN41
IN41
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN41 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN41 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN41 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Binary input IN42
IN42
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN42 tON
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN42 tOFF
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 163

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1 | TCS2
IN42 matching | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset CB Monitor |
52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB | Remote trip | Reset
on demand measures | 79 Enable | 79 Block | None
Relays
K1
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
K2
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
K3
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
K4
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
K5
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
K6
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
K7
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
K8
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
K9
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
K10
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
LEDs
START
Type No-latched | Latched
TRIP
Type No-latched | Latched
L1
Type No-latched | Latched
L2

164
164 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Type No-latched | Latched
L3
Type No-latched | Latched
L4
Type No-latched | Latched
L5
Type No-latched | Latched
L6
Type No-latched | Latched
L7
Type No-latched | Latched
L8
Type No-latched | Latched
L9
Type No-latched | Latched
L10
Type No-latched | Latched
Analog outputs
Current loop 1
Loop 1 Measure assigned Loop1-Mis Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL | PLC | None
0-2 mA | 0-4 mA | 0-5 mA | 1-5 mA | 0-6 mA | 1-6
Loop 1 Output range Loop1-Range
mA | 0-10 mA | 4-20 mA
Loop 1 Sign Loop1-Sign Unipolar | Bipolar
Loop 1 Nominal multiplier Loop1-M 0.01 ... 100.00 step = 0.01
Current loop 2
Loop 2 Measure assigned Loop2-Mis Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL | PLC | None
0-2 mA | 0-4 mA | 0-5 mA | 1-5 mA | 0-6 mA | 1-6
Loop 2 Output range Loop2-Range
mA | 0-10 mA | 4-20 mA
Loop 2 Sign Loop2-Sign Unipolar | Bipolar
Loop 2 Nominal multiplier Loop2-M 0.01 ... 100.00 step = 0.01
Current loop 3
Loop 3 Measure assigned Loop3-Mis Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL | PLC | None
0-2 mA | 0-4 mA | 0-5 mA | 1-5 mA | 0-6 mA | 1-6
Loop 3 Output range Loop3-Range
mA | 0-10 mA | 4-20 mA
Loop 3 Sign Loop3-Sign Unipolar | Bipolar
Loop 3 Nominal multiplier Loop3-M 0.01 ... 100.00 step = 0.01
Current loop 4
Loop 4 Measure assigned Loop4-Mis Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL | PLC | None
0-2 mA | 0-4 mA | 0-5 mA | 1-5 mA | 0-6 mA | 1-6
Loop 4 Output range Loop4-Range
mA | 0-10 mA | 4-20 mA
Loop 4 Sign Loop4-Sign Unipolar | Bipolar
Loop 4 Nominal multiplier Loop4-M 0.01 ... 100.00 step = 0.01
Self-test Relay
MINOR Fail alarm NO | YES
Self-test relay K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
MMI
Display modules Assigned modules | All modules
Auto-reclose - 79
79 Enable 79 Enable OFF | ON
79 Function mode 79 Mode Rapid | Rapid+Slow
Number of delayed reclosures N.DAR 0 ... 5 step = 1
0.1 ... 19.9 step = 0.1
Rapid reclosure dead time trdt s
20 ... 60 step = 1
Slow reclosure dead time tsdt s 1 ... 200 step = 1
Recalim time

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 165

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Value s 1 ... 200 step = 1
Slow reclosure fault discrimination time td1 s 0 ... 10 step = 1
Delayed reclosure fault discrimination time td2 s 0 ... 10 step = 1
Manual close (only R+S) fault discrimination time set MC-td-EN OFF | ON
Manual close fault discrimination time td s 1 ... 10 step = 1
Reset cycle from manual open MO-RES OFF | ON
79-I> Start 79-I> OFF | ON
79-I>> Start 79-I>> OFF | ON
79-I>>> Start 79-I>>> OFF | ON
79-IE> Start 79-IE> OFF | ON
79-IE>> Start 79-IE>> OFF | ON
79-IE>>> Start 79-IE>>> OFF | ON
Relays cycle in progress 79-Run-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Relays reclosure 79-AR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Relays reclosure fail 79-Fail-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
LEDs cycle in progress 79-Run-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
LEDs reclosure 79-AR-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
LEDs reclosure fail 79-Fail-L
| L10
Profile selection
Active profile A | B | By INPUT
Profile A
Thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes - 26
PT1 Probe
ThAL1 Alarm
ThAL1 Enable ThAL1 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT1 Alarm threshold ThAL1 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL1 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL1 Alarm relays ThAL1-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL1 Alarm LEDs ThAL1-L
| L10
Th>1 Trip
Th>1 Enable Th>1 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT1 Trip threshold Th>1 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>1 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>1 Breaker failure Th>1BF OFF | ON
Th>1 Trip relays Th>1-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>1 Trip LEDs Th>1-L
| L10
PT2 Probe
ThAL2 Alarm
ThAL2 Enable ThAL2 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT2 Alarm threshold ThAL2 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL2 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL2 Alarm relays ThAL2-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL2 Alarm LEDs ThAL2-L
| L10
Th>2 Trip
Th>2 Enable Th>2 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT2 Trip threshold Th>2 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>2 Operating time

166
166 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>2 Breaker failure Th>2BF OFF | ON
Th>2 Trip relays Th>2-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>2 Trip LEDs Th>2-L
| L10
PT3 Probe
ThAL3 Alarm
ThAL3 Enable ThAL3 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT3 Alarm threshold ThAL3 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL3 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL3 Alarm relays ThAL3-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL3 Alarm LEDs ThAL3-L
| L10
Th>3 Trip
Th>3 Enable Th>3 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT3 Trip threshold Th>3 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>3 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>3 Breaker failure Th>3BF OFF | ON
Th>3 Trip relays Th>3-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>3 Trip LEDs Th>3-L
| L10
PT4 Probe
ThAL4 Alarm
ThAL4 Enable ThAL4 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT4 Alarm threshold ThAL4 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL4 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL4 Alarm relays ThAL4-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL4 Alarm LEDs ThAL4-L
| L10
Th>4 Trip
Th>4 Enable Th>4 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT4 Trip threshold Th>4 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>4 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>4 Breaker failure Th>4BF OFF | ON
Th>4 Trip relays Th>4-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>4 Trip LEDs Th>4-L
| L10
PT5 Probe
ThAL5 Alarm
ThAL5 Enable ThAL5 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT5 Alarm threshold ThAL5 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL5 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL5 Alarm relays ThAL5-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL5 Alarm LEDs ThAL5-L
| L10
Th>5 Trip
Th>5 Enable Th>5 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT5 Trip threshold Th>5 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>5 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>5 Breaker failure Th>5BF OFF | ON

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 167

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Th>5 Trip relays Th>5-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>5 Trip LEDs Th>5-L
| L10
PT6 Probe
ThAL6 Alarm
ThAL6 Enable ThAL6 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT6 Alarm threshold ThAL6 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL6 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL6 Alarm relays ThAL6-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL6 Alarm LEDs ThAL6-L
| L10
Th>6 Trip
Th>6 Enable Th>6 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT6 Trip threshold Th>6 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>6 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>6 Breaker failure Th>6BF OFF | ON
Th>6 Trip relays Th>6-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>6 Trip LEDs Th>6-L
| L10
PT7 Probe
ThAL7 Alarm
ThAL7 Enable ThAL7 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT7 Alarm threshold ThAL7 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL7 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL7 Alarm relays ThAL7-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL7 Alarm LEDs ThAL7-L
| L10
Th>7 Trip
Th>7 Enable Th>7 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT7 Trip threshold Th>7 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>7 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>7 Breaker failure Th>7BF OFF | ON
Th>7 Trip relays Th>7-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>7 Trip LEDs Th>7-L
| L10
PT8 Probe
ThAL8 Alarm
ThAL8 Enable ThAL8 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT8 Alarm threshold ThAL8 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL8 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL8 Alarm relays ThAL8-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL8 Alarm LEDs ThAL8-L
| L10
Th>8 Trip
Th>8 Enable Th>8 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT8 Trip threshold Th>8 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>8 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>8 Breaker failure Th>8BF OFF | ON
Th>8 Trip relays Th>8-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10

168
168 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>8 Trip LEDs Th>8-L
| L10
Diagnostic
PT100 probe diagnostic relays PT100Diag-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
PT100 probe diagnostic LEDs PT100Diag-L
| L10
Phase overcurrent - 50/51
I> Element
Setpoints
I> Enable I> Enable OFF | ON
IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI |
I> Curve type I>Curve ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | RECTIFIER | I2t | EM |
DEFINITE
ICLP> Mode ICLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
ICLP> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I> Logical block I>BLK1 OFF | ON
I> Input selective block I>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I> Output selective block I>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I> Second harmonic restraint I>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I> Breaker failure I>BF OFF | ON
I> Start relays I>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I> Trip relays I>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I> Start LEDs I>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I> Trip LEDs I>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50/51 First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value In
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>def within CLP ICLP>def In
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
I>def Operating time
0.04 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
50/51 First threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value In
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>inv within CLP ICLP>inv In
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
I>inv Operating time t>inv s
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
I>> Element
Setpoints
I>> Enable I>> Enable OFF | ON
I>> Curve type I>>Curve I2t | DEFINITE
ICLP>> Mode ICLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
ICLP>> Activation time

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 169

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>> Logical block I>>BLK1 OFF | ON
I>> Input selective block I>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I>> Output selective block I>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I>> Second harmonic restraint I>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I>> Breaker failure I>>BF OFF | ON
I> Disabling by I>> start I>disbyI>> OFF | ON
I>> Start relays I>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>> Trip relays I>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I>> Start LEDs I>>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I>> Trip LEDs I>>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50/51 Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value In 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>def within CLP ICLP>>def In 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
I>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Inverse time
50/51 Second threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value In
1.00 ... 20.00 step = 0.01
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>inv within CLP ICLP>>inv In
1.00 ... 20.00 step = 0.01
I>>inv Operating time t>>inv s 0.02 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
I>>> Element
Setpoints
I>>> Enable I>>> Enable OFF | ON
ICLP>>> Mode ICLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
ICLP>>> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>>> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>>> Logical block I>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
I>>> Input selective block I>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I>>> Output selective block I>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I>>> Second harmonic restraint I>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I>>> Breaker failure I>>>BF OFF | ON
I> Disabling by I>>> start I>disbyI>>> OFF | ON
I>> Disabling by I>>> start I>>disbyI>>> OFF | ON
I>>> Start relays I>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>>> Trip relays I>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I>>> Start LEDs I>>>ST-L
| L10

170
170 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I>>> Trip LEDs I>>>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50/51 Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value In 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>>def within CLP ICLP>>>def In 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
I>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N
IE> Element
Setpoints
IE> Enable IE> Enable OFF | ON
IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI |
IE> Curve type IE>Curve
ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | EM | DEFINITE
IECLP> Mode IECLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
IECLP> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE> Logical block IE>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE> Input selective block IE>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE> Output selective block IE>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE> Second harmonic restraint IE>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE> Breaker failure IE>BF OFF | ON
IE> Start relays IE>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE> Trip relays IE>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE> Start LEDs IE>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE> Trip LEDs IE>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50N/51N First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value IEn
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>def within CLP IECLP>def IEn
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
IE>def Operating time
0.04 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
50N/51N First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value IEn
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>inv within CLP IECLP>inv IEn
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
IE>inv Operating time tE>inv s
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
IE>> Element
Setpoints

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 171

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
IE>> Enable IE>> Enable OFF | ON
IECLP>> Mode IECLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
IECLP>> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE>> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE>> Logical block IE>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE>> Input selective block IE>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE>> Output selective block IE>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE>> Second harmonic restraint IE>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE>> Breaker failure IE>>BF OFF | ON
IE> Disabling by IE>> start IE>disbyIE>> OFF | ON
IE>> Start relays IE>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>> Trip relays IE>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE>> Start LEDs IE>>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE>> Trip LEDs IE>>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50N/51N Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value IEn
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>>def within CLP IECLP>>def IEn
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>> Element
Setpoints
IE>>> Enable IE>>> Enable OFF | ON
IECLP>>> Mode IECLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
IECLP>>> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE>>> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE>>> Logical block IE>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE>>> Input selective block IE>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE>>> Output selective block IE>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE>>> Second harmonic restraint IE>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE>>> Breaker failure IE>>>BF OFF | ON
IE> Disabling by IE>>> start IE>disbyIE>>> OFF | ON
IE>> Disabling by IE>>> start IE>>disbyIE>>> OFF | ON
IE>>> Start relays IE>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>>> Trip relays IE>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE>>> Start LEDs IE>>>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE>>> Trip LEDs IE>>>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50N/51N Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON

172
172 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value IEn
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>>>def within CLP IECLP>>>def IEn
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Second Harmonic Restraint - 2ndh-REST
Second harmonic restraint threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value % 10 ... 50 step = 1
I2ndh> reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I2ndh> Start relays I2ndh>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I2ndh> Start LEDs I2ndh>ST-L
| L10
Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS
74TCS Enable 74TCS Enable OFF | ON
74TCS Logical block 74TCS-BLK1 OFF | ON
74TCS Start relays 74TCS-ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
74TCS Trip relays 74TCS-TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
74TCS Start LEDs 74TCS-ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
74TCS Trip LEDs 74TCS-TR-L
| L10
Selective block - BLOCK2
Selective block IN
BLIN1 Selective block operating mode ModeBLIN1 OFF | ON IPh/IE | ON IPh | ON IE
BLIN maximum activation time for phase protections
Value s 0.10 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
BLIN maximum activation time for ground protections
Value s 0.10 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
tB-Iph/IE Elapsed signalling relays tB-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
tB-Iph/IE Elapsed signalling LEDs tB-L
| L10
Selective block OUT
BLOUT Dropout time for phase protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BLOUT Dropout time for ground protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BLOUT Dropout time for ground and phase protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BLOUT1 Selective block operating mode ModeBLOUT1 OFF | ON IPh/IE | ON IPh | ON IE
Phase protections output selective block relays BLK2OUT-Iph-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Ground protections output selective block relays BLK2OUT-IE-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Phase and ground protections output selective block BLK2OUT-Iph/
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
relays IE-K
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Phase protections output selective block LEDs BLK2OUT-Iph-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Ground protections output selective block LEDs BLK2OUT-IE-L
| L10
Phase and ground protections output selective block START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L
LEDs | L10
Breaker failure - BF
BF Enable BF Enable OFF | ON
BF Phase current threshold
State OFF | ON

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 173

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Pickup value In 0.05 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BF Residual current threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value IEn 0.01 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
BF Time delay
Value s 0.06 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
BF Logical block BF-BLK1 OFF | ON
BF Start from circuit breaker CB Input OFF | ON
BF Start relays BF-ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
BF Trip relays BF-TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
BF Start LEDs BF-ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
BF Trip LEDs BF-TR-L
| L10
Profile B
Thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes - 26
PT1 Probe
ThAL1 Alarm
ThAL1 Enable ThAL1 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT1 Alarm threshold ThAL1 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL1 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL1 Alarm relays ThAL1-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL1 Alarm LEDs ThAL1-L
| L10
Th>1 Trip
Th>1 Enable Th>1 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT1 Trip threshold Th>1 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>1 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>1 Breaker failure Th>1BF OFF | ON
Th>1 Trip relays Th>1-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>1 Trip LEDs Th>1-L
| L10
PT2 Probe
ThAL2 Alarm
ThAL2 Enable ThAL2 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT2 Alarm threshold ThAL2 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL2 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL2 Alarm relays ThAL2-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL2 Alarm LEDs ThAL2-L
| L10
Th>2 Trip
Th>2 Enable Th>2 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT2 Trip threshold Th>2 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>2 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>2 Breaker failure Th>2BF OFF | ON
Th>2 Trip relays Th>2-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>2 Trip LEDs Th>2-L
| L10
PT3 Probe
ThAL3 Alarm
ThAL3 Enable ThAL3 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT3 Alarm threshold ThAL3 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1

174
174 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
ThAL3 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL3 Alarm relays ThAL3-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL3 Alarm LEDs ThAL3-L
| L10
Th>3 Trip
Th>3 Enable Th>3 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT3 Trip threshold Th>3 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>3 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>3 Breaker failure Th>3BF OFF | ON
Th>3 Trip relays Th>3-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>3 Trip LEDs Th>3-L
| L10
PT4 Probe
ThAL4 Alarm
ThAL4 Enable ThAL4 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT4 Alarm threshold ThAL4 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL4 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL4 Alarm relays ThAL4-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL4 Alarm LEDs ThAL4-L
| L10
Th>4 Trip
Th>4 Enable Th>4 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT4 Trip threshold Th>4 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>4 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>4 Breaker failure Th>4BF OFF | ON
Th>4 Trip relays Th>4-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>4 Trip LEDs Th>4-L
| L10
PT5 Probe
ThAL5 Alarm
ThAL5 Enable ThAL5 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT5 Alarm threshold ThAL5 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL5 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL5 Alarm relays ThAL5-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL5 Alarm LEDs ThAL5-L
| L10
Th>5 Trip
Th>5 Enable Th>5 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT5 Trip threshold Th>5 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>5 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>5 Breaker failure Th>5BF OFF | ON
Th>5 Trip relays Th>5-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>5 Trip LEDs Th>5-L
| L10
PT6 Probe
ThAL6 Alarm
ThAL6 Enable ThAL6 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT6 Alarm threshold ThAL6 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL6 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 175

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
ThAL6 Alarm relays ThAL6-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL6 Alarm LEDs ThAL6-L
| L10
Th>6 Trip
Th>6 Enable Th>6 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT6 Trip threshold Th>6 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>6 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>6 Breaker failure Th>6BF OFF | ON
Th>6 Trip relays Th>6-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>6 Trip LEDs Th>6-L
| L10
PT7 Probe
ThAL7 Alarm
ThAL7 Enable ThAL7 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT7 Alarm threshold ThAL7 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL7 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL7 Alarm relays ThAL7-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL7 Alarm LEDs ThAL7-L
| L10
Th>7 Trip
Th>7 Enable Th>7 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT7 Trip threshold Th>7 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>7 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>7 Breaker failure Th>7BF OFF | ON
Th>7 Trip relays Th>7-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>7 Trip LEDs Th>7-L
| L10
PT8 Probe
ThAL8 Alarm
ThAL8 Enable ThAL8 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT8 Alarm threshold ThAL8 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL8 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL8 Alarm relays ThAL8-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
ThAL8 Alarm LEDs ThAL8-L
| L10
Th>8 Trip
Th>8 Enable Th>8 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT8 Trip threshold Th>8 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>8 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>8 Breaker failure Th>8BF OFF | ON
Th>8 Trip relays Th>8-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Th>8 Trip LEDs Th>8-L
| L10
Diagnostic
PT100 probe diagnostic relays PT100Diag-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
PT100 probe diagnostic LEDs PT100Diag-L
| L10
Phase overcurrent - 50/51
I> Element
Setpoints
I> Enable I> Enable OFF | ON

176
176 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI |
I> Curve type I>Curve ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | RECTIFIER | I2t | EM |
DEFINITE
ICLP> Mode ICLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
ICLP> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I> Logical block I>BLK1 OFF | ON
I> Input selective block I>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I> Output selective block I>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I> Second harmonic restraint I>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I> Breaker failure I>BF OFF | ON
I> Start relays I>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I> Trip relays I>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I> Start LEDs I>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I> Trip LEDs I>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50/51 First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value In
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>def within CLP ICLP>def In
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
I>def Operating time
0.04 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
50/51 First threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value In
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>inv within CLP ICLP>inv In
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
I>inv Operating time t>inv s
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
I>> Element
Setpoints
I>> Enable I>> Enable OFF | ON
I>> Curve type I>>Curve I2t | DEFINITE
ICLP>> Mode ICLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
ICLP>> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>> Logical block I>>BLK1 OFF | ON
I>> Input selective block I>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I>> Output selective block I>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I>> Second harmonic restraint I>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I>> Breaker failure I>>BF OFF | ON
I> Disabling by I>> start I>disbyI>> OFF | ON

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 177

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
I>> Start relays I>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>> Trip relays I>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I>> Start LEDs I>>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I>> Trip LEDs I>>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50/51 Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value In 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>def within CLP ICLP>>def In 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
I>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Inverse time
50/51 Second threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value In
1.00 ... 20.00 step = 0.01
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>inv within CLP ICLP>>inv In
1.00 ... 20.00 step = 0.01
I>>inv Operating time t>>inv s 0.02 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
I>>> Element
Setpoints
I>>> Enable I>>> Enable OFF | ON
ICLP>>> Mode ICLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
ICLP>>> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>>> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>>> Logical block I>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
I>>> Input selective block I>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I>>> Output selective block I>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I>>> Second harmonic restraint I>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I>>> Breaker failure I>>>BF OFF | ON
I> Disabling by I>>> start I>disbyI>>> OFF | ON
I>> Disabling by I>>> start I>>disbyI>>> OFF | ON
I>>> Start relays I>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>>> Trip relays I>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I>>> Start LEDs I>>>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I>>> Trip LEDs I>>>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50/51 Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value In 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>>def within CLP ICLP>>>def In 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
I>>>def Operating time

178
178 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N
IE> Element
Setpoints
IE> Enable IE> Enable OFF | ON
IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI |
IE> Curve type IE>Curve
ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | EM | DEFINITE
IECLP> Mode IECLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
IECLP> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE> Logical block IE>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE> Input selective block IE>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE> Output selective block IE>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE> Second harmonic restraint IE>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE> Breaker failure IE>BF OFF | ON
IE> Start relays IE>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE> Trip relays IE>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE> Start LEDs IE>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE> Trip LEDs IE>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50N/51N First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value IEn
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>def within CLP IECLP>def IEn
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
IE>def Operating time
0.04 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
50N/51N First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value IEn
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>inv within CLP IECLP>inv IEn
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
IE>inv Operating time tE>inv s
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
IE>> Element
Setpoints
IE>> Enable IE>> Enable OFF | ON
IECLP>> Mode IECLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
IECLP>> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE>> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE>> Logical block IE>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE>> Input selective block IE>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE>> Output selective block IE>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 179

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
IE>> Second harmonic restraint IE>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE>> Breaker failure IE>>BF OFF | ON
IE> Disabling by IE>> start IE>disbyIE>> OFF | ON
IE>> Start relays IE>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>> Trip relays IE>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE>> Start LEDs IE>>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE>> Trip LEDs IE>>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50N/51N Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value IEn
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>>def within CLP IECLP>>def IEn
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>> Element
Setpoints
IE>>> Enable IE>>> Enable OFF | ON
IECLP>>> Mode IECLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change setting
IECLP>>> Activation time
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE>>> Reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE>>> Logical block IE>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE>>> Input selective block IE>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE>>> Output selective block IE>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE>>> Second harmonic restraint IE>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE>>> Breaker failure IE>>>BF OFF | ON
IE> Disabling by IE>>> start IE>disbyIE>>> OFF | ON
IE>> Disabling by IE>>> start IE>>disbyIE>>> OFF | ON
IE>>> Start relays IE>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>>> Trip relays IE>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE>>> Start LEDs IE>>>ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
IE>>> Trip LEDs IE>>>TR-L
| L10
Definite time
50N/51N Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value IEn
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>>>def within CLP IECLP>>>def IEn
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Second Harmonic Restraint - 2ndh-REST
Second harmonic restraint threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value % 10 ... 50 step = 1
I2ndh> reset time delay
0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

180
180 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
I2ndh> Start relays I2ndh>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
I2ndh> Start LEDs I2ndh>ST-L
| L10
Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS
74TCS Enable 74TCS Enable OFF | ON
74TCS Logical block 74TCS-BLK1 OFF | ON
74TCS Start relays 74TCS-ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
74TCS Trip relays 74TCS-TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
74TCS Start LEDs 74TCS-ST-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
74TCS Trip LEDs 74TCS-TR-L
| L10
Selective block - BLOCK2
Selective block IN
BLIN1 Selective block operating mode ModeBLIN1 OFF | ON IPh/IE | ON IPh | ON IE
BLIN maximum activation time for phase protections
Value s 0.10 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
BLIN maximum activation time for ground protections
Value s 0.10 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
tB-Iph/IE Elapsed signalling relays tB-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
tB-Iph/IE Elapsed signalling LEDs tB-L
| L10
Selective block OUT
BLOUT1 Selective block operating mode ModeBLOUT1 OFF | ON IPh/IE | ON IPh | ON IE
BLOUT Dropout time for phase protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BLOUT Dropout time for ground protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BLOUT Dropout time for ground and phase protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
Phase protections output selective block relays BLK2OUT-Iph-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Ground protections output selective block relays BLK2OUT-IE-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Phase and ground protections output selective block BLK2OUT-Iph/
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
relays IE-K
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Phase protections output selective block LEDs BLK2OUT-Iph-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Ground protections output selective block LEDs BLK2OUT-IE-L
| L10
Phase and ground protections output selective block START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L
LEDs | L10
Breaker failure - BF
BF Enable BF Enable OFF | ON
BF Phase current threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value In 0.05 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BF Residual current threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value IEn 0.01 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
BF Time delay
Value s 0.06 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
BF Logical block BF-BLK1 OFF | ON
BF Start from circuit breaker CB Input OFF | ON
BF Start relays BF-ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
BF Trip relays BF-TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
BF Start LEDs BF-ST-L
| L10

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 181

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
BF Trip LEDs BF-TR-L
| L10
PLC
Setpoints
Enable PLC Enable OFF | ON
Relays PLC-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
LEDs PLC-L
| L10
Switches
Switch 1 0|1
Switch 2 0|1
Switch 3 0|1
Switch 4 0|1
Switch 5 0|1
Switch 6 0|1
Switch 7 0|1
Switch 8 0|1
Switch 9 0|1
Switch 10 0|1
Switch 11 0|1
Switch 12 0|1
Switch 13 0|1|2
Switch 14 0|1|2
Switch 15 0|1|2
Switch 16 0|1|2
Switch 17 0|1|2
Switch 18 0|1|2
Switch 19 0|1|2
Switch 20 0|1|2
Switch 21 0|1|2|3
Switch 22 0|1|2|3
Switch 23 0|1|2|3
Switch 24 0|1|2|3
Switch 25 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
Switch 26 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
Switch 27 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
Switch 28 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14
| 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26
| 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38
| 39 | 40 | 41 | 42 | 43 | 44 | 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 | 49 | 50
Switch 29 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 | 55 | 56 | 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62
| 63 | 64 | 65 | 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 | 73 | 74
| 75 | 76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 | 81 | 82 | 83 | 84 | 85 |
86 | 87 | 88 | 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93 | 94 | 95 | 96 | 97
| 98 | 99
0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14
| 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26
| 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38
| 39 | 40 | 41 | 42 | 43 | 44 | 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 | 49 | 50
Switch 30 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 | 55 | 56 | 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62
| 63 | 64 | 65 | 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 | 73 | 74
| 75 | 76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 | 81 | 82 | 83 | 84 | 85 |
86 | 87 | 88 | 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93 | 94 | 95 | 96 | 97
| 98 | 99

182
182 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14
| 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26
| 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38
| 39 | 40 | 41 | 42 | 43 | 44 | 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 | 49 | 50
Switch 31 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 | 55 | 56 | 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62
| 63 | 64 | 65 | 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 | 73 | 74
| 75 | 76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 | 81 | 82 | 83 | 84 | 85 |
86 | 87 | 88 | 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93 | 94 | 95 | 96 | 97
| 98 | 99
0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14
| 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26
| 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38
| 39 | 40 | 41 | 42 | 43 | 44 | 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 | 49 | 50
Switch 32 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 | 55 | 56 | 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62
| 63 | 64 | 65 | 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 | 73 | 74
| 75 | 76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 | 81 | 82 | 83 | 84 | 85 |
86 | 87 | 88 | 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93 | 94 | 95 | 96 | 97
| 98 | 99
Timers
0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 1 s
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 2 s
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 3 s
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 4 s
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 5 s
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 6 s
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 7 s
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 8 s
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 9 s 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 10 s 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 11 s 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 12 s 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 13 s 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 14 s 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 15 s 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 16 s 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 17 s 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 183

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 18 s 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 19 s 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 20 s 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 21 s 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 22 s 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 23 s 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 24 s 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
Circuit Breaker supervision
LEDs-relays allocation
Open CB command relays CBopen-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Close CB command relays CBclose-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
CB Closed LEDs CBclose-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
CB Open LEDs CBopen-L
| L10
CB Diagnostic
Number of CB trips mode ModeN.Open OFF | ON
Number of CB trips threshold N.Open 0 ... 10000 step = 1
Cumulative CB tripping currents mode ModeSumI OFF | ON
Cumulative CB tripping currents threshold SumI In 0 ... 5000 step = 1
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t mode ModeSumI^2t OFF | ON
Circuit breaker opening time for I^2t calculation tbreak s 0.05 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t threshold SumI^2t In^2s 0 ... 5000 step = 1
CB operating time mode Mode-tOpen OFF | ON
Trigger relay for CB opening time trigger measurement Ktrig-break K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Circuit breaker maximum allowed opening time
Value s 0.05 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
Number of CB trips diagnostic relays N.Open-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Cumulative CB tripping currents diagnostic relays SumI-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t diagnostic relays SumI^2t-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Circuit breaker opening time diagnostic relays tbreak-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Number of CB trips diagnostic LEDs N.Open-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Cumulative CB tripping currents diagnostic LEDs SumI-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t diagnostic LEDs SumI^2t-L
| L10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Circuit breaker opening time diagnostic LEDs tbreak-L
| L10
CT supervision - 74CT
74CT Enable 74CT Enable OFF | ON
74CT Threshold S< 0.10 ... 0.95 step = 0.01
74CT Overcurrent threshold
State OFF | ON

184
184 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Pickup value In 0.10 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
S< Operating time
0.03 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value s 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
S< Logical block S<BLK1 OFF | ON
S< Trip relays S<TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
S< Trip LEDs S<TR-L
| L10
Remote tripping
Remote tripping relays RemTrip-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Remote tripping LEDs RemTrip-L
| L10
Pilot wire diagnostic
BLOUT1 Diagnostic pulses period PulseBLOUT1 OFF | 100ms | 1s | 5s | 10s | 60s | 120s
BLIN1 Diagnostic pulses control time interval PulseBLIN1 OFF | 100ms | 1s | 5s | 10s | 60s | 120s
Not received pulses at BLIN signalling relays PulseBLIN-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | L6 | L7 | L8 | L9
Not received pulses at BLIN signalling LEDs PulseBLIN-L
| L10
Demand measures
Fixed demand period tFIX min 1 ... 60 step = 1
Rolling demand period tROL min 1 ... 60 step = 1
Number of cycles for rolling on demand N.ROL 1 ... 24 step = 1
Oscillography
Readings
Initialization | Start recording | Acquire | Trigger |
State
Stopped | Wait | Fail | Off
Records 0 ... 0 step = 0
Buffer storage % 0 ... 0 step = 0
Trigger Setup
Pre-trigger time s 0.05 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
Post-trigger time s 0.05 ... 60.00 step = 0.05
Element pickup trigger ON | OFF
Trigger from outputs K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Binary input trigger ON | OFF
IN1 | IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 |
IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17
Trigger from inputs IN1-IN32
| IN18 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 |
IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32
IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40
Trigger from inputs IN33-IN42
| IN41 | IN42
80% Buffer alarm OFF | ON
Set sample channels
iL1 On | Off
iL2 On | Off
iL3 On | Off
iE On | Off
Set analog channels
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 1 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 2 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 3 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 185

 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 4 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 5 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 6 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 7 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 8 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 9 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 10 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 11 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd |
Analog 12 IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2 | T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 |
T8 | Off
Set digital channels
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 1 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 2 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 3 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 4 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 5 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off

186
186 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 Description Parameter Unit Setting range
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 6 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 7 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 8 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 9 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 10 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 11 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10 | IN1
| IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 | IN9 | IN10 |
IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 | IN16 | IN17 | IN18
Binary 12 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 | IN23 | IN24 | IN25 |
IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 | IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33
| IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 |
IN41 | IN42 | Off
Communication
RS485
Protocol MODBUS | IEC60870-5-103
Address 1 ... 254 step = 1
1200 baud | 2400 baud | 4800 baud | 9600 baud |
Baudrate RS485
19200 baud | 38400 baud | 57600 baud
Ethernet
IP host address
IP net mask
Autonegotiation OFF | ON
NTP synchronizing OFF | ON

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 187

 8.9 APPENDIX E - Revisions history

DSP CPU
Firmware Firmware Documentation Communication Upgrade procedures Description
Release Release

1.08 1.20 NA11-Manual-12-2006 ThySetter 2.6.9 - First edition

1.10 1.21 NA11-Manual-03-2007 ThySetter 2.7.1 - Inverse time curve normalization
1.10 1.21 NA11-Manual-04-2007 ThySetter 2.7.1 - Warnings
1.40 1.60 NA11-Manual-11-2008 ThySetter 3.4.9 - PLC, LPCT inputs, ThySetter description removed
(dedicated manual)
1.40 1.61 NA11-Manual-05-2009 ThySetter 3.5.1 - Current inputs burden, output relays breaking capacity
1.40 1.61 NA11-Manual-09-2009 ThySetter 3.5.4 - TCS description with R dimensioning, Block2 with
example, PLL data
1.51 1.80 NA11-Manual-09-2009 ThySetter 3.5.8 - Corrections on BF logic diagram

188
188 NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 APPENDIX
 8.10 APPENDIX F - EC Declaration of conformity

Manufacturer: THYTRONIC S.p.A.

Address: Piazza Mistral 7 - 20139 MILANO

The undersigned manufacturer herewith declares that the product

Protection relay - type NA11

is in conformity with the previsions of the following EC directives (including all applicable amendments) when installed in accordance
with the installation instructions:
Reference n° title
73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive as amended by 93/68/EEC
89/336/EEC EMC Directive as amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC

Reference of standards and/or technical specifications applied for this declaration of conformity or parts thereof:

- harmonized standards:

nr issue title

EN 61010-1 11.2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use

08.2000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

EN 50263 Product standard for measuring relays and protection equipments

EN 61000-6-4 (EN 50081-2) 10.2002 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Emission standard for industrial environments

EN 61000-6-2 (EN 50082-2) 12.2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Immunity standard for industrial environments

- other standards and/or technical specifications:

nr issue title

EN 61810-1 02-2004 Electromechanical elementary relays

General and safety requirements

EN 60255-6 (CEI 95-1) 05-1998 Electrical relays

Part 6: General requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment

IEC 60255 Electrical relays

Year of CE marking: 2005

Signature .............................................

Name FIORE Ing. GIOACCHINO

Title Managing director
Date 12-2005

APPENDIX NA11 - Manual - 09 - 2009 189

 Headquarter: 20139 Milano - Piazza Mistral, 7 - Tel. +39 02 574 957 01 ra - Fax +39 02 574 037 63
Factory: 35127 Padova - Z.I. Sud - Via dell’Artigianato, 48 - Tel. +39 049 894 770 1 ra - Fax +39 049 870 139 0

www.thytronic.it [email protected] www.pro-n.it

 Firmado Digitalmente por:
CONDOR SANTIAGO Hugo Alejandro FAU
20129646099 hard
Razón: SOY AUTOR DEL DOCUMENTO
Ubicación: DISTRILUZ
Fecha: 16/05/2022 20:48:05

"AÑO DEL FORTALECIMIENTO DE LA SOBERANÍA NACIONAL"

Huancayo, 16 de mayo de 2022

ELCTO-GRP-1175-2022
Expediente: 20220412006378

Señor(a)
COSEM
AV. GIRÁLDEZ Nº 274 OF. E-08, 2DO NIVEL
Huancayo - Huancayo
Junín .-

Asunto : INICIO DE LA OBRA SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN DE USO

EXCLUSIVO EN 22.9 KV TRIFÁSICO PARA LA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO “BRYNAJOM I”
UBICADO EN EL DISTRITO DE SAN PEDRO DE CORIS, PROVINCIA DE CHURCAMPA,
DEPARTAMENTO DE HUANCAVELICA. EXPEDIENTE N° 008GRP2022/A.

Referencia : a) CARTA NO 041-2022/COSEM

De mi consideración:

Es grato dirigirme a usted para saludarlo cordialmente y en atención a la carta de la referencia, donde nos comunica el inicio de
la obra Sistema de Utilización en Media Tensión de Uso Exclusivo en 22.9 KV Trifásico para La Planta de Beneficio “Brynajom I”
ubicado en el Distrito de San Pedro De Coris, Provincia de Churcampa, Departamento de Huancavelica.

Al respecto, el propietario,mediante contrato N° 005-2022, ha designado a la empresa COSEM Contratistas Generales S.R.L. la
ejecución del proyecto Sistema de Utilización en Media Tensión de Uso Exclusivo en 22.9 KV Trifásico para La Planta de
Beneficio “Brynajom I”; quien designa como residente de obra al Ing. Electricista Lindo Rubén Lobo Suarez, con registro CIP Nº
174459; asimismo hacemos de su conocimiento que se ha encargado como Coordinador de Obra al Ing. Carlos Muñoz Illanes
con Reg. CIP Nº 93775.

Cabe indicar que, según carta de compromiso N° 003/2022 de fecha 12.05.2022, el propietario se compromete a entregar el
Certificado de Inexistencia de Restos Arqueológicos (CIRA), al solicitar la Inspección y pruebas ,

Asimismo, deberá de cumplir con lo indicado en el documento de Conformidad de Estudio, que indica presentar el expediente
servidumbre saneado de toda la línea primaria, tal como señala la normatividad vigente, al solicitar la inspección y
pruebas.

Del mismo modo se le recuerda que para la ejecución de la obra deberá sujetarse a lo señalado por la siguiente normatividad
vigente.
“Norma de Procedimientos para la Elaboración de Proyectos y Ejecución de Obras en Sistemas de Distribución y
Sistemas de Utilización en Media Tensión en Zonas de Concesión de Distribución”.
Ley de Concesiones Eléctricas Nº 25844 y su Reglamento.
Código Nacional de Electricidad Suministro 2011.
Reglamento Nacional de Construcciones (RNC).
Reglamento de Seguridad y Salud en el Trabajo de las Actividades Eléctricas.
Normas DGE vigentes y demás normas pertinentes.
Normas de la RM N°111-2013-MEM/DM, Reglamento de Seguridad y Salud en el trabajo con Electricidad.
Ley de Contrataciones del Estado y su Reglamento.
Adjuntar certificado donde indique que la presente obra no se encuentra en zona de riesgo no mitigable y zona
intangible (Ley N° 30556).
La obra deberá cumplir con los siguientes requisitos, para lo cual debe considerar lo siguiente:
Según lo dispuesto por el Art. 25 de D.S. 070-2013-PCM y la Tercera Disposición Complementaria Final del D.S. 026-2016-PCM. Puede
validar la autenticidad e integridad del documento generado a través del código QR ubicado en la parte inferior izquierda del presente
documento o colocando la siguiente dirección en la barra del navegador: https://hidrandina.distriluz.com.pe/SistemaCasillaVerificacion
e ingresando la siguiente clave 1WDPKH.
Para un próximo trámite, señalar el número de expediente: 20220412006378 1 de 2
ENOSA: Jr. Callao 875-Piura. ENSA: Calle San Martín 250-Chiclayo.
HDNA: Jr. San Martín 831-Trujillo. ELCTO: Jr. Amazonas 641-Huacayo.
SEDE LIMA: Av. Camino Real N° 348, Torre El Pilar, Piso 13.-Lima.
 Acta de entrega de terreno.
Documento de aceptación de realización de trabajos cuando:
Se afecten veredas, pistas (Municipalidad)
Exista conflicto con tuberías de agua y/o desagüe (Empresa Administradora de Servicio de agua, desagüe y
alcantarillado)
Exista paralelismo y distancias mínimas con líneas telefónicas (Telefónica)
Otros.
Copia de los AST de los trabajos a realizar.
Check List indicando que se encuentran en buenas condiciones los IPP y EPP.
Carta de Responsabilidad en la ejecución de obra por el contratista o Ingeniero responsable de la obra declarando que
conoce el Reglamento de Seguridad y Salud en el Trabajo de las Actividades Eléctricas.
Copia de la póliza de Seguro Complementario de Trabajo de Riesgo (SCTR) de Pensiones.
Copia de la póliza de Seguro Complementario de Trabajo de Riesgo (SCTR) de Salud.
Seguro contra Accidentes de trabajo.
Presentará y adjuntará los certificados de calibración de los equipos que se utilizaran para las pruebas y mediciones,
emitidos por una entidad autorizada por el INDECOPI.
En las pruebas en blanco los arrollamientos y/o bornes de los transformadores de tensión permanecerán abiertas y los
arrollamientos y/o bornes de los transformadores de corriente permanecerán cortocircuitadas.
El transformador de medición deberá pasar por las Pruebas de Aceptación en los Laboratorios de la Unidad de
Transmisión de Electrocentro S.A. y cuyo protocolo deberá ser presentado como requisito en la Etapa de Inspección y
Pruebas.
El Medidor Multifunción deberá tener su certificado de Aferición emitida por la Unidad de Negocios correspondiente, por lo
que el contratista deberá coordinar con el Área Comercial de la Unidad de Negocios. Dicho certificado deberá ser
presentado como requisito en la Etapa de Inspección y Pruebas.
Comunicar a la Municipalidad de la jurisdicción de la obra la realización de los trabajos.
Presentar el Plan de Trabajo semanal el cual deberá incluir los formatos de procedimientos seguros de trabajo (PST) de
las actividades programadas y preciar la realización de charlas de Inducción al personal y Charlas de 05 minutos.
Asimismo, se recomienda que previo al inicio de las actividades se deberá efectuar la evaluación de los riesgos y discutir el
PST con el personal.
Sin otro particular quedo de usted.

Atentamente.

HUGO ALEJANDRO CONDOR SANTIAGO

Jefe (e) Area de Adm. de Proyectos

Según lo dispuesto por el Art. 25 de D.S. 070-2013-PCM y la Tercera Disposición Complementaria Final del D.S. 026-2016-PCM. Puede
validar la autenticidad e integridad del documento generado a través del código QR ubicado en la parte inferior izquierda del presente
documento o colocando la siguiente dirección en la barra del navegador: https://hidrandina.distriluz.com.pe/SistemaCasillaVerificacion
e ingresando la siguiente clave 1WDPKH.
Para un próximo trámite, señalar el número de expediente: 20220412006378 2 de 2
ENOSA: Jr. Callao 875-Piura. ENSA: Calle San Martín 250-Chiclayo.
HDNA: Jr. San Martín 831-Trujillo. ELCTO: Jr. Amazonas 641-Huacayo.
SEDE LIMA: Av. Camino Real N° 348, Torre El Pilar, Piso 13.-Lima.
 cllrltÉflx{, ftt6¡oxiL
Itys¡tüAvqLrcA
w
fiüs
Dlrecclón Regional de
EÍergit y lllinas

Resotrución Direetoral Regienal

Ne o0 § "?t}IffGCB.RE&-HVCA§QRI}E-SREM-
Huancavetica, CI 7 flii, ?'J??
VI§TO;

14toil2a2z,presentadi:^trY§X;.$:[',,i?il;,I':J?f¿,5i';il.]T"uiX1.x:ffi ::
el INFORME rÉCUTCO SUSTENTATORTO (tTS) DEL PROYECTO "ELECTR|F|GAG|ON
vc Bo A DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOIit 1", para su respectiva evaluación y aprobación, del
José Manuel Guerra Uruche, ubicado en el distrito de San Pedro de Coris,
cia de Churcampa, departamento de Huancavelica, e lnforme No 020-20221GOB..-
v -HVCA/GRDE-DREM/UTAA, de fecha A4lAZl2022. demás documentos obrantes en
elexpediente, y;
CONSIDERANDO:
Que, conforme lo señala el inciso 22 del artículo 2o de la
Constitución Polltica del Perú, es derecho fundamental de la persona humana gozar de
un ambiente equilibrado y adecuado al desarrollo de la vida, asímismo, conforme a los
artículo 16" y 17o de la Ley N'28611- Ley General del Ambiente definen a los
Yft,§ instrumentos de gestión ambiental, como aquellos medios operativos que son diseñados,
,w normados y aplicados, de carácter funcional o complementario, para facilitar y asegurar
el cumplimiento de la Política NacionaldelAmbiente y las normas ambientales en el pals.
Los instrumentos de gestión ambiental pueden ser de planificación, promoción,
prevención, control, conección, información, entre otros, rigiéndose por sus normas
legales respectivas y los principios de la citada Ley; siendo la evaluación ambiental uno
de dichos instrumentos, de acuerdo al artículo 17.2 del mismo texto normativo.
Que, el artículo 4 del Decreto Supremo N" 054-2013-PCM, que
establece las disposiciones ambientales para los proyectos de inversión, dispone que en
los casos en que sea necesario modificar componentes auxiliares o hacer ampliaciones
proyectos de inversión con certificación ambiental aprobada que tienen impacto
ntal no significativo o se pretendan hacer mejoras tecnológicas en las operaciones,
:A
se requerirá un procedimiento de modificación del lnstrumento de Gestión Ambiental;

Que, el Decreto Supremo N' 014-201g-EM, Reglamento para la

Protección Ambiental en las Actividades Eléctricas, en su artículo 59" establece que el
lnforme Técnico Sustentatorio (lTS), es un lnstrumento de Gestión Ambiental
complementario que se utiliza en los casos que sea necesario realizar la modificación de
componentes auxiliares o hacer ampliaciones en proyectos eléctricos, que cuenten con
certificación ambientalo lnstrumento de Gestión Ambientalcomplementario, que prevean
impactos ambientales no significativos o cuando se pretenda hacer mejoras tecnológicas
en las operaciones, siempre que no generen impactos ambientales negativos
significativos;
Que, el mismo artículo señala que el lT§ dobe sor presentado pOr
ef Titular a la Autoridad Ambiental Competente que corresponda, antes de la ejecución

ilci', ¿t2q - ''1 1

fx(ri t§*5 t87

 üs§ranHo ft*ctotaAL
HlrA§GAYET¿CA
w
Dlracclón Regional de
Energía y Mina§

Reselueión Directoral Regional

NO OO § .2O22IGOB-REG.HVCAIGRNE.DREM.
Huancavetica, ü ? f[ü. il]¿Z

Que, mediante regístro N' 091, Doc. N" 2120323, Exp. No

1585287 , de fecha 141A112022, presentado por eltitular José Manuel Guerra Urruche ante
la Dirección Regional de Energía y Minas de Huancavelica el INFORME TÉCNrcO
SUSTENTATOR|O (rTS) DEL PROYECTO ,,ELECTR|F|CAC|ON PLANTA DE BENEF|C|O
VO BO
BRYMAJOM 1", ubicado en el distrito de San Pedro de Coris, provincia de Churcampa,
departamento de Huancavelica, para su respectiva evaluación y aprobación;
Bi
Que, estando al lnfonne N" 020-2022/GOB.REG.-HVCA/GRDE-
DREM/UTAA, de fecha O4lO2l2A22. el responsable de la Unidad Técnica de Asuntos
Ambientales de la DREM-HVCA informa que, luego de revisado y evaluado el INFORME
TÉcN¡co susrENTAToRto (¡TS) DEL PRoyEcro'ELEcrRtFrcActoN rLANTA DE
BENEFICIO BRYNAJOIIII 1", ubicado en el distrito de San Pedro de Coris, provincia de
Churcampa, departamento de Huancavelica, se concluye que elexpediente se encuentra
de acuerdo al artículo 61o del Decreto Supremo N' 014-201g'EM, Reglamentg para la
\r Br Protección Ambiental en las Actividades Eléctricas, por lo tanto el INFORME TECNICO
SUSTENTATORIO antes señalado se encuentra CONFORME;

Estando a Io expuesto; y, en uso de las atribuciones conferidas

por la Ley N' 27867 "Ley Orgánica de Gobiernos Regionales"; Ordenanza Regional N"
421-GOB.REG-HVCA/CR, "Reglamento de Organización y Funciones"; Resolución
Gerencial Regíonal N' 002-2009/GOB.REG-HVCA/GRDE, Delegación de Funciones; y
demás normas vigentes, reglamentarias y complementarias.

SE RESUELVE:

ARTÍCULO PRIMERO: OTORGAR IA CONFORMIDAD AI

INFORME TÉCNICO SUSTENTATORIO (lTS) DEL PROYEGTO "ELECTR|FICACION
áffiF,"\
*?rJ "A PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM 1", ubicado en el distrito de San Pedro de Coris,
fl
i or.,eorg"
prov¡ncia de Churcampa, departamento de Huancavelica, deltitular José Manuel Guerra
L f --:l5/, Urruche de acuerdo a los fundamentos y
conclusiones señalados en el lnforme N" 020-
ru#u i
2022IGOB.REG.-HVCA/GRDE-DREM/UTAA, de fecha 041021202} el cual se adjunta
como anexo de la presente Resolución Directoral.

ARTíCULO SEGUNDO: Eltitular se encuentra obligada a cumplir

con lo estipulado en el lnforme Técnico
Sustentatorio (lTS) del PROYECTO
"ELECTRIF¡CACION PLANTA DE BENEFIGIO BRYNAJOM l"con los compromisos y
recomendaciones de la Unidad técnica de Asuntos Ambientales de la Dirección Regional
de Energía y Minas, con la presente Resolución y el informe que la sustenta, así como
con los compromisos asumidos a través de los escritos presentados durante la
evaluaciÓn.

3
 r*ir"
6ól:!lñl{O nf ClA}rll.
ryffiP
Direcclón Régional de
HU¡tt¡CAVELICA Energla y ñiinas

Resolución Direetoral Reglonal

g
NE OC "EE22fGOB-REG-HVCAÍGRN E-BRHIII -

Huancavetica, ü i f¿U. iu¿¿

lnfículo TERCERO: La aprobacíón de la presente
Gertificación Ambiental no constituye el otorgamiento de autorizaciones, permisos y
otros, que por leyes orgánicas o especiales son de competencia de otras autoridades
nacionales, sectoriales y regionales o locales o la que corresponda otorgar a algún
particular.

nnfíCutO CUARTO: NoTlFlcAR el presente Acto a la Gerencia

Regional de Desarrollo Económico, Unidad Técnica de Asuntos Ambientales de la
Dirección Regional de Energía Minas de Huancavelica, OEFA OD HUANCAVELICA e
interesado, para su conocimiento y fines pertinentes.

nee[SrnEsE, coiIUNfOuESE Y ARGHIVESE,

Y V$IAS
l, .1.#

aiii.CcióN
tnü
,:.r;{ ii{Grüi(AL

4
 Firmado digitalmente por ASTO
PALACIOS Rodney Bettino FAU
30222 soft
PERU I Ministerio de Cuitura DIRECCI6N DESCONCENTRADA DE DIRECClON DESCONCENTRADA DE
Motive: Soy el autor del docufriento
CULTURA HUANCAVELICA CULTURA HUANCAVELICA Fecha: 21.02.2022 16:59:01 -05:00

"Decenio de la Igualdad de Oportunidades para Mujeres y Hombres"

"Ano del Fortalecimiento de la Soberania Nacional"

Huancavelica, 21 de Febrero del 2022

CARTA N° 000081-2022-DDC HVCA/MC

Senor:
JOSE MANUEL GUERRA URRUCHE
Presente.-

Asunto : DENEGADO POR VIAS DE REGULARIZACION LA SOLICITUD

DE CERTIFICADO DE INEXISTENCIA DE RESTOS
ARQUEOLOGICOS (CIRA) - “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACION EN
MEDIA TENSION 22.9 KV, 3F DE USO EXCLUSIVO PARA
PLANTA CONCENTRADORA CARHUANCHO DE LA EMPRESA
MINERA BRYNAJOM S.R.L.

Referenda : EXPEDIENTS N° 3426-2022

PROVEIDO N° 000402-2022-DDC HVCA/MC (03FEB2022)
INFORME N° 000019-2022-DDC HVCA-EZPM/MC (03FEB2022)
INFORME N° 000032-2022-DDC HVCA-JMCM/MC (24ENE2022)
SOLICITUD S/N (12ENE2022)

De mi consideracion:

Saludandole cordialmente, me dirijo a usted para dar atencion a su solicitud de

expedicion del Certificado de Inexistencia de Restos Arqueologicos (CIRA) para el
proyecto “Sistema de Utilizacion en Media Tension 22.9 KV, 3F de uso exclusive
para Planta Concentradora Carhuancho de la EMPRESA MINERA BRYNAJOM
S.R.L”

Al respecto, el personal tecnico de la Direccion Desconcentrada de Cuitura -

Huancavelica ha efectuado la revision de la documentacion y realizado la inspeccion
al terreno que se solicita certificar, emitiendose el INFORME N°00019-2022-DDC
HYVCA-EZPM/MC_ (03FEB2022), de la Lie. Elizabeth Zoraida Palomino Meneses, en
el cual se precisa que se a corroborado que el trazo solicitado esta ejecutado, desde la
sub base de Electrocentro en una longitud de 10 metros registra rollizos de eucalipto
con una red tendida.

Mientras que el trazo presente una variante y se ha utilizado el area de servidumbre de

la carretera preexistente, en donde se registran postes de concrete y la red esta tendida
tanto aerea con subterraneamente, prolongandose hasta el extreme de la carretera.

A proposito, precisamos que el articulo 12° del Reglamento de Intervenciones

Arqueologicas, aprobado mediante Decreto Supremos N° 003-2014-MC, sehala: “Para
realizar una intervencidn en cualquiera de sus modalidades u obtener una certificacion,
sea en espacios publicos o privados, se debe contar con la autorizacidn del Ministerio
de Cuitura. Estas deben tramitarse ante la Sede Central o las Direcciones
Desconcentradas de Cuitura, segun el ambito de sus competencias. En ningun caso
estas seran otorgadas en vias de regularizacion”.

Av. Javier Prado Este 2465, San Borja

Central Telefonica: (511) 618 9393
www.gob.pe/cultura
:opia
ente din
I
■2013-PCM y
Siempre
f con el pueblO
 PERU I Ministerio de Cultura DIRECCION DESCONCENTRADA DE DIRECCI6N DESCONCENTRADA DE
CULTURA HUANCAVELICA CULTURA HUANCAVELICA

"Decenio de !a Igualdad de Oportunidades para Mujeres y Hombres"

"Ano del Fortalecimiento de la Soberania Nacional"

For lo expuesto, su solicitud de expedicion del CIRA para el area del proyecto “Sistema
de Utilizacion en Media Tension 22.9 KV, 3F de uso exclusive para Planta
Concentradora Carhuancho de la EMPRESA MINERA BRYNAJOM S.R.L”, ubicado
en el Distrito de San Pedro de Coris, Provincia de Churcampa, Departamento de
Huancavelica, ha sido denegada.

I. CONCLUSIONES:

1.1 El administrado no ha cumplido con presentar los requisites estipulados en la

normativa vigente. Ya que se estable en:

> REGLAMENTO DE INTERVENCION ARQUEOLOGICA aprobado mediante

Decreto Supremo N° 003-2014-MC, en el capitulo II, articulo 12, lo siguiente:

CAPITULO II

AUTORIZACION Y TITULARIDAD

Articulo 12. AUTORIZACION, CERTIFICACION Y TITULARIDAD

Para realizar una intervencion arqueologica en cualquiera de sus
modalidades u obtener una certificacion, sea en espacios publicos 0
privados, se debe contar con la autorizacion del Ministerio de Cultura.
Estas deben tramitarse ante la Sede Central 0 las Direcciones
Desconcentradas de Cultura, segun el ambito de sus competencias. En
ningun caso estas seran otorgadas en vlas de regularizacion.

> En la Ley General del Patrimonio Cultural de la Nacion N° 28296

SUBCAPITULO 2

BIENES CULTURALES VIRREINALES Y REPUBLICANOS

Articulo 37°.- PROHIBICION DE REGULARIZACION

Esta prohibido conceder autorizacion de ejecucidn de obra vinculada a
bienes culturales inmuebles, en via de regularizacion, que haya sido
ejecutada sin autorizacion previa del INC.

1.2 No existen vestigios arqueologicos en superficie en el area materia de

certificacion.

Adjunto sustento en cuatro (04) folios, para su conocimiento y fines pertinentes.

Asimismo, se hace de su conocimiento que mediante Resolucibn Directoral N° 238-

2017-VMPCIC-MC, del 28 de diciembre de 2017, se aprobo la “Guia para la expedicion
del Certificado de Inexistencia de Restos Arqueologicos - CIRA”, la que tiene por objetivo
establecer las pautas que deben seguir los administrados (personas naturales 0
juridicas) para elaborar y presentar el expediente para obtencion de un CIRA; en tal
sentido, en lo sucesivo las solicitudes de expedicion de CIRA deberan observar lo
indicado en esta guia. La Guia y sus anexos pueden descargarse en:
https://vwvw.aob.pe/483-obtener-certificado-de-inexistencia-de-restos-araueoloqicos-cira.

Av. Javier Prado Este 2465, San Borja

Central Telefonica: (511) 618 9393
T Siempre
www.gob.pe/cultura
C f con el pueblO
1
 DmiCCIdhi Desconcentrada de direcci6n desconcentrada de
PERU :rio de Culture
CULTURA HUANOWEUCA CULTURA HUANCAVELICA

"Decenio de la Igualdad de Oportunidades para Mujeres y Hombres"

"Ano del Fortalecimiento de la Soberania Nacional"

Igualmente, le participamos que el Ministerio de Cultura, a traves de la Direccion de

Certificaciones, ha puesto a disposicion de la ciudadama el Sistema de Gestion de CIRA
y el Sistema de Gestion de PMA para realizar estos procedimientos de manera virtual.
Para dar inicio a un procedimiento administrative los interesados podran ingresar al
vinculo: http://plataformamincu.cultura.qob.pe/accesovirtual. Finalmente, le
recomendamos que todas las solicitudes presentadas a un expediente mantengan la
continuidad del canal utilizado al presentar la solicitud de expedicion del CIRA.

Atentamente,

Docurpertto firmado eKgitalmente

Rp&NEY BETTING XSJO PALACIOS

DIRECpiON DESCObK^ENTRADA^CULTURA HUANCAVELICA

«RAP/mmh»

Av. Javier Prado Este 2465, San Borja

Central Telefonica: (511) 618 9393
)|f! Siempre
www.gob.pe/cultura UJjjon el pueblo
Esta copia autentica imprimible de un documento electronico archivado por el Ministerio de Cultura, aplicando lo dispuesto por el Art. 25 de D.S. 070-2013-PCM y la Tercera Disposicii
Complementaria Final del D.S. 026-2016-PCM. Su autf :idad e integridad pueden contrastadas a traves de la siguiente direccion web:
 1390
5

2000
2000
K
DETALLE 1

VISTA DE PLANTA
L
4

500 500

1000
39 Conductor Autoportante NA2XSA2Y-S 18/30kV de 50 mm² Req.
38 Porta escalera de FºGº para maniobras de Seccionamiento (Incluye accesorios según detalle de armado) 1
37 Tablero de control del recloser 1
36 Conductor Desnudo de Cobre cableado temple blando 35 mm² req.
35 Conductor tipo WP de Cobre cableado temple blando 35 mm² req.
34 Conductor de AL. tipo NA2XSY 18/30 KV de 50mm2 req.
DETALLE 1 33 Conductor de Aleación de Aluminio Tipo AAAC de 50 mm2 de sección 7 hilos req.
3

L K
32 Murete de concreto armado 1

2000
31 Cable de control tipo NYY de 7x2.5mm2 15m
30 Tubo de F°G° de 35mmØ x 3m long. con curva t/baston 1
29 Caja metalica portamedidor trifasico 1
28 Medidor electronico multifuncional A1800, Incluye Modem 4G (SUMINISTRADO POR ELECTROCENTRO S.A.) 1
27 Trafomix exterior: TP 3x 50VA, 22.9/0.22kV; TC 3x30VA, 30/5A precision 0.2 1
26 Fusible de expulsión de 25 A 3
25 Recloser Exterior Trifásico 27.0kV, 630/12500A, 125 kV BIL, incluye transformador monofásico y tablero de control 1
24 Pararrayo clase distribución óxido metálico de 21 KV, 10 KA, 150 KV (BIL) 3
23 Seccionador fusible unipolar tipo Cut Out de 27 KV., 100 A, 150 KV (BIL) 3
2

22 Hebilla de acero inoxidable para fleje de 19mm 23

21 Fleje de acero inoxidable (Band-It) de 19mm de ancho y 0.8mm espesor 23

20 Sikaboom 1

19 Tubo de F°G° de 3'' Ø x 5m long 6

18 Tubo PVC-P de 3'' Ø x 3m long 3

17 Correa plastica de amarre 363 mm de longitud color negro 50
Perno A°G°, ø 9.5mm x 38 mm Long. c/arandela de presion de A°G° DE 9.5 mm ø 6
Vista perfil carga Vista perfil fuente 16
15 Arandela cuadrada plana de A°G° 57x57x5mm 18mm de agujero 18

14 Arandela cuadrada curva de A°G° 57x57x5mm 18mm de agujero 20

13 Conector tipo perno partido de cobre para conductor de 25 mm2 de sección 8

12 Plancha doblada de Cobre para linea a tierra Tipo J 12

1

11 Perno maquinado A°G° 16 mm diam x 508 mm long, 152 mm de roscado con t/c 4

VILCAHUAMAN Firmado digitalmente 10 Perno maquinado A˚G˚ 16 mm² ø x 305mm. Long. 152 mm de roscado con t/c.
Perno maquinado A˚G˚ 16 mm² ø x 254mm. Long. 152 mm de roscado con t/c.
12

RODRIGUEZ por VILCAHUAMAN 09 8

Perno maquinado A˚G˚ 13 mm² ø x 254mm. Long. 152 mm de roscado con t/c. 8
RODRIGUEZ Cesar Luis 08
Cesar Luis FAU FAU 20129646099 soft 07 Terminal de comprension, Tipo Ojal para conductor de 50mm2 22

20129646099 Fecha: 2022.04.07

06 Terminal autocontraible para conductor N2XSY de 50mm2 22
Cruceta de perfil tipo "U" de F°G° de 75x75x9.5mm, 2.60m long 2
soft
05
10:23:21 -05'00' Cruceta de perfil tipo "U" de F°G° de 75x75x6mm, 2.10m long 2
04
03 Bastidor simple con perfiles de F°G° 75x75x6mm, 1.2m long., incluye riostra de 1.24m y acc (pernos riostra) 4

02 Media loza de CAV 1.5m, 750 Kg 2

01 Poste de C.A.C. 13/500/2/165/360, c/perilla 2

0

CÓDIGO DESCRIPCIÓN CANT.

5000
800 800

2000

DISEÑO: LAMINA N°:

APROB.

L.R.L.S
VISTA FRONTAL
APROBO:
REVISION N°

---
ESTRUCTURA DE SECCIONAMIENTO , MEDICION Y PROTECCION
SU-01
FECHA

DIBUJO:
A.J.L.A.
TIPO PSMP-3
V°B°

FECHA: ESC:
MARZO - 2022 S/E
CERTIFICADO DE ZONA DE RIESGO NO MITIGABLE Y ZONA
INTANGIBLE
N° 001-2021/MDSC

El órgano ejecutable de la Municipalidad distrital de San Pedro de Coris,

provincia de Churcampa y departamento de Huancavelica, en cumplimiento de

lo establecido en la Ley N° 30556, ha realizado la inspección técnica respecto a

la ubicación del proyecto:

“SISTEMA DE UTILIZACION EN MEDIA TENSION 22.9 kV – 3Ø DE USO

EXCLUSIVO PARA LA PLANTA CONCENTRADORA CARHUANCHO DE LA
EMPRESA MINERA BRYNAJOM S.R.L-HUANCAVELICA”.

El que suscribe CERTIFICA que el proyecto objeto de la inspección antes

señalado NO SE ENCUENTRA UBICADA EN ZONA DE RIESGO NO

MITIGABLE Y ZONA INTANGIBLE.

LUGAR: San Pedro de Coris/Churcampa/Huancavelica

VIGENCIA 2 AÑOS. FECHA DE EXPEDICION: 05/01/2021

FECHA DE CADUCIDAD: 06/01/2023

5/4/22, 09:39 Datos de Ficha RUC- CIR(Constancia de Información Registrada)

FICHA RUC : 20486419971

BRYNAJOM S.R.L.
Número de Transacción : 516196168
CIR - Constancia de Información Registrada

Información General del Contribuyente

Apellidos y Nombres ó Razón Social : BRYNAJOM S.R.L.

Tipo de Contribuyente : 28-SOC.COM.RESPONS. LTDA
Fecha de Inscripción : 20/03/2006
Fecha de Inicio de Actividades : 14/03/2006
Estado del Contribuyente : ACTIVO
Dependencia SUNAT : 0023 - INTENDENCIA LIMA
Condición del Domicilio Fiscal : HABIDO
Emisor electrónico desde : 04/07/2016
Comprobantes electrónicos : FACTURA (desde 04/07/2016),BOLETA (desde 20/07/2016)

Datos del Contribuyente

Nombre Comercial : -
Tipo de Representación : -
Actividad Económica Principal : 4100 - CONSTRUCCIÓN DE EDIFICIOS
7730 - ALQUILER Y ARRENDAMIENTO DE OTROS TIPOS DE MAQUINARIA,
Actividad Económica Secundaria 1 :
EQUIPO Y BIENES TANGIBLES
Actividad Económica Secundaria 2 : -
Sistema Emisión Comprobantes de Pago : MANUAL
Sistema de Contabilidad : MANUAL/COMPUTARIZADO
Código de Profesión / Oficio : -
Actividad de Comercio Exterior : SIN ACTIVIDAD
Número Fax : -
Teléfono Fijo 1 : 64
- 253563
Teléfono Fijo 2 : -
Teléfono Móvil 1 : 64 -
935978160
Teléfono Móvil 2 : 64 -
964939450
Correo Electrónico 1 : [email protected]
Correo Electrónico 2 : -

Domicilio Fiscal

Actividad Economica : 4100 - CONSTRUCCIÓN DE EDIFICIOS

Departamento : LIMA
Provincia : LIMA
Distrito : LA MOLINA
Tipo y Nombre Zona : URB.
CAMINO REAL
Tipo y Nombre Vía : CAL.
INFANTAS
Nro : 181
Km : -
Mz : -
Lote : -
Dpto : -
Interior : -
Otras Referencias : -
Condición del inmueble declarado como Domicilio Fiscal : OTROS.

Datos de la Empresa

Fecha Inscripción RR.PP : 14/03/2006

Número de Partida Registral : 12929993
Tomo/Ficha : -
Folio : -
Asiento : -
Origen del Capital : NACIONAL
País de Origen del Capital : -

Registro de Tributos Afectos

https://e-menu.sunat.gob.pe/cl-ti-itmenu/MenuInternet.htm?pestana=*&agrupacion=* 1/3
5/4/22, 09:39 Datos de Ficha RUC- CIR(Constancia de Información Registrada)

Exoneración
Tributo Afecto desde Marca de
Desde Hasta
Exoneración
IGV - OPER. INT. - CTA. PROPIA 14/03/2006 - - -
IMP.TEMPORAL A LOS ACTIV.NETOS 01/03/2008 - - -
RENTA 4TA. CATEG. RETENCIONES 01/09/2021 - - -
RENTA 5TA. CATEG. RETENCIONES 07/01/2008 - - -
RENTA - REGIMEN MYPE TRIBUTARIO 01/01/2022 - - -
ESSALUD SEG REGULAR TRABAJADOR 01/05/2006 - - -
SNP - LEY 19990 16/12/2021 - - -
FONDO CJMMS - LEY 29741-TRAB 01/08/2012 - - -
SENCICO 14/03/2006 - - -

Representantes Legales

Tipo y Número de Fecha de Nro. Orden de

Apellidos y Nombres Cargo Fecha Desde
Documento Nacimiento Representación
GUERRA URRUCHE JOSE MANUEL GERENTE GENERAL 04/05/1965 14/03/2006 -
DOC. NACIONAL DE
Dirección Ubigeo Teléfono Correo
IDENTIDAD
-23720220 JUNIN HUANCAYO
PJ. SANTA MARIA 198 12 - - -
HUANCAYO

Otras Personas Vinculadas

Tipo y Fecha de
Apellidos y Nombres Vinculo Fecha Desde Origen Porcentaje
Nro.Doc. Nacimiento
DOC. PAREDES ORDOÑEZ MARCELA
SOCIO 26/11/1955 14/03/2006 - 3.500000000
NACIONAL LUZMILA
DE Dirección Ubigeo Teléfono Correo
IDENTIDAD
-19814933 --- --- -
Tipo y Fecha de
Apellidos y Nombres Vinculo Fecha Desde Origen Porcentaje
Nro.Doc. Nacimiento
DOC. URRUCHI DE GUERRA MELCHORA
SOCIO 06/01/1932 14/03/2006 - 96.500000000
NACIONAL RAYMUNDA
DE Dirección Ubigeo Teléfono Correo
IDENTIDAD
-19827401 --- --- -

Establecimientos Anexos

Otras
Código Tipo Denominación Ubigeo Domicilio Cond.Legal
Referencias
ENT
JUNIN
HUANCAYO PROLONG
0001 SUCURSAL SUCURSAL Z.I. BATANYACU AV. GRAU 2533 PROPIO
EL TAMBO MENENDEZ
Y GRAU
SEDE JUNIN
HUANCAYO ---- PUEBLO CHUPURO AV. LOS PROCERES CESION EN
0003 S.PRODUCTIVA -
PRODUCTIVA CHUPURO S/N USO.
JUNIN
HUANCAYO ---- COMUNIDAD CAMPESINA ACOPALCA ---- ANEXO DE
0004 S.PRODUCTIVA - ALQUILADO
HUANCAYO CASA HACIENDA S/N ACOPALCA

 
Importante

La SUNAT se reserva el derecho de verificar el domicilio fiscal declarado por el contribuyente en cualquier momento.

Documento emitido a través de SOL - SUNAT Operaciones en Línea, que tiene validez para realizar trámites Administrativos, Judiciales y
demás

DEPENDENCIA SUNAT
Fecha:05/04/2022
Hora:09:39

https://e-menu.sunat.gob.pe/cl-ti-itmenu/MenuInternet.htm?pestana=*&agrupacion=* 2/3
5/4/22, 09:39 Datos de Ficha RUC- CIR(Constancia de Información Registrada)

https://e-menu.sunat.gob.pe/cl-ti-itmenu/MenuInternet.htm?pestana=*&agrupacion=* 3/3
ZONA REGISTRAL X]V. SEDE AYAGUCHO Código N" 91988076
Oficina Registral HUANTA Solicitud N'4620438
1310812021 '16:38:32

REGISTRO DE PROPIEDAD INIVIUEBLE

REG¡STRO DE PREDIOS

CERTIFICADO REGISTRAL INMOB!LIARIO

El funcionario que suscribe, CERTIFICA:

I. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL INMUEBLE

Ubicación:
_\En UBICACION RURAL PREDIO YACOHUANAY
Ha. i52.6600
r..ristrito de: SAN PEDRO DE CORIS Provincia de: CHURCAIUPA Departamento de: HUANCAVELICA

Las inscripciones corren inscritas en la Partida Electrónica N" 40017915.

Antecedentes: Ninguno

Numero de lmágenes Electrónicas, posteriores a la Ficha o Tomoi 0 (Cero)

¡I. EL TITULAR DOMINIAL REGISTRAL

o
N Propietario(s)
1 BRYNAJOIV S.R.L

III. CARGAS Y GRAVÁMENES INSCRITOS VIGENTES

HIPOTECA EN EL ASIENTO O2-D, CONSTITUIDA POR IMENDEZ GALINDO Y ESPOSA DOÑA TVARCELINA
LEYVA DE LA CRUZ EN FAVOR DE LA CAJA RURAL AHORRO Y CREDITO LOS LIBERTADORES DE
AYACUCHO, HASTA POR LA SUÍVA DE US$ 21,OOO.OO DOLARES AÍVIERICANOS, CON EL OBJETO DE
SARANTIZAR Y RESPALDAR EL PAGO DE UN PRESTAIVO.
ÉtvlBARGO EN EL ASIENTO 06-D: TRABADO HASTA POR LA SUTVA DE US$ 12,000.00 DOLARES
AIVERICANOS, EXPEDIDO MEDIANTE RESOLUCION DEL JUEZ DEL DECIMO QUINTO JUZGADO CIVIL,
CORTE SUPERIOR DE JU$.TICIA DE LIN4A, SECRETARIO NELY CARHUACHIN SICCHA EN
POR DON LUS ARTURO CACERES CLAVIJO CONTRA TMARCELINO GALINDO Y ON
DE DAR SUIVIA DE DINERO

IV. ANOTAC¡ONES EN EL REGISTRO PERSONAL O RUBRO O

Ninguno

V. TíTULOS PENDIENTES

Ninguno

VI. DATOS ADICIONALES DE RELEVANCIA PARA CONOCIMIENTO DE TERCEROS

LOS CERTIFICADOS OUE EXTIENDEN LAS OFICINAS REGISTRALES ACREDITAN LA EXISTENCIA O INEXISTENCIA DE INSCRIPICIONES O ANOTACIONES EN EL REGISTRO AL
TtEt\¡Po DE su expeotclón (ART. 140'DEL T.u.o DEL REGLAT\,4ENTo cENERAL DE Los REGlsrRos púellcos ApRoBADo poR RESoLUCToN N. 126-2012-suNARp-sN).
 +:
.t

§ur,*,rp-;;,;,
.a: \r\ t¿r.:,i.;':t \ i ll ti 1i1. rt

REGLATUENTO DEL SERVICIO DE PUBLICIDAD REGISTRAL: Artículo 81.- Delimitación de la responsabilidad - El

servidor responsable que expide la publicidad formal no asume responsabilidad por los defectos o las inexactitudes de
los asientos registrales, índices automatizados, y títulos pendientes que no consten en el sistema informático.

VII. PÁG¡NAS QUE ACOMPAÑAN AL CERTIFICADO

PAGINAS DEL 01 AL 05 PARTIDA N" 40017915

No de Fojas del Certificado: 2 No Recibo: 2021 -5295818

Derechos Pagados: S/. 71.00
Mayor Derecho: S/. 0
Total de Derechos: S/. 71.00

Verificado y expedido por JUAN CARLOS LINDO ALFARO , ABOGADO CERTIFICADOR de la Oficina Registral de
HUANTA, a las 08:44:48 horas del20 de Agosto del2021

-)

lir rl la

JrJ*il 0s ut*00
AESSABCI
3ma Rag*¡lf,Bl N*

ÜE
VllLSede
zfr&
lEMrsoRol
lEMrsoRrl
lErursoR2l

-)

LOS CERTIFICADOS OUE EXTIENDEN LAS OFICINAS REGISTRALES ACREDITAN LA EXISTENCIA

O INEXISTENCIA DE INSCRIPICIONES O ANOTACIONES EN EL REGISTRO AL
rlElvPoDE su EXPEDIoIÓN (ART. 140' DEL r.u.o DEL REGLAT\¡ENro cENERAL oe ros necrsrnos puafrcós
ApáóaAñó üoñirisoLucróN N" 126-20.12-suNARp-sN).
OF ICINA RE GI ST RAL R[GIONAL "tOS LI BERTADORES \i/ARI" PRO PIE DAD Y OFICINA DE
CHLlRutAl"lFA
I

PROP. 5
PLANO ......A.. FICHA (-, (-) (:), d-i '-:) I'iI
5 i'l I o ó
NO
NEF
O 4 8 C( C)[:t{:} 5" A ü.
A),

INDEPENDI¿AClON.*El inmueble inscrito en esta ficha se ha independi¿ado de1 que r nscri tt) en. -I{UANCAVSLICA 23t07 / L9e9

B), D8§ffi,IPcION ucl IMEEBI,ST .$S

O1.- RUSTIC0. denominado "l'ACOI'ltJANAv"' ubicado en el Di.si-rit-o de 5Ai'] F'EDRo fJE CoÉIS, Frovrnria ce
CHURCANPA y Dspartamento de I'IUANCAVELICA - * Area 152 . dentro de los 1Índeros didas peri$átri
siguientes: Pon e1 N0RTE, con berreno de la Cotnunidad iniciándose desde e.l. Re tamav0i:c . donde
6ambia su rumbc¡ hacia.'Nor-o§sle, por e1 riachuelo n derecha, ab.a jo 1le puhto denominado Sa
Carlos- donde cambia de rumbo hacia Sutr-Oesle, asce n form¿ recta aI nomi nado a y llegar on forma
recte aI punlo Mo1le Cruz. fi.nalmente a Tajo Huacc 25-OOmI PrJr e con La r fundo UrpaYcco). lPa "
propiedad de Pio Cuadros Yance, iniciándose 1;o ReLama:/oD o L-rna ori n Sur*oeste¡ en forma recL
ascendiendo para Ii.egal' aI pllnto denonrinado Cru¿, en s rido c canritro do irerra,Jura hacj' T'
Pafipalca-Chaucamarca, con 1.,275.OOml. ; Por eI Lerrenos de Ia C u d Carnpesin CC a rhuancho, i nici.ándose desde' el' §
punto denominado Ccellccay Cruz tornando n de Nor-0este e I catn herr.adura cuyo lirnite e$ el cer -
de piedras hasta llegar al Ptlnto A sandü por 1o5 n Fuca 8-'[a
y, Por eJ-
j.rrall.mente llegar eI putnto denomínaoo
on terrenos de 1a Comunidad carnpesLna
d
llatarumi donde se cru¿an los canrinos S con 1 . O5O §)
L arhuancho. Íniciándoge desde eI pu adü I'latarumi, p endo hac:i.a te. , entre cercos dB Cabuya donde limit z.o
carflino de herradura haci ta donde canrbia e n La0ión eI NsrLe hasta I. Iegar al lugar de Tarapampa
I uegc: a. de rumbo hacia eJ ralmenLe oa ra pun Lo I a c, iiuaccta ; donde I imi t.a loe Le r ranos c §
o
o
-r

ce rco de Ca con 795 - O0nrl TotaI rJe 5, l'lua rl /L

-----
Me¡ldozaAzp¡¡$tt
{(o
PgE¡¡@
(,l

,t:H;:lj"
REGISTRO PERSONAL
D§
¡¡o

t ,¡:.'"''.i Oi-- [nscripc-io¡res referentes a

,"
*,
" " per5onas que han f igura<1o como
'{ ":'i propietarios en los úl l.irnos 3O
"{
rr! aíio-:. * N NA. * l-luan ta,
.:r= 1:
?,\.+t : i::. .:l
23/07/eA"-
l1

qr"*H:#
' LEGAL1¿!1gIQ¡{ rE*.!s s ttE&¡of,
{
CONTINUA
AL
DORSO

EDIAZS/0201 IIVPRES ÓN:20/0812021 09 13 42 Pásina 1 de 5

llo existen Titulos Pendientes y/o Suspendidos
 o2- PROP DAD HURCAI'IF'A
¡l:: r
6 O { o ó 2 I Plano : A
OFICINA DE

FICHA NO
']
(}(}(-)()21É

C) TITUTOS DE DOMINIO D) GRAVAMENES Y CARGAS E) CANCELACIONES

OX--- ltl*[rG$"lIHIICtülLlfif,:]IüIlSi:: A f avo r de don @U-- Ant,eriores a .la i-rideoe

FIENDEZ GáLlNDO, MARCELfNO y esposa doña y 50 a ños de .an t i. grurerJad
-EyvA DE LA CRUZ, mAilCe LIt'lA- - l-.a historia l{uar^¡ ba ,
da I de recho de p ropi.edád as cclmc
sigue: Por Escritura Púb1Íca de Fecha
L7/O1/L99o, Notario de HLrancavelica don
+ugusto Zorrilla Almonacid-* doña Paul ina
Gal irrclo viuda de f'fé¡rdez vendió por e]
¡7ñlD
- por don t*§
"Á-'¡
{ At
rlarceL i no rlenoé¿ es pos.a doña
crecio de I/-5'0OO,oo0.0o intis pagado-- lfe rce I i na Le Cruz a favor de
Pres. a hrs . t2:31: JS del
f i tulo No 18t17 del trrmo 5 de]"
/ §9a -"
"3/A7Di a r io . -
Caja RuraI
Liberta do res
y C rédi Lci L
cucho, haLsa
*tñü*
Derecl'los: S/ "29"o0 nuevos soIes"* Recibo suma cle 00 Dólares Arrr §.ek\J'
No 2958. - f3 fol ios . - HUANTA, err gAt- go d p res $ rf>§*
f\\.J !
23i07,/
5o
t' €i5
t' e I
Am e r
m e tls UA T
i ncum p 1 I
i CA I zú ,t 0
e ba t r v
I t1 te t' e5
\$-
to-
o)

nsa t.o r i o eq U 1 aI L
§
nü r m aI v po r o ú9. me
m
z.o
urne t't t(] P r' F tra §
I eEa l. ¿ ad a ri .l,r TI 1o o
o
Cá rde rlas Ia P r I .1

de
de 1
o9 o3 Í t.u I o i.l0 t L.UrI o b \¡
(o
D De ho 7 n
Re c bo 1 7 ó8 .F (,r
l
Jayc
Éú ir,s" (.I

i".,*\\i'
Ha ta qub Be 1n c r I ila
f &vor he LUI S AETURO
ca a
CALVIJO Lrasado cc)n DOLORES
I{ORALES QIJI SPE haet,a por Ll$
D - A. se{ún mÍnuta de I tl l/o3/o2 -
Se anota a sol"lcltucl del notar-i-o cle Llma
Jose Berreto BogFia¡to de L6/O9/O? -- Pres-
a hrs. B : 58 clel 18,209,¡02 titulo : 1/ ró.
c 2675 del tomo I clel I)a»' §/
DE 14 - 00 . HUANTA. 01/ rQ/o" .

sAllcHtT
MAñ.ü{
pllPr ¡¡n

EDIAZS/0201 II/PRES|ÓN:20/08t202109 43 42 página 2 de 5

No existen Titu os Pendientes y/o Suspendidos
 PROPIE AD ) OFICINA DE C HU

Plano : B OOO AzA

FICHA Nq -- r-t Éa r-t = r .'t
NEF
Io ( o o ó 2- o3
E) CANCEI-ACIONES
c) TrruLos DE DoMlNlo O} GRAVAITIENES Y CARGAS

.-
ii4 BLOEUEB: Hasta que 5e inqcri
1a hipoteca a favor de LUIS
CACEFES CLAV IJlf casado con
TF I DAD f4ORALES AU I 5IPEh
I.I T
12,C,...,4t.O,, D.A. seqúnm!rnuta d
Se anota e solicitud d, nota L ima
Jcrse Berret-crBoqgiano d I t7ta2 - -
Pre--. a hr--- 9:.17 de
3936, Rec. de
Titulo
I D. Der i!
4
;tiÑ
14.OO.- HUANTA
^,¡ñ*'
usk\r.
!q)
AÑi ZAf,lON DE DE s*"u" e
PC De conformi el art, CL
del Reqlar¡en ldel §)
r.os PúbIicos, lariza z.o
! o de inscripc ,enel §
Req
omi tido
ist rador
fi
de ce5
a9i
med i 1a
o
o
p reÉen ta se I rel to, a
mér i to lo arch dió (0
mér i to ref er id c iprión, (,l
nisrno se encu rt¡ado e
R Ittar I ón rsg 5n
Hr-r ?(,():',

o6. - HGO: Trabado hagta po¡- I a

u$. l2, rlQO dól ares arneri canos r
do mpdj.ante Resolución por e) Juez
imo Ouinto Ju:qado CiviI, Corte
Super de Jrrsticia de Lina, Secretario
Carhtrachin Siccha,Bn los seqtridos
por Dorr Luris Arturo Cáceres Clavijo
rontr¡ Don lnar€plino llÉnede¡ G¡Iindo y
tra, Sobre Abliqeción de Dar Suma de
iners - -
HuancaYc
tintra en la Ha-ia C
,N\a Reqi§üal :1 ¡-' ,i-..........--
lli if Tr jDt)
'/-J,':tIn

ED]AZS/0201 I[/PRESIÓN:20/08i2021 09:43 42 Página 3 de 5

l',10 existen Títulos Pendientes v/o Suspendidos
 PROPIE-,AD ) oFlclNA DE er¡uasnfirn _

I'lEF J U { 0 O o 2 8 or(
Pl*nr¡ : C
FrcHA *'-- ÉHHÉ:E
E) CANCELACIONES
c) TrruLos DE DoMlNro DI GRAVAMENES Y CARGAS

- Et'tffARGO; '( V iene

(16,
Copia Certificad¿. de
expedida por el Jüez
Sscretarie. -Pres . á h
2&/O?/03 Ti tulo torno
üOlr,¡dÉI Bisrio choE .71 .OO
Ntlevos §o I ea - * Reci
Huanta, G5/Of,/UC¡O:

-o
q)
-
d
§)
zo
§
o
o
{(o
J
(,t

EDTAZS/0201 tMpRrstÓn:zolo\nox og 43.42 Página 4 de 5

No existen Titulos Pendientes yio Suspendidos
 Partida No 40017915

ZONA REGISTRAL N: XI - SEDE ICA

OFTCINA REGISTRAL HUANTA

sunarp
!,rF., _:,--J.r:. ¡ r!:.,n.¡
N" Partida: 40017915

d.j iJ., Re.,isi :ir Pri i.c.-

INSCRIPCION DE SECCTON ESPECIAL DE PREDIOS RURALE§
UBIC.RUR PREDIO YACOHUANAY AREA IIa 152.ó600
SAN PEDRO DE CORIS

Viene de la ficha 28-080510

REGISTRO DE PROPIEDAD INMUEBLE

RUBRO: TITULOS DE DOtVlNlO
C0002: COMPRAVENTA

Vendido a favor de empresa BRYNAJOM S.R.L en la pañida No

del registro de personas jurídicas de I a de Lima,
comprado de su anter¡ores propietarios ino Méndez Gal doña
It/arcelina Leyva de la Cruz, en el de S/
a Según así consta de la escritura públ fecha
.00
5, por el tr)
E
o
Notario Público de Huancayo Dr. Ciro Gálvez rl)
o
.C
o
.o@
Presentación: El título fue o-o
p
11 [t/ horas, bato el,'
^'E
No 2015-00006112 del Tomo D 1.00 n solés ¿&
con Recibo(s) Número(s) 0 HUANT deN de 5 8.7
--.o
Ni
Ee
co.P-
eó
*w- ( FE
Y"
é
.6o-
,J' 8
I É-
L!-
o-F
Ec
@ -o ,;
(I)
FO
oz.
' aub
N
a
a
d\ N¡
\o\3
ñ
U

ñ
b
l\!d
\q-J
qa
ik\J
&\
r#,
w
u"W§

Páginir Número I
Rcsoluciótt del Supcrintett¡Iente Nocional tle los Registros Púhlicos N. l2J-97-SLINARp
 Dr, Ciro Gálvez Herrera
ABAGAE,# trOIARTO
HUANCAYO

PRIMER TESTIMONIO
FOJAS : CINCUENIA Y NUEVE..
KARDEX : DIECISIETE..
ruúm¡no : DIECISIETE..

COMPRA VENTA
QUE OIORGA : DON MARCELINO MENDEZ GALINDO Y CONYUGE.-
A FAVOR DE : " LA EMPRESA "BRYNAJOM S.R.1.".-
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
¡¡lrnooucc¡ón.- EN LA cIUDAD DE cHURcAMpA, A Los DrEcrNueve oÍes DEL MES DE
SETTEMBRE DEL DOS MrL QUTNCE, ANTE MI: CrRO CÁlVeZ HERRERA, ABOGADO -
NOTARIO PUBLICO DE HUANCAYO, PERUANO, IDENTIFICADO CON DOCUMENTO NACIONAL
DE IDENTIDAD: 19813153, MILITAR:8b.246572049 Y REGISTNO ÚruICO DE CONTRIBUYENTE
t71303247s+, aUTORIZaOO pOn eU COtee¡o oe nottRros oe ¡uxuv, secÚn
RESOLUCION NO O57-2O15.CNJ/JD DE FECHA 19 DE JUNIO DE 2015, PARA EJERCER
LA FUNCION NOTARIAL EN LA PROVINCIA DE CHURCAMPA; C O M P A R E C E N:
COMO "VENDEDORES'' DON MARCELINO MENDEZ GALINDO, CON DOCUMENTO
CIONAL DE IDENTIDAD NUMERO 10475957 , CASADO, AGRICULIOR, Y CONYUGE
o IINA TEYVA DE tA CRUZ, CON DOCUMENTO NACIONAL DE IDENTIDAD
U lf,I NUMERO 23ó90088, CASADA, AI\/A DE CASA, AMBOS DOMICILIADOS EN AVENIDA LOS
oH €T INCAS SIN NUMERO, DEL DISTRITO DE CHUPURO, PROVINCIA DE HUANCAYO,
4l.3 ¡¡t §
.ó DEPARTAMENIO DE JUNIN, QUIENES PROCEDEN POR SUS PROPIOS DERECHOS, Y DE OTRA
I\t <E frt
a

Itt € T\
cii¡
l¡t PARTE COMO "COMPRADORA" LA EMPRESA "BRYNAJOM S.R.t.'' CON REGISTRO UNICO
8g
caE & DE CONTRIBUYENTE NUMERO 2048641997I, INSCRITA EN LA PARTIDA ELECTRONICA
(, itg NUMERO 12929993 DEL REGTSTRo DE pERSoNAS:uRÍorcns DE LA oFtctNA REGtsTRAL DE
r¡¡ o LIMA, DEBIDAMENTE REPRESENTADO POR SU GERENTE GENERAL DON JOSE MANUEL
.t, GUERRA URRUCHE, PERUANO, IDENTIFICADO CON DOCUMENTO NACIONAL DE
(J E IDENIIDAD 23720220, CASADO, INGENIERO METALURGISTA, DOMICILIADO EN
pRoLoNGAcróN GRAU N" 2533, DEL DtsTRtTo DE EL iAMBo, coN FACULTADES
DEBIDAMENTE INSCRITAS EN LA PARTIDA ELECTRONICA NUMERO 12929993 DEL REGISTRO
DE PERSONES IUNÍOICAS DE LA OFICINA REGISTRAL DE LIMA. LOS COMPARECIENTES SON
MAYoRES DE EDAD, PERUANoS, SUFRAGANIES, HÁgIlTs PARA CoNTRATAR E
INTELIGENTES EN EL IDIOMA CASIELLANO A QUIENES DE HABER IDENTIFICADO DOY FE, ASI
COMO DE HABER CONSTATADO QUE PROCEDEN CON CAPACIDAD, LIBERTAD Y
CONOCIMIENTO CON QUE SE OBLIGAN CONFORME A LA LEY DEL NOTARIADO,
AstMtsMo sr eovrRró A Los TNTERESADos soBRE Los EFECTos LEGALES DEL pRESENTE
INSTRUMENTO PÚALICO NOTARIAL, DE CONFORMIDAD ET ARTÍCULO VEINTISIETE DEL

s DECRETO LEGISLATIVO NÚUTNO MIL CUARENTA Y NUEVE Y ME ENTREGAN UNA MINUTA

DE COMPRA VENTA, PARA QUE SU TENOR ELEVE A ESCRITURA PUBLICA LA CUAL ARCHIVO
EN SU LEGAJO RESPECTIVO, BAJO EL NUMERO RESPECTIVO, SIENDO SU CONTENIDO
LITERAL COMO SIGUE: M I N U T A.- STÑON NOTARIO: SÍRVNST EXTENDER EN SU REGISTRO
DE ESCRITURAS PUBLICAS UNA DE COMPRA VENTA, QUE CELEBRAN DE UNA PARTE COMO
''VENDEDORES'' DON MARCELINO MENDEZ GALINDO, CON DOCUA/ENTO NACIONAL DE
IDENTIDAD NUMERO 10475957, CASADo, AGRICULToR, Y CoNYUoT ooÑn MARCELINA
LEYVA DE tA CRUZ, CON DOCUMENTO NACIONAL DE IDENTIDAD NUMERO 23690088,
CASADA, AMA DE CASA, AMBOS DOMICILIADOS EN AVENIDA LOS INCAS SIN NUMERO,
DEL DISTRITO DE CHUPURO, PROVINCIA DE HUANCAYO, DEPARTAMENTO DE JUNIN, Y, DE
: OTRA PARTE COMO ''COMPRADORA" LA EMPRESA "BRYNAJOM S.R.t.'' CON REGISTRO
r!+,:r-rl UNICO DE CONTRIBUYENTE NUMERO 20486419971, INSCRITA EN LA PARTIDA
¡E+¡-= ELECTRoNtcA NUMERo 12929993 DEL REGTSTRo DE pERSoNRS tuRÍorcAs DE LA oFtctNA
PROLONGACIÓN GRAU N" 2533, DEL DISTRITO DE EL TAMBO, CON FACULTADES
12929993 DEL REGISTRO
DEBIDAMENTE INSCRITAS EN LA PARTIDA ELECTRONICA NUI\/1ERO
ór-ftnsóÑn1 .luniotcAs DE LA oFlClNA REGISTRAL DE LIMA; CoNFoRME LAS A
CLÁUSULNS SIGUIENTES: PRIMERA.- ''LOS VENDEDORES'' DECLARAN
SER UNICOS Y

LEGtTlMos pRoptETARtos DEL pREDIo RUSTICo, uBlCAClÓN: PREDIo DENOMINADO

..YACOHUANAY'" ANEXO DE PAMPALCA, DEL DISTRITO DE SAN PEDRO DE CORIS'
PROVINCIA CHURCAMPA, DEPARTAMENTO DE HUANCAVELICA, CUYA AREA. LINDEROS
MEDIDAS PERIMETRICAS CORREN INSCRITOS EN LA PARTIDA ELECTRONICA NUMERO
40017?15 DEL REGISTRO DE PREDIOS DE LA ZONA REGISTRAL NO XI- SEDE ICA.- SEGUNDA'-
LA FORMA DE ADQUISICION Y DEMAS PORMENORES CORREN INSCRITOS EN LA PARTIDA
ELECTRONICA CORREN INSCRITOS EN LA PARTIDA ELECÍRONICA NUMERO 400179I5 DEL
_
REGISIRO DE PREDIOS DE LA ZONA REGISTRAL N" XI SEDE ICA._ TERCERA.- POR EL
PRESENTE INSTRUMENTO ''LOS VENDEDORES' OTORGAN EN CALIDAD DE VENTA REAL,
ENAJENActó¡¡ p¡RpmuA, TRANSFERENCTA y posEstóN DEFtNtTIvA A FAVOR "DE LA
coMPRADoRA EL INMUEBLE DESCRITO EN LA CLÁUSULA PRIMERA POR EL PRECIO TOTAL
DE CTENTO CTNCUENTA Mtr y 00/100 NUEVoS sorEs (s/. 150,000.00) suMA DE DINERO
QUE 'LOS VENDEDORES DECLARA HABER RECIBIDO NAEDIANTE CHEQUES NO
NEGOCIABLES, LOS CUALES PRODUCEN EFECTOS CANCELATORIOS SOBRE EL PRECIO DE
I
VENTA, EN SU TOTALIDAD Y A SU ENTERA CONFORMIDAD SIN RECLAA/O ALGUNO Y PARA
MAYOR CONSTANCIA FIRMAN EL PRESENTE DOCUMENTO.-CUARTA.- "tOS VENDEDORES''
DECLARAN QUE EL CITADO INMUEBLE A LA FECHA SE HALLA CON UNA HIPOTECA:
ASIENTO 2-D, FICHA: 00002F8 UBIGEO 080510, EMBARGO: ASIENTO ó-D, FICHA: 000028
UBIGEO OBO5]O DE LA PARTIDA ELECTRONICA NUN4ERO 4OO]79I5 DEL REGISTRO DE
PREDIOS DE LA ZONA REGISTRAL NO XI - SEDE ICA, Y QUE BAJO ESAS CONDICIONES LA
COMPRADORA CETEBRA EL PRESENTE CONTRATO NO TENIENDO NADA QUE RECLAMAR
EN EL FUTURO POR ESIAR PLENAMENTE DE ACUERDO.- QUINTA._ LA VENTA COMPRENDE
EL INMUEBLE, SUS ENTRADAS, SALIDAS, USOS, COSTUMBRES, SERVIDUMBRES, AIRES,
VUELOS, SUELO, SUBSUELO Y TODO CUANTO DE HECHO Y DE DERECHO ES INHERENTE AL
BIEN SUB MATERIA, DENTRO DE SUS LIMITES ANTES INDICADOS, SIENDO LA VENTA AD-
CORPUS.- SEXTA.- LOS CONTRATANTES DECLARAN QUE ENTRE EL PRECIO Y EL INMUEBLE
QUE SE VENDE, EXISTE JUSTA Y PERFECTA EQUIVALENCIA, POR LO QUE SE HACEN MUTUA
GRACIA Y RECIPROCA DONACIÓN OT CUALQUIER EXCESO O DIFERENCIA DE PRECIO O
EXTENSIÓN QUE SE SUSCITARA EN EL FUTURO Y QUE AL PRESENTE NO ADVIERTAN,
RENUNCIANDO POR LC MISMO A LAS ACCIONES CONTRACTUALES ATEGANDO DOLO,
ERROR, FUERZA, V¡OLENCIA, DINERO NO RECIBIDO Y CUALQUIER OTRO QUE SEA CAUSAL
DE NULIDAD DE LA PRESENTE.- SÉPTIMA.- 'LA COMPRADORA'' DECLARA HABER
-)
CONSTATADO QUE EL INMUEBLE NO ESTA AFECTO A ENSANCHE U OBRA PUBLICA, ASi
COMO DECLARAN CONOCER QUE "LOS VENDEDORES'' SON LOS ÚNICOS Y LEGíTIMOS
PROPIETARIOS DEL INMUEBLE QUE ADQUIEREN, POR LO GUE NO EXISTE IMPEDIMENTO
ALGUNO PARA SU ADQUISICIÓN.- OCTAVA.- LOS OTORGANTES DECLARAN QUE TODO
CONFLICTO O CONTROVERSIA, DERIVADO O RELACIONADO CON ESTE CONTRATO SERA
RESUELTO MEDIANTE ARBITRAJE DE DERECHO, DE CCNFORMIDAD CON LOS
REGLAMENTOS ARBITRALES DEL CENTRO DE ARBITRAJE DEL ILUSTRE COLEGIO DE
ABOGADOS DE JUNIN, A CUYAS NORMAS, ADNAINISTRACIÓN, GESTIÓN Y DECISIÓN SE
SONIEIEN LAS PARTES EN FORMA INCONDICIONAL, DECLARANDO CONOCERLAS Y
ACEPTARLAS EN SU INTEGRIDAD.- UD. SEÑOR NOTARIO, AGREGUE LO DE LEY Y
f¡eft/eiiCEl Q. -=========================================================
CHURCAMPA, 1 1 SETIEMBRE 20'l §.-===========================================
UN SELLO. UNA IRMA. HUGO VlttAR ñAñeZ. ABOGADO. CAL. lg3S3.- ===============
FIRMAS Y HUELLAS DIGITAI.ES DE.- MARCELINO MENDEZ GALINDO.. MARCELINA TEYVA DE
LA CRUZ.- JOSE MANUET GUERRA URRUCHE.- ===================================
ANOTACIóN,- POR RECIBIDO; LA PRESENTE SE HALLA AFECTO DEL PAGO DE IMPUESTO DE
ALCABALA CONFORME AL DEC. LEY 776 Y SU MODIFICATORIA DEC. LEG. 952. PARA
trr tr\,/^p a Fqr-plrl lpa pl IRI l-A PPF§FNTF TlTt ll O DF PROPIFDAI-I: RFCIBO DF PAGC) Al
 CHURCAMPA, I 1 SETIEMBRE 201§.- ===========================================
FIRMADo: clRO ATFREDO GALVEZ HERRERA. ABOGADO - NOTARIO.- SELLO NOTARIAL.-==
CONSTANCIA: DE CONFORMIDAD AL ARTíCULO 55 DEL DECRETO LEGISLATIVO 1049,
MODIFICADO POR EL DECRETO LEGISLATIVO 110ó Y RESOLUCIÓN S.B.S. N'5709-2012,
DEJO CONSTANCIA DE HABER TOMADO LA ACCIÓN DE CONTROL Y DEBIDA DILIGENCIA
EN MATERIA DE PREVENCIÓN DE LAVADO DE ACTIVOS, PREGUNTANDO A TODOS LOS
INTERVINIENTES EN RELACIÓN AL ORIGEN DE LOS FONDOS, BIENES Y ACTIVOS
INVOLUCRADOS EN LA PRESENTE TRANSACCIÓN, AL QUE RESPONDEN QUE TODO FUE
LÍCITAMENTE ADQUIRIDO; TAMBIÉN SE LES EXIGIÓ LA UTILIZACIÓN DE LoS MEDIoS DE
pAGO DISpUESTO pOR EL ARI[CULO eUINTO DE LA LEy NúMER O 21jg4,- ==============
CONSTAN crA.- SE DEJA CONSTANCIA DE QUE LOS OTORGANIES HAN SIDO INSTRUIDOS
DE LOS ALCANCES Y EFECTOS LEGALES QUE PRODUCE EL PRESENTE INSTRUMENTO
RELEVANDO DE TODA RESPONSABILIDAD AL NOTARIO QUE INIERVIENE EN LA PRESENTE
DOY FE.-====================================================

d
I

N
r¿¡
g
É
o ot
o
x z
6

+-

:_
¡-
r]iEÉrc
¡-+J+ ' 'l
ffi 1#l {i}'fi} lfiX fitr ;$, ¡X1l ¡fi,1:r ,rrur
..

ll§{13
t.,.
il:r ,§ |lr{ uii ¡¡, ,¡. ,sr r,1¡ ¡d F' úIb d¡n {rk r¡ll 1,4 ,r!,
I
 CERIIIICO._ QUE, HE TENIDO A LA VISTA EL RECIBO UNICO DE PAGO DEL IMPUESTO DE
ALCABALA POR LAS SUMAS DE CUATRO MIL QUINIENIOS Y OO /IOO NUEVOS SOLES
(s/.4,500.00). PAGos EFECTUADO POR LA COMPRADORA, A LA MUNTCTPALTDAD
DISTRITAL DE SAN PEDRO DE CORIS, DE FECHAS 09I12I2O14Y 15IO9I2OI5, POR LA VENTA
DEL INMUEBLE MATERIA DEL PRESENTE DOCUMENTO, EL CUAL ARCHIVO EN SU LEGAJO
RESPECTIVO.- DE LO QUE DOY FE
CONCLUSIóN: FORMALIZADO EL PRESENTE INSTRUMENTO, DI A CONOCER SU OBJETO Y
TENOR A LOS COMPARECIENTES POR LECTURA QUE TODO EL LES HICE DE PRINCIPIO A FIN,
LUEGO DE LO CUAL SE AFIRMAR Y RATIFICAN EN SU CONTENIDO Y PROCEDEN A
FIRMARLO EN SEÑAL DE CONFORMIDAD, UNTO CONMIGO. EL PRESENTE INSIRUMENTO SE
HALLA EXTENDIDO DE FOJAS CINCUENTA Y NUEVE A FOJAS SESENTA Y UNO VUELTA, PAPEL
SELLADO DE SERrE (ó30909) A LA SER|E (ó309r r VUELTA) DE LO QUE DOY FE.- HACIENDO
CONSTAR QUE EL PROCESO DE TOMA DE FIRMAS DE TODOS LOS CONTRATANTES Y
FORMALIZACIÓN DE LA PRESENTE ESCRITURA CONCLUYE HOY I9 DE SETIEMBRE DEL 20I5.-
a ñEIAAI
utr IEñAVtrE
Lt, \J¿utr uU I rtr.-cglc.-==================================================
.

FIRMAS Y HUEttAS DACTILARES DE.- MARCELINO MENDEZ GALINDO.. MARCETINA LEYVA

DE LA CRUZ.- JOSE MANUEI_ GUERRA URRUCHE.- =================================
FIRMADO: CIRO ATFREDO GATVEZ HERRERA. ABOGADO - NOTARIO.- SELLO NOTARIAL.-=
CONCUERDA, CON EL ORIGINAL DE SU REFERENCIA AL QUE ME REMITO EN CASO
NECESARIO, EXPIDO EL PRESENTE PRIMER TESTIMONIO A SOLICITUD DE LA PARTE
INTERESADA, PREVIA CONFRONTAC¡ÓN DE LEY. DOY FÉ.-
HUANCAYO, 21 DE SETIEMBRE DEt 20I5..

((
/
CI GATVEZ HERRERA
: ABOGADO
NOTARIO PÚBTrcO
É+Ir:i.l -
¡-áJ=
_cAt [E BEAL 583 _585 - HYO
Talál.rn^. r-aarr, árr.L
 -,:..

sunarp
s.r¿,i.r:ñC¿rJr i.¡rrior.l
I
de lr3 ee§:ttre5 PLibli..,:

ZONA REGISTRAI- N: XI - SDDII ICA

OFTCINA RbGISII)-AL HUANI'A

.|ITULO
NI' 2015-00006112
Fecha de Presentación 23109/2015

Se deja ccnstancia que se ha registrado 1o siguiente:

ACTO N"
PARTIDA ASIENTO
RURA]- - COMPRA VENTA 40017915 COOO2

Se infornra que han sido incorporados al Indice de Propietarios la(s) siguiente(s)

persona(s):
Panida N +0017915 BRYNAJOM S.R.L.

Derecho: l,agados: 3/481.00 nuevos soles, derechos cobrados: S/.481.00 nuevos

ple.q y Dr rechos por devolver : 5/.0.00 nuevós soles.
R-ecibo(s; Númeró(s) 00006773-01. HUANT{ 09 de Noviembre de 2015.

rtÁm-a
rtgripina A, Yakncia ltfmriqrc
8E&STRADOR PUBLEO
 Electrocentro S.A. PRESUPUESTO DE SERVICIO Nro.: 75100127538
Ayacucho
Servicio Solicitado: Energía PostPago
Tipo de Solicitado: Suministro Normal

Nro. Solicitud: 75100135337

Fecha de Entrega: 07/04/2022 15:41:58 Cliente: RUC - 20486419971
Fecha de Valorización: 07/04/2022 BRYNAJOM SRL
Fecha de Vencimiento: 07/05/2022 Dir. Suministro: Bq. SAN PEDRO DE CORIS Nº s/n Pueblo SAN PEDRO
DE CORIS

Tarifa: MT4 Potencia: 889.79 kW Tipo de Acometida: Aérea Tipo de Conexión: Trifásica

Precio Unit. Parcial

Código Descripción Medida Cantidad (S/) (S/)

Costos por Actividades

-99999 C5.4. Conexión Básica en Media Tensión 22,9kV, Trifásico, 21,172.74
de 1000 kW hasta 2500 kW, salida a PMI, MT4
Sub Total(S/): 21,172.74

Observación: Sub Total (S/): 21,172.74

[Nada] Descuento (0.00%) (S/): 0.00

Total Servicio (S/): 21,172.74

* La cancelación de este presupuesto está sujeto a variación tarifaria y a que no exista impedimento físico para la ejecución del servicio.

*El presente documento NO ES COMPROBANTE DE PAGO, luego de emitirse la conformidad de la inspección

deberá apersonarse a nuestras oficinas para realizar el trámite correspondiente.

* El costo del servicio incluye impuestos.

Representante de la Empresa Cliente / Solicitante

Nombre
DNI
Parentesco
Fecha de Recepción
 REV. 0

CARTA DE GARANTÍA
Santa Anita, Octubre del 2021
SRES.
MINERA YUNCAN SRL
TRANSFORMADOR TRIFASICO 50KVA
DE NUESTRA CONSIDERACION: Según la política de calidad de MP CONSULTORIA Y CONSTRUCCION SAC

se extiende la presente carta de garantía, para que, sin costo alguno, se repare o sustituya, según sea el caso, todo o parte del bien contra defectos de
fabricación, siempre y cuando el producto haya sido operado en condiciones normales de uso y manejo, respecto al siguiente equipo:

SUMINISTRO:
SUB ESTACION COMPACTA DE MEDIA TENSION 24KV, 1000KVA, que contiene lo siguiente
01 unid. CELDA DE LLEGADA 24KV
Equipado con lo siguiente:
01 Seccionador de Potencia Tripolar Linea a Tierra
01 unid. CELDA DE TRANSFORMACION 500KVA
Equipado con lo siguiente:
03 Bases Portafusibles
03 Fusibles de tipo cartucho de alto poder de ruptura
01 unid. CELDA DE TRANSFORMACION 50KVA
Equipado con lo siguiente:
03 Bases Portafusibles
03 Fusibles de tipo cartucho de alto poder de ruptura
01 unid. Estructura de Baja Tension 500KVA
Equipado con lo siguiente:
01 Interruptores Automáticos Tmax T6N, 3x320-800A(CELDA BT DE 500KVA)
01 unid. Estructura de Baja Tension 50KVA
Equipado con lo siguiente:
01 Interruptores Automáticos XT1B, 3x112-160A(CELDA BT DE 50KVA)
El periodo de garantía es de 12(doce) meses, computado a partir del equipo en los almacenes del cliente.
CONDICIONES:
1. Para hacer efecto esta garantía, EL CLIENTE remitirá un informe detallado de lo acontecido con el producto, vía correo electrónico:
[email protected] o al celular 972512534, a fin de tomar las acciones pertinentes en el menor breve plazo, de acuerdo a nuestros procedimientos
internos de calidad.

2. El traslado de productos a nuestras instalaciones, será asumido por el cliente.

3. Para la recepción del equipo. EL CLIENTE deberá presentar el comprobante de pago y la correspondencia guías de remisión.
4. Todos los accesorios que por defectuosos serán reemplazados en cumplimiento de esta garantía pasarán a ser propiedad de

MP CONSULTORIA Y CONSTRUCCION SAC

EXCLUSIONES GENERALES DE LA COBERTURA:
MP CONSULTORIA Y CONSTRUCCION SAC limita su responsabilidad a lo establecido en la presente, no teniendo obligación alguna sobre la instalación de
los equipos y sus accesorios no previstos por MP CONSULTORIA Y CONSTRUCCION SAC
"-Defecto o daño del producto, derivado del manejo contrario al indicado en el manual del usuario.
-Por perdida o daño ocasionado en el producto, a consecuencia del traslado por parte de EL CLIENTE.
-Defectos o daños producidos a causa o como consecuencia de pruebas, operación, mantenimiento, instalación, alteración, reparación, y/o modificaciones de
cualquier parte del bien, realizadas por EL CLIENTE, o terceros.
-Pérdidas o daño por hechos de robo, terrorismo, hostilidad, guerra civil, huelgas, disturbios laborales, incautación y/o desastres naturales.
SIN OTRO PARTICULAR, CON LA SEGURIDAD DE SEGUIR OTORGANDOLES UN OPTIMO SERVICIO, SIEMPRE CON EL COMPROMISO DE LA
MEJORA CONTINUA Y LA SATISFACCION DE LAS NECESIDADES Y EXPECTATIVAS DE CADA UNO DE NUESTROS CLIENTES, QUEDAMOS DE UD.
ATENTAMENTE."

Lima, Octubre del 2021

 REV. 0

CARTA DE GARANTÍA
Santa Anita, Octubre del 2021
SRES.
MINERA YUNCAN SRL
TRANSFORMADOR TRIFASICO 50KVA
DE NUESTRA CONSIDERACION: Según la política de calidad de MP CONSULTORIA Y CONSTRUCCION SAC

se extiende la presente carta de garantía, para que, sin costo alguno, se repare o sustituya, según sea el caso, todo o parte del bien contra defectos de
fabricación, siempre y cuando el producto haya sido operado en condiciones normales de uso y manejo, respecto al siguiente equipo:

SUMINISTRO:
01 UNID. TRANSFORMADOR TRIFASICO EN BAÑO DE ACEITE 50 KVA-MARCA TITAN PRO, con las siguientes caracteristicas:
Potencia Nominal 50 KVA
Relación de Transformación en Vacio 22 900 / 230 V.
Relación de Transformación con Carga 22 900 / 230 V
Grupo de Conexión Dyn5 - Yyn6
Frecuencia 60 Hz
Nro. de fases 3Ø
Nro. de Aisladores en el lado Pri./Sec. *3 / 4
Clase de Aislamiento "Ao" (Aceite Mineral)
Enfriamiento ONAN
Nivel de Aisl. Inter. en el lado Primario 24 / 50 / 125 KV
Nivel de Aisl. Inter. en el lado Secundario 1.1 / 3 KV
Altitud de Operación máxima 4 000 msnm
Montaje EXT.
Posición y Tipo de Aisladores Sobre la tapa de Porcelana
Línea de fuga 625 mm
Servicio Continuo
Norma de Fabricación IEC Pub. 60044-1 y 3
El periodo de garantía es de 12(doce) meses, computado a partir del equipo en los almacenes del cliente.
CONDICIONES:
1. Para hacer efecto esta garantía, EL CLIENTE remitirá un informe detallado de lo acontecido con el producto, vía correo electrónico:
[email protected] o al celular 972512534, a fin de tomar las acciones pertinentes en el menor breve plazo, de acuerdo a nuestros procedimientos
internos de calidad.

2. El traslado de productos a nuestras instalaciones, será asumido por el cliente.

3. Para la recepción del equipo. EL CLIENTE deberá presentar el comprobante de pago y la correspondencia guías de remisión.
4. Todos los accesorios que por defectuosos serán reemplazados en cumplimiento de esta garantía pasarán a ser propiedad de

MP CONSULTORIA Y CONSTRUCCION SAC

EXCLUSIONES GENERALES DE LA COBERTURA:
MP CONSULTORIA Y CONSTRUCCION SAC limita su responsabilidad a lo establecido en la presente, no teniendo obligación alguna sobre la instalación de
los equipos y sus accesorios no previstos por MP CONSULTORIA Y CONSTRUCCION SAC
"-Defecto o daño del producto, derivado del manejo contrario al indicado en el manual del usuario.
-Por perdida o daño ocasionado en el producto, a consecuencia del traslado por parte de EL CLIENTE.
-Defectos o daños producidos a causa o como consecuencia de pruebas, operación, mantenimiento, instalación, alteración, reparación, y/o modificaciones de
cualquier parte del bien, realizadas por EL CLIENTE, o terceros.
-Pérdidas o daño por hechos de robo, terrorismo, hostilidad, guerra civil, huelgas, disturbios laborales, incautación y/o desastres naturales.
SIN OTRO PARTICULAR, CON LA SEGURIDAD DE SEGUIR OTORGANDOLES UN OPTIMO SERVICIO, SIEMPRE CON EL COMPROMISO DE LA
MEJORA CONTINUA Y LA SATISFACCION DE LAS NECESIDADES Y EXPECTATIVAS DE CADA UNO DE NUESTROS CLIENTES, QUEDAMOS DE UD.
ATENTAMENTE."

Lima, Octubre del 2021

 CARTA DE GARANTIA
Lima, 11 de Diciembre de 2021

Señor(es): MINERA YUNCA

Referencia: PROYECTO PLANTA CONCENTRADORA MINERA YUNCA

Estimados Señores:

Mediante la presente garantizamos nuestros productos, ofertada para la compra de referencia ferretería
eléctrica, por un periodo de 12 meses contados a partir de la fecha de entrega, lo siguiente:

 Bastidor doble y simple con perfiles de F° G° 75x75x6mm, 1.2m long. Incluye riostra
de 1.24m y acc.
 Cruceta de perfil tipo “U” de F° G° de 75x75x6mm, 1.50m long.
 Grapa de Anclaje de Al. Tipo pistola c/3 pernos de 16/50mm2.

Garantizamos que los materiales y/o equipos son nuevos y fabricados con materiales de alta calidad, libre de
defectos de material, de producción o de fabricación.

Esta garantía es contra defectos de diseño o fabricación y no así por mal uso o instalación inadecuada. En el
improbable caso de que se produjera estos inconvenientes, nos comprometemos a reparar o entregar otro
bien a plena satisfacción de ustedes.

Atentamente

Por el Proveedor:
Lima, 10 de diciembre del 2021

Señores
MINERA YUNCA
Presente. -

Referencia: PROYECTO PLANTA CONCENTRADORA MINERA YUNCA

CARTA DE GARANTIA

Estimados señores:

Mediante la presente nuestra representada en el Perù, Maurizio & Cía. Ltda. fabricante
de los seccionadores y pararrayos marca Maurizio, expresa para los productos de
procedencia Brasil lo siguiente:

• Seccionador cutout de porcelana Maurizio (Brasil) 27kV 100Amps

150 kVBIL 432mm Linea de Fuga
• Pararrayo polimérico de distribución Maurizio (Brasil) 21kV 10kA de
782mm Linea de Fuga

Garantizamos el buen funcionamiento de los ítems ofertados por el plazo de dos (2)
años contados a partir de la fecha de la recepción.

Garantizamos que los seccionadores y pararrayos suministrados son nuevos y

fabricados con material de alta calidad y su perfecto estado de conservación,
comprometiéndonos a la reposición o reemplazo, sin costo alguno para el cliente de
aquellas partes que resulten defectuosas, siempre que estas no se deban a su
utilización indebida.

Atentamente,

Representante en el Perú

Maurizio & Cia. Ltda.

Av. Dr. Abílio Sampaio, 725 - Vila Gustavo, São Paulo - SP, 02209-040, Brasil
 CERTIFICADO DE GARANTÍA DE CALIDAD TÉCNICA

Lima, 26 de agosto del 2021

Señores:

ELECTRO CHAVEZ E.I.R.L

Presente.-

Asunto: CERTIFICADO DE GARANTIA POR EL SUMINISTRO DE:

 10 KIT DE TERMINACIÓN USO EXT. P/CAB. N2XSY 25KV 3-1X35/120MM2

Marca: ELCON MEGARAD; Modelo: TES-2584/PE

Por la presente garantizamos la buena calidad de los productos suministrados.

Esta garantía tiene una vigencia de 2 años desde la fecha de recepción de los materiales
que se suministraran.

Durante este período de tiempo nos comprometemos a remplazar, sin costo alguno
para ELECTRO CHAVEZ E.I.R.L, aquellas partes que resulten con defectos de
fabricación o calidad, por otros que cumplan satisfactoriamente las Especificaciones
Técnicas de los repuestos originales.

En este caso, el período de garantía de los repuestos o partes entregados en

reemplazo, tendrá igualmente la vigencia establecida líneas arriba. Con este fin,
subsanaremos cualquier deficiencia imputable a nosotros. Esta garantía no es válida
por daños originados por el inadecuado uso o instalación de dichas terminaciones, lo
cual será determinado por los especialistas de nuestra representada.

Atentamente,
lj\lCCP ACTA DE INSPECCIÓN
"Qf)I":,,_'•

VERSJON
_l_
F-058

00

ACTA DE INSPECCIÓN DE POSTES Y ACCESORIOS DE CONCRETO

El día 8 de juho del 2021, se reunieron en la Planta de Concreto Centnfugado Perú S.A.C. ubicado en la Urb.
Las Dalmacias Lote 17- Zapallal - Puente Piedra - los s,gwentes representantes:
ING. EDIÑO BUSTAMANTE TIRADO- JEFE DE PRODUCGON - CONCRETO CENTRIFUGADO PERU S.A.C.
ING. JAIME PALOMINO CHICCHON- CONTROL DE CAUDAD - CONCRETO CENTRIFUGADO PERU S.A.C.
ING. ROLANDO RAMOS VEGA
Para reahzar Inspección, Pruebas de Ensayo y Control de Calidad de Postes de Concreto Armado, para RR
& JR CONTRATISTAS Y CONSULTORES S.R.L., ruyo detalle es el sigwente:

ITEM DESCRIPCION UNO CANTIDAD

1 POSTES DE CAC 9/300/2/120/255 UNO 1 27
2 POSTE DE CAC 9/200/2/120/255 UNO 23
3 POSTE DE CAC 13/300/2/165/360 UNO 2
4 POSTE DE CAC 13/400/2/165/360 UNO 14
5 POSTE DE CAC 13/500/2/165/360 UNO 1
" 6
-'-- -
MEDIA LOZA DE CAV 1 50/750 KG-360 MMD
�-
UNO
-+
4
-
Efectuada la Inspección y prueba de los postes de concreto armado requendos como son:
Inspección Visual, venñcecón de d.meneones, pruebas a carga de trabajo y rotura, se comprobó que dicho
requerimiento se encuentra conforme a las Especrficaaones Técnicas.
Se acordó declarar conforme el lote mchcado, los cuales se encuentran aptos para su traslado a sus almacenes

Nota:
1.-De acuerdo a lo estipulado en la NTP 339.027 en el numeral 6.00 "Extrawón de muestras y recepción",
TABLA 2-Plan de Muestreo y Aceptaaón; para el tamaño de lote menor a 11, no se extrae muestras.
Forman parte de la presente acta los siguientes documentos:
✓ Certificado de calibración del dinamómetro Nº GM - 001-2020 de fecha 06-08-2020, marca Dillon
Sene E21055.

En señal de conformidad se firma la presente acta.

Puente Piedra, 8 de Julio del 2021.

ING. ROLANDO RAMOS VEGA

�=;;,
-, I

IN E
PALOMINO CHICCHON
CONTROL DE CALIDAD CCP S.A.C.
 •••
8
i
i
.;

t• o
•
o o

,
•
o o
• o

.
"• •

-"".
 g

g
o
8

•
o

• •o
o

,
o
u :il �"'
 g

,,,
O, o
,

� �
"Jo
�
o "
i: � E
E E
E E E
t

g
� :::!
... <O
<O
�

-"
•,
o
o:
�
E
E
o

-
w
o
z
��
B u <
ou •e> -�.
u
• o "'�
-
ri, o uu
u u ou
"' N
' z e
u
o
o
w
o
� \\ i �
g::¡
-!' �
< u
w�
"
u w
� �º
' '\'' :< o
"-o...
zZ
0:

,¡, u
>

i .,,, o

.
� u o
w
::,
"'"-w o
-
m

. ,,, ,,,
o u w
� N
(l

9 - �
w u
,.
o
N

.
N

8o o

-
o w

. .
N
•o u

.-
-é ¡: w �
,e lao w
ó o � o
"' � o o o

u . -- ,,,.-
o
o
ro

u
o
N - --
ro
N

.
M

o
N
,,,
M ro
w

- ,,,
o
0- " w l'l M
m

8
w
�
o... �
w ci w
"!¡;" ;'l�z ;;u
e
�
�
�
w
:¡
<.> ... m
o o < w
u u �
"'
 INACAL Certificado de Calibración
Metrolog1'?! GM - 001 - 2020
Laboratorio de Grandes Masas

Página 1 de 4

Expediente 1039385 Este certificado de calibración

documenta ta trazabuldad a los
Soacrtante CONCRETO CENTRIFUGADO PERU patrones nacionales, que realizan las
S.A.C. unidades de medida de acuerdo con el
Dirección Urb. Las Dalmacias Lote 17 Sistema Internacional de Unidades (SI)

Instrumento de Medcon OINAMOMETRO la Dneccón de Metrologia custodia,

conserva y mantiene los patrones
Intervalo de lndicacrones 0kg a 2000kg naconeles de las unidades de medida,
calibra patrones secundarios, realiza
Resoluetón 20 kg
mediciones y cernñcaciones
metroíóqrcas a sohcnud de los
Clase de Exactitud interesados. promueve el desarrollo de
NO INDICA
la metrología en el pais y c.ontnbuye a
Marca la difusión del Sistema legal de
OILLON
Unidades de Medida del Perú.
Modelo
(SLUMP).
NO INDICA
la Direccon de Metrología es miembro
Tipo MECANICO del Sistema Interamericano de
Metrología (SIM) y participa
Procedencia NO INDICA activamente en las lntercomparaciones
que éste realiza en la región.
Número de Sene D47072 Con el fin de asegurar la calidad de sus
medtaones el usuario está obligado a
Fecha de Cajbractón 2020-08-06 recalibrar sus instrumentos a intervalos
apropiados

Este certificado de calibración sólo puede ser dñundroo completamente y sin mod.ñcacones. los extractos o
modificaciones requieren la autonzaclán de la Dirección de Metrología del INACAL.
Certificados sin firma digital y sello carecen de validez.

Responsable del área Responsable del !aboralooo

Firmado digitalmente
por ZAVALAGA RIVERA
Dwiqht M1chael FAU
20600283015 soft
Fecha: 2020--08-06
15 55:09

oeeccce de Metrología Dirección de Metrología

lnstituu, Naclonalde C../idad • INACAL

Dirección de Metrología
Galle Las CatnellilS N" 817, San Js>d,o. L<ma Pt,ru
Teff (01) 84o.M?Q Ane�o 1501
Emal/ me/roloq!a@1na;:a/qobpe Puede tlfln6car el 11Umem Qe � en /JI págma
W"b-wwwmacal,¡obpe btrm:.DaaPrat::Ktne&jnag/gob QQrdm/ygri[,cafl
 Certificado de Calibración
INACAL GM - 001 - 2020
Metr0Jog1a
Laboratorio de Grandes Masas
Página 2 de 4

Método de Calibración
Determmacrón de tos errores de me.ceceo de1 dinamómetro empleando pesas patrones certificadas

Lugar de Calibración
LABORATORIO DE GRANDES MASAS
Calle de la Prosa 150 - San Borja - Lima

Condiciones Ambientales

Temperatura 19,4 ºC
Humedad Relativa 71,7 %
Presión Atmosférica 996,0 mbar

Patrones de referencia

Trazabilidad Patrón utilizado Certificado de calibración

INACAUDM LM-046-2020
PESAS De: 2020-02-19
(Clase de Exactitud 0,5/1000)
INACAL/DM LM--050-2020
Patrones de referencia del Instituto
De: 2020-02-17 al 2020--02-26
Nacional de Calidad (INACAL) -

Pesas patrones ciase E2 INACAUDM LM--042-2020

PESAS De: 2020--02-05
(Clase de Exactitud M,)
INACAUOM LM-041-2020
De· 2020--02--05

Observaciones
El dinamómetro fue calibrado en las mstaiacones de INACAL (Gravedad local= 9,7825931 mis')
Para una mejer aprccmacón de lectura, se subdrvid1ó la d1V1s16n mínima del dinamómetro en 04 partes.
utnear el Newton como unidad de medida de fuerza dentro del Sistema Legal de Unidades de Medida del Perú
(SLUMP).

Instituto NacloMI (H C.hdad - IHACAl.

01n1Cdó11 ele IAetrologla
Cl!R<, L8s CamellasN"817. San lsda t..,m¡_ Pe.
Telf (01) 640-8820 Anexo 1501
i,ma,1 ,OOl¡pbg¡a@vw,al ¡pi¡ :>11
v.'EB www 1'1BCa/ gob pe
 Certificado de Calibración
INACAL GM - 001 - 2020
Metrologia
Laboratorio de Grandes Masas
Página 3 de 4
Resultados de Medición
� ce CALERACO\I 2020--08-06
LBCACÓNOO. �r.o.erFO LABORATCJro CEGRA/\1:6 M\SA.S
Cale de la Posa 150 - s., BOIJa- um
INSPECCION VISUAL
IA..lJSlE[EaRQ TBE ESCALA TBE
OSCt.ACON LBfE TBE
""'
Q.RS(R

ENSAYO DEREPETIBtLIDAD
CA�= 1 000 kg CA�: 2000 kg
1 E 1 E
( •~ \ ( kg) ( kg) ( kg)
995 -5 2005 5
990 -10 2000 o
990 -10 1 995 -5
990 -10 2000 o
990 -10 2000 o

�YO DE PESAJE

CA"3A 1 E
( kg 1 ( kg) ( kg)
o o o
200 200 o
400 395 -5
600 590 -10
800 790 -10
1000 990 -10
1 200 1190 -10
1400 1390 -10
1600 1595 -5
1800 1795 -5
2000 2000 o
1 Lectura del dinamómetro
E Error encootrado

Incertidumbre ezpandida de meorccn 10 kg

lnstnuto Nac1011,1/ CH Clllidad - INACAL

Direcdón da .lleln>logla
CalleLasCam!thasN"811 Sanl:lol U.. "etu
Telf (01) 640-8820Anexo 1501
ema,1 metro'xlo@fNCII! oob º"
WEBwww,lllC!llgobpe
 Certificado de Calibración
INACAL
I"
GM - 001 - 2020
Metrolog1a
Laboratorio de Grandes Masas
Página 4 de 4
Incertidumbre
La incertidumbre reportada en el presente certrficado es la incertidumbre expandida de medición que resulta de
multiplicar la incertidumbre estándar combinada por el factor de cobertura k=2 La incertidumbre fue determinada
según la "Guia para la Expresión de la Incertidumbre en la Medición", segunda enccn. juho del 2001 (Traducción al
castellano efectuada por lndecop1, con autortzacón de ISO, de la GUM. "Gurde lo the Expression of Uncertamty in
Measuremenl", corrected and repnnted 1n 1995. equivalente a la publtcaclÓn del BIPM JCGM 100 2008, GUM 1995
INl!h rmnor ccrrecnons "Evaluaban of Measurement Data - Gu1de to the Expressmn of Uncertamty m Measurement" ).
La incertidumbre expandida de medición fue calculada a partir de los componentes de incertidumbre de los factores
de influencia en la caflbraoón La mcerbdumbre rndteada no incluye una esumecon de vanacones a largo plazo.

Recalibración
los resultados son váhdos en el momento de la cahbraaóo Al solicitante le corresponde disponer en su momento la
ejecución de una recahbracrón, la cual está en funCl6n del uso, conservación y mantenimiento del instrumento de
rneo-cron o a reglamentaciones vigentes.
DIRECCION DE METROLOGIA
El Servicio Nacional de Metrologla (actuamente la Drecoón de MetrologIa del INACAL), fue creado mediante ley Nº
23560 el 6 enero de 1983 y fue encomendado al INDECOPI mediante Decreto Supremo DS-024-93 ITINCL
El 11 de Julio 2014 fue aprobada la Ley N° 30224 la cual crea el Sistema Nacional de Calidad. y tiene como objenvc
promover y garantizar el cumplimiento de la Pouuca Nacional de Calidad para el desarrollo y la competruvoad de las
actividades económicas y la prctecccn del consumidor
El Instituto Nacional de Calidad (INACAl) es un organismo público técnico especajzado adscnto al Mimsteno de
Produooón, es el cuerpo rector y autondad técmca máxima en la nonna!Jva del Sistema Nacional de la Calidad y el
responsable de la operación del sistema ba¡o las drspcsscooes de la ley. y tiene en el ámbito de sus competencias·
Metrología Normalización y Acreditación.
la Dirección de Metrología del INACAl cuenta con diversos Laboratonos Metrológ1cos debidamente acondicionados,
instrumentos de medición de atta exactitud y personal calrficado. Cuenta con un Sistema de Gestión de la Calidad
que cumple con las siguientes Normas etemeconaies vigentes IS0/IEC 17025, ISO 17034; ISO 27001 e ISO 37001,
con lo cual se constituye en una entidad capaz de bnndar un seMCIO integral. confiable y eficaz de aseguramiento
metrcloqtco para la mdustna, la eenca y el comercio bnndando frazabrhdad metroéqrcemente váfda al Sistema
Internacional de Umdades SI y al Sistema legal de Unidades de Medida del Perú (SLUMP).
la Dirección de Metrologia del INACAL cuenta con la oooperaaón técmca de orgamsmos metrolóqrcoa
internacionales de alto prestigio tales como. el Phys1kallsch-Techmsche Bundesanstatt (PTB) de Alemama; el Centro
Nacional de Metrología (CENAM) de México; el Natonal lnstitute of Slandards and Technology {NIST) de USA, el
Centro Español de Metrología (CEM) de España, el lnstatuto Naaonal de Tecnología lndustnal (INTI) de Argentina el
Instituto Naaonal de Metrología (INMETRO) de Brasil; entre otros.

SISTEMA INTERAMERICANO DE METROLOGIA- SIM

El Sistema lnteramencano de Metrología (Sl\.t) es una orgamzaaón regional auspiciado por la Orqamzacron de
Estados Americanos (OEA), cuya finalidad es promover y fomentar el desarrollo de la metrologia en los países
americanos. La D1reCCl6n de Metrolog1a del JNACAL es miembro del SIM a través de la subreqién ANDIMET (Bolivia,
Colombia, Ecuador, Perú y Venezuela) y participa acuvamente en las lntercomparac10nes realizadas por el SIM

lnsl/rulo NIIIC/oMI de (;a/ldMJ- INACAL

Dirección de Metrologia
Ca., Las Camellas N" 8 11. 581 Sldro. U·,e . �·
T91f (01) 640---8820Anexo 150!
ema� 'llf'ln1':xpa@"IOOI! oob pe
WEBwww ,nacal gob ptJ
 www.imq.it

CERTIFICATO N.
CERTIFICATE N. 9105.ELCN

SI CERTIFICA CHE IL SISTEMA DI GESTIONE PER LA QUALITA’ DI

WE HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM OPERATED BY

ELCON MEGARAD SPA

VIA AMORETTA 6/E PARCO S. NICOLA - 83100 AVELLINO (AV)
UNITA' OPERATIVE / OPERATIVE UNITS

VIA NAZIONALE 110 - LOC. ARCELLA - 83030 MONTEFREDANE (AV)

ZONA INDUSTRIALE - LOC. MOSCUSO - 81049 MIGNANO MONTE LUNGO (CE)

E' CONFORME ALLA NORMA / IS IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE STANDARD

ISO 9001:2015
PER LE SEGUENTI ATTIVITA' / FOR THE FOLLOWING ACTIVITIES

Progettazione, sviluppo, fabbricazione, assistenza di: guaine in poliolefine termorestringenti e tubi elastomerici
per applicazioni elettriche ed elettroniche mediante processi di compoundazione, estrusione, reticolazione,
espansione, verniciatura e marcatura superficiale. Progettazione e produzione di corredi per giunti e terminali
per cavi elettrici di energia e telecomunicazioni, di sistemi di collegamento per apparati di segnalamento, di
resine e isolatori per l'isolamento elettrico. Produzione di miscele, mastici e nastri per l'isolamento elettrico
Design, development, production, assistance for heat shrinkable polyolefine and elastomeric sleeves svitable
for electronic and electrotechnical applications through compounding, extrusion, cross linking, expansion,
coating and surface marking. Design and production of kits and joints and terminals for energy electric cables
and telecommunications, connection systems for measure and signalling equipments, of resins and insulators
for the electric insulation. Production of mixtures, mastic and tapes for electric insulation
Ulteriori informazioni riguardanti l'applicabilità dei requisiti ISO 9001:2015 possono essere ottenute consultando l'organizzazione
Further clarifications regarding the applicability of ISO 9001:2015 requirements may be obtained by consulting the organization

IL PRESENTE CERTIFICATO E' SOGGETTO AL RISPETTO DEL

REGOLAMENTO PER LA CERTIFICAZIONE DEI SISTEMI DI GESTIONE
THE USE AND THE VALIDITY OF THE CERTIFICATE SHALL SATISFY THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE RULES FOR CERTIFICATION OF MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

DATE: PRIMA CERTIFICAZIONE EMISSIONE CORRENTE SCADENZA

FIRST CERTIFICATION CURRENT ISSUE EXPIRY
2003-03-31 2021-04-26 2024-05-13

_________________________
IMQ S.p.A. - VIA QUINTILIANO, 43 - 20138 MILANO ITALY
Management Systems Division - Flavio Ornago

IAF: 19, 14
SGQ N° 005 A
Membro degli Accordi di Mutuo
Riconoscimento EA, IAF e ILAC La validità del certificato è subordinata a sorveglianza annuale e riesame completo
Signatory of EA, IAF and ILAC del Sistema di Gestione con periodicità triennale
Mutual Recognition Agreements The validity of the certificate is submitted to annual audit and a reassessment
of the entire management System within three years
 ELCON MEGARAD SPA
VIA NAZIONALE 110 - LOC. ARCELLA - 83030 MONTEFREDANE (AV)
ZONA INDUSTRIALE - LOC. MOSCUSO - 81049 MIGNANO MONTE LUNGO (CE)

has implemented and maintains a

Quality Management System

for the following scope:

Design, development, production, assistance for heat shrinkable polyolefine and elastomeric sleeves
svitable for electronic and electrotechnical applications through compounding, extrusion, cross
linking, expansion, coating and surface marking. Design and production of kits and joints and
terminals for energy electric cables and telecommunications, connection systems for measure and
signalling equipments, of resins and insulators for the electric insulation. Production of mixtures,
mastic and tapes for electric insulation
Further clarifications regarding the applicability of ISO 9001:2015 requirements may be obtained by consulting the organization

which fulfills the requirements of the following standard:

ISO 9001:2015
Issued on: 2021 - 04 - 26
Expires on: 2024 - 05 - 13

This attestation is directly linked to the IQNet Partner’s original certificate

and shall not be used as a stand-alone document

Registration Number: IT - 31034

 H&P IIYDT]S TRIAL S.R.L.
]aa"¿*UAn* t,4t/rrín V S@
Fabricación, de Transformadores, Sub-estaciones
Equipos Compactos de Medida, Servicio Eléctrico
g SG§

25t1

ENTE

POTENCIA: 50 KVA tr^atre 30 MARCA: CONYCON

22SOO r2x2.5 a/o V FRECUENCIA: 60 Hz TP.3
v2 230 uExlóN D-Y Nro. SERIE: 1 I 1 -0053
l1: 1.26 A, GRUPO: FABRIC 2021
t2: 125.5 ALTITUD: 2504 msnm NORMA: 370.002

ERROR DE
Posición TENSIONES COMPARADAS
Relacion Teorica
U.V v-w W.U RELACION +/.
Conmut. v2 vw-u uw -v t¡v-w 0.1Yo
1 24045 230 120.716 120.83 120.71 120.75 0.039
2 23473 230 117 .842 117.88 117.84 117.88 0.021
3 22900 z3u 114.968 115.07 114.95 1 14.99 0.03'1
4 l¿ózó 112.094 !il 112.13 112.09 112.13 0.020
5 21755 230 109.220 109.33 109.20 109.24 0.034

DE LA RESISTENCIA DE LOS ARROLLAMIENTOS

ARROLLAIVIENTO DE BT Tamb. = 19 'C ARROLLAI\,{IENTO DE AT Tamb.= 19 "C
FASES TENSION INTENSIDAD RESISTENCIA FASES TENSION INTENSIDAD RESISTENCIA
u-v 4.72 mV 100 I
I
mA 47.2 mO U.V 96.1 mV 1 mA 96.'l C)
4.71 mV 100 mA 47.1 mQ v-w 96.3 mV '1 mA 96.3 o
w-u 4.73 mV 100 mA 47.3 l¡Q W-U 96.4 mV 1mA 96.4 f)
2,. MEDIDA DE LA RIGIDEZ NORIVA T amb. ("C) KV ACEITE MINERAL
DIELECTRICA DEL ACEITE ASTI\,'] D1 816 - 79 19 50 TRANSOL

3.- MEDIDA DEL ESPESOR DE Valor Minimo (um) Valor Medido (pm) RESULTADO
CAPA DE PINTURA ttlll 120 300 BIEN

PRUEBA DE VACIO: Al¡mentado lado de tension 230 volt¡os Frec : 60 HZ.

TENSION (Lectura) voltios INTENSIDAD (Lectura) amper¡os WATIMETRO Perd¡das en el
Fases u-v w-u U v 360 Wat¡os nucleo
Valor. 228 230 4.10 4.15 4.08 w2 0 Watios 360 Watios

Tamb ('C) 19
Posic¡ón INTENS¡DAD TENSION WATIIVIETROS PERD..COBRE TENSION DE
del Lectura Valor Lectura Valor K=1 K=1x1 x(1.1 6), ccKTo.
Conmut. K= 1 116 Amp K = 1.16 Volt. w2 a 19'C a 75oC a 19"C a75oC
3 .1.09 t.zo 815 943 5d0 0 500 669w 4851 4.22o/o 4.25a/o

6.- MEDIDA DE LA RESISTENCIA 7.- SOBRETENSION APLICADA 8.- SOBRETENSION INDUCIDA

DE AISLAMIENTO: aFrecuencia lndustrial a Doble Tensión - Doble Frec.
AT. M: 891 0 M-ohm, 5000VDC AT-BT y M: 50 KV, T=60seg. TENSION: 460 Volt.
BT-M: 3230 'l/-ohm,2500VDC BT-AT 3,0 KV FRECUENCI 120 Hz.
AT - BT: 16700 M-O¡m, SOOoVDC RESULTADO BIEN T=60 seg.iRESULTADO: BtEñ

SUPERVISION

v
rltD

por: lng por:

t"{

lng. Diego
t{
C 4635'3
/l§A
jrs'rA

Parv¡na Sup. ¡ng. Ruben Lobo Suarez sup. lng Pedro Huaman
BRYNAJOI\¡ CONYCON

Telefax: 425-5298 email: ventas@hpindustrial,com.pe / [email protected] Pasaie Ghasuta No 2345,

Cel. 998 383 851 / 968 153 045 [email protected] Chacra Ríos Norte - Cercado de
www.transformadoresh pindustrial.com
 TT&P ilYDUSTRIAL S.R.L.
?,na¿"a¿t¿e«do t,Krr;a 7 Selan¿dnd
Fabricación, de Transformadores, Sub-estaciones
Equipos Compactos de Medida, Servicio Eléctrico.
g scq

POTENCIA: KVA FASES: 3@ SOLIET

22900 !2x2.5 0/o V ENCIA: 60 Hz T3DO
460 230 V ExróN D-Y SERIE: 849
12.61 A PO: Dyn5 FABRIC. 2020
,TITUD: msnm 370.002

DynS ERROR DE
Posición TENSIONES U.V V.W W-U RELACION +/.
Relacion Teorica
Conmut. V1 v2 n-u n -v n-w 0.5%
1 24045 460 90.537 90.549 90.559 90.522 0.007
2 23473 460 88.382 88.425 88.390 88.391 0.023
c 22900 460 86.226 86.250 86.217 86.217 0.002
4 22328 460 84.070 84.1 1 6 84.085 84.087 0.031
E
21755 460 81 .915 81.943 81.908 8l .913 0.008

2.- MEDIDA DE LA RESISTENCIA DE LOS

ARROLLAMIENTO DE BT Tamb.= 21 'C ARROLLAMIENTO DE BT Tamb.= 2l "C
FASES TENSION INTENSIDAD RESISTENCIA FASES TENSION INTENSIDAD RESISTENCIA
u-v 4.72 mV 100 mA 47.2 mQ U-V 96.1 mV 1 mA 96.1 t2
4.71 mV 100 mA 47.1 mC) v-w 96.3 mV 1 mA 96.3 O
w-u 4.73 mV 100 mA 47.3 mC) W-U 96.4 mV 1 mA 96.4 f)
2.- MEDIDA DE LA R¡GIDEZ NORMA T amb. ('C) KV ACEITE MINERAL
DIELECTRICA DEL ACEITE ASTM D1816.79 21 40 LUBTROIL

3.- MEDIDA DEL ESPESOR DE Valor Minimo (¡m) Valor Medido (pm) RESULTADO
I

CAPA DE PINTURA :
120 300 BIEN

DE VACIO: Al¡mentado de tens¡on 460 voltios

TENSION (Lectura) volt¡os INTENSIDAD (Lectura) amperios WATIMETRO (Lectura) Perd¡das en el
Fases u-v w-u u W1 : 1060 Watios nucleo
Valor 460 460 460 7.80 6.84 7.67 w2 0 Wat¡os 1060 Watios

DE Tamb ('C) 21
Pos¡ción INTENSIDAD TENSION til WATIMETROS PERD.-COBRE TENSION DE I
del Lecturá Valor Lectura Valor K= 1 K=1 x1 x(1 .1 8), CCKTO.
Conmut. K= 1 1.18 Amp K = 1.18 Volt. W1 w2 Wr a21"C a 75oC a21'C a 75oC
? 10.70 12.61 820 966 1 850 0 1 850 2568w 4851 4.25% 4.40%

6.. MEDIDA DE LA RESISTENCIA 7.- SOBRETENSION APLICADA 8.. SOBRETENSION INOUCIDA

DE AISLAMIENTO: aFrecuenc¡a lndustrial a Doble Tensión - Doble Frec.
AT-M: 19700 M-ohm,5000VDC AT-BT y M: 50
KV, T=60ses. TENSION 920 Volt.
.M: 25OOVDC BT ,T KV 3.0 FRECUENC 120 Hz.
T=60 seg./RESULTADO: BIEN

OBSERVACIONES:

CO §uPEf<vtstoN 1 §uPEt<vtstoN 2

-,,{s, EGo IG|/^-J;

ias. ¡ldü&jffrEldÍr
f'{ r

ñ §.a
F. et¡ §ühsíeS lfr_eniucr tr * i*§F
Prob. por: lng. Pablo Valverde Revisado por: lng. Diego Huamani parvina sup. lng. Jose Guerra Galvez / lng. Alvaro Benito Aguitar
MINERA PERU SOL SOLIET

Pasaie Ghasuta N'2345

Cel.998 383 851 /968 153 045 Ghacra Ríos l{orte. Gercado de Lima
www.hpindustrial.com.pe
 H&P I]YDUSTRIAL S.R.L.
7aa"¿*Uar¿a €rorqíe q Seqan¿dÁd
Fabricación, de Transformadores, Sub-estaciones
Equipos Compactos de Medida, Servicio Eléctrico.
I
9) scq

PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBAS TRANSFORMADOR MIXTO DE MEDIDA ACEITE: X

CLIENTE: MINERA PERU SOL OT: HP-S
MA POTENCIAL INTENSIDAD
Marca SOLIET Ith KA 3x25 3x15 VA
No de Ser¡e 850 I KA Transrormacion 22.900 t 220 KV 30/5
Tipo TMEA-33 Peso 22O KG a 60 Hz 60 Nz
Año de Fabricacion. 2020 Ext / lnt. Yyn0 lllyn0
3lase de aislamiento AO Polar¡dad de Precis¡on 0.2 0.2 s
Altitud 4500 msnm. Norma tEC60044-1-2 Nivel de a¡slamiento 24150t125 KV 24t501125 KV
exter¡or 170 kv ONAN ONAN

Tamb= 18 .C
DENOMINACION AT-BT AT - Masa (VDC : 5000 V) BT - Masa 2500

TRANSFOR¡ilADOR 12000 Ohm 9000 ¡, - ohm 3800 M

TRANSFORI\ilADOR - 1 2000 lV - Ohm 9000 M-Ohm 3800 M

MEDIDA DE LA TRANSFORMADOR DE POTENCIAL TRANSFORMADOR DE CORRIENTE

u.v 5.92 kO v-w 5.90 ko w-u 5.90 ko R 7.1 mO S 7.33 m o T 7.18 mO
18 "c 1239 mo w 1244 na 1240 mO r -s 639 mO s -t 640 -f o

3.- LA CLASE DE PRECISION POTE 22900

LIMIfES DE
U
25 VA Cos O = 0.8 CARGA = 6.25 VA Cos O = 0.8
% Usx zÉ ANGULO DE !X-*. Jlt?::-: ERROR DE RELACION ANGULO DE DESFASAJE
ERROR (T) ERROR DE
RESULTADO BIEN
o RESULTADO BIEN (min)
t ó o RELACTON e/.) DESFASAJE (min) tY.t

o.0242 0.1 194 1.346

120 o.2 10 2.547
2.875
'- ol3o4 - - =:n¡Hlliljlo.872
100 0.2 10 ? 0.0303
80 0.2 '10 0.0491 2.5',t3 0.1 328 0.733
120 0.2 10 0.0336 2.240 0.1 303 o.522
i¡10
100
80
o.2
o.2
10
10
' 0.0610
0.0854 0.735 :il:lli
0.1 303
0.1 300
0.595
0.626
120 o.2 10 o.0264 :iil 0.1301 1.248
100 0.: 10 o.0322 2.913 0.1 367 0.823
6U o.2 10 3t 0.0467 2.631 0:1406 0.781

LIMITES OE
u CARGA = 15 VA Cos @ = 0.8 CARGA = 3.75 VA Cos O = 0.8
o/o lsx zÉ ANGULO DE ERROR DE RELACION
ERROR (1) ERROR DE
ANGULO DE DESFASAJE (MiN) RESULTADO BIEN
o RESULTADO BIEN ('/")
t ó 6 RELACTON (%) DESFASAJE (m¡n)

120 0.2 10 -0.0635 3.262 -o.0273 3.167

-0.0617 3.426 -o.0246 3.302
100 o.2 10 §
20 o.2 10 d; -0.0417 4.O45 -0.0060 : 3.330
5 0.35 15 -0.0270 3.1 04 0.0099 2.594
1 0.75 30 -0.0091 -1 .751 0.0475 1.890
120 0.2 10 -0.0463 2.880 :¡ -0.0154 3.129
100 o.2 10 -0.0434 3.059 -0.0'136 2.919
o
20 o.2 10 0 -o.0282 3.496 0.0037 3.117
0.35 15 _ñ ñloq 2.950 0.01981ür...," 2.173
1 0.75 30 0.0049 -1.291 0.0594 -2.278
120 0.2 10 -0.o47'l 2.802 -0.0f 70 2.738
100 o.2 -0.0449 2.971 -0.0146 2.845
10 I
20 0.2 10 F; -0.0315 3.455 -0.o121 2.754
q 0.35 15 -0.0177 2.576 0.0012 2.774
1 0.75 30 0.0036 0.0143 2.036

SALA DE DPTO. TECNICO SUPERVISION 1 2

1/
I
ll
\
&P li'¡Dl
,.# ¡
$,1 t¡A S*

tYry'"'
-: tü§#.
S§ q*i Cel* ffiü
Rev¡sado por: lng. Diego lng. Alvarc Benito Agu¡lar
Prob. por; lng.Pablo Valverde Paryina lng. Jose Guerra Galvez
MINERA PERU SOL / SOLIET

Telefax 425-5298 Pasaje Chasuta N'2345

Cel. 998 383 851 / 968 153 045 Chacra Ríoi Norte- Gercado de Lima
www.hpindushial.com.pe I
 TI&P I]YDUS TRIAL S. R. L. l,
?z.an¿*a¿t¿ezdn €,4rrqín ? Seaan¿dad
Fabricación, de Transformadores, Sub-estaciones
Equipos Compactos de Medida, Servicio Eléctrico, SG§

s..MEDIDA DE LA RIGIDEZ Tamb (oC ) NORMA KV ACEITE MINERAL

DIELECTRICA DEL ACEITE 18 ASTM D1816 - 79 35 ENVIROTEMP
DE VACIO: Alimentado lado de tension 220 voltios Frec :60 HZ.
TENSION (Lectura)volt¡os INTENSIDAD (Lectura) amperios WATIMETRO (Lectura)
PERDIDAS EN EL NUCLEO
Fases u-v w-u u w1 = 28 Wat¡os
Valor 222 220 221 0.17 0.18 0.17 w2 0 Wát¡os 28 Watios
7.- PRUEBA TENSION INDUCIDA TC 8.- PRUEBA TENSION INDUCIDA TP
FASES INT, NO¡/lINAL SEG, RESULTADO TENSION FRECUENCIA TIEMPO RESULTADO
R 5 Amp. 60 BIEN 440 120 Hz. 60 Seg. BIEN
S 5 Amp. 60 BIEN 9.- PRUEBA TENSION APLICADA
T 5 amp. 60 B¡EN AT/BT-M 50 KV 60 Seg. BIEN
BT/AT.M 2.5 KV 60 Seg. BIEN

OBSERVACIONES /\\
oll
i'iil
a

isT¡
: b.I
\¿15 : i =-6,1 fa i, .ll 1"":
SALA DE PRUEBAS DPTO. TECNICO I SUPERVISION 1 SUPERVISION 2

l-
1 l

,r- ,ÉU]if.r¡,
'Éfiil
IP#. ! rts '
t..^

r* 4*! n{l ta SffiF

1i
por lng.Pablo Valverde
Prob. ::l Revisado por: lng. Diego Huamani paryina Sup. lng. Jose Guera Galvez s"{ lng. Alvaro Benito Agu¡¡ar
lri MINERA PERU SOL SOLIET

it :l
rl
rt
l
It!:
l
:i:l li
:ii¡ I¡
g
i :iia
tiLl ==
E

l iiii il ti il
E I
;i;i t;
i $

!rli l! =
E !
t:
!l:i É E
:: fi E
i!i: E
fl
il
5 é
li :i !
t;r :t .1

|]E I i
+ =
r
;i É

,{#l
':".,,1,7

[email protected] /
Telefax 425ú298 Pasaje Ghasuta N'2345
Gel. 998 383 851 / 968 153 045 Ghacra Ríos Norte. Cercado de Lima
www.hpindushial.com.pe /
 INFORME DE CONFIGURACIÓN
RELE MARCA THYTRONIC
NA11
NA11#1A1MD00T

SIISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV,

TRIFÁSICO
PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I.

Julio 2022

1
 “INFORME DE CONFIGURACIÓN DE RELE NA11#1A1MD00T DEL SISTEMA DE
UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARAPLANTA DE BENEFICIO
BRYNAJOM I”
1. INTRODUCCIÓN

El desarrollo del presente informe, tiene como objetivo brindar los parámetros del rele Marca
THYTRONIC NA11 de entrada para Planta de Beneficio Brynajom I. La concesionaria Electrocentro
S.A. mediante Carta N° A-0164-2022 de fecha 15 de febrero del 2022, ha emitido la fijación de punto
de diseño en la barra 22.9KV de la SET Machahuay, ubicado en el distrito de San Pedro de Coris,
provincia de Churcampa, Departamento Huancavelica, para una demanda de máxima de 889.79kW.

Por lo tanto, en cumplimiento de la ley de concesiones eléctricas N° 25844, Código Nacional de

Electricidad (C.N.E. – Suministro), Norma Técnica de Calidad de Servicio Eléctrico (N.T.C.S.E.),
directivas de OSINERGMIN, Arts. 170° y 172° del Reglamento de la Ley de Concesiones Eléctricas
(L.C.E.), Ley que aprueba disposiciones de carácter extraordinario para las intervenciones del
Gobierno Nacional frente a desastres y que dispone la creación de la Autoridad para la
Reconstrucción con Cambios (Ley N° 30556).

TEMA DEL INFORME

TÉCNICO
CONFIGURACIÓN DEL RECLOSER RELE THYTRONIC
NA11
NA11#1A1MD00T
CONFIGURACIÓN DE RECLOSER NA11
ASUNTO / MOTIVO:
UUNN / SSEE / CGH / EBA / Similar: HUANCAVELICA/ SE MACHAHUAY P411
PERÍODO DEL INFORME TÉCNICO: JULIO 2022

2. OBJETIVOS

Establecer una adecuada configarcion de rele THYTRONIC NA11 según el estudio de coordinación de protecciones
en media tensión entre el recloser THYTRONIC NA11 y el rele de barra 22.9KV de la SE Machahuay, bajo el
esquema de protección de tiempo inverso.
Dar a conocer el estado situacional del recloser
Dar a conocer todos otros trabajos realizados en el recloser

3. REFERENCIA

ESTUDIO DE COORDINACIÓN DE PROTECCIONES V 1.0 DEL PROYECTO “SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN

MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I.”. ELABORADO POR
COSEM, MARZO DEL 2022.

CARTA ELCTO-GRP-1660-2022

4. DESCRIPCIÓN Y EVIDENCIA FOTOGRÁFICA DE ACTIVIDADES REALIZADAS

En el cuadro N°1, se adjunta actividades ejecutadas, así mismo se adjuntan evidencias fotográficas de los trabajos
realizados.

2
 Cuadro N°01
Actividades realizadas de mantenimiento y pruebas al Recloser.
Actividades
Ítem Fecha TRABAJOS REALIZADOS cargo Hrs

10/07/2022 Apertura del permiso de Supervisor de Campo

1 07:45-
trabajo, Charla de Asistente de Campo
08:00
seguridad, inspección de Técnico Electricista
EPP y de herramientas,
señalización del área de
trabajo.
2 10/07/2022 Limpieza Externa de Tablero Supervisor de Campo
Asistente de Campo 08:00-
de recloser.
Técnico Electricista 11:00
Configuración y seteo del
recloser NA11
3 10/07/2022 Limpieza del área de trabajo. Supervisor de Campo
Asistente de Campo 11:00-
Finalización de permiso de
Técnico Electricista 11:30
trabajo.

DATOS DEL EQUIPO DE PROTECCIÓN:

CODIGO DE EQUIPO: Recloser NA11

SALIDA PARA SISTEMA DE

UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN
UBICACIÓN:
22.9kV, TRIFÁSICO PARA PLANTA DE
BENEFICIO BRYNAJOM I

MARCA: THYTRONIC

MODELO: NA11

TENSIÓN AC AUXILIAR: 220V CA

RELACION DE
100/1
TRANSFORMACIÓN DE TC:

3
INSPECCIÓN DEL EQUIPO:

MEDIDA DE
INICIAL RESULTADO
CORRECCIÓN

ASPECTO EXTERIOR CORRECTO APROBADO

CONEXIONADO ELÉCTRICO CORRECTO APROBADO

ATERRAMIENTO DEL APROBADO

CORRECTO
TABLERO Y CONTROLADOR

COMUNICACIÓN CON LA PC CORRECTO APROBADO

DISPLAY CORRECTO APROBADO

TECLADO FRONTAL CORRECTO APROBADO

CONFIGURACIÓN DE LAS FUNCIONES DE PROTECCIÓN:

FUNCIÓN DE MEDIDA DE
INICIAL RESULTADO
PROTECCIÓN: CORRECCIÓN

SOBRECORRIENTE PICKUP: 33
COMPROBACIÓN
TEMPORIZADA DE CURVE: IEC-VI APROBADO
SEGÚN ECP
FASES 51 DIAL: 0.05

SOBRECORRIENTE PICKUP: 660

COMPROBACIÓN
INSTANTANEO DE CURVE: DEFINITE TIME APROBADO
SEGÚN ECP
FASES 50 DIAL: 0.01

SOBRECORRIENTE PICKUP: 12
COMPROBACIÓN
TEMPORIZADA DE CURVE: IEC-SI DESHABILITADO
SEGÚN ECP
TIERRA 51N DIAL: 0.05

SOBRECORRIENTE PICKUP: 180

COMPROBACIÓN
INSTANTANEO DE CURVE: DEFINITE TIME DESHABILITADO
SEGÚN ECP
TIERRA 50N DIAL: 0.01

RECIERRE: SIN COMPROBACIÓN

RECIERRE 79 APROBADO
RECIERRES SEGÚN ECP

4
VERIFICACIONES COMPLEMENTARIAS:

VERIFICACIÓN DE : INICIAL MEDIDA RESULTADO

BORNES APROBADO -- APROBADO

CIRCUITO DE RECTIFICACIÓN APROBADO

220V CA/ 24V CC -
CA/CC

MONITOREO DE ESTADOS CORRECTO - APROBADO

MONITOREO DE ALARMAS CORRECTO - APROBADO

5
 Se evidencia en imágenes fotográficas siguientes trabajos descritos en el cuadro n°1:

Fotografía 1 , Apertura de circuitos de la SE MACHAHUAY

Fotografías 2 y 3, Configuración del Recloser NA11

6
Fotografías 4 y 5 , Configuración del Recloser NA11 50 y 51

Fotografías 6 y 7, Configuración del Recloser NA11 50 y 51

7
Fotografías 8 y 9 , Configuración del Recloser NA11 50 y 51

Fotografías 10 y 11, Configuración del Recloser NA11 50 y 51

8
Fotografías 12 y 13 , Configuración del Recloser NA11 50N y 51N

Fotografías 14 y 15, Configuración del Recloser NA11 50N y 51N

9
5. CONCLUSIONES

Se cumple trabajos coordinados

Los trabajos se realizaron cumpliendo normas de seguridad y protocolos establecidos.
Se realizó la configuración del Equipo según el estudio de Coordinación de protecciones donde se
seteo las funciones 51,50, 51N y 50N así como la comprobación de los relays-output de disparo del
equipo y señalización de funciones de protección mediante los Leds.
Se adjunta ajustes del recloser.

10
ANEXOS
AJUSTES DEL EQUIPO DE PROTECCIÓN
 Gruppo Taratura Valore

Set
Base
Relay reference name NA11#1A1MD00T
Relay nominal frequency - fn 60 Hz
Relay phase nominal current - In 1A
Relay residual nominal current - IEn 1A
Phase CT primary nominal current - Inp 100 A
Residual CT primary nominal current - IEnp 100 A
Measurements reading mode RELATIVE
Inputs
Binary input IN1
IN1
Logic Active-ON
IN1 tON
Value 0.000 s
IN1 tOFF
Value 0.000 s
IN1 matching None
Binary input IN2
IN2
Logic Active-ON
IN2 tON
Value 0.000 s
IN2 tOFF
Value 0.000 s
IN2 matching None
Relays
K1
Logic De-energized
Operation MODE No-latched
Minimum pulse width - tTR (ms) 150
K2
Logic De-energized
Operation MODE No-latched
Minimum pulse width - tTR (ms) 150
K3
Logic De-energized
Operation MODE No-latched
Minimum pulse width - tTR (ms) 150
K4
Logic De-energized
Operation MODE No-latched
Minimum pulse width - tTR (ms) 150
K5
Logic De-energized
Operation MODE No-latched
Minimum pulse width - tTR (ms) 150
K6
Logic De-energized
Operation MODE No-latched
Minimum pulse width - tTR (ms) 150
LEDs
START
Type No-latched
TRIP
Type No-latched
L1
Type No-latched
L2
Type No-latched
L3
Type No-latched
 Gruppo Taratura Valore
L4
Type No-latched
L5
Type No-latched
Self-test Relay
MINOR Fail alarm YES
Self-test relay No bit set
Enable setting by MMI
Enable setting by MMI ON
Auto-reclose - 79
79 element OFF
Function mode Rapid+Slow
Number of delayed reclosures 3
trdt - Rapid reclosure dead time 0.300 s
tsdt - Slow reclosure dead time 30.000 s
tr - Reclaim time
Value 180.000 s
td1 - Slow reclosure fault discrimination time 5.000 s
td2 - Delayed reclosure fault discrimination time 5.000 s
td - Manual close (only R+S) fault discrimination time set OFF
td - Manual close fault discrimination time 5.000 s
Reset cycle from manual open ON
I> start OFF
I>> start OFF
I>>> start OFF
IE> start OFF
IE>> start OFF
IE>>> start OFF
Relays cycle in progress No bit set
Relays reclosure No bit set
Relays reclosure fail No bit set
LEDs cycle in progress No bit set
LEDs reclosure No bit set
LEDs reclosure fail No bit set
Profile selection
Active profile A
Profile A
Phase overcurrent - 50/51
1st Pickup Element
Setpoints
I> element ON
I> time characteristic IEC/BS B
ICLP> OFF
ICLP> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tI>RES
Value 0.000 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start I> No bit set
Relays Trip I> K1,
LEDs Start I> No bit set
LEDs Trip I> L1,
Definite time
Pickup I> def
State OFF
Pickup value 0.300 In
Pickup within CLP 0.300 In
Time delay tI> def
Value 0.200 s
 Gruppo Taratura Valore
Inverse time
Pickup I> inv
State ON
Pickup value 0.330 In
Pickup within CLP 2.000 In
Time delay tI> inv 0.050 s
2nd Pickup Element
Setpoints
I>> element ON
I>> time characteristic DEFINITE
ICLP>> OFF
ICLP>> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tI>>RES
Value 0.000 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
First threshold inhibition OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start I>> No bit set
Relays Trip I>> K3,
LEDs Start I>> No bit set
LEDs Trip I>> No bit set
Definite time
Pickup I>> def
State ON
Pickup value 6.600 In
Pickup within CLP 2.000 In
Time delay tI>> def
Value 0.030 s
Inverse time
Pickup I>> inv
State OFF
Pickup value 1.000 In
Pickup within CLP 2.000 In
Time delay tI>> inv 5.000 s
3rd Pickup Element
Setpoints
I>>> element OFF
ICLP>>> OFF
ICLP>>> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tI>>>RES
Value 0.100 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
First threshold inhibition OFF
Second threshold inhibition OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start I>>> No bit set
Relays Trip I>>> No bit set
LEDs Start I>>> No bit set
LEDs Trip I>>> No bit set
Definite time
Pickup I>>> def
State OFF
Pickup value 1.000 In
Pickup within CLP 2.000 In
Time delay tI>>> def
 Gruppo Taratura Valore
Value 1.000 s
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N
1st Pickup Element
Setpoints
IE> element ON
IE> time characteristic IEC/BS A
IECLP> OFF
IECLP> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tIE>RES
Value 0.000 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start IE> No bit set
Relays Trip IE> K1,
LEDs Start IE> No bit set
LEDs Trip IE> L2,
Definite time
Pickup IE> def
State OFF
Pickup value 0.1000 IEn
Pickup within CLP 2.0000 IEn
Time delay tIE> def
Value 0.050 s
Inverse time
Pickup IE> inv
State ON
Pickup value 0.1200 IEn
Pickup within CLP 2.0000 IEn
Time delay tIE> inv 0.050 s
2nd Pickup Element
Setpoints
IE>> element ON
IECLP>> OFF
IECLP>> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tIE>>RES
Value 0.000 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
First threshold inhibition OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start IE>> No bit set
Relays Trip IE>> K1,
LEDs Start IE>> No bit set
LEDs Trip IE>> L3,
Definite time
Pickup IE>> def
State ON
Pickup value 1.8000 IEn
Pickup within CLP 2.0000 IEn
Time delay tIE>> def
Value 0.030 s
3rd Pickup Element
Setpoints
IE>>> element OFF
IECLP>>> OFF
IECLP>>> Time delay
 Gruppo Taratura Valore
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tIE>>>RES
Value 0.100 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
First threshold inhibition OFF
Second threshold inhibition OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start IE>>> No bit set
Relays Trip IE>>> No bit set
LEDs Start IE>>> No bit set
LEDs Trip IE>>> No bit set
Definite time
Pickup IE>>> def
State OFF
Pickup value 1.0000 IEn
Pickup within CLP 2.0000 IEn
Time delay tIE>>> def
Value 1.000 s
Second Harmonic Restraint
Pickup I2NDH> def
State OFF
Pickup value 10.0 %
Reset time delay tI2NDH>RES
Value 0.100 s
Relays Start I2NDH> No bit set
LEDs Start I2NDH> No bit set
Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS
74TCS element OFF
Block1 OFF
Relays Start 74TCS No bit set
Relays Trip 74TCS No bit set
LEDs Start 74TCS No bit set
LEDs Trip 74TCS No bit set
Block2
Block2 input
BLIN_1 selection OFF
tB IPh
Value 2.000 s
tB IE
Value 2.000 s
Relay Block2 diagnostic No bit set
LEDs Block2 diagnostic No bit set
Block2 output
tF IPh
Value 1.000 s
tF IE
Value 1.000 s
tF IPh/IE
Value 1.000 s
BLOUT_1 selection OFF
Relays Block2 IPh No bit set
Relays Block2 IE No bit set
Relays Block2 IPh/IE No bit set
LEDs Block2 IPh No bit set
LEDs Block2 IE No bit set
LEDs Block2 IE/IPh No bit set
Breaker Failure - BF
BF element OFF
Pickup IBF>
State ON
 Gruppo Taratura Valore
Pickup value 0.100 In
Pickup IEBF>
State ON
Pickup value 0.1000 IEn
Time delay tBF
Value 1.000 s
Block1 OFF
CB ON
Relays Start BF No bit set
Relays Trip BF No bit set
LEDs Start BF No bit set
LEDs Trip BF No bit set
Profile B
Phase overcurrent - 50/51
1st Pickup Element
Setpoints
I> element OFF
I> time characteristic DEFINITE
ICLP> OFF
ICLP> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tI>RES
Value 0.100 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start I> No bit set
Relays Trip I> No bit set
LEDs Start I> No bit set
LEDs Trip I> No bit set
Definite time
Pickup I> def
State OFF
Pickup value 1.000 In
Pickup within CLP 2.000 In
Time delay tI> def
Value 1.000 s
Inverse time
Pickup I> inv
State OFF
Pickup value 1.000 In
Pickup within CLP 2.000 In
Time delay tI> inv 10.000 s
2nd Pickup Element
Setpoints
I>> element OFF
I>> time characteristic DEFINITE
ICLP>> OFF
ICLP>> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tI>>RES
Value 0.100 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
First threshold inhibition OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start I>> No bit set
Relays Trip I>> No bit set
LEDs Start I>> No bit set
 Gruppo Taratura Valore
LEDs Trip I>> No bit set
Definite time
Pickup I>> def
State OFF
Pickup value 1.000 In
Pickup within CLP 2.000 In
Time delay tI>> def
Value 1.000 s
Inverse time
Pickup I>> inv
State OFF
Pickup value 1.000 In
Pickup within CLP 2.000 In
Time delay tI>> inv 5.000 s
3rd Pickup Element
Setpoints
I>>> element OFF
ICLP>>> OFF
ICLP>>> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tI>>>RES
Value 0.100 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
First threshold inhibition OFF
Second threshold inhibition OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start I>>> No bit set
Relays Trip I>>> No bit set
LEDs Start I>>> No bit set
LEDs Trip I>>> No bit set
Definite time
Pickup I>>> def
State OFF
Pickup value 1.000 In
Pickup within CLP 2.000 In
Time delay tI>>> def
Value 1.000 s
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N
1st Pickup Element
Setpoints
IE> element OFF
IE> time characteristic DEFINITE
IECLP> OFF
IECLP> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tIE>RES
Value 0.100 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start IE> No bit set
Relays Trip IE> No bit set
LEDs Start IE> No bit set
LEDs Trip IE> No bit set
Definite time
Pickup IE> def
State OFF
Pickup value 1.0000 IEn
 Gruppo Taratura Valore
Pickup within CLP 2.0000 IEn
Time delay tIE> def
Value 1.000 s
Inverse time
Pickup IE> inv
State OFF
Pickup value 1.0000 IEn
Pickup within CLP 2.0000 IEn
Time delay tIE> inv 10.000 s
2nd Pickup Element
Setpoints
IE>> element OFF
IECLP>> OFF
IECLP>> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tIE>>RES
Value 0.100 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
First threshold inhibition OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start IE>> No bit set
Relays Trip IE>> No bit set
LEDs Start IE>> No bit set
LEDs Trip IE>> No bit set
Definite time
Pickup IE>> def
State OFF
Pickup value 1.0000 IEn
Pickup within CLP 2.0000 IEn
Time delay tIE>> def
Value 1.000 s
3rd Pickup Element
Setpoints
IE>>> element OFF
IECLP>>> OFF
IECLP>>> Time delay
Value 0.100 s
Reset time delay tIE>>>RES
Value 0.100 s
Block1 OFF
Block2 IN OFF
Block2 OUT OFF
BF element OFF
First threshold inhibition OFF
Second threshold inhibition OFF
Second Harmonic Restraint OFF
Relays Start IE>>> No bit set
Relays Trip IE>>> No bit set
LEDs Start IE>>> No bit set
LEDs Trip IE>>> No bit set
Definite time
Pickup IE>>> def
State OFF
Pickup value 1.0000 IEn
Pickup within CLP 2.0000 IEn
Time delay tIE>>> def
Value 1.000 s
Second Harmonic Restraint
Pickup I2NDH> def
State OFF
 Gruppo Taratura Valore
Pickup value 10.0 %
Reset time delay tI2NDH>RES
Value 0.100 s
Relays Start I2NDH> No bit set
LEDs Start I2NDH> No bit set
Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS
74TCS element OFF
Block1 OFF
Relays Start 74TCS No bit set
Relays Trip 74TCS No bit set
LEDs Start 74TCS No bit set
LEDs Trip 74TCS No bit set
Block2
Block2 input
BLIN_1 selection OFF
tB IPh
Value 2.000 s
tB IE
Value 2.000 s
Relay Block2 diagnostic No bit set
LEDs Block2 diagnostic No bit set
Block2 output
tF IPh
Value 1.000 s
tF IE
Value 1.000 s
tF IPh/IE
Value 1.000 s
BLOUT_1 selection OFF
Relays Block2 IPh No bit set
Relays Block2 IE No bit set
Relays Block2 IPh/IE No bit set
LEDs Block2 IPh No bit set
LEDs Block2 IE No bit set
LEDs Block2 IE/IPh No bit set
Breaker Failure - BF
BF element OFF
Pickup IBF>
State ON
Pickup value 0.100 In
Pickup IEBF>
State ON
Pickup value 0.1000 IEn
Time delay tBF
Value 1.000 s
Block1 OFF
CB ON
Relays Start BF No bit set
Relays Trip BF No bit set
LEDs Start BF No bit set
LEDs Trip BF No bit set
Circuit Breaker supervision
LEDs-relays allocation
CB Open relay No bit set
CB Close relay No bit set
LEDs CB Closed No bit set
LEDs CB Open No bit set
CB Diagnostic
Operations criteria OFF
N.CB Trip 10000
Cumulative sum I criteria OFF
Contact interrupting duty SumI 5000.000 In
Cumulative sum I2t criteria OFF
 Gruppo Taratura Valore
CB trip delay for I2t computation 0.050 s
Contact interrupting duty SumI2t 5000.0000 In^2s
Break time criteria OFF
Break time tbreak
Value 1.000 s
Break time assigned relays No bit set
Relays N. of operations No bit set
Relays Breaking SumI No bit set
Relays Breaking SumI2t No bit set
Relays Break time No bit set
LEDs N. of operations No bit set
LEDs Breaking SumI No bit set
LEDs Breaking SumI2t No bit set
LEDs Break time No bit set
CT supervision - 74CT
74CT element OFF
Pickup 74CT 0.50
Pickup I*
State ON
Pickup value 0.100 In
74CT Time delay
Value 1.000 s
Block1 OFF
Relays Trip 74CT No bit set
LEDs Trip 74CT No bit set
Remote tripping
Relays Remote trip No bit set
LEDs Remote trip No bit set
Pilot wire diagnostic
Pulse OUT OFF
Pulse IN OFF
Relay pilot wire diagnostic No bit set
LED pilot wire diagnostic No bit set
On demand measures
Fixed demand period 15 min
Rolling demand period 5 min
Number of rolling demand period 12

Oscillography
Readings
State Initialization
Records 0
Buffer storage %
Trigger Setup
Pre-trigger time 0.050 s
Post-trigger time 0.200 s
Element pickup trigger OFF
Trigger from outputs No bit set
Binary input trigger OFF
Trigger from inputs No bit set
80% Buffer alarm OFF
Set sample channels
iL1 Off
iL2 Off
iL3 Off
iE Off
Set analog channels
Analog 1 Off
Analog 2 Off
Analog 3 Off
Analog 4 Off
Analog 5 Off
Analog 6 Off
 Gruppo Taratura Valore
Analog 7 Off
Analog 8 Off
Analog 9 Off
Analog 10 Off
Analog 11 Off
Analog 12 Off
Set digital channels
Binary 1 Off
Binary 2 Off
Binary 3 Off
Binary 4 Off
Binary 5 Off
Binary 6 Off
Binary 7 Off
Binary 8 Off
Binary 9 Off
Binary 10 Off
Binary 11 Off
Binary 12 Off

Communication
RS485
Protocol MODBUS
Address 1
Baudrate RS485 9600 baud
Ethernet
IP host address 200.1.2.222
IP net mask 255.255.255.0
Autonegotiation ON
NTP synchronizing OFF

Commands
Reset
Default settings
Circuit breaker
Real Time Clock

Test
TEST state OFF

Start/End settings
 Relatório de ensaios - Página 1 de 3
PI-14-001
REV:00
DATA:02/01/18

NÚMERO: 2077/20
CLIENTE: EDEX REPRESENTACIONES S.A.C

PEDIDO DE COMPRA: 852-20-T NORMA: ABNT NBR 16050:2012;

PESO UNITARIO: 2,340KG

MATERIAL: PARA RAIOS DISTRIBUIÇÃO POLIMÉRICO, 21 kV - 10 kA

QUANTIDADE: 200 PEÇAS TOTAL DE AMOSTRAS: 20 PEÇAS

ENSAIOS DE RECEBIMENTO
ENSAIO ESPECIFICADO RESULTADO

1) VERIFICAÇÃO VISUAL E DIMENSIONAL ABNT NBR 16050:2012, IEC 60099-4:2014; APROVADO

20 AMOSTRAS
2) TORQUE NOS CONECTORES,
TERMINAIS E DESLIGADOR VALOR REFERÊNCIA: 2, 7daN.m APROVADO
20 AMOSTRAS
3) ENSAIO DE MEDIÇÃO DA TENSÃO DE REFERÊNCIA (Corrente: 1 mA);

AMOSTRA TENSÃO AMOSTRA TENSÃO

REFERÊNCIA REFERÊNCIA
(kV) (kV)
1 21,81 11 21,65
2 22,42 12 22,18
3 22,64 13 22,60
4 22,43 14 21,96
5 22,51 15 21,99
6 21,99 16 22,65
7 22,06 17 22,66
8 21,72 18 21,76
9 22,38 19 22,59
10 22,21 20 22,15
4) ENSAIO DE MEDIÇÃO DAS DESCARGAS PARCIAIS;

DESCARGAS PARCIAIS (pC)

ESPECIFICADO < 10
MIN < 10
MÁX < 10
NOTA.: FORAM ENSAIADAS 20 PEÇAS
5) ENSAIO DE TRAÇÃO NO SUPORTE ISOLANTE;
O BRAÇO DE MONTAGEM DO PARA-RAIOS DEVE SUPORTAR A UM ESFORÇO DE TRAÇÃO
"F" EQUIVALENTE A TRÊS VEZES O PESO DO PARA-RAIOS, APLICADO CONFORME DESENHO,
NÃO DEVENDO APRESENTAR UMA FLECHA RESIDUAL.

TRAÇÃO: 10 KGF
TRAÇÃO: 10 KGF
TRAÇÃO: 10 KGF
NOTA.: FORAM ENSAIADAS 20 PEÇAS
6) ENSAIO DE TENSÃO RESIDUAL A IMPULSO ATMOSFÉRICO (8/20 s)

MAURIZIO & CIA LTDA FM-14-001

Av. Dr. Abílio Sampaio, 725 - Vila Gustavo - São Paulo - Brasil - CEP: 02209-040
Tel.: 0055-11-2951-1700 Fax.: 0055-11-2981-9566 E-mail:[email protected]
Home Page: http://www.maurizio.com.br
 Relatório de ensaios - Página 2 de 3
PI-14-001
REV:00
DATA:02/01/18

NÚMERO: 2077/20
AMOSTRA
IMPULSO DE CORRENTE (kA) TENSÃO RESIDUAL (kV)
1 10,20 53,78
2 9,71 53,59
3 9,89 53,96
4 10,04 53,74
5 9,98 54,07
6 9,88 54,13
7 10,27 53,71
8 9,99 53,66
9 9,77 53,60
10 9,94 53,78
11 10,21 53,73
12 10,30 54,04
13 9,90 54,05
14 9,87 53,71
15 10,00 54,13
16 10,27 53,90
17 9,70 53,54
18 9,66 53,45
19 9,86 53,69
20 10,14 53,75
7) MEDIÇÃO DA COMPONENTE RESISTIVA DA CORRENTE DE FUGA A MCOV;

AMOSTRA CORRENTE AMOSTRA CORRENTE DE

DE FUGA FUGA
(A) (A)
1 275 11 246
2 304 12 286
3 314 13 266
4 241 14 298
5 244 15 311
6 302 16 275
7 272 17 318
8 254 18 252
9 310 19 312
10 312 20 304
ANEXO A - OSCILOGRAMAS DOS ENSAIOS REALIZADOS;

MAURIZIO & CIA LTDA FM-14-001

Av. Dr. Abílio Sampaio, 725 - Vila Gustavo - São Paulo - Brasil - CEP: 02209-040
Tel.: 0055-11-2951-1700 Fax.: 0055-11-2981-9566 E-mail:[email protected]
Home Page: http://www.maurizio.com.br
 Relatório de ensaios - Página 3 de 3
PI-14-001
REV:00
DATA:02/01/18

NÚMERO: 2077/20

OBS.: OS ENSAIOS FORAM REALIZADOS CONFORME NORMA ABNT NBR 16050:2012; E OS RESULTADOS FORAM
SATISFATÓRIOS.

Maurizio & Cia Ltda.:

RESULTADO: LOCAL: EMISSÃO: Anderson Silva
APROVADO SÃO PAULO 08 / 12 / 2020

MAURIZIO & CIA LTDA FM-14-001

Av. Dr. Abílio Sampaio, 725 - Vila Gustavo - São Paulo - Brasil - CEP: 02209-040
Tel.: 0055-11-2951-1700 Fax.: 0055-11-2981-9566 E-mail:[email protected]
Home Page: http://www.maurizio.com.br
 RELATÓRIO DE ENSAIOS - FOLHA 1DE1 PI-14-001
REV:00
DATA:02/01/18

NÚMERO: 1145/20

CLIENTE: EDEX REPRESENTACIONES S.A.C

PEDIDO DE COMPRA: 112/20 NF: 43563 NORMA: ABNT NBR 7282:2011

MATERIAL: CHAVE FUSÍVEL DE DISTRIBUIÇÃO 300A, 36,2KV, NBI 150KV, PORTA FUSÍVEL 100A, 12KA.

QUANTIDADE TOTAL: 138 PEÇAS AMOSTRAS: 13 PEÇAS

ENSAIOS DE RECEBIMENTO
ENSAIO ESPECIFICADO RESULTADO
1) VERIFICAÇÃO GERAL ABNT NBR 7282:2011 APROVADO
2) ACIONAMENTO MECÂNICO MÍN.: 8 daN MÁX.: 17 daN 10,3 a 14,7 daN
3) DIMENSIONAL DES. MAURIZIO 2268 APROVADO
4) TENSÃO SUPORTÁVEL A SECO -
60HZ - 60 SEGUNDOS VIDE ANEXO 1 APROVADO
5) RESISTÊNCIA ÔHMICA DOS
CONTATOS - 20,3 a 26,4 
6) OPERAÇÃO MECÂNICA 50 OPERAÇÕES APROVADO
7) VERIFICAÇÃO DA ESPESSURA DO PERMANÊNCIA DA CAMADA DE PRATA APÓS
PRATEAMENTO OPERAÇÃO MECÂNICA APROVADO
8) ELEVAÇÃO DE TEMPERATURA VIDE ANEXO 2 APROVADO
9) ZINCAGEM (ESPESSURA DA
CAMADA) MÍN.: 74m MÉD.: 84m 92 a 112 m
10) RESISTÊNCIA MECÂNICA DO
GANCHO E DO OLHAL DO P. MÍN.: 200 daN APROVADO
FUSÍVEL
ANEXO 1 (ENSAIO DE TENSÃO SUPORTÁVEL A SECO EM 60HZ)
CONDIÇÕES AMBIENTES
PRESSÃO ATMOSFÉRICA ( b ) . ...... Bar TEMPERATURA BULBO ÚMIDO ..........  C
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE ( t ) ........  C F. DE CORREÇÃO d= b . 273 +20C
TEMPERATURA BULBO SECO ....... .  C 1013 273+ tC
POSIÇÃO VALOR FATOR DE VALOR
DA CHAVE TIPO DE LIGAÇÃO APLICADO (KV) CORREÇÃO ESPECIFICADO(KV)
POLO VIVO - TERMINAIS 1 E 2
FECHADA POLO ATERRADO - BASE 71 - 70
POLO VIVO - TERMINAL 1
ABERTA POLO ATERRADO - TERMINAL 2 78 - 77
ANEXO 2 (ENSAIO DE ELEVAÇÃO DE TEMPERATURA)
CORRENTE APLICADA: 300 AMPERES
PONTOS DE MEDIÇÃO T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
TEMPERATURA APÓS ESTABILIZAÇÃO (C) 50 48 44 52 53 45 46 26
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE (C) 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26

ELEVAÇÃO MÁXIMA DA TEMPERATURA (t) 24 22 18 26 27 19 20 00

‘
T1 TERM. ENTRADA T3 CONT. SUPERIOR T5 CONT. SUPERIOR T7 TERM. SAÍDA
T2 CONT. INFERIOR T4 COMT. INFERIOR T6 CONT. INFERIOR T8 TEMP. AMBIENTE

MAURIZIO & CIA LTDA FM-14-001

Av. Dr. Abílio Sampaio, 725 - Vila Gustavo - São Paulo - Brasil - CEP: 02209-040
Tel.: 0055-11-6981-9900 Fax.: 0055-11-6981-9566 E-mail:[email protected]
Home Page: http://www.maurizio.com.br
 RELATÓRIO DE ENSAIOS - FOLHA 1DE1 PI-14-001
REV:00
DATA:02/01/18

NÚMERO: 1145/20

MAURIZIO & CIA LTDA FM-14-001

Av. Dr. Abílio Sampaio, 725 - Vila Gustavo - São Paulo - Brasil - CEP: 02209-040
Tel.: 0055-11-6981-9900 Fax.: 0055-11-6981-9566 E-mail:[email protected]
Home Page: http://www.maurizio.com.br
 RELATÓRIO DE ENSAIOS - FOLHA 1DE1 PI-14-001
REV:00
DATA:02/01/18

NÚMERO: 1145/20

Maurizio & Cia Ltda.:

RESULTADO: LOCAL: EMISSÃO: Anderson Silva
APROVADO SÃO PAULO 19 / 06 / 2020

MAURIZIO & CIA LTDA FM-14-001

Av. Dr. Abílio Sampaio, 725 - Vila Gustavo - São Paulo - Brasil - CEP: 02209-040
Tel.: 0055-11-6981-9900 Fax.: 0055-11-6981-9566 E-mail:[email protected]
Home Page: http://www.maurizio.com.br
 PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBA RELÉ DE PROTECCIÓN THYTRONIC NA11

SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA TENSIÓN 22.9 kV - EMPRESA MINERA BRYNAJOM S.R.L.

AJUSTES ENTREGADOS POR ENEL: N° de Serie: RELE THYTRONIC NA11 - 211421

ALIMENTADOR N° Cat:
SEF Io> (A): 40 A Vn AC: Vn DC: 24 Vdc
SEF to> (s): 0.57 s IN fase: 1A IN Tierra: 1A
51N Io>> (A): - A TC Fases: 300/1 A TC Toroidal: 300/1 A
t51N t Io>> (s): - s Instalado: 300 A Instalado: 300/1 A

PRUEBA 1 DISPARO POR PRIMER NIVEL (I >) - TIEMPO DEFINIDO

Nº Fase I Teorico I Disparo error (%) Fase t Teorico t Disparo error (ms)
1 R 30 30.34 1.13 R 0.200 0.264 150 ms
2 S 30 29.55 -1.50 S 0.200 0.265 150 ms
3 T 30 27.67 -7.77 T 0.200 0.265 150 ms

PRUEBA 2 DISPARO POR FALLA A TIERRA - PRIMER NIVEL - 51N

Ajuste
Nº Io Teorico Io Disparo error (%) Ajuste Tiempo to Teorico to Disparo error (ms)
Corriente
1 Io> 10 10.40 4.00 to> 0.450 0.462 12 ms

PRUEBA 3 DISPARO POR SFALLA A TIERRA - SEGUNDO NIVEL - 50N

Ajuste
Nº Io Teorico Io Disparo error <10% Ajuste Tiempo to Teorico to Disparo error (ms)
Corriente
1 Io>> 200 (40A) 39.73 0.68 to>> 0.100 0.109 9 ms

EQUIPO DE PRUEBA EQUIPO DE MANIOBRA

AVO INTERRUPTOR: SECCIONADOR:
× SVERKER 750 Nº Serie: 2606201701 MARCA: WIPP & BOURNE IN: 630 A
OTRO TIPO: VN: 24kV
Marca: KARDEX: ISC: 16kA
Cargador
Serie: SERIE: Año: 2016
Marca Bateria Apertura y Cierre - Mando Remoto: Local:

Observaciones: TODO QUEDO CONFORME - SETEO Seccionador de Potencia

Y PRUEBAS DE FUNCIONAMIENTO Fusibles R S T
Capacidad - - -
Marca - - -

Fecha:
Empresa:
Responsable Contratista: Tco. Harrison Peña Garcia

Firma del Responsable Residente de Obra Supervisor de Obra Supervisor ENEL

 FM-003

CERTIFICADO DE CALIBRACIÓN: EE-1786-2021

OT: 1351-2021 Fecha de Emisión: 2021-09-25
Expediente: E-0124

1. DATOS DEL CLIENTE:

Cliente : ELECTRO CONSTRUCCIONES LEON S.A.C

Dirección : JR. LIBERTAD N° 626 EL TAMBO, HUANCAYO, JUNÍN

2. INSTRUMENTO : MEGÓHMETRO

Marca : KYORITSU Alcance :

Modelo : 3125 Tensión : 0 mV a 600 V (AC); 0 mV a 600 V (DC)
Serie : W0376506 Resistencia Alta: 0 kΩ a 1000 GΩ
Identificación : E21-0825 Tensión de Prueba: 500 V a 5000 V
Procedencia : JAPAN
Tipo : DIGITAL

3. FECHA Y LUGAR DE MEDICIÓN:

Fecha de Calibración : 2021-09-24

Lugar de Calibración : Laboratorio 1 de ENERLAB SAC.

4. MÉTODO DE CALIBRACIÓN:

La calibración se realizó siguiendo los procedimientos: PC-021 "Procedimiento para la calibración de multímetros
digitales", Segunda Edición - Marzo 2016, INACAL-DM.EL-004 “Procedimiento para la Calibración de Megóhmetros”,
Edición Digital 1, CEM-ESPAÑA.
5. PATRÓN DE CALIBRACIÓN

Patrón Utilizado Certificado Identificación

Multímetro Digital LE-040-2021 L1-002 Si
Calibrador Multifunción F8647006 L1-043 Si
Caja de Resistencia LE-025-2021 L1-006 Si

6. CONDICIONES AMBIENTALES

Inicial Final
Temperatura (°C) 21,9 22,2
Humedad Relativa (%HR) 58,4 54,2

Ing. Máximo Oriundo Cordero

CIP:94415
Gerencia Técnica
Los resultados son válidos al momento de la calibración, al solicitante le correponde disponer en su momento la ejecución de una
nueva calibración, la cual está en función del uso, mantenimiento o reglamentaciones vigentes.
Este certificado sólo puede ser difundido completamente y sin modificaciones. Los extractos o modificaciones requieren la
autorización de ENERGÍA Y LABORATORIOS S.A.C - ENERLAB S.A.C.
El presente certificado carece de validez sin las firmas ENERLAB S.A.C.
Los resultados reportados en el presente certificado de calibración corresponden únicamente al objeto calibrado, no pudiéndose
extender a otro.
Los resultados reportados en el presente certificado de calibración no deben ser utilizados como una certificación de conformidad con
normas de producto o como certificado del sistema de calidad de la entidad que lo produce.

Fecha: Octubre-2019 Pag. 1 de 2

versión: 02
 FM-003

CERTIFICADO DE CALIBRACIÓN: EE-1786-2021

7. RESULTADOS

Función Tensión Continua

Indicación del Tensión Incertidumbre Factor de

Rango Error
Equipo Aplicada Expandida Cobertura (k )
60 V 60,00 V 0,00 V 0,82 V 2,00
-60 V -60,00 V 0,00 V 0,82 V 2,00
600 V 302 V 300,00 V 2,00 V 0,82 V 2,00
543 V 540,00 V 3,00 V 0,82 V 2,00
-542 V -540,00 V -2,00 V 0,82 V 2,00

Función Tensión Alterna

Frecuencia de 60 Hz
Indicación del Tensión Incertidumbre Factor de
Rango Error
Equipo Aplicada Expandida Cobertura (k )
60 V 60,00 V 0,00 V 0,61 V 2,00
600 V 301 V 300,00 V 1,00 V 0,62 V 2,00
542 V 540,00 V 2,00 V 0,73 V 2,00

Función Resistencia de Aislamiento

Tensión de Indicación del Resistencia Incertidumbre Factor de

Error
prueba Equipo Patrón Expandida Cobertura (k )
10,2 MΩ 10,00 MΩ 0,2 MΩ 0,06 MΩ 2,00
500 V 101 MΩ 100,2 MΩ 1 MΩ 0,6 MΩ 2,00
507 MΩ 499,2 MΩ 8 MΩ 0,7 MΩ 2,00
10,2 MΩ 10,00 MΩ 0,2 MΩ 0,06 MΩ 2,00
1000 V 101 MΩ 100,2 MΩ 1 MΩ 0,6 MΩ 2,00
1,01 GΩ 1,001 GΩ 0,01 GΩ 0,006 GΩ 2,00
10,1 MΩ 10,00 MΩ 0,1 MΩ 0,06 MΩ 2,00
2,5 Kv 100 MΩ 100,2 MΩ 0 MΩ 0,6 MΩ 2,00
1,00 GΩ 1,001 GΩ 0,00 GΩ 0,006 GΩ 2,00
100,0 MΩ 100,22 MΩ -0,2 MΩ 0,08 MΩ 2,00
5 Kv 1,00 GΩ 1,001 GΩ 0,00 GΩ 0,006 GΩ 2,00
10,0 GΩ 9,99 GΩ 0,0 GΩ 0,06 GΩ 2,00

Medición de Tensión de prueba

Tensión de Tensión Indicación del Incertidumbre Factor de

Error
prueba Generada Patrón Expandida Cobertura (k )
500 620 V 605 V 16 V 1V 2,00
1000 1.190 V 1.183 V 7V 28 V 2,00
2500 2.790 V 2.775 V 15 V 65 V 2,00
5000 5.620 V 5.774 V -154 V 130 V 2,00

8. OBSERVACIONES
 Se colocó una etiqueta autoadhesiva con la indicación de CALIBRADO en el equipo.
 La incertidumbre expandida se determinó a partir de la incertidumbre combinada multiplicada por el factor de
cobertura, para un nivel de confianza aproximado de 95%.
Fin del Documento

Fecha: Octubre-2019 Pag. 2 de 2

versión: 02
Huancayo, 24 de mayo del 2022 T.P:

CONSTANCIA
SEGURO COMPLEMENTARIO DE TRABAJO DE RIESGO PENSION

CONSTRUCTORA Y SERVICIOS MULTIPLES CONTRATISTAS GENERALES SOCIEDAD COMERCIAL

DE RESPONSABILIDAD LIMI
VIGENCIA: 25/05/2022 AL 25/06/2022
ACTIVIDAD:
Por medio del presente dejamos constancia que los asegurados detallados líneas abajo, conforme al Decreto Supremo
003-98-SA, se encuentran amparados bajo la cobertura de pensión.

SCTR PENSIONES Póliza 1297080

PERSONAL ASEGURADO

SEDE: A NIVEL NACIONAL

Nro NOMBRES PATERNO MATERNO TIPODOC NRODOC

1 NELSON NOLI ARIAS ENRIQUEZ DNI 75382261
2 ENRIQUE ARQUIMEDES CARDENAS ORTIZ DNI 20011969
3 ITALO MAX CASO LOARTE DNI 46264559
4 JOSEFIL ROBEN ENRRIQUEZ TUNQUE DNI 71553651
5 MEQUIAS JOSE GONZALES ARAUJO DNI 80634161
6 ANTONIO JESUS LEON ASTUHUAMAN DNI 70617100
7 FREDY RAUL LEON LAZO DNI 23235488
8 WILDER LEON LAZO DNI 80544820
9 LINDO RUBEN LOBO SUAREZ DNI 20708858
10 RAFAEL PARIONA ASTO DNI 46971026

Extendemos la presente constancia a solicitud de nuestro cliente, CONSTRUCTORA Y SERVICIOS MULTIPLES

CONTRATISTAS GENERALES SOCIEDAD COMERCIAL DE RESPONSABILIDAD LIMI.

Francisco Noya Bao

Gerente Comercial
La Positiva Vida Seguros y Reaseguros

Nota:
El presente documento está sujeto a la política de suscripción de la Compañía y queda sin efecto en caso que el cliente
mantenga obligaciones pendientes a favor de la compañía por este concepto.
Así mismo, esta constancia carecerá de validez respecto de aquellos asegurados sobre los que, con anterioridad a la
fecha de emisión de este documento, se haya producido un siniestro (fallecimiento y/o accidente de trabajo)
relacionado al riesgo cubierto por el SCTR. En este supuesto, la Compañía no será responsable de cancelar el beneficio
de este seguro, debido a la inexistencia del riesgo.
Tratándose de configuración de invalidez, se aplicará la política de delimitación del riesgo de la Compañía, en caso
corresponda. Le recordamos cumplir con las medidas de prevención y salud ocupacional establecidas en Minería, DS
024-2016-EM y normas modificatorias (en caso de actividad minera), o en las normas del sector donde se realice la
actividad de riesgo, y, poner a disposición de la Compañía, cuando ésta la requiera, las Evaluaciones Médicas
Ocupacionales de los asegurados.
Cláusula Garantía (SCTR Pensión)
La presente póliza cubre actividades y servicios que se prestan dentro de la concesión minera en las sedes
administrativas y/o en superficie. No cubre las actividades de exploración, explotación y extracción de mina realizada en
SUPERFICIE y/o en SOCAVON o cualquier otra actividad realizada en socavón de una mina. En ese sentido, La
Positiva no se hará responsable de atender los siniestros ocasionados de las actividades mencionadas anteriormente.

DIECHAMORRO
 SCTR6510757-S0302162-SALUD
Miraflores, 25 de Mayo del 2022

09:35 AM

CONSTANCIA
Por medio de la presente, dejamos constancia que los Señores:

CONSTRUCTORA Y SERVICIOS MULTIPLES CONTRATISTAS GENERALES SOCIEDAD COM

De acuerdo a lo establecido en el Decreto Supremo 003-98-SA – Normas Técnicas del Seguro Complementario
de Trabajo de Riesgo, a la fecha han contratado con Rimac S.A. Entidad Prestadora de Salud la(s) póliza(s) de
Seguro Complementario de Trabajo de Riesgo siguiente(s):

SCTR SALUD N° S0302162

La constancia es de vigencia mensual y es renovable

La presente constancia tiene vigencia desde 25/05/2022 hasta el 24.06.2022. A solicitud de la empresa
contratante se emite la presente Constancia detallando a continuación el personal que se encuentra afiliado a
la(s) póliza(s) antes mencionada(s).

RELACION DE PERSONAL:
N° APELLIDOS Y NOMBRES C.E/DNI/PAS/RUC

SEDE : A NIVEL NACIONAL

1 ARIAS ENRIQUEZ NELSON NOLI DNI 75382261

2 CARDENAS ORTIZ ENRIQUE ARQUIMEDES DNI 20011969

3 CASO LOARTE ITALO MAX DNI 46264559

4 ENRRIQUEZ TUNQUE JOSEFIL ROBEN DNI 71553651

5 GONZALES ARAUJO MEQUIAS JOSE DNI 80634161

6 LEON ASTUHUAMAN ANTONIO JESUS DNI 70617100

7 LEON LAZO FREDY RAUL DNI 23235488

8 LEON LAZO WILDER DNI 80544820

9 LOBO SUAREZ LINDO RUBEN DNI 20708858

10 PARIONA ASTO RAFAEL DNI 46971026

Se expide la presente a solicitud del Asegurado/Contratante para los fines que estime convenientes.

Xiaoping Lui
Rimac EPS S.A. Entidad Prestadora
Usuario : CR1LMATOSR de Salud
 DEPARTAMENTO DE
INGENIERIA Y ANALISIS

REGISTRO DE OBRAS DE INGRESO A SMALLWORLD

Formato para la Gestión de Actualización de instalaciones en GIS
UU. NN/SEM Ayacucho

Tipo de Proyecto OBRA

Cod. Orden 490000588
N° API 490000588
SISTEMA DE UTILIZACIÓN EN MEDIA
TENSION DE USO EXCLUSIVO EN 22.9kV,
Descripción Ins. Rmv. Und.
TRIFASICO PARA LA PLANTA DE BENEFICIO
"BRYNAJOM I",
Sistema Utilización: SI VANO/TRAMO 36 0 Und

Fecha de ejecución: 17/06/2022 LONGITUD 3795.3 000.0 m

Área de referencia: TER | 500 | D-Y UAP 0 0 Und

CODIGO_SER SIN CODIGO RETENIDA 22 0 Und

NOMBRE_SER SIN DETALLE TRAFO 2 0 Und

N° CONTRATO SIN CONTRATO POSTE 24 0 Und
COSEM CONTRATISTAS
Responsable: SECC. 1 0 Und
GENERALES SRL
Supervisor: Ing. Jonattan Huallullo C. TABLERO 1 0 Und

Usuario de actualización: scastane SED 1 0 Und

Fecha de Actualización 7/13/2022 8:45:32 PM PAT 27 0 Und

ESTADO GIS CONFORME

FECHA DE REVISION 11/08/2022